Use these links to rapidly review the document
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INDEX TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Table of Contents

As filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on July 17, 2013

Registration No. 333-189736

UNITED STATES
SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
WASHINGTON, D.C. 20549



Amendment No. 1
to
FORM S-1
REGISTRATION STATEMENT
UNDER
THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933



Control4 Corporation
(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)

Delaware
(State or other jurisdiction of
incorporation or organization)
  3670
(Primary Standard Industrial
Classification Code Number)
  42-1583209
(I.R.S. Employer
Identification Number)

11734 S. Election Road
Salt Lake City, Utah 84020
(801) 523-3100

(Address, including zip code, and telephone number, including
area code, of registrant's principal executive offices)

Martin Plaehn
President and Chief Executive Officer
11734 S. Election Road
Salt Lake City, Utah 84020
(801) 523-3100
(Name, address, including zip code, and telephone number, including
area code, of agent for service)



Copies to:

William J. Schnoor
Richard A. Kline
Michael J. Minahan
Goodwin Procter LLP
135 Commonwealth Drive
Menlo Park, California 94025
(650) 752-3100

 

Greg Bishop
General Counsel and
Chief Compliance Officer
11734 S. Election Road
Salt Lake City, Utah 84020
(801) 523-3100

 

Eric C. Jensen
Andrew S. Williamson
Cooley LLP
3175 Hanover Street
Palo Alto, California 94304
(650) 843-5000



Approximate date of commencement of proposed sale to the public:
As soon as practicable after this registration statement becomes effective.



                  If any of the securities being registered on this Form are to be offered on a delayed or continuous basis pursuant to Rule 415 under the Securities Act of 1933 check the following box:     o

                  If this Form is filed to register additional securities for an offering pursuant to Rule 462(b) under the Securities Act, please check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.     o

                  If this Form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(c) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.     o

                  If this Form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(d) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.     o

                  Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, or a smaller reporting company. See the definitions of "large accelerated filer," "accelerated filer" and "smaller reporting company" in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act. (Check one)

Large accelerated filer  o   Accelerated filer o   Non-accelerated filer ý
(Do not check if a small reporting company)
  Smaller reporting company o



CALCULATION OF REGISTRATION FEE

       
 
Title of Each Class of Securities
to be Registered

  Proposed Maximum
Aggregate Offering
Price(1)

  Amount of
Registration Fee(2)(3)

 

Common Stock, par value $0.0001 per share

  $60,000,000   $8,184

 

(1)
Estimated solely for the purpose of calculating the registration fee in accordance with Rule 457(o) under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended. Includes offering price of additional shares that the underwriters have the option to purchase.

(2)
Calculated pursuant to Rule 457(o) under the Securities Act based on an estimate of the proposed maximum offering price.

(3)
Previously paid.



                   The registrant hereby amends this registration statement on such date or dates as may be necessary to delay its effective date until the registrant shall file a further amendment which specifically states that this registration statement shall thereafter become effective in accordance with Section 8(a) of the Securities Act of 1933 or until the registration statement shall become effective on such date as the Securities and Exchange Commission, acting pursuant to said Section 8(a), may determine.

   


Table of Contents

The information in this preliminary prospectus is not complete and may be changed. We may not sell these securities until the registration statement filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission is effective. This preliminary prospectus is not an offer to sell these securities and it is not soliciting an offer to buy these securities in any state where the offer or sale is not permitted.

Subject to Completion
Preliminary Prospectus dated July 17, 2013

PROSPECTUS

                  Shares

LOGO

Common Stock



              This is Control4 Corporation's initial public offering. We are selling                        shares of our common stock.

              We expect the public offering price to be between $            and $            per share. Currently, no public market exists for the shares. After pricing of the offering, we expect that the shares will trade on The NASDAQ Global Market under the symbol "CTRL".

              We are an "emerging growth company" as defined in the Jumpstart our Business Startups Act of 2012 and, therefore, may comply with certain reduced public company reporting requirements.

               Investing in the common stock involves risks that are described in the "Risk Factors" section beginning on page 15 of this prospectus.



 
  Per Share   Total  

Public offering price

  $     $    

Underwriting discount (1)

  $     $    

Proceeds, before expenses, to us

  $     $    

(1)
See "Underwriting" for a description of the compensation payable to the underwriters.

              The underwriters may also exercise their option to purchase up to an additional                        shares from us at the public offering price, less the underwriting discount, for 30 days after the date of this prospectus.

              Neither the Securities and Exchange Commission nor any state securities commission has approved or disapproved of these securities or determined if this prospectus is truthful or complete. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal offense.

              The shares will be ready for delivery on or about                        , 2013.



BofA Merrill Lynch   Raymond James

Canaccord Genuity   Cowen and Company   Needham & Company



   

The date of this prospectus is                        , 2013.


GRAPHIC


Table of Contents


TABLE OF CONTENTS

 
  Page  

Prospectus Summary

    1  

Risk Factors

    15  

Special Note Regarding Forward-Looking Statements and Industry Data

    39  

Use of Proceeds

    40  

Dividend Policy

    40  

Capitalization

    41  

Dilution

    43  

Selected Consolidated Financial Data

    45  

Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations

    49  

Business

    81  

Management

    98  

Executive Compensation

    106  

Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions

    115  

Principal Stockholders

    118  

Description of Capital Stock

    122  

Shares Eligible for Future Sale

    127  

Material U.S. Federal Income and Estate Tax Consequences for Non-U.S. Holders

    130  

Underwriting

    134  

Legal Matters

    140  

Experts

    140  

Where You Can Find More Information

    140  

Index to Consolidated Financial Statements

    F-1  

              You should rely only on the information contained in this prospectus and in any free writing prospectus prepared by or on behalf of us and delivered or made available to you. We have not, and the underwriters have not, authorized anyone to provide you with information different from, or in addition to, that contained in this prospectus or any related free writing prospectus. We do not take responsibility for, and can provide no assurance as to the reliability of, any other information that others may give you. This prospectus is an offer to sell only the shares offered hereby but only under circumstances and in jurisdictions where it is lawful to do so. The information contained in this prospectus is current only as of its date.

              No action is being taken in any jurisdiction outside the United States to permit a public offering of our common stock or possession or distribution of this prospectus in that jurisdiction. Persons who come into possession of this prospectus in a jurisdiction outside the United States are required to inform themselves about, and to observe any restrictions as to, this offering and the distribution of this prospectus applicable to that jurisdiction.

i


Table of Contents


PROSPECTUS SUMMARY

               This summary highlights information contained elsewhere in this prospectus. Because this is only a summary, it does not contain all of the information that may be important to you. You should read this entire prospectus and should consider, among other things, the matters set forth under "Risk Factors," "Selected Consolidated Financial Data," "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations" and our consolidated financial statements and related notes thereto appearing elsewhere in this prospectus before making your investment decision.

Overview

              Control4 is a leading provider of automation and control solutions for the connected home. We unlock the potential of connected devices, making entertainment systems easier to use, homes more comfortable and energy efficient, and families more secure. We provide our consumers with the ability to integrate music, video, lighting, temperature, security, communications and other functionalities into a unified home automation solution that enhances our consumers' daily lives. More than 75% of our consumers have integrated two or more of these functionalities with our solution. At the center of our solution is our advanced software platform, which we provide through our products that interface with a wide variety of connected devices that are developed both by us and by third parties.

              Our solution functions as the operating system of the home, making connected devices work together to control, automate and personalize the homes of our consumers. For example, our solution can be configured so that:

    A half hour before you wake up in the morning, the thermostat adjusts to heat up the house, the lights slowly become brighter and the shades gradually open;

    As you leave for work, one push of a button locks the doors, arms the security system, turns off all the lights, powers down all non-essential devices and adjusts the temperature settings to the "away" mode;

    When you return home in the evening, the push of a button opens your garage door, unlocks the door and adjusts the thermostat to your preferred temperature;

    When you are ready to watch a movie, instead of having to use several remotes, a single interface—be it a touch screen, smartphone, tablet or simple remote—provides you with easy control of your entire entertainment system. As the movie starts, the window blinds close, the lights dim and the temperature adjusts to keep your family comfortable; and

    When it is time for bed, the press of a "goodnight" button closes the blinds, turns off the lights, locks the doors, arms the security system and turns off all televisions and game consoles.

              At the center of the Control4 product line is the Control4 Home Operating System, which we refer to as the C4 OS. We embed our C4 OS in a range of products, including controller appliances, interfaces and connected devices that interact with various music, video, lighting, temperature, security, communications and other devices. We offer our 4Sight subscription service, which allows consumers to control and monitor their homes remotely from their smartphone, tablet or laptop, and allows our dealers to perform remote diagnostic services. For example, 4Sight allows a consumer to remotely unlock the front door to let in a repairman, to turn on the air conditioning on the way home, and to monitor the home security cameras from a smartphone. In addition, our 4Store application marketplace offers a range of third-party applications for use with our products. We derive virtually all of our revenue from the sale of products that contain our proprietary software, and a smaller portion from software licensing and annual service subscriptions.

 

1


Table of Contents

              We were founded in 2003 to deliver a home automation solution to the mainstream market by enabling consumers to unify their connected devices into a personalized system at an accessible and affordable entry point. Based on our analysis, through March 31, 2013, we estimate that we have automated more than 120,000 homes representing cumulative sales of more than 275,000 of our controller appliances, the brain of the connected home. We sell and deliver our solutions through an extensive worldwide dealer and distributor network and have solutions installed in 81 countries. Our top 100 dealers represented 24% of our total revenue in 2012.

              We generated revenue of $74.9 million, $93.4 million and $109.5 million in 2010, 2011 and 2012, respectively, and $26.6 million for the three months ended March 31, 2013. We had a net loss of $16.3 million, $3.9 million and $3.7 million in 2010, 2011 and 2012, respectively, and $1.5 million for the three months ended March 31, 2013.

Our Industry

Market Opportunity

              Consumers are becoming more reliant on network-aware devices in their everyday lives, contributing to the creation of a large opportunity in the mainstream home automation market. Growth in smart devices, such as smartphones and tablets, and the ubiquity of wireless networks have combined to create the "connected consumer." These consumers are seeking a connected home with expanded capabilities in the form of networks, connected devices and smart systems.

              Historically, the home automation market was primarily comprised of luxury systems that were so expensive that only wealthy consumers could afford the programming and installation costs. As consumer awareness of home automation grows and expectations for interoperable and more affordable solutions increase, the mainstream segment of the home automation market is expected to expand rapidly. According to ABI Research, the mainstream segment of the home automation market was estimated to be a $571 million market in 2012 and a $2.6 billion market by 2017, representing a CAGR of 35%, as consumers look for centralized solutions to provide personalized control and automation of their homes.

Consumer Requirements

              For mainstream consumers to embrace a home automation solution, we believe that the solution must have the following attributes:

    Easy to Use.   Accustomed to easy-to-use smartphones, consumers want a simple, unified, yet powerful and innovative interface for the unique set of devices and systems they have in their homes;

    Interoperable.   Consumers are looking for a single solution with the ability to manage their network of current and future devices, regardless of manufacturer, technology or communication protocol;

    Personalized and Flexible.   Consumers want to be able to easily personalize the behavior of the devices in their homes to reflect their own lifestyles and preferences—now and into the future—providing flexibility as their needs and lifestyles change;

    Affordable and Future-Proof.   Consumers want a home automation solution that delivers rich functionality at an affordable price point and that adapts to changing needs over time without significant cost or disruption; and

    Accessible Service and Support.   Consumers are looking for solutions that are supported by local trained specialists who can provide both responsive initial consultation and installation, as well as ongoing service and support.

 

2


Table of Contents

Limitations of Traditional Approaches

              The home automation market has traditionally been comprised of:

    Luxury Installations.   Generally found in the highest end segment of the market, these systems and installations are typically complex, lengthy, inflexible and expensive;

    Managed Services.   Generally provided by a cable, telephone or security provider, these services come as a non-personalized, one-size-fits-all service with narrow capabilities and recurring monthly charges; and

    Point Products.   Generally supplied by companies focused on a discrete function within the home, these products typically lack interoperability with other devices.

Our Solution

              The Control4 solution, built around our advanced software platform, sits at the center of the fast-growing mainstream segment of the home automation market. Our solution functions as the operating system of the home, integrating music, video, lighting, temperature, security, communications and other devices into a unified automation solution that enhances our consumers' daily lives. Our solution provides the consumer with the following key benefits:

    Easy to Use.   Our solution is designed to be simple and intuitive. For example, our easy-to-use interfaces can be as advanced as a smartphone, tablet, in-wall touch panel, television or multi-function remote control, or as simple as a single button or switch;

    Broad Device Interoperability.   Our open and flexible solution provides consumers with access to a broad universe of over 6,400 discrete third-party devices. With our solution, consumers can connect and automate the devices they already own—as well as the devices they purchase in the future—and have the confidence that all of those devices will interoperate as seamlessly as if they were made by the same manufacturer;

    Advanced Personalization.   Our adaptable solution enables consumers to personalize the features and functionality of their Control4 system. Our modular design also enables the smooth integration of new third-party products to meet the evolving needs of our consumers as their lifestyles change;

    Attractive Entry Point.   According to ABI Research, the typical luxury home automation installation can cost $60,000 or more for whole-home systems. With our solution, consumers can start with a single-room multi-media automation experience for about $1,000 and scale to an integrated solution with an average cost of $26,000;

    Professional Installation and Support Through Our Global Dealer Network.   We have built a global network of over 2,800 active direct dealers and distributors to help consumers develop and install their customized home automation experiences with the Control4 solution; and

    Remote Access and Specialized Apps.   We have developed complementary services and applications offerings to provide consumers more access, control and enhanced functionality over their automated homes.

 

3


Table of Contents

Our Growth Strategy

              Our goal is to be the leading global provider of mainstream home automation solutions and the operating system of choice for the home. The following are key elements of our growth strategy:

    Enhance Our Software Platform and Products.   We intend to continue to invest in our software platform to develop new products, features and capabilities that deliver exceptional performance and value to our consumers;

    Strengthen and Expand Our Global Dealer Network.   We plan to continue to expand, train, support and optimize our global certified dealer network to ensure that we have sufficient geographic coverage across both existing and new markets;

    Increase Penetration of Our North America Core Market.   We intend to continue to focus sales and marketing resources to increase penetration of the residential market in North America;

    Expand Our Focus on Adjacent Markets.   We plan to continue making investments to capitalize on opportunities outside the residential market, including in the light commercial, multi-dwelling unit and hospitality markets, and internationally;

    Enhance Our Solution with Services and Apps.   We intend to continue to enhance our 4Sight subscription services and to support third-party apps via our 4Store application marketplace to deliver more functionality and value to our consumers;

    Pursue Technology Licensing Opportunities.   We plan to expand our licensing activities to leverage third-party distribution channels, grow our partner relationships, and simplify the home automation experience for dealers and consumers; and

    Pursue Strategic Acquisitions.   We intend to identify, acquire and integrate strategic technologies, assets and businesses that we believe will enhance the overall strength of our business.

Risks Related to Our Business

              Our business is subject to numerous risks and uncertainties, including those highlighted in "Risk Factors" immediately following this prospectus summary. These risks include, but are not limited to, the following:

    We have incurred operating losses in the past, may incur operating losses in the future, and may not achieve or maintain profitability;

    The markets in which we participate are highly competitive and many companies, including large technology companies, broadband and security service providers and other managed service providers, are actively targeting the home automation market. Our failure to differentiate ourselves and compete successfully with these companies would make it difficult for us to add and retain consumers, and would reduce or impede the growth of our business;

    Consumers may choose to adopt point products that provide control of a discrete home function rather than adopting our unified home automation solution. If we are unable to increase market awareness of the benefits of our unified solution, our revenue may not continue to grow, or it may decline;

    Many of the competitors in our market, including providers of luxury integrated solutions with long operating histories, established markets, broad user bases and proven consumer acceptance, may be successful in expanding into the mainstream home automation market, which may harm our growth and future prospects;

 

4


Table of Contents

    Since we rely on third-party dealers and distributors to sell and install our solutions, we do not have a direct sales pipeline, which makes it difficult for us to accurately forecast future sales and correctly predict manufacturing requirements;

    Our quarterly results of operations have fluctuated and may continue to fluctuate. As a result, we may fail to meet or exceed the expectations of investors or securities analysts, which could cause our stock price to decline; and

    If we are unable to develop new solutions, sell our solutions into new markets or further penetrate our existing markets, our revenue may not grow as expected.

Corporate Information

              We were incorporated in Delaware in 2003. Our principal executive offices are located at 11734 South Election Road, Suite 200, Salt Lake City, Utah 84020, and our telephone number is (801) 523-3100. Our principal website address is www.control4.com . Information contained on our website does not constitute a part of, and is not incorporated by reference into, this prospectus.

              Control4, the Control4 logo, 4Sight, 4Store and Control4 MyHome are registered trademarks or trademarks of Control4 Corporation in the United States and, in certain cases, in other countries. This prospectus contains additional trade names, trademarks and service marks of other companies. We do not intend our use or display of these companies' trade names, trademarks or service marks to imply a relationship with, or endorsement or sponsorship of us by, these other companies.

              We are an emerging growth company as defined in the Jumpstart Our Business Startups Act of 2012, or the JOBS Act. We will remain an emerging growth company until the earliest to occur of: the last day of the fiscal year in which we have more than $1.0 billion in annual revenue; the date we qualify as a "large accelerated filer," with at least $700 million of equity securities held by non-affiliates; the issuance, in any three-year period, by us of more than $1.0 billion in non-convertible debt securities; or the last day of the fiscal year ending after the fifth anniversary of our initial public offering.

 

5


Table of Contents


THE OFFERING

Common stock offered by Control4 Corporation

                          shares

Common stock to be outstanding after the offering

 

                        shares

Option to purchase additional shares offered by Control4 Corporation. 

 

                        shares

Use of Proceeds

 

The net proceeds to us from this offering will be approximately $            million (or approximately $             million if the underwriters' option to purchase additional shares is exercised in full), based upon an assumed initial public offering price of $        share, which is the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, and after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us. We intend to use the net proceeds from this offering for general corporate purposes, including working capital and capital expenditures. We intend to use $            million of the net proceeds from this offering to pay off the remaining amounts owed under a litigation settlement agreement. We may also use a portion of the net proceeds from this offering for acquisitions of complementary technologies, assets or businesses.

Risk Factors

 

See "Risk Factors" and the other information included in this prospectus for a discussion of factors you should carefully consider before deciding to invest in our common stock.

Proposed NASDAQ Global Market trading symbol

 

"CTRL"

              The number of shares of our common stock to be outstanding after the completion of this offering is based on:

    17,801,035 shares outstanding as of March 31, 2013;

    47,540 shares of common stock, on an as-converted basis, issuable upon the net exercise of a warrant to purchase 182,666 shares of preferred stock outstanding as of March 31, 2013 at an exercise price of $9.259, which would terminate upon this offering in accordance with its terms; and

    125,760 shares of common stock issuable upon the net exercise of warrants to purchase 541,235 shares of common stock outstanding as of March 31, 2013 at a weighted average exercise price of $9.607, which would terminate upon this offering in accordance with their terms.

              The number of shares of our common stock to be outstanding after the completion of this offering excludes:

    4,609,466 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of options outstanding as of March 31, 2013 at a weighted average exercise price of $5.561 per share of which 19,324

 

6


Table of Contents

      shares of common stock were issued upon the exercise of options with a weighted average exercise price of $5.912 after March 31, 2013;

    389,782 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of options that were granted after March 31, 2013, with an exercise price of $11.284 per share;

    11,715 shares of common stock, on an as-converted basis, issuable upon the exercise of warrants to purchase preferred stock outstanding as of March 31, 2013 at a weighted average exercise price of $7.707 per share that will remain outstanding following this offering if not exercised; and

    2,200,000 shares reserved for future issuance under our 2013 Stock Option and Incentive Plan, as well as shares originally reserved for issuance under our 2003 Equity Incentive Plan, but which may become available for awards under our 2013 Stock Option and Incentive Plan, which plan will become effective in connection with this offering and contains provisions that will automatically increase its share reserve each year, as more fully described in "Executive Compensation—Employee Benefit Plans."

              Except for historical financial statements or as otherwise indicated, information in this prospectus reflects or assumes the following:

    A 1-for-5.2 reverse stock split to be effected on or about July 18, 2013;

    The filing of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation immediately prior to the closing of this offering;

    The conversion of all of our outstanding preferred stock into an aggregate of 15,293,960 shares of common stock immediately prior to the closing of this offering;

    No exercise after March 31, 2013 of outstanding options or warrants; and

    No exercise of the underwriters' option to purchase additional shares.

 

7


Table of Contents


SUMMARY CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL DATA

              We have derived the summary consolidated statements of operations data for the fiscal years ended December 31, 2010, 2011 and 2012 from our audited consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus. We have derived the summary consolidated statements of operations data for the three months ended March 31, 2012 and March 31, 2013 and our consolidated balance sheet data as of March 31, 2013 from our unaudited interim consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus. The unaudited interim financial statements reflect, in the opinion of management, all adjustments of a normal, recurring nature that are necessary for the fair presentation of the financial statements. Our historical results are not necessarily indicative of our future results. The following summary consolidated financial data should be read in conjunction with "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations" and our consolidated financial statements and related notes included elsewhere in this prospectus.

 
  Years Ended December 31,   Three Months Ended
March 31,
 
 
  2010   2011   2012   2012   2013  
 
  (In thousands, except per share data)
 

Consolidated Statements of Operations Data:

                               

Revenue

  $ 74,925   $ 93,376   $ 109,512   $ 22,628   $ 26,571  

Cost of revenue

    43,357     50,534     57,225     12,466     13,550  

Cost of revenue—inventory purchase commitment

            1,840          
                       

Gross margin

    31,568     42,842     50,447     10,162     13,021  

Operating expenses:

                               

Research and development        

    15,922     19,211     20,310     4,813     6,066  

Sales and marketing

    22,491     17,546     20,182     5,038     5,605  

General and administrative        

    8,876     9,805     10,150     2,532     2,828  

Litigation settlement

            2,869          
                       

Total operating expenses

    47,289     46,562     53,511     12,383     14,499  
                       

Loss from operations

    (15,721 )   (3,720 )   (3,064 )   (2,221 )   (1,478 )

Interest and other expense, net

    (544 )   (165 )   (518 )   (462 )   (49 )
                       

Loss before income taxes

  $ (16,265 ) $ (3,885 ) $ (3,582 ) $ (2,683 ) $ (1,527 )

Income tax (expense) benefit

            (141 )       56  
                       

Net loss

  $ (16,265 ) $ (3,885 ) $ (3,723 ) $ (2,683 ) $ (1,471 )
                       

Net loss per common share, basic and diluted

  $ (9.93 ) $ (2.02 ) $ (1.58 ) $ (1.19 ) $ (0.59 )
                       

Weighted-average number of shares, basic and diluted

    1,638     1,923     2,360     2,249     2,502  
                       

Pro forma net loss per common share, basic and diluted (unaudited) (1)

              $ (0.21 )       $ (0.08 )
                             

Pro forma weighted-average number of common shares, basic and diluted (unaudited)

                17,828           17,969  
                             

Other Non-GAAP Financial Data:

                               

Adjusted gross margin

  $ 31,596   $ 42,891   $ 52,365   $ 10,179   $ 13,037  

Adjusted gross margin percentage

    42.2%     45.9%     47.8%     45.0%     49.1%  

Adjusted operating income (loss)

  $ (14,252 ) $ (1,707 ) $ 4,514   $ (1,490 ) $ (640 )

(1)
Pro forma net loss per common share has been calculated assuming the conversion of all outstanding shares of our preferred stock as of March 31, 2013 into 15,293,960 shares of common stock and the net exercise of outstanding warrants to purchase 723,901 shares of capital stock into an aggregate of 173,300 shares of common stock as of March 31, 2013 prior to the completion of this offering.

 

8


Table of Contents

              Stock-based compensation expense included in the consolidated statements of operations data above was as follows:

 
  Years Ended December 31,   Three Months
Ended
March 31,
 
 
  2010   2011   2012   2012   2013  
 
  (In thousands)
 

Cost of revenue

  $ 28   $ 49   $ 78   $ 17   $ 16  

Research and development

    249     492     704     130     236  

Sales and marketing

    546     523     580     144     184  

General and administrative

    646     949     1,507     440     402  
                       

Total stock-based compensation expense

  $ 1,469   $ 2,013   $ 2,869   $ 731   $ 838  
                       

Reconciliation of Non-GAAP Financial Data

Adjusted Gross Margin

              A reconciliation of Adjusted gross margin to gross margin, the most directly comparable GAAP financial measure, is presented below:

 
  Years Ended December 31,   Three Months Ended
March 31,
 
 
  2010   2011   2012   2012   2013  
 
  (Dollars in thousands)
 

Gross margin

  $ 31,568   $ 42,842   $ 50,447   $ 10,162   $ 13,021  

Stock-based compensation expense included in cost of revenue

    28     49     78     17     16  

Cost of revenue—inventory purchase commitment

            1,840          
                       

Adjusted gross margin

  $ 31,596   $ 42,891   $ 52,365   $ 10,179   $ 13,037  
                       

Adjusted gross margin percentage

    42.2%     45.9%     47.8%     45.0%     49.1%  

              To provide investors with additional information regarding our financial results, we have disclosed in the table above and within this prospectus Adjusted gross margin, a non-GAAP financial measure. We have included Adjusted gross margin in this prospectus because Adjusted gross margin is a key measure used by our management and board of directors to understand and evaluate our operating performance and trends, to prepare and approve our annual budget, and to develop short- and long-term operational plans.

              Adjusted gross margin is defined as gross margin less stock-based compensation expense and loss on inventory purchase commitment. Management believes that the use of Adjusted gross margin provides consistency and comparability with our past and future performance, facilitates period-to-period comparisons and also facilitates comparisons with other companies.

              Management believes that it is useful to exclude stock-based compensation expense from gross margin because the amount of such expense in any specific period may not directly correlate to the underlying performance of our business operations. We believe it is useful to exclude loss on inventory purchase commitment because it is an expense that arose from our commitment to purchase energy-related products from our contract manufacturing partner that we will not use due to our decision to discontinue our energy product line for utility customers. We have not incurred that type of expense in past periods and we believe that past and future periods are more comparable if we exclude that expense from gross margin.

 

9


Table of Contents

              Our use of Adjusted gross margin has limitations as an analytical tool and you should not consider it in isolation or a substitute for our analysis of our results as reported under GAAP. Some of these limitations are:

    Adjusted gross margin does not reflect the potentially dilutive impact of equity-based compensation; and

    Although we have not incurred significant loss on purchase commitments in the past, there is no guarantee that we will not incur those expenses in the future and therefore Adjusted gross margin may not be indicative of future performance.

              Because of these limitations, you should consider Adjusted gross margin alongside other financial performance measures.

Adjusted Operating Income

              A reconciliation of Adjusted operating income (loss) to loss from operations, the most directly comparable GAAP financial measure, is presented below:

 
  Years Ended December 31,   Three Months
Ended March 31,
 
 
  2010   2011   2012   2012   2013  
 
  (In thousands)
 

Loss from operations

  $ (15,721 ) $ (3,720 ) $ (3,064 ) $ (2,221 ) $ (1,478 )

Stock-based compensation expense

    1,469     2,013     2,869     731     838  

Cost of revenue—inventory purchase commitment

            1,840          

Litigation settlement

            2,869          
                       

Adjusted operating income (loss)

  $ (14,252 ) $ (1,707 ) $ 4,514   $ (1,490 ) $ (640 )
                       

              To provide investors with additional information regarding our financial results, we have disclosed in the table above and within this prospectus Adjusted operating income, a non-GAAP financial measure. We have included Adjusted operating income in this prospectus because Adjusted operating income is a key measure used by our management and board of directors to understand and evaluate our operating performance and trends. We use it to prepare and approve our annual budget and to develop short- and long-term operational plans.

              Adjusted operating income is defined as operating income less stock-based compensation expense, loss on inventory purchase commitment and litigation settlement expense. Management believes that the use of Adjusted operating income provides consistency and comparability with our past and future performance, facilitates period-to-period comparisons and also facilitates comparisons with other companies.

              Management believes that it is useful to exclude stock-based compensation expense from operating income because the amount of such expense in any specific period may not directly correlate to the underlying performance of our business operations. We believe it is useful to exclude loss on inventory purchase commitment because it is an expense that arose from our commitment to purchase energy-related products from our contract manufacturing partner that we will not use due to our decision to discontinue our energy product line for utility customers. We have not incurred that type of expense in past periods and we believe that past and future periods are more comparable if we exclude that expense from operating income.

              We believe it is useful to exclude litigation settlement expense from operating income because that expense was related to two separate legal settlements that were resolved in 2012. Those settlements are not indicative of past or future operating performance. We believe that past and future periods are more comparable if we exclude that expense from operating income.

 

10


Table of Contents

              Our use of Adjusted operating income has limitations as an analytical tool and you should not consider it in isolation or as a substitute for our analysis of our results as reported under GAAP. Some of these limitations are:

    Adjusted operating income does not reflect the potentially dilutive impact of equity-based compensation;

    Although we have not incurred significant loss on purchase commitments in the past, there is no guarantee that we will not incur those expenses in the future and therefore Adjusted operating income may not be indicative of future performance; and

    We are involved in litigation matters from time to time and we may incur litigation settlement expenses in future periods and, therefore, Adjusted operating income may not be indicative of future performance.

              Because of these limitations, you should consider Adjusted operating income alongside other financial performance measures.

 

11


Table of Contents

Consolidated Balance Sheet Data

              The following table sets forth our summary consolidated balance sheet data as of March 31, 2013:

    On an actual basis;

    On a pro forma basis to reflect the conversion of all outstanding shares of our preferred stock into 15,293,960 shares of our common stock, which will occur immediately prior to the closing of this offering assuming our valuation prior to this offering is at least $225 million and the net proceeds to us from this offering are not less than $35 million, the net exercise of outstanding warrants to purchase 723,901 shares of capital stock into an aggregate of 173,300 shares of common stock as of March 31, 2013, the corresponding reclassification of our warrant liability to additional paid-in capital, which will occur immediately prior to the closing of this offering unless earlier exercised or expired, and the filing of our post-offering amended and restated certificate of incorporation, which will occur immediately prior to the closing of this offering; and

    On a pro forma as adjusted basis to reflect the pro forma adjustments described above and our receipt of the net proceeds from our sale of                        shares of common stock in this offering at an assumed initial public offering price of $            per share, which is the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us.

 
  As of March 31, 2013  
 
  Actual   Pro forma   Pro forma
as adjusted (1)
 
 
  (In thousands)
 

Consolidated Balance Sheet Data:

                   

Cash and cash equivalents

  $ 14,573   $ 14,573        

Property and equipment, net

    3,566     3,566        

Working capital, excluding deferred revenue

    21,582     21,582        

Total assets

    49,455     49,455        

Redeemable convertible preferred stock

    116,313            

Total stockholders' equity (deficit)

    (93,204 )   23,685        

(1)
A $1.00 increase (decrease) in the assumed initial public offering price of $            per share, the midpoint of the range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, would increase (decrease) cash and cash equivalents and each of working capital, excluding deferred revenue, total assets and total stockholders' equity (deficit) by $             million, assuming that the number of shares offered by us, as set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, remains the same, and after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions payable by us. Each increase or decrease of 1.0 million shares in the number of shares offered by us would increase or decrease cash and cash equivalents and each of working capital, excluding deferred revenue, total assets and total stockholders' equity (deficit) by $             million assuming that the assumed price per share remains the same, and after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions payable by us. The pro forma as adjusted information discussed above is illustrative only and will be adjusted based on the actual initial public offering price and other terms of this offering determined at pricing.

 

12


Table of Contents

Recent Developments

              The estimated ranges of our financial results and operating metrics below as of and for the three months ended June 30, 2013 are preliminary, based upon our estimates and are subject to completion of financial and operating closing procedures. This data has been prepared by and is the responsibility of our management. We have begun our normal quarterly closing and review procedures for the three months ended June 30, 2013; however, given the timing of these estimates, final results as of and for the three months ended June 30, 2013 may differ from our estimated results, including as a result of the quarter-end closing procedures or review adjustments. The summary information below is not a comprehensive statement of our financial results or operating metrics for this period and our actual results and metrics may differ from the estimated ranges due to the completion of our financial and operating closing procedures and/or adjustments and other developments that may arise before the results for this period are finalized. These estimates should not be viewed as a substitute for full interim financial statements prepared in accordance with GAAP that have been reviewed by our auditors. In addition, these estimates as of and for the three months ended June 30, 2013, are not necessarily indicative of the results to be achieved for the remainder of 2013 or any future period. This information should be read in conjunction with the financial statements and the related notes and "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations" for prior periods included elsewhere in this prospectus.

              The following are preliminary estimates for the three months ended June 30, 2013:

 
  As of or for the Three Months
Ended June 30, 2013
 
 
   
   
   
 
 
  (Dollars in thousands)
 

GAAP Disclosure:

                   

Revenue

  $ 32,000       $ 32,500  

Gross margin

  $ 16,100       $ 16,600  

Gross margin as a percentage of revenue

    50.3%         51.1%  

Operating income

  $ 1,100       $ 1,800  

Cash and cash equivalents

        $ 18,100        

Other Non-GAAP Financial Data: (1)

                   

Adjusted gross margin

                   

Gross margin

  $ 16,100       $ 16,600  

Stock-based compensation expense included in cost of revenue

    15         15  

Cost of revenue—inventory purchase commitment

    (180 )       (180 )
               

Adjusted gross margin

  $ 15,935       $ 16,435  
               

Adjusted gross margin percentage

    49.8%         50.5%  

Adjusted operating income

                   

Operating income

  $ 1,100       $ 1,800  

Stock-based compensation expense

    850         850  

Cost of revenue—inventory purchase commitment

    (180 )       (180 )
               

Adjusted operating income

  $ 1,770       $ 2,470  
               

(1)
See "—Reconciliation of Non-GAAP Financial Data" above for statements disclosing the reasons why our management believes that presentation of the non-GAAP financial measures provide useful information to investors regarding our financial condition and results of operations and the additional purposes for which our management uses the non-GAAP financial measures.

 

13


Table of Contents

              We estimate total revenue to be in a range from $32.0 million to $32.5 million for the three months ended June 30, 2013, compared to $27.6 million for the three months ended June 30, 2012. We estimate our Core revenue will be in a range from $31.5 million to $31.9 million for the three months ended June 30, 2013. The estimated increase in total revenue is in the range of $4.4 million to $4.9 million, or 16% to 18%, compared to revenue for the three months ended June 30, 2012. The estimated increase was primarily due to the net increase in the number of direct dealers selling our products and an increase in sales from existing dealers in both North America and internationally.

              We estimate gross margin to be in a range from $16.1 million to $16.6 million for the three months ended June 30, 2013, compared to $13.3 million for the three months ended June 30, 2012. As a percentage of revenue, we estimate gross margin for the three months ended June 30, 2013 to be in a range from 50.3% to 51.1%, compared to 48.1% for the three months ended June 30, 2012. During the three months ended June 30, 2013, we reduced our reserve for inventory purchase commitments by approximately $180,000, as our proceeds from liquidating the underlying inventory and our ability to consume common components exceeded our original estimates. As a result, our gross margin percentage is higher than it otherwise would have been. We expect our adjusted gross margin percentage to be in the range of 49.8% to 50.5%. The estimated increase in adjusted gross margin percentage from 48.2% in the three months ended June 30, 2012 to between 49.8% and 50.5% in the three months ended June 30, 2013 was due to higher prices charged for our controller appliances and associated software, higher sales of third-party products sold through our online distribution platform, lower component costs and lower fixed manufacturing overhead expenses as a percentage of revenue.

              We expect the favorable impact on our gross margin as a percentage of revenue related to higher prices for our controller appliances and associated software to continue in future periods; however, the impact will decline as software sold separately for use with legacy controller appliances will diminish over time.

              We expect the positive impact on our gross margin as a percentage of revenue resulting from increased sales of third-party products sold through our online distribution platform to continue in future periods; however, the impact will diminish as the growth rate of that revenue stabilizes in future periods.

              We expect product component cost reductions to continue to have a positive impact on our gross margin as a percentage of revenue as those reductions are the result of negotiated price decreases with our manufacturing partners that are not short-term in nature.

              The impact of lower manufacturing overhead as a percentage of revenue on our gross margin percentage will vary depending on manufacturing overhead spending in that period. In the three months ended June 30, 2013, we received a credit for duties paid in previous periods. We expect credits received in future periods, and the related favorable impact on our gross margin percentage, will be less significant in future periods.

              We estimate our operating income for the three months ended June 30, 2013 to be between $1.1 million and $1.8 million compared to $369,000 for the three months ended June 30, 2012 and our adjusted operating income to be between $1.8 million and $2.5 million for the three months ended June 30, 2013 compared to $1.0 million for the three months ended June 30, 2012. The increase in estimated operating income was due to higher revenue and higher gross margin percentages offset by higher operating expenses.

              We expect our cash balance at June 30, 2013 to be $18.1 million compared to $14.6 million at March 31, 2013 and $18.7 million at December 31, 2012. The $600,000 expected decrease in cash for the first half of 2013 was due to $2.1 million in purchases of property and equipment, which was offset by $700,000 in cash generated from operations and $800,000 in net proceeds from notes payable and common stock option exercises.

 

14


Table of Contents


RISK FACTORS

               Investing in our common stock involves a high degree of risk. You should consider carefully the risks and uncertainties described below, together with all of the other information in this prospectus, including our financial statements and related notes, before deciding whether to purchase shares of our common stock. If any of the following risks is realized, our business, financial condition, results of operations and prospects could be materially and adversely affected. In that event, the price of our common stock could decline, and you could lose part or all of your investment.

Risks Related to Our Business and Industry

We have incurred operating losses in the past, may incur operating losses in the future, and may not achieve or maintain profitability.

              We began our operations in 2003. For substantially all of our history, we have experienced net losses and negative cash flows from operations. As of March 31, 2013, we had an accumulated deficit of $107.1 million. We expect our operating expenses to increase in the future as we expand our operations. Furthermore, as a public company, we will incur additional legal, accounting and other expenses that we did not incur as a private company. If our revenue does not grow to offset these increased expenses, we will not become profitable. We may incur significant losses in the future for a number of reasons, including without limitation the other risks and uncertainties described in this prospectus. Additionally, we may encounter unforeseen operating or legal expenses, difficulties, complications, delays and other unknown factors that may result in losses in future periods. If these losses exceed our expectations or our revenue growth expectations are not met in future periods, our financial performance will be harmed.

The markets in which we participate are highly competitive and many companies, including large technology companies, broadband and security service providers and other managed service providers, are actively targeting the home automation market. Our failure to differentiate ourselves and compete successfully with these companies would make it difficult for us to add and retain consumers, and would reduce or impede the growth of our business.

              The market for automation and control solutions for the connected home is increasingly competitive and global. Many large technology companies have expanded into the connected home market by developing their own solutions, or by acquiring other companies with home automation solution offerings. For example, Microsoft Corporation recently acquired id8 Group R2 Studios Inc., a home entertainment technology company. These large technology companies already have broad consumer awareness and sell a variety of devices for the home, and consumers may choose their offerings instead of ours, even if we offer superior products and services. Similarly, many managed service providers, such as cable TV, telephone and security companies, are beginning to offer services that provide device control and automation capability within the home for an additional monthly service fee. For example, Comcast is expanding its Xfinity service to provide residential security, energy and automation services. These managed service providers have the advantage of leveraging their existing consumer base, network of installation and support technicians and name recognition to gain traction in the home automation market. In addition, consumers may prefer the monthly service fee with little to no upfront cost offered by some of these managed service providers over a larger upfront cost with little to no monthly service fees.

              We expect competition from these large technology companies and managed service providers to increase in the future. This increased competition could result in pricing pressure, reduced sales, lower margins or the failure of our solutions to achieve or maintain broad market acceptance. To remain competitive and to maintain our position as a leading provider of automation and control solutions for the connected home, we will need to invest continuously in product development, marketing, customer service and support and product delivery infrastructure. We may not have

15


Table of Contents

sufficient resources to continue to make the investments in all of the areas needed to maintain our competitive position. In addition, most of our competitors have longer operating histories, greater name recognition, larger consumer bases and significantly greater financial, technical, sales, marketing and other resources than us, which may provide them with an advantage in developing, marketing or servicing new solutions. Increased competition could reduce our market share, revenue and operating margins, increase our operating costs, harm our competitive position and otherwise harm our business and results of operations.

Consumers may choose to adopt point products that provide control of discrete home functions rather than adopting our unified home automation solution. If we are unable to increase market awareness of the benefits of our unified solution, our revenue may not continue to grow, or it may decline.

              Many vendors have emerged, and may continue to emerge, to provide point products with advanced functionality for use in the home, such as a thermostat that can be controlled by an application on a smartphone. We expect more and more consumer electronic and consumer appliance products to be network-aware and connected—each very likely to have its own smart device (phone or tablet) application. Consumers may be attracted to the relatively low costs of these point products and the ability to expand their home control solution over time with minimal upfront costs, despite some of the disadvantages of this approach. While we have built our solution to be flexible and support third-party point products, these products may reduce the revenue we receive for each installation. It is therefore important that we have technical expertise and provide attractive top quality products in many areas, such as lighting and video, and establish broad market awareness of these solutions. If a significant number of consumers in our target market choose to adopt point products rather than our unified automation solution, then our business, financial condition and results of operations will be harmed, and we may not be able to achieve sustained growth or our business may decline.

Many of the competitors in our market, including providers of luxury integrated installations with long operating histories, established markets, broad user bases and proven consumer acceptance, may be successful in expanding into the mainstream home automation market, which may harm our growth and future prospects.

              Many companies with which we directly compete have been operating in this industry for many years and, as a result, have established significant name recognition in the home automation industry. For example, Crestron, a provider of luxury integrated installations, has been in business for over 40 years and has become an established presence in the home automation industry. Another provider of luxury integrated installations is Savant Systems, which provides home automation based on the Apple iOS operating platform. To the extent these providers are able to develop more affordable products that compete more directly with our solution, our growth may be constrained and our business could suffer. In addition, given the strong growth potential of the market, we expect there to be many new entrants in the future.

Since we rely on third-party dealers and distributors to sell and install our solutions, we do not have a direct sales pipeline, which makes it difficult for us to accurately forecast future sales and correctly predict manufacturing requirements.

              We depend on our dealer and distributor network to sell and install our solution. As a result, we do not develop or control our sales pipeline, making it difficult for us to predict future sales. In addition, because the production of certain of our products requires long lead times, we enter into agreements for the manufacture and purchase certain of our products well in advance of the time in which those products will be sold. These contracts are based on our best estimates of our near-term product needs. If we underestimate consumer demand, we may forego revenue opportunities, lose market share and damage our relationships. Conversely, if we overestimate consumer demand, we may purchase more inventory than we are able to sell at any given time, or at all. If we fail to accurately

16


Table of Contents

estimate demand for our products, we could have excess or obsolete inventory, resulting in a decline in the value of our inventory, which would increase our costs of revenues and reduce our liquidity. Our failure to accurately manage inventory relative to demand would adversely affect our results of operations.

We have relatively limited visibility regarding the consumers that ultimately purchase our products, and we often rely on information from third-party dealers and distributors to help us manage our business. If these dealers and distributors fail to provide timely or accurate information, our ability to quickly react to market changes and effectively manage our business may be harmed.

              We sell our solutions through dealers and distributors. These dealers and distributors work with consumers to design, install, update and maintain their home automation installations. While we are able to track orders from dealers and distributors and have access to certain information about the configurations of their Control4 systems that we receive through our controller appliances, we also rely on dealers and distributors to provide us with information about consumer behavior, product and system feedback, consumer demographics, buying patterns and information on our competitors. We use this channel sell-through data, along with other metrics, to assess consumer demand for our solutions, develop new products, adjust pricing and make other strategic business decisions. Channel sell-through data is subject to limitations due to collection methods and the third-party nature of the data and thus may not be complete or accurate. In addition, to the extent we collect information directly from consumers, for example through surveys that we conduct, the consumers who supply this sell-through data self select and vary by geographic region and from period to period, which may impact the usefulness of the results. If we do not receive consumer information on a timely or accurate basis, or if we do not properly interpret this information, our ability to quickly react to market changes and effectively manage our business may be harmed.

Our quarterly results of operations have fluctuated and may continue to fluctuate. As a result, we may fail to meet or exceed the expectations of investors or securities analysts, which could cause our stock price to decline.

              Our quarterly revenue and results of operations may fluctuate as a result of a variety of factors, many of which are outside of our control. If our quarterly revenue or results of operations fall below the expectations of investors or securities analysts, the price of our common stock could decline substantially. Fluctuations in our results of operations may be due to a number of factors, including:

17


Table of Contents

              Due to the foregoing factors and the other risks discussed in this prospectus, you should not rely on quarter-to-quarter comparisons of our results of operations as an indication of our future performance. You should not consider our recent revenue growth as indicative of our future performance.

If we are unable to develop new solutions, sell our solutions into new markets or further penetrate our existing markets, our revenue may not grow as expected.

              Our ability to increase sales will depend in large part on our ability to enhance and improve our solutions, to introduce new solutions in a timely manner, to sell into new markets and to further penetrate our existing markets. The success of any enhancement or new product or solution depends on several factors, including the timely completion, introduction and market acceptance of enhanced or new solutions, the ability to attract, retain and effectively train sales and marketing personnel, the ability to develop relationships with dealers and distributors and the effectiveness of our marketing programs. Any new product or solution we develop or acquire may not be introduced in a timely or cost-effective manner, and may not achieve the broad market acceptance necessary to generate significant revenue. Any new markets into which we attempt to sell our solutions, including new vertical markets and new countries or regions, may not be receptive. Our ability to further penetrate our existing markets depends on the quality of our solutions and our ability to design our solutions to meet consumer demand. Moreover, we are frequently required to enhance and update our solutions as a result of changing standards and technological developments, which makes it difficult to recover the cost of development and forces us to continually qualify new solutions with our consumers. If we are unable to successfully develop or acquire new solutions, enhance our existing solutions to meet consumer requirements, sell solutions into new markets or sell our solutions to additional consumers in our existing markets, our revenue may not grow as expected.

Our success depends, in part, on our ability to develop and expand our global network of dealers and distributors.

              We have developed a global network of over 2,800 active direct dealers and 27 distributors to sell, install and support our solutions. We rely on our dealers and distributors to provide consumers with a successful Control4 home automation experience. In some cases, dealers may choose not to offer our solution and instead offer a product from one of our competitors or, in other cases, the dealer may simply discontinue its operations. In order to continue our growth and expand our business, it is important that we continue to add new dealers and distributors and maintain most of our existing relationships. We must also work to expand our network of dealers and distributors to ensure that we have sufficient geographic coverage and technical expertise to address new markets and technologies. While it is difficult to estimate the total number of available dealers in our markets, there are a finite number of dealers that are able to perform the types of technical installations required for home automation systems. In the event that we saturate the available dealer pool, or if market or other forces cause the available pool of dealers to decline, it may be increasingly difficult to grow our business. As consumers' home automation options grow, it is important that we enhance our dealer footprint by broadening the expertise of our dealers, working with larger and more sophisticated dealers and expanding the mainstream consumer products our dealers offer. If we are unable to expand our network of dealers and distributors, our business could be harmed.

18


Table of Contents

We rely on our dealers and distributors to sell our solution, and if our dealers and distributors fail to perform, our ability to sell and distribute our products and services will be limited, and our results of operations may be harmed.

              Substantially all of our revenue is generated through the sales of our solution by our dealers and distributors. Our dealers and distributors are independent businesses that voluntarily sell our products as well as the products of other companies to consumers. We provide our dealers and distributors with specific training and programs to assist them in selling our products, but we cannot assure that these steps will be effective. We have observed, and expect to continue to observe, high volatility in the monthly, quarterly and annual sales performance of individual dealers and distributors. Although we can make estimated forecasts of cumulative sales of large numbers of dealers and distributors, we cannot assure their accuracy collectively nor individually. Accordingly, we may not be able to reduce or slow our spending quickly enough if our actual sales fall short of our expectations. As a result, we expect that our revenues, results of operations and cash flows may fluctuate significantly on a quarterly basis. We believe that period-to-period comparisons of our revenues, results of operations and cash flows may not be meaningful and should not be relied upon as an indication of future performance.

              Our dealers and distributors may be unsuccessful in marketing, selling, and supporting our products and services. If we are unable to develop and maintain effective sales incentive programs for our third-party dealers and distributors, we may not be able to incentivize them to sell our products to consumers and, in particular, to larger businesses and organizations. Our dealers and distributors may also market, sell and support products and services that are competitive with ours, and may devote more resources to the marketing, sales, and support of such competitive products. Our dealers and distributors may have incentives to promote our competitors' products to the detriment of our own, or may cease selling our products altogether. Our agreements with our dealers and distributors may generally be terminated for any reason by either party with advance notice. We cannot assure you that we will retain these dealers and distributors, or that we will be able to secure additional or replacement dealers and distributors. Further, if we alter our sales process in a region by switching from a distributor to a direct dealer model, our sales may be impacted leading up to or in connection with such change in sales process. In addition, while we take certain steps to protect ourselves from liability for the actions of our dealers and distributors, consumers may seek to recover amounts from us for any damages caused by dealers in connection with system installations, or the failure of a system to perform properly due to an incorrect installation by a dealer. In addition, our dealers and distributors may use our name and our brand in ways we do not authorize, and any such improper use may harm our reputation or expose us to liability for their actions.

              If we fail to effectively manage our existing sales channels, if our dealers or distributors are unsuccessful in fulfilling the orders for our products, or if we are unable to enter into arrangements with, and retain a sufficient number of, high quality dealers and distributors in each of the regions in which we sell products, and keep them motivated to sell our products, our results of operations may be harmed. The termination of our relationship with any significant dealer or distributor may also adversely impact our sales and results of operations.

We have entered into several strategic arrangements and intend to pursue additional strategic opportunities in the future. If the intended benefits from our strategic relationships are not realized, our growth and results of operations may be harmed .

              We are in the process of growing our relationships with strategic partners in order to attempt to reach markets that we cannot currently address cost-effectively and to increase awareness of our solution. If these relationships do not develop in the manner we intend, our future growth could be impacted. Furthermore, the termination of our relationship with a partner may cause us to incur expenses without corresponding revenue, incur a termination penalty and harm our sales and results of

19


Table of Contents

operations. For example, in 2012, we discontinued energy products for utility customers and, in connection with that decision, we incurred an expense related to an inventory purchase commitment and paid a fee to our counterparty to terminate the arrangement. Any loss of a major partner or distribution channel or other channel disruption could harm our results of operations and make us more dependent on alternate channels, damage our reputation, increase pricing and promotional pressures from other partners and distribution channels, increase our marketing costs, or harm buying and inventory patterns, payment terms or other contractual terms.

If we do not maintain the compatibility of our solutions with third-party products and applications that our consumers use, demand for our solutions could decline.

              Our solutions are designed to interoperate with a wide range of other third-party products, including products in the areas of music, video, lighting, temperature and security. If we do not support the continued integration of our solutions with third-party products and applications, including through the provision of application programming interfaces that enable data to be transferred readily between our solutions and third-party products and applications, demand for our solutions could decline and we could lose sales. We will also be required to make our solutions compatible with new or additional third-party products and applications that are introduced into the markets that we serve. To help us meet this challenge, we have developed our Simple Device Discovery Protocol, or SDDP, designed to enable our devices to recognize and control third-party products by embedding software in such products at the manufacturer, making it easier for dealers and consumers to add them to their Control4 systems. Although we are making SDDP available on a royalty-free basis to product manufacturers, its adoption is not yet substantial, and may not achieve greater or broad market acceptance. In addition, companies that provide popular point solutions have and may continue to eliminate or restrict our ability to control and be compatible with these products. For example, a thermostat company has restricted the interoperability of its products with our solutions. As a result, we may not be successful in making our solutions compatible with these third-party products and applications, which could reduce demand for our solutions. In addition, if prospective consumers require customized features or functions that we do not offer, then the market for our solutions may be harmed.

Our inability to adapt to technological change could impair our ability to remain competitive.

              The market for home automation and control solutions is characterized by rapid technological change, frequent introductions of new products and evolving industry standards. Our ability to attract new consumers and increase revenue from existing consumers will depend in significant part on our ability to anticipate changes in industry standards and to continue to enhance or introduce existing solutions on a timely basis to keep pace with technological developments. We are currently changing several aspects of our operating system, and may utilize Android open source technology in the future, which may cause difficulties including compatibility, stability and time to market. The success of this or any enhanced or new product or solution will depend on several factors, including the timely completion and market acceptance of the enhanced or new product or solution. Similarly, if any of our competitors implement new technologies before we are able to implement them, those competitors may be able to provide more effective products than ours, possibly at lower prices. Any delay or failure in the introduction of new or enhanced solutions could harm our business, results of operations and financial condition.

20


Table of Contents

We currently rely on contract manufacturers to manufacture our products and component vendors to supply parts used in our products. The majority of our components are supplied by a single source. Any disruption in our supply chain, or any our failure to successfully manage our relationships with our contract manufacturers or component vendors could harm our business.

              Our reliance on contract manufacturers reduces our control over the assembly process, exposing us to risks, including reduced control over quality assurance, production costs and product supply. We rely on a limited number of contract manufacturers to manufacture substantially all of our products. We also do business with a number of component vendors, and the parts they supply may not perform as expected. For certain of our products and components, we rely on a sole-source manufacturer or supplier. In 2012, two contract manufacturers, Sanmina and LiteOn, manufactured 82% of our inventory purchases. Certain of our contract manufacturers and component vendors are located outside of the United States and may be subject to political, economic, social and legal uncertainties that may harm our relationships with these parties. If we fail to manage our relationships with our contract manufacturers or component vendors effectively, or if our contract manufacturers or component vendors experience delays, disruptions, capacity constraints or quality control problems in their operations, our ability to ship products may be impaired and our competitive position and reputation could be harmed. In addition, any adverse change in our contract manufacturers' or component vendors' financial or business condition could disrupt our ability to supply quality products to our dealers and distributors. If we are required to change contract manufacturers or component vendors, we may lose revenue, incur increased costs or damage our relationships, or we might be unable to find a new contract manufacturer or component vendor on acceptable terms, or at all. In addition, qualifying a new contract manufacturer or component vendor can be an expensive and lengthy process. If we experience increased demand that our contract manufacturers or component vendors are unable to fulfill, or if they are unable to provide us with adequate supplies of high-quality products for any reason, we could experience a delay in our order fulfillment, and our business, results of operations and financial condition would be harmed.

Growth of our business will depend on market awareness and a strong brand, and any failure to develop, maintain, protect and enhance our brand would hurt our ability to retain or attract consumers.

              Because of the early stage of development of the mainstream home automation market, we believe that building and maintaining market awareness, brand recognition and goodwill is critical to our success. This will depend largely on our ability to continue to provide high-quality solutions, and we may not be able to do so effectively. While we may choose to engage in a broader marketing campaign to further promote our brand, this effort may not be successful. Our efforts in developing our brand may be affected by the marketing efforts of our competitors and our reliance on our dealers, distributors and strategic partners to promote our brand. If we are unable to cost-effectively maintain and increase awareness of our brand, our business, results of operations and financial condition could be harmed.

We operate in the emerging and evolving home automation market, which may develop more slowly or differently than we expect. If the mainstream home automation market does not grow as we expect, or if we cannot expand our solutions to meet the demands of this market, our revenue may decline, fail to grow or fail to grow at an accelerated rate, and we may incur additional operating losses.

              The market for home automation and control solutions is in an early stage of development, and it is uncertain whether, how rapidly or how consistently this market will develop, and even if it does develop, whether our solutions will achieve and sustain high levels of demand and market acceptance. Some consumers may be reluctant or unwilling to use our solutions for a number of reasons, including satisfaction with traditional solutions, concerns for additional costs and lack of awareness of our solutions. Unified home automation solutions such as ours have traditionally been luxury purchases for the high end of the residential market. Our ability to expand the sales of our

21


Table of Contents

solutions to a broader consumer base depends on several factors, including the awareness of our solutions, the timely completion, introduction and market acceptance of our solutions, the ability to attract, retain and effectively train sales and marketing personnel, the ability to develop relationships with dealers and distributors, the effectiveness of our marketing programs, the costs of our solutions and the success of our competitors. If we are unsuccessful in developing and marketing our home automation solutions to mainstream consumers, or if these consumers do not perceive or value the benefits of our solutions, the market for our solutions might not continue to develop or might develop more slowly than we expect, either of which would harm our revenue and growth prospects.

Our consumers may experience service failures or interruptions due to defects in the software, infrastructure, third-party components or processes that comprise our existing or new solutions, or due to dealer errors in product installation, any of which could harm our business.

              Our solutions may contain undetected defects in the software, infrastructure, third-party components or processes. If these defects lead to service failures after introduction of or an upgrade to a product or solution, we could experience harm to our branded reputation, claims by our consumers, dealers, distributors, strategic partners or developers or lost revenue during the period required to address the cause of the defects. We may find defects in new or upgraded solutions, resulting in loss of, or delay in, market acceptance of our solutions, which could harm our business, results of operations and financial condition.

              Since our solutions are installed by our dealers, if they do not install or maintain our solutions correctly, our solutions may not function properly. If the improper installation or maintenance of our solutions leads to service failures after introduction of, or an upgrade to, a product or solution, we could experience harm to our branded reputation, claims by our consumers, dealers, distributors, strategic partners or developers or lost revenue during the period required to address the cause of the problem. This could harm our business, results of operations and financial condition.

              Any defect in, or disruption to, our solutions could cause consumers not to purchase additional products from us, prevent potential consumers from purchasing our solutions or harm our reputation. Although our contracts with our consumers limit our liability to our consumers for these defects, disruptions or errors, we nonetheless could be subject to litigation for actual or alleged losses to our consumers' businesses, which may require us to spend significant time and money in litigation or arbitration, or to pay significant settlements or damages. Defending a lawsuit, regardless of its merit, could be costly, divert management's attention and affect our ability to obtain or maintain liability insurance on acceptable terms and could harm our business. Although we currently maintain some warranty reserves, we cannot assure you that these warranty reserves will be sufficient to cover future liabilities. Furthermore, we may be required to indemnify our dealers, distributors and partners against certain liabilities they may incur as a result of defects of our products. In 2012, we incurred significant costs associated with the recall and replacement of a defective chip from a third-party component used within one of our products.

We encounter seasonality in sales, which could harm the amount, timing and predictability of our revenue and cause our stock price to fluctuate.

              We have little recurring revenue or backlog and our revenue is generated from orders of our solutions from new and existing consumers, which may cause our quarterly results to fluctuate. We may experience seasonality in the sales of our solutions. Historically, our revenue is generally higher in the fourth quarter and lower in the first quarter. Seasonal variations in our sales may lead to significant fluctuations in our cash flows and results of operations on a quarterly basis. If we experience a delay in signing or a failure to sign a significant partner agreement in any particular quarter, then our results of operations for such quarter and for subsequent quarters may be below the expectations of securities analysts or investors, which may result in a decline in our stock price.

22


Table of Contents

We may not generate significant revenue as a result of our current research and development efforts.

              We have made and expect to continue to make significant investments in research and development and related product opportunities. In the year ended December 31, 2012, we spent $20.3 million on research and development expenses. High levels of expenditures for research and development could harm our results of operations, especially if not offset by corresponding future revenue increases. We believe that we must continue to dedicate a significant amount of resources to our research and development efforts to maintain our competitive position. However, it is difficult to estimate when, if ever, we will generate significant revenue as a result of these investments.

Our strategy includes pursuing acquisitions and our potential inability to successfully integrate newly-acquired technologies, assets or businesses may harm our financial results.

              We believe part of our growth will be driven by acquisitions of other companies or their technologies, assets and businesses. Any acquisitions we complete will give rise to risks, including:

              Fully integrating an acquired technology, asset or business into our operations may take a significant amount of time. We may not be successful in overcoming these risks or any other problems encountered with acquisitions. To the extent we do not successfully avoid or overcome the risks or problems related to any such acquisitions, our results of operations and financial condition could be harmed. Acquisitions also could impact our financial position and capital needs, or could cause fluctuations in our quarterly and annual results of operations. Acquisitions could include significant goodwill and intangible assets, which may result in future impairment charges that would reduce our stated earnings. We may incur significant costs in our efforts to engage in strategic transactions and these expenditures may not result in successful acquisitions.

23


Table of Contents

Future acquisitions of technologies, assets or businesses, which are paid for partially or entirely through the issuance of stock or stock rights, could dilute the ownership of our existing stockholders.

              We expect that the consideration we might pay for any future acquisitions of technologies, assets or businesses could include stock, rights to purchase stock, cash or some combination of the foregoing. If we issue stock or rights to purchase stock in connection with future acquisitions, net income (loss) per share and then-existing holders of our common stock may experience dilution.

Our gross margins can vary significantly depending on multiple factors, which can result in fluctuations in our results of operations.

              Our gross margins are likely to vary due to consumer demand, product mix, new product introductions, unit volumes, commodity and supply chain costs, product delivery costs, geographic sales mix, foreign currency exchange rates, excess and obsolete inventory and the complexity and functionality of new product innovations. In particular, if we are not able to introduce new solutions in a timely manner at the cost we expect, or if consumer demand for our solutions is less than we anticipate, or if there are product pricing, marketing and other initiatives by our competitors to which we need to react that lower our margins, then our overall gross margin will be less than we project. The impact of these factors on gross margins can create unanticipated fluctuations in our results of operations, which may cause volatility in our stock price.

If we are unable to substantially utilize our net operating loss carryforwards, our financial results will be harmed.

              As of December 31, 2012, our net operating loss, or NOL, carryforward amounts for U.S. federal income and state tax purposes were $83.6 million and $83.1 million, respectively. Under Section 382 of the Internal Revenue Code, a corporation that undergoes an "ownership change" may be subject to limitations on its ability to utilize its pre-change NOLs to offset future taxable income. Purchases of our common stock in amounts greater than specified levels, which will be beyond our control, could create an additional limitation on our ability to utilize our NOLs for tax purposes in the future. Limitations imposed on our ability to utilize NOLs could cause U.S. federal and state income taxes to be paid earlier than would be paid if such limitations were not in effect and could cause such NOLs to expire unused, in each case reducing or eliminating the benefit of such NOLs. Furthermore, we may not be able to generate sufficient taxable income to utilize our NOLs before they expire. If any of these events occur, we may not derive some or all of the expected benefits from our NOLs. In addition, at the state level there may be periods during which the use of NOLs is suspended or otherwise limited, which would accelerate or permanently increase state taxes owed.

Governmental regulations affecting the import or export of products could harm our revenue.

              The U.S. and various foreign governments have imposed controls, export license requirements and restrictions on the import or export of some technologies, especially encryption technology, and may impose additional or broader controls, export license requirements and restrictions on the import or export of some technologies in the future. In addition, from time to time, governmental agencies have proposed additional regulation of encryption technology, such as requiring the escrow and governmental recovery of private encryption keys. Although we do not believe that any of our products currently require an export license, if our products or components of our products become subject to governmental regulation of encryption technology or other governmental regulation of imports or exports, we may be required to obtain import or export approval for such products, which could increase our costs and harm our international and domestic sales and our revenue. In addition, failure to comply with such regulations could result in penalties, costs and restrictions on export privileges, which would harm our results of operations.

24


Table of Contents

If we are unable to manage our growth and diverse and complex operations, our reputation in the market and our ability to generate revenue from new or existing consumers may be harmed.

              Because our operations are geographically diverse and complex, our personnel resources and infrastructure could become strained and our reputation in the market and our ability to successfully implement our business plan may be harmed. We have experienced a period of rapid growth in our headcount and operations. The growth in the size, complexity and diverse nature of our business and the expansion of our product lines and consumer base have placed increased demands on our management and operations, and further growth, if any, may place additional strains on our resources in the future. Our ability to effectively compete and to manage our planned future growth will depend on, among other things:

              If we do not manage the size, complexity and diverse nature of our business effectively, we could experience delayed product releases and longer response times for assisting our consumers with implementation of our solutions, and could lack adequate resources to support our consumers on an ongoing basis, any of which could harm our reputation in the market, our ability to successfully implement our business plan and our ability to generate revenue from new or existing consumers.

If we fail to retain our key employees, our business would be harmed and we might not be able to implement our business plan successfully.

              Given the complex nature of the technology on which our business is based and the speed with which such technology advances, our future success is dependent, in large part, upon our ability to attract and retain highly qualified managerial, engineering and sales personnel. Competition for talented personnel is intense, and we cannot be certain that we can retain our managerial, engineering and sales personnel or that we can attract, assimilate or retain such personnel in the future. Our inability to attract and retain such personnel could harm our business, results of operations and financial condition.

Downturns in general economic and market conditions and reductions in spending may reduce demand for our solutions, which could harm our revenue, results of operations and cash flows.

              Our revenue, results of operations and cash flows depend on the overall demand for our solutions. Concerns about the systemic impact of a potential widespread recession, energy costs, geopolitical issues, the availability and cost of credit and the global housing and mortgage markets have contributed to increased market volatility, decreased consumer confidence and diminished growth expectations in the U.S. economy and abroad. The current unstable general economic and market conditions have been characterized by a dramatic decline in consumer discretionary spending and have disproportionately affected providers of products and services that represent discretionary purchases. While the decline in consumer spending has recently moderated, these economic conditions could still lead to continued declines in consumer spending over the foreseeable future, and may have resulted in

25


Table of Contents

a resetting of consumer spending habits that may make it unlikely that such spending will return to prior levels for the foreseeable future.

              During weak economic times, the available pool of dealers and distributors may decline as the prospects for home building and home renovation projects diminish, which may have a corresponding impact on our growth prospects. In addition, there is an increased risk during these periods that an increased percentage of our dealers will file for bankruptcy protection, which may harm our reputation, revenue, profitability and results of operations. We also face risks from international dealers and distributors that file for bankruptcy protection in foreign jurisdictions, in that the outcome of the application of foreign bankruptcy laws may be more difficult to predict. In addition, we may determine that the cost of pursuing any claim may outweigh the recovery potential of such claim. Likewise, consumer bankruptcies can detrimentally affect the business stability of our dealers and distributors. Prolonged economic slowdowns and reductions in new home construction and renovation projects may result in diminished sales of our solutions. Further worsening, broadening or protracted extension of the economic downturn could have a negative impact on our business, revenue, results of operations and cash flows.

If our estimates or judgments relating to our critical accounting policies are based on assumptions that change or prove to be incorrect, our results of operations could fall below expectations of securities analysts and investors, resulting in a decline in our stock price.

              The preparation of financial statements in conformity with generally accepted accounting principles, or GAAP, requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the amounts reported in our consolidated financial statements and accompanying notes. We base our estimates on historical experience and on various other assumptions that we believe to be reasonable under the circumstances, as provided in "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations," the results of which form the basis for making judgments about the carrying values of assets, liabilities and equity, and the amount of revenue and expenses that are not readily apparent from other sources. Significant assumptions and estimates used in preparing our consolidated financial statements include, or may in the future include, those related to revenue recognition, allowance for doubtful accounts, inventories, product warranties, income taxes and stock-based compensation expense. Our results of operations may be harmed if our assumptions change or if actual circumstances differ from those in our assumptions, which could cause our results of operations to fall below the expectations of securities analysts and investors, resulting in a decline in our stock price.

Changes in existing financial accounting standards or practices, or taxation rules or practices, may harm our results of operations.

              Changes in existing accounting or taxation rules or practices, new accounting pronouncements or taxation rules, or varying interpretations of current accounting pronouncements or taxation practice could harm our results of operations or the manner in which we conduct our business.

Mergers or other strategic transactions involving our competitors could weaken our competitive position, which could harm our results of operations.

              Our industry is highly fragmented, and we believe it is likely that some of our existing competitors will consolidate or be acquired. In addition, some of our competitors may enter into new alliances with each other or may establish or strengthen cooperative relationships with systems integrators, third-party consulting firms or other parties. Any such consolidation, acquisition, alliance or cooperative relationship could lead to pricing pressure and our loss of market share and could result in a competitor with greater financial, technical, marketing, service and other resources, all of which could harm our business, results of operations and financial condition.

26


Table of Contents

We will incur increased costs and demands upon management as a result of complying with the laws and regulations affecting public companies, which could harm our results of operations and our ability to attract and retain qualified executives and board members.

              As a public company, we will incur significant legal, accounting and other expenses that we did not incur as a private company, including costs associated with public company reporting and corporate governance requirements. These requirements include compliance with Section 404 and other provisions of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act, or the Dodd-Frank Act, as well as rules implemented by the Securities and Exchange Commission, or SEC, The NASDAQ Stock Market LLC, or NASDAQ, and other applicable securities or exchange-related rules and regulations. In addition, our management team will also have to adapt to the requirements of being a public company. We expect complying with these rules and regulations will substantially increase our legal and financial compliance costs and make some activities more difficult, time consuming or costly, particularly if we are no longer an "emerging growth company," as defined in the Jumpstart Our Business Startups Act of 2012, or the JOBS Act.

              As a public company, we also expect that it may be more difficult and more expensive for us to obtain director and officer liability insurance, and we may be required to accept reduced policy limits and coverage or incur substantially higher costs to obtain the same or similar coverage. As a result, it may be more difficult for us to attract and retain qualified individuals to serve on our board of directors or as our executive officers.

We are an "emerging growth company," and any decision on our part to comply with certain reduced disclosure requirements applicable to emerging growth companies could make our common stock less attractive to investors.

              We are an "emerging growth company," as defined in the JOBS Act, and we may take advantage of certain exemptions from various reporting requirements that are applicable to other public companies that are not "emerging growth companies" including not being required to comply with the auditor attestation requirements of Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, reduced disclosure obligations regarding executive compensation in our periodic reports and proxy statements, and exemptions from the requirements of holding an annual non-binding advisory vote on executive compensation and nonbinding stockholder approval of any golden parachute payments not previously approved. If we choose not to comply with the auditor attestation requirements of Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, our auditors will not be required to attest to the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting. As a result, investors may become less comfortable with the effectiveness of our internal controls and the risk that material weaknesses or other deficiencies in our internal controls go undetected may increase. If we choose to provide reduced disclosures in our periodic reports and proxy statements while we are an emerging growth company, investors would have access to less information and analysis about our executive compensation, which may make it difficult for investors to evaluate our executive compensation practices. We cannot predict if investors will find our common stock less attractive because we may rely on these exemptions and provide reduced disclosure. If some investors find our common stock less attractive as a result, there may be a less active trading market for our common stock and our stock price may be harmed. We will remain an "emerging growth company" for up to five years or such earlier time that we are no longer an emerging growth company. We will remain an emerging growth company until the earliest to occur of: the last day of the fiscal year in which we have more than $1.0 billion in annual revenue; the date we qualify as a "large accelerated filer," with at least $700 million of equity securities held by non-affiliates; the issuance, in any three-year period, by us of more than $1.0 billion in non-convertible debt securities; or the last day of the fiscal year ending after the fifth anniversary of our initial public offering.

27


Table of Contents

              In addition, Section 107 of the JOBS Act provides that an emerging growth company can take advantage of the extended transition period provided in Section 7(a)(2)(B) of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, or the Securities Act, for complying with new or revised accounting standards. In other words, an emerging growth company can delay the adoption of certain accounting standards until those standards would otherwise apply to private companies. However, we have chosen to "opt out" of such extended transition period, and as a result, we will comply with new or revised accounting standards on the relevant dates on which adoption of such standards is required for non-emerging growth companies. Section 107 of the JOBS Act provides that our decision to opt out of the extended transition period for complying with new or revised accounting standards is irrevocable.

As a result of becoming a public company, we will be obligated to develop and maintain a system of effective internal controls over financial reporting. We may not complete our analysis of our internal control over financial reporting in a timely manner, or these internal controls may not be determined to be effective, which may harm investor confidence in our company and, as a result, the value of our common stock.

              We will be required, pursuant to Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, to furnish a report by management on, among other things, the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting in the second annual report we file with the SEC. This assessment will need to include disclosure of any material weaknesses identified by our management in our internal control over financial reporting. However, our auditors will not be required to formally attest to the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting pursuant to Section 404 until we are no longer an "emerging growth company" as defined in the JOBS Act if we take advantage of the exemptions available to us through the JOBS Act.

              We are in the very early stages of the costly and challenging process of compiling the system and processing documentation necessary to perform the evaluation needed to comply with Section 404. We may not be able to remediate any future material weaknesses, or to complete our evaluation, testing and any required remediation in a timely fashion. During the evaluation and testing process, if we identify one or more material weaknesses in our internal control over financial reporting, we will be unable to assert that our internal controls are effective. If we are unable to assert that our internal control over financial reporting is effective, or if our auditors are unable to express an opinion on the effectiveness of our internal controls when they are required to issue such opinion, investors could lose confidence in the accuracy and completeness of our financial reports, which could harm our stock price.

Our failure to raise additional capital or generate cash flows necessary to expand our operations and invest in new technologies in the future could reduce our ability to compete successfully and harm our results of operations.

              We believe that our existing cash and cash equivalents will be sufficient to meet our anticipated cash requirements for at least the next 12 months. We may need to raise additional funds, and we may not be able to obtain additional debt or equity financing on favorable terms, if at all. If we raise additional equity financing, our security holders may experience significant dilution of their ownership interests and the value of shares of our common stock could decline. If we engage in debt financing, we may be required to accept terms that restrict our ability to incur additional indebtedness, force us to maintain specified liquidity or other ratios or restrict our ability to pay dividends or make acquisitions. If we need additional capital and cannot raise it on acceptable terms, if at all, we may not be able to, among other things:

28


Table of Contents

              Our inability to do any of the foregoing could reduce our ability to compete successfully and harm our results of operations.

We may be subject to additional tax liabilities, which would harm our results of operations.

              We are subject to income, sales, use, value added and other taxes in the United States and other countries in which we conduct business, which laws and rates vary greatly by jurisdiction. Certain jurisdictions in which we do not collect sales, use, value added or other taxes on our sales may assert that such taxes are applicable, which could result in tax assessments, penalties and interest, and we may be required to collect such taxes in the future. Significant judgment is required in determining our worldwide provision for income taxes. These determinations are highly complex and require detailed analysis of the available information and applicable statutes and regulatory materials. In the ordinary course of our business, there are many transactions and calculations where the ultimate tax determination is uncertain. Although we believe our tax estimates are reasonable, the final determination of tax audits and any related litigation could be different from our historical tax practices, provisions and accruals. If we receive an adverse ruling as a result of an audit, or we unilaterally determine that we have misinterpreted provisions of the tax regulations to which we are subject, our tax provision, results of operations or cash flows could be harmed. In addition, liabilities associated with taxes are often subject to an extended or indefinite statute of limitations period. Therefore, we may be subject to additional tax liability (including penalties and interest) for a particular year for extended periods of time.

Our business is subject to the risks of earthquakes, fire, power outages, floods and other catastrophic events, and to interruption by manmade problems such as terrorism.

              A significant natural disaster, such as an earthquake, fire or a flood, or a significant power outage could harm our business, results of operations and financial condition. Natural disasters could affect our manufacturing vendors or logistics providers' ability to perform services such as manufacturing products or assisting with shipments on a timely basis. Sanmina and LiteOn, two of our contract manufacturers that manufactured 82% of our inventory purchases in 2012, have manufacturing facilities located in China. In the event our manufacturing vendors' information technology systems or manufacturing or logistics abilities are hindered by any of the events discussed above, shipments could be delayed, resulting in missing financial targets, such as revenue and shipment targets, for a particular quarter. Further, if a natural disaster occurs in a region from which we derive a significant portion of our revenue, such as metropolitan areas in North America, consumers in that region may delay or forego purchases of our solutions from dealers and distributors in the region, which may harm our results of operations for a particular period. In addition, acts of terrorism could cause disruptions in our business or the business of our manufacturers, logistics providers, dealers, distributors, consumers or the economy as a whole. Given our typical concentration of sales at the end of each month and quarter, any disruption in the business of our manufacturers, logistics providers, dealers, distributors and consumers that impacts sales at the end of our quarter could have a greater impact on our quarterly results. All of the aforementioned risks may be augmented if the disaster recovery plans for us and our suppliers prove to be inadequate. To the extent that any of the above results in delays or cancellations of orders, or delays in the manufacture, deployment or shipment of our products, our business, financial condition and results of operations would be harmed.

29


Table of Contents

Global or regional economic, political and social conditions could harm our business and results of operations.

              External factors such as potential terrorist attacks, acts of war, financial crises, trade friction or geopolitical and social turmoil in those parts of the world that serve as markets for our solutions, such as Europe or Asia, or elsewhere could harm our business and results of operations. These uncertainties may cause our consumers to reduce discretionary spending on their home and make it difficult for us to accurately plan future business activities. More generally, these geopolitical, social and economic conditions could result in increased volatility in worldwide financial markets and economies that could harm our sales. We are not insured for losses or interruptions caused by terrorist acts or acts of war. The occurrence of any of these events or circumstances could harm our business and results of operations.

Failure to comply with laws and regulations could harm our business.

              Our business is subject to regulation by various federal, state, local and foreign governmental agencies, including agencies responsible for monitoring and enforcing employment and labor laws, workplace safety, product safety, environmental laws, consumer protection laws, anti-bribery laws, import/export controls, federal securities laws and tax laws and regulations. In certain jurisdictions, these regulatory requirements may be more stringent than in the United States. Noncompliance with applicable regulations or requirements could subject us to investigations, sanctions, mandatory product recalls, enforcement actions, disgorgement of profits, fines, damages, civil and criminal penalties or injunctions. If any governmental sanctions are imposed, or if we do not prevail in any possible civil or criminal litigation, our business, results of operations and financial condition could be materially harmed. In addition, responding to any action will likely result in a significant diversion of management's attention and resources and an increase in professional fees. Enforcement actions and sanctions could further harm our business, results of operations and financial condition.

Risks Related to Our International Operations

In recent years, a significant amount of our revenue has come from sales outside of the United States, and we are therefore subject to a number of risks associated with international sales and operations.

              We have a limited history of marketing, selling, and supporting our products and services internationally. However, consumers in countries outside of North America accounted for 25% of our revenue for the year ended December 31, 2012 and we expect that percentage to grow in the future. As a result, we must hire and train experienced personnel to staff and manage our foreign operations. To the extent that we experience difficulties in recruiting, training, managing, and retaining an international staff, and specifically staff related to sales management and sales personnel, we may experience difficulties in sales productivity in foreign markets.

              If we are not able to increase the sales of our solutions to consumers located outside of North America, our results of operations or revenue growth may be harmed. In addition, in connection with our expansion into foreign markets, we are a receiver of currencies other than the U.S. dollar. Accordingly, changes in exchange rates, and in particular a strengthening of the U.S. dollar, will negatively affect our net sales and gross margins as expressed in U.S. dollars. There is also a risk that we will have to adjust local currency product pricing due to competitive pressures when there has been significant volatility in foreign currency exchange rates.

              Conducting and launching operations on an international scale requires close coordination of activities across multiple jurisdictions and time zones and consumes significant management resources. Our limited experience in operating our business outside of the United States increases the risk that our current and any future international expansion efforts will not be successful. Conducting

30


Table of Contents

international operations subjects us to risks that, generally, we do not face in the United States, including:

              The impact of any one of these risks could harm our international business and, consequently, our results of operations generally. Additionally, operating in international markets also requires significant management attention and financial resources. We cannot be certain that the investment and additional resources required in establishing, acquiring or integrating operations in other countries will produce desired levels of revenue or profitability.

Due to the global nature of our business, we could be harmed by violations of the U.S. Foreign Corrupt Practices Act, the U.K. Bribery Act or similar anti-bribery laws in other jurisdictions in which we operate, or various international trade and export laws.

              The global nature of our business creates various domestic and local regulatory challenges. The U.S. Foreign Corrupt Practices Act, or the FCPA, the U.K. Bribery Act 2010, or the U.K. Bribery Act, and similar anti-bribery laws in other jurisdictions generally prohibit U.S.-based companies and their intermediaries from making improper payments to non-U.S. officials for the purpose of obtaining or retaining business. In addition, U.S.-based companies are required to maintain records that accurately and fairly represent their transactions and have an adequate system of internal accounting controls. We operate in areas of the world that experience corruption by government officials to some degree and, in certain circumstances, compliance with anti-bribery laws may conflict with local customs and practices. Our global operations require us to import from and export to several countries, which geographically stretches our compliance obligations. In addition, changes in such laws could result in increased regulatory requirements and compliance costs which could harm our business, financial condition and results of operations. Our employees or other agents may engage in prohibited conduct and render us responsible under the FCPA, the U.K. Bribery Act or similar anti-bribery laws. If we are found to be in violation of the FCPA, the U.K. Bribery Act or other anti-bribery laws (either due to acts or inadvertence of our employees, or due to the acts or inadvertence of others), we could suffer criminal or civil penalties or other sanctions, which could harm on our business.

31


Table of Contents

Risks Related to Our Intellectual Property

From time to time, we are defendants in legal proceedings as to which we are unable to assess our exposure and which could become significant liabilities in the event of an adverse judgment.

              We are defendants in legal proceedings from time to time. Companies in our industry have been subject to claims related to patent infringement and product liability, as well as contract and employment-related claims. We may not be able to accurately assess the risks related to these suits, and we may be unable to accurately assess our level of exposure. In December 2012, we entered into a settlement agreement relating to alleged patent infringements, which included future royalty payments on certain products and the payment of a lump sum amount for alleged past damages.

If we fail to protect our intellectual property and proprietary rights adequately, our business could be harmed.

              We believe that proprietary technology is essential to establishing and maintaining our leadership position. We seek to protect our intellectual property through trade secrets, copyrights, confidentiality, non-compete and nondisclosure agreements, patents, trademarks, domain names and other measures, some of which afford only limited protection. We also rely on patent, trademark, trade secret and copyright laws to protect our intellectual property. Despite our efforts to protect our proprietary rights, unauthorized parties may attempt to copy aspects of our technology or to obtain and use information that we regard as proprietary. Our means of protecting our proprietary rights may not be adequate or our competitors may independently develop similar or superior technology, or design around our intellectual property. In addition, the laws of some foreign countries do not protect our proprietary rights to as great an extent as the laws of the United States. Intellectual property protections may also be unavailable, limited or difficult to enforce in some countries, which could make it easier for competitors to capture market share. Our failure or inability to adequately protect our intellectual property and proprietary rights could harm our business, financial condition and results of operations.

              To prevent substantial unauthorized use of our intellectual property rights, it may be necessary to prosecute actions for infringement and/or misappropriation of our proprietary rights against third parties. Any such action could result in significant costs and diversion of our resources and management's attention, and we cannot assure you that we will be successful in such action. Furthermore, many of our current and potential competitors have the ability to dedicate substantially greater resources to enforce their intellectual property rights than we do. Accordingly, despite our efforts, we may not be able to prevent third parties from infringing upon or misappropriating our intellectual property.

An assertion by a third party that we are infringing its intellectual property could subject us to costly and time-consuming litigation or expensive licenses that could harm our business and results of operations.

              The industries in which we compete are characterized by the existence of a large number of patents, copyrights, trademarks and trade secrets, and by frequent litigation based on allegations of infringement or other violations of intellectual property rights. We have been subject to patent litigation in the past and we may be subject to similar litigation in the future. Given that our solution integrates with all aspects of the home, the risk that our solution may be subject to these allegations is exacerbated. As we seek to extend our solutions, we could be constrained by the intellectual property rights of others. In addition, our dealer and distributor contracts require us to indemnify them against certain liabilities they may incur as a result of our infringement of any third-party intellectual property.

              We might not prevail in any intellectual property infringement litigation given the complex technical issues and inherent uncertainties in such litigation. Defending such claims, regardless of their merit, could be time-consuming and distracting to management, result in costly litigation or settlement, cause development delays or require us to enter into royalty or licensing agreements. In addition, we

32


Table of Contents

currently have a limited portfolio of issued patents compared to our larger competitors, and therefore may not be able to effectively utilize our intellectual property portfolio to assert defenses or counterclaims in response to patent infringement claims or litigation brought against us by third parties. Further, litigation may involve patent holding companies or other adverse patent owners who have no relevant products or revenues and against which our potential patents provide no deterrence, and many other potential litigants have the capability to dedicate substantially greater resources to enforce their intellectual property rights and to defend claims that may be brought against them. If our solutions exceed the scope of in-bound licenses or violate any third-party proprietary rights, we could be required to withdraw those solutions from the market, re-develop those solutions or seek to obtain licenses from third parties, which might not be available on reasonable terms or at all. Any efforts to re-develop our solutions, obtain licenses from third parties on favorable terms or license a substitute technology might not be successful and, in any case, might substantially increase our costs and harm our business, financial condition and results of operations. If we were compelled to withdraw any of our solutions from the market, our business, financial condition and results of operations could be harmed.

We are generally obligated to indemnify our dealers, distributors and partners for certain expenses and liabilities resulting from intellectual property infringement claims regarding our products, which could force us to incur substantial costs.

              We have agreed, and expect to continue to agree, to indemnify our dealers, distributors and partners for certain intellectual property infringement claims regarding our products. As a result, in the case of infringement claims against these dealers, distributors and partners, we could be required to indemnify them for losses resulting from such claims or to refund amounts they have paid to us. We expect that some of our dealers, distributors and partners may seek indemnification from us in connection with infringement claims brought against them. We evaluate each such request on a case-by-case basis and we may not succeed in refuting all such claims. If a dealer, distributor or partner elects to invest resources in enforcing a claim for indemnification against us, we could incur significant costs disputing it. If we do not succeed in disputing it, we could face substantial liability.

The use of open source software in our solutions may expose us to additional risks and harm our intellectual property.

              Some of our solutions use or incorporate software that is subject to one or more open source licenses. Open source software is typically freely accessible, usable and modifiable. Certain open source software licenses require a user who intends to distribute the open source software as a component of the user's software to disclose publicly part or all of the source code to the user's software. In addition, certain open source software licenses require the user of such software to make any derivative works of the open source code available to others on potentially unfavorable terms or at no cost.

              The terms of many open source licenses to which we are subject have not been interpreted by U.S. or foreign courts, and accordingly there is a risk that those licenses could be construed in a manner that imposes unanticipated conditions or restrictions on our ability to commercialize our solutions. In that event, we could be required to seek licenses from third parties in order to continue offering our solutions, to re-develop our solutions, to discontinue sales of our solutions or to release our proprietary software code under the terms of an open source license, any of which could harm our business. Further, given the nature of open source software, it may be more likely that third parties might assert copyright and other intellectual property infringement claims against us based on our use of these open source software programs.

              While we monitor the use of all open source software in our products, solutions, processes and technology and seek to ensure that no open source software is used in such a way as to require us to disclose the source code to the related product or solution when we do not wish to do so, we are currently conducting a comprehensive audit of open source software contained in our solutions.

33


Table of Contents

Although we are not aware of any use of open source software in our solutions that would require us to disclose all or a portion of the source code underlying our solutions, we have not completed our open source software audit; therefore, it is possible that such use may have inadvertently occurred in deploying our solutions. Additionally, if a third-party software provider has incorporated certain types of open source software into software we license from such third party for our solutions without our knowledge, we could, under certain circumstances, be required to disclose the source code to our solutions. This could harm our intellectual property position and our business, results of operations and financial condition.

We rely on the availability of third-party licenses. If these licenses are available to us only on less favorable terms or not at all in the future, our business and results of operations may be harmed.

              We have incorporated third-party licensed technology into our products. It may be necessary in the future to renew licenses relating to various aspects of these products or to seek additional licenses for existing or new products. The necessary licenses may not be available on acceptable terms, or at all. The inability to obtain certain licenses or other rights, or to obtain those licenses or rights on favorable terms, or the need to engage in litigation regarding these matters, could result in our inability to include certain features in our products or delays in product releases until such time, if ever, as equivalent technology could be identified, licensed or developed and integrated into our products, which may have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition. Moreover, the inclusion in our products of intellectual property licensed from third parties on a nonexclusive basis could limit our ability to protect our proprietary rights in our products.

Failure to maintain the security of our information and technology networks, including information relating to our dealers, distributors, consumers and employees, could adversely affect us.

              We are dependent on information technology networks and systems, including the Internet, to process, transmit and store electronic information and, in the normal course of our business, we collect and retain certain information pertaining to our dealers, distributors, consumers and employees. The legal, regulatory and contractual environment surrounding information security and privacy is constantly evolving and companies that collect and retain such information are under increasing attack by cyber-criminals around the world. A significant actual or potential theft, loss, fraudulent use or misuse of dealer, distributor, consumer, employee or other personally identifiable data, whether by third parties or as a result of employee malfeasance or otherwise, non-compliance with our contractual or other legal obligations regarding such data or a violation of our privacy and security policies with respect to such data could result in significant costs, fines, litigation or regulatory actions against us. Such an event could additionally result in adverse publicity and therefore adversely affect the market's perception of the security and reliability of our services. Security breaches of, or sustained attacks against, this infrastructure could create system disruptions and shutdowns that could result in disruptions to our operations. We cannot be certain that advances in cyber-capabilities or other developments will not compromise or breach the technology protecting the networks that access our products and services. If any one of these risks materializes our business, financial condition, results of operations and cash flows could be materially and adversely affected.

If security breaches in connection with the delivery of our services allow unauthorized third parties to obtain control or access of our consumers' appliances containing our products, our reputation, business, results of operations and financial condition could be harmed.

              Certain of our employees and dealers can access and update certain of our home automation products and services through the Internet. If security breaches in connection with the delivery of our services via the Internet allow unauthorized third parties to obtain control of our consumers' appliances containing our products, our reputation, business, results of operations and financial condition could be

34


Table of Contents

harmed. Furthermore, although we do not recommend or approve of port forwarding for remote access to our solutions, certain of our dealers have in the past and may in the future enable port forwarding, which could create security vulnerabilities in a consumer's home network. If security breaches in connection with the delivery of our solutions occur, our reputation, business, results of operations and financial condition could be harmed.

Risks Related to Owning Our Common Stock and this Offering

Our share price may be volatile and you may be unable to sell your shares at or above the offering price.

              The initial public offering price for our shares was determined by negotiations between us and representatives of the underwriters and may not be indicative of prices that will prevail in the trading market. The market price of our common stock could be subject to wide fluctuations in response to many risk factors listed in this section, and others beyond our control, including:

              Furthermore, the stock markets have experienced extreme price and volume fluctuations that have affected and continue to affect the market prices of equity securities of many companies. These fluctuations often have been unrelated or disproportionate to the operating performance of those companies. These broad market and industry fluctuations, as well as general economic, political and market conditions such as recessions, interest rate changes or international currency fluctuations, may harm the market price of our common stock. If the market price of our common stock after this offering does not exceed the initial public offering price, you may not realize any return on your investment in us and may lose some or all of your investment. In the past, companies that have experienced volatility in the market price of their stock have been subject to securities class action litigation. We may be the target of this type of litigation in the future. Securities litigation against us

35


Table of Contents

could result in substantial costs and divert our management's attention from other business concerns, which could harm our business.

No public market for our common stock currently exists and an active trading market may not develop or be sustained following this offering.

              Prior to this offering, there has been no public market for our common stock. An active trading market may not develop following the completion of this offering or, if developed, may not be sustained. The lack of an active market may impair your ability to sell your shares at the time you wish to sell them, or at a price that you consider reasonable. The lack of an active market may also reduce the fair market value of your shares. An inactive market may also impair our ability to raise capital to continue to fund operations by selling shares and may impair our ability to acquire other companies or technologies by using our shares as consideration.

If securities or industry analysts do not publish research or reports about our business, or publish negative reports about our business, our share price and trading volume could decline.

              The trading market for our common stock will depend on the research and reports that securities or industry analysts publish about us or our business. We do not have any control over these analysts. If one or more of the analysts who cover us downgrade our shares or change their opinion of our shares, our share price would likely decline. If one or more of these analysts cease coverage of our company or fail to regularly publish research or reports on us, we could lose visibility in the financial markets, which could cause our stock price or trading volume to decline.

Future sales of our common stock in the public market could cause our share price to fall.

              Sales of a substantial number of shares of our common stock in the public market after this offering, or the perception that these sales might occur, could depress the market price of our common stock and could impair our ability to raise capital through the sale of additional equity securities. Based on the number of shares of common stock outstanding as of March 31, 2013, upon the closing of this offering, we will have                        shares of common stock outstanding, assuming no exercise of outstanding options or the underwriters' option to purchase additional shares.

              All of the common stock sold in this offering will be freely tradable without restrictions or further registration under the Securities Act except for any shares held by our affiliates as defined in Rule 144 under the Securities Act.                    shares of common stock outstanding after this offering, or        % based on shares outstanding as of March 31, 2013, will be restricted as a result of securities laws, lock-up agreements or other contractual restrictions that restrict transfers for at least 180 days after the date of this prospectus, subject to certain extensions.

              The underwriters may, in their sole discretion, release all or some portion of the shares subject to lock-up agreements with the underwriters prior to expiration of the lock-up period. See "Shares Eligible for Future Sale."

              The holders of 16,130,909 shares of common stock, or 90.6% based on shares outstanding as of March 31, 2013, will be entitled to rights with respect to registration of such shares under the Securities Act pursuant to an investors' rights agreement between such holders and us. See "Description of Capital Stock—Registration Rights." If such holders, by exercising their registration rights, sell a large number of shares, the market price for our common stock could be harmed. If we file a registration statement for the purpose of selling additional shares to raise capital and are required to include shares held by these holders pursuant to the exercise of their registration rights, our ability to raise capital may be impaired. We intend to file a registration statement on Form S-8 under the Securities Act to register shares for issuance under our 2003 Equity Incentive Plan and 2013 Stock Option and Incentive Plan. Our 2013 Stock Option and Incentive Plan provides for automatic increases in the shares reserved

36


Table of Contents

for issuance under the plan which could result in additional dilution to our stockholders. Once we register these shares, they can be freely sold in the public market upon issuance and vesting, subject to a lock-up period of at least 180 days and other restrictions provided under the terms of the applicable plan and/or the option agreements entered into with option holders.

Our management team may invest or spend the proceeds of this offering in ways with which you may not agree, or in ways which may not yield a positive return.

              The net proceeds from this offering may be used for working capital purposes and for other general corporate purposes, including the research and development of new solutions, sales and marketing activities, paying off remaining amounts owed under a litigation settlement agreement, financing acquisition opportunities and other capital expenditures. Although we may use a portion of the net proceeds to acquire complementary products, solutions, technologies or businesses, we have no current understandings, agreements or commitments to do so at this time.

              Our management will have considerable discretion in the application of the net proceeds, and you will not have the opportunity, as part of your investment decision, to assess whether the proceeds are being used appropriately. The net proceeds may be used for corporate purposes that do not improve our results of operations or increase our market value.

Purchasers in this offering will experience immediate and substantial dilution in the book value of their investment.

              The initial public offering price of our common stock is substantially higher than the net tangible book value per share of our outstanding common stock immediately after this offering. Therefore, if you purchase our common stock in this offering, you will incur immediate dilution of $            in net tangible book value per share from the price you paid. In addition, following this offering, purchasers in this offering will have contributed        % of the total consideration paid by our stockholders to purchase shares of common stock, in exchange for acquiring approximately        % of our total outstanding shares as of March 31, 2013 after giving effect to this offering. In addition, if outstanding options to purchase our common stock are exercised, you will experience additional dilution.

Our directors, executive officers and principal stockholders will continue to have substantial control over us after this offering and could delay or prevent a change in corporate control.

              After this offering, our directors, executive officers and holders of more than 5% of our common stock, together with their affiliates, will beneficially own, in the aggregate,        % of our outstanding common stock, assuming no exercise of the underwriters' option to purchase additional shares of our common stock in this offering. As a result, these stockholders, acting together, would have the ability to control the outcome of matters submitted to our stockholders for approval, including the election of directors and any merger, consolidation or sale of all or substantially all of our assets. In addition, these stockholders, acting together, would have the ability to control the management and affairs of our company. Accordingly, this concentration of ownership might harm the market price of our common stock by:

37


Table of Contents

Anti-takeover provisions in our charter documents and under Delaware law could make an acquisition of us, which may be beneficial to our stockholders, more difficult and may prevent attempts by our stockholders to replace or remove our current management and limit the market price of our common stock.

              Provisions in our certificate of incorporation and bylaws, as amended and restated upon the closing of this offering, may have the effect of delaying or preventing a change of control or changes in our management. Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws, which will become effective upon the closing of this offering, include provisions that:

              These provisions, alone or together, could delay or prevent hostile takeovers and changes in control. These provisions may also frustrate or prevent any attempts by our stockholders to replace or remove our current management by making it more difficult for stockholders to replace members of our board of directors, which is responsible for appointing the members of our management.

              As a Delaware corporation, we are also subject to provisions of Delaware law, including Section 203 of the Delaware General Corporation law, which prevents some stockholders holding more than 15% of our outstanding common stock from engaging in certain business combinations without approval of the holders of substantially all of our outstanding common stock.

              Any provision of our certificate of incorporation or bylaws or Delaware law that has the effect of delaying or deterring a change of control could limit the opportunity for our stockholders to receive a premium for their shares of our common stock, and could also affect the price that some investors are willing to pay for our common stock.

We do not intend to pay dividends for the foreseeable future.

              We have never declared or paid any cash dividends on our common stock and do not intend to pay any cash dividends in the foreseeable future. We anticipate that we will retain all of our future earnings for use in the operation of our business and for general corporate purposes. Any determination to pay dividends in the future will be at the discretion of our board of directors. Accordingly, investors must rely on sales of their common stock after price appreciation, which may never occur, as the only way to realize any future gains on their investments.

38


Table of Contents


SPECIAL NOTE REGARDING FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS AND INDUSTRY DATA

              This prospectus contains forward-looking statements that are based on our management's beliefs and assumptions and on information currently available to our management. The forward-looking statements are contained principally in, but not limited to, the "Prospectus Summary," "Risk Factors," "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations," "Business" and "Executive Compensation." Forward-looking statements include all statements that are not historical facts and can be identified by terms such as "anticipates," "believes," "could," "seeks," "estimates," "expects," "intends," "may," "plans," "potential," "predicts, "projects," "should," "will," "would" or similar expressions and the negatives of those terms. Forward-looking statements include, but are not limited to, statements about:

              Forward-looking statements involve known and unknown risks, uncertainties and other factors that may cause our actual results, performance or achievements to be materially different from any future results, performance or achievements expressed or implied by the forward-looking statements. We discuss these risks in greater detail in "Risk Factors" and elsewhere in this prospectus. Given these uncertainties, you should not place undue reliance on these forward-looking statements. Also, forward-looking statements represent our management's beliefs and assumptions only as of the date of this prospectus. You should read this prospectus and the documents that we have filed as exhibits to the registration statement, of which this prospectus is a part, completely and with the understanding that our actual future results may be materially different from what we expect.

              Except as required by law, we assume no obligation to update these forward-looking statements publicly, or to update the reasons actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in these forward-looking statements, even if new information becomes available in the future.

              This prospectus also contains estimates and other information concerning our industry, including market size and growth rates, which are based on industry publications, surveys and forecasts, including those generated by ABI Research and IDC. These industry publications, surveys and forecasts generally indicate that their information has been obtained from sources believed to be reliable. The industry in which we operate is subject to a high degree of uncertainty and risk due to variety of factors, including those described in "Risk Factors."

39


Table of Contents


USE OF PROCEEDS

              We estimate that the net proceeds from our sale of                        shares of common stock in this offering at an assumed initial public offering price of $            per share, the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us, will be approximately $             million, or $             million if the underwriters' option to purchase additional shares is exercised in full. A $1.00 increase (decrease) in the assumed initial public offering price would increase (decrease) the net proceeds to us from this offering by $             million, assuming the number of shares offered by us, as set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, remains the same and after deducting the estimated underwriting discounts and commissions.

              We intend to use the net proceeds of this offering primarily for general corporate purposes, including working capital and capital expenditures. We intend to use $             million of the net proceeds from this offering to pay off the remaining amounts owed under a litigation settlement agreement.

              In addition, if appropriate opportunities arise to acquire or invest in complementary technologies, assets or businesses, we may use a portion of the net proceeds for such acquisition or investment. However, we are not currently discussing any such potential acquisition or investment with any third party. The amount and timing of these expenditures will vary depending on a number of factors, including competitive and technological developments and the rate of growth, if any, of our business.

              Pending their use, we plan to invest our net proceeds from this offering in short-term, interest-bearing obligations, investment-grade instruments, certificates of deposit or direct or guaranteed obligations of the U.S. government.


DIVIDEND POLICY

              We have never declared or paid cash dividends on our common stock. We currently intend to retain all available funds and any future earnings for use in the operation of our business and do not anticipate paying any dividends on our common stock in the foreseeable future. Any future determination to declare dividends will be made at the discretion of our board of directors and will depend on our financial condition, results of operations, capital requirements, general business conditions and other factors that our board of directors may deem relevant. In addition, our credit facility prohibits us from declaring or paying cash dividends on our capital stock.

40


Table of Contents


CAPITALIZATION

              The following table sets forth our capitalization as of March 31, 2013:

              The information below is illustrative only and our capitalization following the completion of this offering will be adjusted based on the actual initial public offering price and other terms of this offering determined at pricing. You should read this table together with "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations" and our financial statements and the related notes appearing elsewhere in this prospectus.

 
  As of March 31, 2013  
 
  Actual   Pro Forma   Pro Forma
As Adjusted
 
 
  (In thousands)
 

Total debt and settlement obligations

  $ 7,233   $ 7,233        

Warrant liability

    576            

Redeemable Convertible Preferred stock, $0.0001 par value, 83,163,408 shares authorized, 15,293,960 shares issued and outstanding, actual; 83,163,408 shares authorized, no shares issued and outstanding, pro forma; no shares authorized, issued, and outstanding, pro forma as adjusted

    116,313            

Stockholders' equity (deficit)

                   

Preferred stock, $0.0001 par value, no shares authorized, issued, and outstanding, actual and pro forma; 25,000,000 shares authorized, no shares issued and outstanding, pro forma as adjusted

               

Common stock, $0.0001 par value, 127,836,592 shares authorized, 2,507,075 shares issued and outstanding, actual; 500,000,000 shares authorized, 17,974,335 shares issued and outstanding, pro forma; 500,000,000 shares authorized,                        shares issued and outstanding, pro forma as adjusted

        2        

Additional paid-in capital

    13,863     130,750        

Accumulated deficit

    (107,058 )   (107,058 )      

Accumulated other comprehensive loss

    (9 )   (9 )      
               

Total stockholders' equity (deficit)

    (93,204 )   23,685        
               

Total capitalization

  $ 30,918   $ 30,918   $    
               

41


Table of Contents

              The number of shares of our common stock to be outstanding after the completion of this offering is based on:

              The number of shares of our common stock to be outstanding after the completion of this offering excludes:

              A $1.00 increase (decrease) in the assumed initial public offering price of $            per share, the midpoint of the range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, would increase (decrease) cash and cash equivalents and total stockholders' equity (deficit) and total capitalization by $         million, assuming that the number of shares offered by us, as set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, remains the same, and after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions payable by us. Each increase or decrease of 1.0 million shares in the number of shares offered by us, assuming that the assumed initial public offering price remains the same, would increase or decrease cash and cash equivalents and total stockholders' equity (deficit) and total capitalization by $         million.

42


Table of Contents


DILUTION

              If you invest in our common stock, your interest will be diluted to the extent of the difference between the amount per share paid by purchasers of shares of common stock in this initial public offering and the pro forma as adjusted net tangible book value per share of common stock immediately after this offering.

              At March 31, 2013, our net tangible book value was approximately $         million, or $         per share of common stock. Net tangible book value per share represents the amount of our total tangible assets less our total liabilities, divided by the shares of common stock outstanding at March 31, 2013. After giving effect to our sale of                         shares of common stock in this offering at an assumed initial public offering price of $            per share, the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, and after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us, our pro forma as adjusted net tangible book value at March 31, 2013 would have been $            , or $            per share of common stock. This represents an immediate increase in pro forma as adjusted net tangible book value of $            per share to existing stockholders and an immediate dilution of $            per share to new investors.

              The following table illustrates this dilution:

Assumed initial public offering price per share

      $

Net tangible book value per share as of March 31, 2013

  $    

Increase per share attributable to this offering

       
         

Pro forma as adjusted net tangible book value per share after giving effect to this offering

       
         

Net tangible book value dilution per share to investors in this offering

      $
         

              If all our outstanding options had been exercised, the pro forma net tangible book value as of March 31, 2013 would have been $             million, or $             per share, and the pro forma net tangible book value after this offering would have been $             million, or $            per share, causing dilution to new investors of $            per share.

              If the underwriters fully exercise their option to purchase additional shares, the pro forma as adjusted net tangible book value per share after giving effect to this offering would be $            per share, and the dilution in pro forma net tangible book value per share to investors in this offering would be $            per share.

              The following table summarizes, on a pro forma as adjusted basis as of March 31, 2013, the total number of shares of common stock purchased from us, the total consideration paid to us and the average price per share paid to us by existing stockholders and by new investors purchasing shares in this offering at the assumed initial public offering price of $            per share, the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, before deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us:

 
  Shares Purchased   Total Consideration    
 
 
  Average Price
Per Share
 
 
  Number   Percent   Amount   Percent  

Existing stockholders

            % $         % $    

New investors

                               
                         

Total

          100.0 % $       100.0 % $    
                       

              The foregoing calculations are based on:

43


Table of Contents

              The foregoing calculations exclude:

              A $1.00 increase (decrease) in the assumed initial public offering price of $            per share, the midpoint of the range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, would increase (decrease) our pro forma as adjusted net tangible book value by $             million, or $            per share, and the pro forma dilution per share to investors in this offering by the $            per share, assuming that the number of shares offered by us, as set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, remains the same, and after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions payable by us. Each increase or decrease of 1.0 million shares in the number of shares offered by us would increase or decrease our pro forma as adjusted net tangible book value by approximately $             million, or $            per share, and the pro forma dilution to investors in this offering would be $            per share, assuming that the assumed initial public offering price remains the same, and after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions payable by us. The pro forma information discussed above is illustrative only and will change based on the actual initial public offering price and other terms of this offering determined at pricing.

44


Table of Contents


SELECTED CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL DATA

              We have derived the selected consolidated statements of operations data for the fiscal years ended December 31, 2010, 2011 and 2012 and the selected consolidated balance sheet data as of December 31, 2011 and 2012 from our audited consolidated financial statements and related notes included elsewhere in this prospectus. We have derived the selected consolidated statements of operations data for the three months ended March 31, 2012 and March 31, 2013 and the selected consolidated balance sheet data as of March 31, 2013 from our unaudited interim consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus. We have derived the selected consolidated statements of operations data for the fiscal years ended December 31, 2008 and 2009 from our audited consolidated financial statements not included in this prospectus. We have derived the selected consolidated balance sheet data as of March 31, 2012 from our unaudited consolidated financial statements not included in this prospectus. Our unaudited interim consolidated financial statements have been prepared on the same basis as our annual consolidated financial statements and include all adjustments, consisting of only normal recurring adjustments, necessary for the fair presentation of those statements. The following selected consolidated financial data should be read in conjunction with "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations" and our consolidated financial statements and related notes included elsewhere in this prospectus. Our historical results are not necessarily indicative of the results to be expected for any future period and the results for any interim period are not necessarily indicative of the results to be expected in the full year.

 
  Years Ended December 31,   Three Months Ended
March 31,
 
 
  2008   2009   2010   2011   2012   2012   2013  
 
  (In thousands, except per share data)
   
   
 

Consolidated Statements of Operations Data:

                                           

Revenue

 
$

57,098
 
$

67,742
 
$

74,925
 
$

93,376
 
$

109,512
 
$

22,628
 
$

26,571
 

Cost of revenue

    35,330     41,674     43,357     50,534     57,225     12,466     13,550  

Cost of revenue—inventory purchase commitment

                    1,840          
                               

Gross margin

    21,768     26,068     31,568     42,842     50,447     10,162     13,021  

Operating expenses:

                                           

Research and development

    12,013     10,862     15,922     19,211     20,310     4,813     6,066  

Sales and marketing

    15,079     16,483     22,491     17,546     20,182     5,038     5,605  

General and administrative

    8,225     6,690     8,876     9,805     10,150     2,532     2,828  

Litigation settlement

    3,937                 2,869          
                               

Total operating expenses

    39,254     34,035     47,289     46,562     53,511     12,383     14,499  
                               

Loss from operations

    (17,486 )   (7,967 )   (15,721 )   (3,720 )   (3,064 )   (2,221 )   (1,478 )

Interest and other expense, net

    (47 )   (401 )   (544 )   (165 )   (518 )   (462 )   (49 )
                               

Loss before income taxes

    (17,533 )   (8,368 )   (16,265 )   (3,885 )   (3,582 )   (2,683 )   (1,527 )

Income tax (expense) benefit

                    (141 )       56  
                               

Net loss

  $ (17,533 ) $ (8,368 ) $ (16,265 ) $ (3,885 ) $ (3,723 ) $ (2,683 ) $ (1,471 )
                               

Net loss per common share,
basic and diluted

  $ (11.85 ) $ (5.42 ) $ (9.93 ) $ (2.02 ) $ (1.58 ) $ (1.19 ) $ (0.59 )
                               

Other Non-GAAP Financial Data:

                                           

Adjusted gross margin

 
$

21,811
 
$

26,094
 
$

31,596
 
$

42,891
 
$

52,365
 
$

10,179
 
$

13,037
 

Adjusted gross margin percentage

    38.2%     38.5%     42.2%     45.9%     47.8%     45.0%     49.1%  

Adjusted operating income (loss)

  $ (12,541 ) $ (6,928 ) $ (14,252 ) $ (1,707 ) $ 4,514   $ (1,490 ) $ (640 )

45


Table of Contents

              Stock-based compensation expense included in the consolidated statements of operations data above was as follows:

 
  Years Ended December 31,   Three Months Ended
March 31,
 
 
  2008   2009   2010   2011   2012   2012   2013  
 
  (In thousands)
   
   
 

Cost of revenue

  $ 43   $ 26   $ 28   $ 49   $ 78   $ 17   $ 16  

Research and development

    167     229     249     492     704     130     236  

Sales and marketing

    245     339     546     523     580     144     184  

General and administrative

    553     445     646     949     1,507     440     402  
                               

Total stock-based compensation expense

  $ 1,008   $ 1,039   $ 1,469   $ 2,013   $ 2,869   $ 731   $ 838  
                               

Adjusted Gross Margin

              A reconciliation of Adjusted gross margin to gross margin, the most directly comparable GAAP financial measure, is presented below:

 
  Years Ended December 31,   Three Months Ended
March 31,
 
 
  2008   2009   2010   2011   2012   2012   2013  
 
  (Dollars in thousands)
   
   
 

Gross margin

  $ 21,768   $ 26,068   $ 31,568   $ 42,842   $ 50,447   $ 10,162   $ 13,021  

Stock-based compensation expense included in cost of revenue

    43     26     28     49     78     17     16  

Cost of revenue—inventory purchase commitment

                    1,840          
                               

Adjusted gross margin

  $ 21,811   $ 26,094   $ 31,596   $ 42,891   $ 52,365   $ 10,179   $ 13,037  
                               

Adjusted gross margin percentage

    38.2%     38.5%     42.2%     45.9%     47.8%     45.0%     49.1%  

              To provide investors with additional information regarding our financial results, we have disclosed in the table above and within this prospectus Adjusted gross margin, a non-GAAP financial measure. We have included Adjusted gross margin in this prospectus because Adjusted gross margin is a key measure used by our management and board of directors to understand and evaluate our operating performance and trends, to prepare and approve our annual budget and to develop short- and long-term operational plans.

              Adjusted gross margin is defined as gross margin less stock-based compensation expense and loss on inventory purchase commitment. Management believes that the use of Adjusted gross margin provides consistency and comparability with our past and future performance, facilitates period-to-period comparisons and also facilitates comparisons with other companies.

              Management believes that it is useful to exclude stock-based compensation expense from gross margin because the amount of such expense in any specific period may not directly correlate to the underlying performance of our business operations. We believe it is useful to exclude loss on inventory purchase commitment because it is an expense that arose from our commitment to purchase energy-related products from our contract manufacturing partner that we will not use due to our decision to discontinue our energy product line for utility customers. We have not incurred that type of expense in past periods and we believe that past and future periods are more comparable if we exclude that expense from gross margin.

46


Table of Contents

              Our use of Adjusted gross margin has limitations as an analytical tool and you should not consider it in isolation or a substitute for our analysis of our results as reported under GAAP. Some of these limitations are:

              Because of these limitations, you should consider Adjusted gross margin alongside other financial performance measures.

Adjusted Operating Income

              A reconciliation of Adjusted operating income (loss) to loss from operations, the most directly comparable GAAP financial measure, is presented below:

 
  Years Ended December 31,   Three Months Ended
March 31,
 
 
  2008   2009   2010   2011   2012   2012   2013  
 
  (In thousands)
   
   
 

Loss from operations

  $ (17,486 ) $ (7,967 ) $ (15,721 ) $ (3,720 ) $ (3,064 ) $ (2,221 ) $ (1,478 )

Stock-based compensation expense

    1,008     1,039     1,469     2,013     2,869     731     838  

Cost of revenue—inventory purchase commitment

                    1,840          

Litigation settlement

    3,937                 2,869          
                               

Adjusted operating income (loss)

  $ (12,541 ) $ (6,928 ) $ (14,252 ) $ (1,707 ) $ 4,514   $ (1,490 ) $ (640 )
                               

              To provide investors with additional information regarding our financial results, we have disclosed in the table above and within this prospectus Adjusted operating income, a non-GAAP financial measure. We have included Adjusted operating income in this prospectus because Adjusted operating income is a key measure used by our management and board of directors to understand and evaluate our operating performance and trends. We use it to prepare and approve our annual budget and to develop short- and long-term operational plans.

              Adjusted operating income is defined as operating income less stock-based compensation expense, less loss on inventory purchase commitment and litigation settlement expense. Management believes that the use of Adjusted operating income provides consistency and comparability with our past and future performance, facilitates period-to-period comparisons and also facilitates comparisons with other companies.

              Management believes that it is useful to exclude stock-based compensation expense from operating income because the amount of such expense in any specific period may not directly correlate to the underlying performance of our business operations. We believe it is useful to exclude loss on inventory purchase commitment because it is an expense that arose from our commitment to purchase energy-related products from our contract manufacturing partner that we will not use due to our decision to discontinue our energy product line for utility customers. We have not incurred that type of expense in past periods and we believe that past and future periods are more comparable if we exclude that expense from operating income. We believe it is useful to exclude litigation settlement expense

47


Table of Contents

from operating income because that expense was related to two separate legal settlements that were resolved in 2012. Those settlements are not indicative of past or future operating performance. We believe that past and future periods are more comparable if we exclude that expense from operating income.

              Our use of Adjusted operating income has limitations as an analytical tool and you should not consider it in isolation or a substitute for our analysis of our results as reported under GAAP. Some of these limitations are:

              Because of these limitations, you should consider Adjusted operating income alongside other financial performance measures.

Consolidated Balance Sheet Data

              The following table sets forth our selected consolidated balance sheet data as of the dates presented:

 
  As of December 31,   As of March 31,  
 
  2011   2012   2012   2013  
 
  (In thousands)
   
   
 

Consolidated Balance Sheet Data:

                         

Cash and cash equivalents

  $ 18,468   $ 18,695   $ 16,561   $ 14,573  

Property and equipment, net

    2,127     2,666     2,262     3,566  

Working capital, excluding deferred revenue

    24,908     23,832     23,156     21,582  

Total assets

    43,534     50,638     42,126     49,455  

Long-term debt, including current portion

    2,320     3,159     2,388     3,394  

Redeemable convertible preferred stock and warrant liability

    116,660     116,914     117,059     116,889  

Total stockholders' deficit

    (92,506 )   (92,603 )   (94,499 )   (93,204 )

48


Table of Contents


MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION
AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

               You should read the following discussion and analysis of our financial condition and results of operations in conjunction with our consolidated financial statements and the notes thereto included elsewhere in this prospectus. The following discussion contains forward-looking statements that reflect our plans, estimates and beliefs. Our actual results could differ materially from those discussed in the forward-looking statements. Factors that could cause or contribute to these differences include those discussed below and elsewhere in this prospectus, particularly in the "Risk Factors" section.

Overview

              Control4 is a leading provider of automation and control solutions for the connected home. We unlock the potential of connected devices, making entertainment systems easier to use, homes more comfortable and energy efficient, and families more secure. We provide our consumers with the ability to integrate music, video, lighting, temperature, security, communications and other functionalities into a unified home automation solution that enhances our consumers' daily lives. More than 75% of our consumers have integrated two or more of these functionalities with our solution. At the center of our solution is our advanced software platform, which we provide through our products that interface with a wide variety of connected devices that are developed by us and by third parties.

              We derive virtually all of our revenue from the sale of products that contain our proprietary software, which functions as the operating system of the home. Currently, we derive a smaller portion of our revenue from licensing our MyHome software, which allows consumers to access their home control system from their smartphone, tablet or laptop. In the future, we plan to bundle MyHome software licenses with our controller appliances. We also generate revenue from the sale of annual subscriptions to our 4Sight service, which allows consumers to receive alerts regarding activities in their home, and also allows dealers to perform remote diagnostic services. Although our subscription-based revenue is currently insignificant, we intend over time to develop additional subscription-based services and increase our subscription-based revenue.

              We outsource the manufacturing of our hardware products to contract manufacturers. The majority of our hardware products are manufactured by Sanmina and LiteOn at their respective facilities in southern China, with additional manufacturing performed by six other contract manufacturers throughout Asia.

              Consumers purchase our products from our worldwide network of certified independent dealers, regional and national retailers and distributors. These dealers design and install a solution to fit the specific needs of each consumer, whether it is a one-room home theatre solution or a whole-home automation solution that includes the integration of music, video, lighting, temperature, security and communications devices. Our products are primarily installed in both new and existing residences. A portion of our revenue is attributable to small commercial installations and multi-dwelling units, including hotels. During the year ended December 31, 2012, we sold our products directly to over 2,800 active direct dealers in the United States, Canada, the United Kingdom and 40 other countries, and partnered with 27 distributors to cover an additional 38 countries where we do not have direct dealer relationships. These distributors sell our solutions through dealers and provide warehousing, training, technical support, billing and service for dealers in each of those countries.

              We were founded in 2003 and began shipping our products and generating revenue in 2005. Our revenue has increased from $23.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2006 to $109.5 million for the year ended December 31, 2012. Our revenue for the three months ended March 31, 2013 was $26.6 million, compared to $22.6 million for the three months ended March 31, 2012. Our revenue growth has resulted primarily from a combination of adding new dealers and distributors to our sales

49


Table of Contents

channel, as well as increasing revenue from existing dealers and distributors by enhancing and expanding our product offerings and solutions.

              We refer to revenue from sales through our dealer and distributor network in the United States and Canada (which we refer to as North America) and outside of North America (which we refer to as International) as our Core revenue. Our Core revenue excludes revenue attributable to products we sell to hotels and other multi-dwelling units, and certain other revenue. Our North America Core revenue represented 74% and 77% of our revenue for the year ended December 31, 2012 and the three months ended March 31, 2013, respectively. Our International Core revenue has been growing at a faster rate than our North America Core revenue. Our International Core revenue for the three months ended March 31, 2013 increased by 20% compared to the three months ended March 31, 2012, primarily due to our addition of new international dealers and distributors.

              To date, nearly all of our revenue growth has been organic. We have completed small acquisitions, but those acquisitions have been technology- and distribution-related and have not contributed materially to our revenue. We intend to identify, acquire and integrate strategic technologies, assets and businesses that we believe will enhance the overall strength of our business.

              We have historically experienced seasonal variations in our revenue as a result of holiday-related factors that are common in our industry. Our revenue is generally highest in the fourth quarter due to consumers' desires to complete their home installations prior to the Thanksgiving and Christmas holidays. We generally see decreased sales in the first quarter due to the number of installations that were completed in the fourth quarter and the resulting decline in dealer activity in the first quarter. We generally expect these seasonal trends to continue in the future, which may cause quarterly fluctuations in our results of operations and certain financial metrics.

Factors and Trends Affecting Our Performance

              A number of industry trends have facilitated our growth over the past several years, including the proliferation of connected devices and the ubiquity and growth of network-enabled homes. From 2006 through 2008, the majority of our sales were for use in new, single-family homes. During the slowdown in the new housing market beginning in 2008, our dealers redirected their focus to existing homes, and today, we estimate that the majority of our installations are in existing homes. We expect that future increases in either new home construction or existing home renovations will have a positive impact on our revenue.

              We believe that the growth of our business and our future success are dependent upon many factors, including the rates at which consumers adopt our products and services, our ability to strengthen and expand our dealer and distributor network, our ability to expand internationally and our ability to meet competitive challenges. While each of these areas presents significant opportunities for us, they also pose important challenges that we must successfully address in order to sustain or expand the growth of our business and improve our results of operations. These challenges include:

50


Table of Contents

Key Operating and Financial Metrics

              We use the following key operating and financial metrics to evaluate and manage our business.

 
  As of or for the Years Ended
December 31,
  As of or for the
Three Months
Ended March 31,
 
 
  2009   2010   2011   2012   2012   2013  

Number of North America Dealers

    1,633     1,944     2,215     2,350     2,240     2,371  

Number of Direct International Dealers

    159     261     375     501     400     514  

Number of Controller Appliances Sold

    36,796     49,703     62,760     69,209     15,222     17,758  

Core Revenue Growth

    13%     26%     24%     20%     17%     19%  

International Core Revenue as a Percentage of Total Revenue

    9%     14%     18%     22%     20%     20%  

Number of North America and Direct International Dealers

              Because our dealers promote, sell, install and support our products, a broader dealer network allows us to reach more potential consumers across more geographic regions. We expect our dealer network to continue to grow, both in North America and internationally. While we have historically focused on dealers affiliated with the Custom Electronics Design and Installation Association, or CEDIA, we believe there is an opportunity to establish relationships with dealers outside of CEDIA, including electrical contractors, heating and cooling specialists, and security system installers. The number of dealers in the above table reflects active direct dealers that have placed an order with us in the trailing 12-month period.

              Our international dealer network is growing at a faster rate than our North America dealer network, and we expect this trend to continue as we increase our presence in new and existing international markets. In addition, in some international markets, we plan to establish direct relationships with selected dealers that we previously served through distributors, which we expect will further increase our number of direct international dealers.

Number of Controller Appliances Sold

              Our controller appliances contain our proprietary software and provide consumers with the essential software technology to enable home control, automation and personalization. Historically, on average, our consumers have purchased 2.26 controller appliances per installation. The number of controller appliances we sell in a given period provides us with an indication of consumer adoption of our technology. Our sales of controller appliances also create significant opportunity to sell our other products and services. Historically, for every one dollar of controller revenue we generate, we have recognized approximately two dollars of revenue from the sale of our other products and services,

51


Table of Contents

although this varies from period to period. Once a consumer has deployed our controller appliances, we believe that the consumer is more likely to remain committed to our technology platform and purchase more of our products, applications and services in the future.

Core Revenue Growth

              The majority of our revenue comes from sales of our products through our distribution channels comprised of dealers in the United States and Canada and dealers and distributors located throughout the rest of the world. We refer to revenue attributable to sales through dealers located in the United States and Canada as North America Core revenue and revenue attributable to sales through dealers and distributors located throughout the rest of the world as International Core revenue. Core revenue does not include revenue from sales to hotels or multi-dwelling units, sales to utility customers and certification fees paid to us. Our revenue from sales to hotels, multi-dwelling units and other sources is generally project-based and has been significant in some periods and insignificant in other periods. In the future, we expect revenue from these sources to continue to be attributable to large projects and will continue to be significant in some periods and insignificant in other periods. We, therefore, believe that our core revenue growth is a good measure of our market penetration and the growth of our business.

International Revenue as a Percentage of Total Revenue

              We believe that the international market represents a large and underpenetrated opportunity for us. In recent years, we have established offices in international regions, we have formed relationships with international dealers and distributors and we have expanded foreign language support for our solutions. We track International revenue as a percentage of total revenue as a key measure of our success expanding our business internationally.

Basis of Presentation and Key Components of Results of Operations

Revenue

              We derive revenue primarily from the sale of products that contain our proprietary software. We generally recognize revenue upon the shipment of our products. We also license software that allows our customers to manage and control their homes from their smartphones, tablets or laptops. We recognize software license revenue at the time the software license is provided to the customer. In addition, we sell a subscription service, 4Sight, that allows consumers to control and monitor their homes remotely from their smartphones, tablets or laptops, and allows our dealers to perform remote diagnostic services. We defer subscription revenue at the time of payment and recognize it ratably over the term the service is provided. We record estimated reductions to revenue for dealer and distributor incentives at the time of the initial sale. We also record estimated reductions to revenue for estimated returns from our dealers and distributors at the time of the initial sale.

52


Table of Contents

              The following is a breakdown of our revenue between North America and International and a further breakdown between our Core revenue and other revenue:

 
  Years Ended December 31,   Three Months Ended
March 31,
 
 
  2009   2010   2011   2012   2012   2013  
 
  (In thousands)
 

North America Core Revenue

  $ 50,134   $ 60,245   $ 71,472   $ 81,130   $ 17,257   $ 20,470  

Other North America Revenue

    11,116     3,120     2,633     1,280     516     576  
                           

Total North America Revenue

    61,250     63,365     74,105     82,410     17,773     21,046  
                           

International Core Revenue

   
6,106
   
10,699
   
16,797
   
24,471
   
4,507
   
5,386
 

Other International Revenue

    386     861     2,474     2,631     348     139  
                           

Total International Revenue

    6,492     11,560     19,271     27,102     4,855     5,525  
                           

Total Revenue

 
$

67,742
 
$

74,925
 
$

93,376
 
$

109,512
 
$

22,628
 
$

26,571
 
                           

North America Core Revenue as a % of Total Revenue

   
74%
   
80%
   
77%
   
74%
   
76%
   
77%
 

International Core Revenue as a % of Total Revenue

    9%     14%     18%     22%     20%     20%  

Cost of Revenue

              Cost of revenue is comprised primarily of the price we pay our contract manufacturers for the components and products that they produce on our behalf. We closely monitor our product costs and continually work to reduce the cost of our products through negotiation with our contract manufacturers and component vendors, and engineering design changes. Cost of revenue also includes all of the overhead expenses associated with procuring, warehousing and shipping our products (both inbound and outbound). Cost of revenue also includes estimated and actual expenses associated with excess and obsolete inventory, as well as warranty expenses and royalty fees paid to third-party licensors.

Gross Margin

              As a percentage of revenue, our gross margin has been and will continue to be affected by a variety of factors. Our gross margin is relatively consistent across our products. Our gross margin is higher on software licensing and subscription revenue than it is on product sales. Our gross margin is also higher on our sales made directly through dealers than it is on our sales made through distributors. Gross margin may also be negatively affected by price competition in our target markets. Our gross margin on third-party products we sell through our online distribution platform is higher than our gross margin on our other product sales because we only recognize our net profit on these sales as revenue.

              In the near term, we generally expect our gross margin to increase modestly as a result of our continued efforts to work with our contract manufacturers and component vendors to reduce the cost of components we purchase, engineer product design improvements, manage our supply chain and realize economies of scale as we grow our business. We also expect increased third-party product sales through our online distribution platform to have a positive impact on our gross margin going forward. From time to time, however, we may experience fluctuations in our gross margin as a result of the factors discussed in the preceding paragraph.

53


Table of Contents

Operating Expenses

Research and Development

              Research and development expenses consist primarily of compensation for our engineers and product managers. Research and development expenses also include prototyping expenses incurred in the development of our products, including products used for testing. We also include fees paid to agencies to obtain regulatory certifications. We expect our research and development expenses to increase in absolute dollars for the foreseeable future as we continue to invest in the development of new solutions; however, we expect those expenses to fluctuate as a percentage of our revenue in future periods based on fluctuations in our revenue and the timing of those expenses.

Sales and Marketing

              Sales and marketing expenses consist primarily of compensation and related travel expenses for our sales and marketing personnel. Sales and marketing expenses also include expenses associated with trade shows, marketing events, advertising and other marketing-related programs. We expect our sales and marketing expenses to increase in absolute dollars for the foreseeable future as we add sales personnel, particularly in our international channel, and continue to invest in advertising and promotions to increase awareness of our products. However, we also expect our sales and marketing expenses to fluctuate as a percentage of our revenue in future periods based on fluctuations in our revenue and the timing of those expenses.

General and Administrative

              General and administrative expenses consist primarily of compensation for our employees in our executive administration, finance, information systems and legal departments. Also included in general and administrative expenses are outside legal fees, audit fees, facilities expenses and insurance costs. We expect our general and administrative expenses to increase in absolute dollars primarily as a result of the increased cost associated with being a public company. However, we also expect our general and administrative expenses to fluctuate as a percentage of our revenue in future periods based on fluctuations in our revenue and the timing of those expenses.

54


Table of Contents

Results of Operations

              The following tables set forth our results of operations for the periods presented in absolute dollars and as a percentage of our revenue for those periods.

 
  Years Ended December 31,   Three Months Ended
March 31,
 
 
  2010   2011   2012   2012   2013  
 
  (In thousands)
 

Revenue

  $ 74,925   $ 93,376   $ 109,512   $ 22,628   $ 26,571  

Cost of revenue

    43,357     50,534     57,225     12,466     13,550  

Cost of revenue—inventory purchase commitment

            1,840          
                       

Gross margin

    31,568     42,842     50,447     10,162     13,021  

Operating expenses:

                               

Research and development

    15,922     19,211     20,310     4,813     6,066  

Sales and marketing

    22,491     17,546     20,182     5,038     5,605  

General and administrative

    8,876     9,805     10,150     2,532     2,828  

Litigation settlement

            2,869          
                       

Total operating expenses

    47,289     46,562     53,511     12,383     14,499  
                       

Loss from operations

    (15,721 )   (3,720 )   (3,064 )   (2,221 )   (1,478 )

Other income (expense):

                               

Interest expense, net

    (404 )   (392 )   (264 )   (62 )   (75 )

Other income (expense)

    (140 )   227     (254 )   (400 )   26  
                       

Total other expense

    (544 )   (165 )   (518 )   (462 )   (49 )
                       

Loss before income taxes

    (16,265 )   (3,885 )   (3,582 )   (2,683 )   (1,527 )

Income tax (expense) benefit

            (141 )       56  
                       

Net loss

  $ (16,265 ) $ (3,885 ) $ (3,723 ) $ (2,683 ) $ (1,471 )
                       

Includes stock-based compensation expense as follows:

 
  Years Ended December 31,   Three Months
Ended March 31,
 
 
  2010   2011   2012   2012   2013  
 
  (In thousands)
 

Cost of revenue

  $ 28   $ 49   $ 78   $ 17   $ 16  

Research and development

    249     492     704     130     236  

Sales and marketing

    546     523     580     144     184  

General and administrative

    646     949     1,507     440     402  
                       

Total stock-based compensation expense

  $ 1,469   $ 2,013   $ 2,869   $ 731   $ 838  
                       

55


Table of Contents


 
  Years Ended
December 31,
  Three Months
Ended March 31,
 
 
  2010   2011   2012   2012   2013  
 
  (As a percentage of revenue)
 

Revenue

    100 %   100 %   100 %   100 %   100 %

Cost of revenue

    58     54     52     55     51  

Cost of revenue—inventory purchase commitment

    0     0     2          
                       

Gross margin

    42     46     46     45     49  

Operating expenses:

                               

Research and development

    21     21     19     21     23  

Sales and marketing

    30     19     18     22     21  

General and administrative

    12     11     9     11     11  

Litigation settlement expense

    0     0     3          
                       

Total operating expenses

    63     50     49     55     55  
                       

Loss from operations

    (21 )   (4 )   (3 )   (10 )   (6 )

Other income (expense):

                               

Interest expense, net

    (1 )   0     0     0     0  

Other income (expense)

    0     0     0     (2 )   0  
                       

Total other expense

    (1 )   0     (0 )   (2 )   0  
                       

Loss before income taxes

    (22 )   (4 )   (3 )   (12 )   (6 )

Income tax (expense) benefit

    0     0     0     0     0  
                       

Net loss

    (22 )%   (4 )%   (3 )%   (12 )%   (6 )%
                       

Comparison of the Three Months Ended March 31, 2012 and 2013:

Revenue

 
  Three Months
Ended March 31,
  Change  
 
  2012   2013   $   %  
 
  (Dollars in thousands)
 

Revenue

  $ 22,628   $ 26,571   $ 3,943     17%  

              Revenue increased by $3.9 million, or 17%, in the three months ended March 31, 2013 compared to the three months ended March 31, 2012. North America core revenue increased by $3.2 million, or 19%, from $17.3 million in the three months ended March 31, 2012 to $20.5 million in the three months ended March 31, 2013, while International core revenue increased by $900,000, or 20%, from $4.5 million in the three months ended March 31, 2012 to $5.4 million in the three months ended March 31, 2013. The increase in North America core revenue was due to a combination of the net increase in the number of active direct dealers selling our products and services and an increase in sales from existing direct dealers, both resulting in an increased number of system sales. The increase in International core revenue was primarily due to an increase in the number of dealers and distributors selling our products and services and the resulting increase in the number of system sales. Our International core revenue increased at a slower rate than it increased for the full year 2012 compared to 2011 primarily due to lower sales in China and certain countries in Latin America. Other revenue declined by $200,000 from $900,000 for the three months ended March 31, 2012 to $700,000 for the three months ended March 31, 2013. The decline in other revenue is due primarily to sales to energy-related customers in 2012 that did not recur in 2013.

56


Table of Contents

Gross Margin

 
  Three Months
Ended March 31,
  Change  
 
  2012   2013   $   %  
 
  (Dollars in thousands)
 

Gross margin

  $ 10,162   $ 13,021   $ 2,859     28%  

Percentage of revenue

    45%     49%              

              As a percentage of revenue, our gross margin increased from 44.9% in the three months ended March 31, 2012 to 49.0% in the three months ended March 31, 2013. The increase in gross margin as a percentage of revenue was due to a combination of higher sales of third-party products sold through our online distribution platform, a decrease in fixed overhead as a percentage of revenue and component cost reductions. The higher sales of third-party products sold through our online distribution platform and the decrease in fixed overhead as a percentage of revenue each accounted for approximately 1.5 basis points of the increase in gross margin as a percentage of revenue and component cost reductions accounted for approximately 1.0 basis point of the increase in gross margin as a percentage of revenue. We believe that sales of third-party products sold through our online distribution platform will continue to have a positive impact on our gross margin as a percentage of revenue; however, we expect the impact on future periods to be less significant. We only sold third-party products through our online distribution platform for a portion of the three months ended March 31, 2012 as we began to sell these third-party products through our online distribution platform at the end of this period. We generated less than $50,000 in revenue from such sales in the three months ended March 31, 2012. In the three months ended March 31, 2013, we sold third-party products through our online distribution platform for the entire period and generated less than $500,000 in revenue from such sales. The timing of the commencement of the sales of third-party products through our online distribution platform resulted in a more significant impact of these sales on gross margin as a percentage of revenue when comparing the results from the three months ended March 31, 2013 to those from the three months ended March 31, 2012. We expect component cost reductions to continue to have a positive impact on our gross margin as a percentage of revenue in future periods as those reductions are the result of negotiated price decreases from our manufacturing partners that were not short-term in nature.

Research and Development Expenses

 
  Three Months
Ended March 31,
  Change  
 
  2012   2013   $   %  
 
  (Dollars in thousands)
 

Research and development expenses

  $ 4,813   $ 6,066   $ 1,253     26%  

Percentage of revenue

    21%     23%              

              Research and development expenses increased by $1.3 million, or 26%, in the three months ended March 31, 2013 compared to the three months ended March 31, 2012. Research and development expenses increased as a percentage of revenue from 21% in the three months ended March 31, 2012 to 23% in the three months ended March 31, 2013. The increase in research and development expenses was due primarily to increased cash and stock compensation expense as a result of adding product development and product management personnel. Expenses associated with prototyping and test units associated with products announced or to be announced in 2013 also increased in the first quarter of 2013 compared to the first quarter of 2012.

57


Table of Contents

Sales and Marketing Expenses

 
  Three Months
Ended March 31,
  Change  
 
  2012   2013   $   %  
 
  (Dollars in thousands)
 

Sales and marketing expenses

  $ 5,038   $ 5,605   $ 567     11%  

Percentage of revenue

    22%     21%              

              Sales and marketing expenses increased by $567,000, or 11%, in the three months ended March 31, 2013 compared to the three months ended March 31, 2012. Sales and marketing expenses decreased as a percentage of revenue from 22% in the three months ended March 31, 2012 to 21% in in the three months ended March 31, 2013. The increase in sales and marketing expenses was due to increased compensation expense as a result of adding sales and marketing personnel, increased trade show-related expenses and increased credit card merchant fess associated with the increase in revenue.

General and Administrative Expenses

 
  Three Months
Ended March 31,
  Change  
 
  2012   2013   $   %  
 
  (Dollars in thousands)
 

General and administrative expenses

  $ 2,532   $ 2,828   $ 296     12%  

Percentage of revenue

    11%     11%              

              General and administrative expenses increased by $296,000, or 12%, in the three months ended March 31, 2013 compared to the three months ended March 31, 2012. General and administrative expenses were 11% of revenue in the three months ended March 31, 2012 and 2013. The increase in general and administrative expenses was due primarily to increased consulting, accounting and legal fees. Compensation expense was also higher in the three months ended March 31, 2013 compared to the three months ended March 31, 2012 due to the addition of general and administrative personnel.

Other Income (Expense)

 
  Three Months
Ended March 31,
  Change
 
  2012   2013   $   %
 
  (Dollars in thousands)

Other income (expense)

  $ (462 ) $ (49 ) $ 413     (89)%

              Other expense increased by $413,000 for the three months ended March 31, 2013 compared to the three months ended March 31, 2012. The increase is due primarily to the change in the fair value of the warrant to purchase Series G-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock.

Comparison of the Years Ended December 31, 2010, 2011 and 2012

Revenue

 
  Years Ended December 31,    
   
 
 
  2011 over
2010
  2012 over
2011
 
 
  2010   2011   2012  
 
  (Dollars in thousands)
 

Revenue

  $ 74,925   $ 93,376   $ 109,512     25%     17%  

58


Table of Contents

2012 Compared to 2011

              Revenue increased by 17% in 2012 compared to 2011. North America core revenue increased by $9.7 million, or 14%, from $71.5 million in 2011 to $81.1 million in 2012, while International core revenue increased by $7.7 million, or 46%, from $16.8 million in 2011 to $24.5 million in 2012. The increase in North America core revenue was primarily due to the net increase in the number of active direct dealers and the resulting increase in the number of system sales. Our International core revenue increased at a faster rate than our North America core revenue primarily due to the growth rate being measured from a smaller base, increased dealer penetration into regions where we had previously done business, and our expansion into new regions. As of December 31, 2012, we had 2,350 active dealers in North America compared to 2,215 at the end of 2011. Similarly, we had 501 active direct International dealers compared to 375 at the end of 2011. Other revenue declined by $1.2 million, or 23%, from $5.1 million in 2011 to $3.9 million in 2012. The decline was primarily due to a decrease in revenue from sales to hotels and multi-dwelling units. Revenue from sales to hotels and multi-dwelling units is difficult for us to predict and we are uncertain as to how much revenue we will receive from these projects in the future.

2011 Compared to 2010

              Revenue increased by 25% in 2011 compared to 2010. North America core revenue increased by $11.3 million, or 19%, from $60.2 million in 2010 to $71.5 million in 2011, while International core revenue increased by $6.1 million, or 57%, from $10.7 million in 2010 to $16.8 million in 2011. The increase in North America core revenue was primarily due to an increase in the number of dealers selling our products and the resulting increase in the number of system sales. International core revenue increased at a faster rate than North America core revenue primarily due to increased penetration in countries and regions where we had previously done business, as well as our expansion into new countries and regions.

Gross Margin

 
  Years Ended December 31,    
   
 
 
  2011 over
2010
  2012 over
2011
 
 
  2010   2011   2012  
 
  (Dollars in thousands)
 

Gross margin

  $ 31,568   $ 42,842   $ 50,447     36%     18%  

Percentage of revenue

    42%     46%     46%              

2012 Compared to 2011

              As a percentage of revenue, our gross margin increased from 45.9% in 2011 to 46.1% in 2012. In 2012, our total cost of revenue included the loss on inventory purchase commitments of $1.8 million recorded in the third quarter of 2012. The loss on inventory purchase commitments was the result of our commitment to purchase energy-related products from our contract manufacturing partner that we will not use due to our decision to discontinue our energy product line in 2012 because the near- and mid-term demand of utility customers for the energy product line was lower than expected and the costs of developing and servicing the energy product line was higher than we expected. Our energy product line consisted of a wireless thermostat and an in-home controller device that connected wirelessly to the home's smart meter, allowing utility customers to monitor their energy usage and to modify their energy consumption. We generated less than 1% of our total revenue from our energy product line in each of 2010, 2011 and 2012. Excluding the loss on inventory purchase commitments, gross margin would have increased by $9.4 million, or 22%, in 2012 compared to 2011. Gross margin would have increased as a percentage of revenue from 45.9% in 2011 to 47.7% in 2012. That increase in gross margin as a percentage of revenue was due primarily to a combination of a decrease in fixed manufacturing overhead as a percentage of revenue and component cost reductions.

59


Table of Contents

2011 Compared to 2010

              As a percentage of revenue, our gross margin increased from 42.1% in 2010 to 45.9% in 2011. The increase in gross margin was due to a combination of favorable sales mix and component cost reductions. In 2011, we began selling MyHome software applications, which represented approximately 5% of our revenue in 2011 and contributed to the favorable sales mix compared to 2010. Fixed overhead as a percentage of revenue was relatively constant in 2011 compared to 2010.

Research and Development Expenses

 
  Years Ended December 31,    
   
 
 
  2011 over
2010
  2012 over
2011
 
 
  2010   2011   2012  
 
  (Dollars in thousands)
 

Research and development expenses

  $ 15,922   $ 19,211   $ 20,310     21%     6%  

Percentage of revenue

    21%     21%     19%              

2012 Compared to 2011

              Research and development expenses increased by $1.1 million, or 6%, in 2012 compared to 2011. Research and development expenses declined as a percentage of revenue from 21% in 2011 to 19% in 2012. The increase in research and development expenses was due primarily to increased cash and stock compensation expense as a result of adding product development and product management personnel. Expenses associated with prototyping and compliance agency approvals also increased in 2012 compared to 2011 due to new products introduced in 2012 and new products that will be introduced in 2013.

2011 Compared to 2010

              Research and development expenses increased by $3.3 million, or 21%, in 2011 compared to 2010 and remained at 21% of revenue in both 2010 and 2011. The increase was primarily due to increased compensation paid for product management and product development personnel in 2011 compared to 2010. The increase in compensation was partially offset by a reduction in contract labor expense and recruiting and relocation expense.

Sales and Marketing Expenses

 
  Years Ended December 31,    
   
 
 
  2011 over
2010
  2012 over
2011
 
 
  2010   2011   2012  
 
  (Dollars in thousands)
 

Sales and marketing expenses

  $ 22,491   $ 17,546   $ 20,182     (22 )%   15%  

Percentage of revenue

    30%     19%     18%              

2012 Compared to 2011

              Sales and marketing expenses increased by $2.6 million, or 15%, in 2012 compared to 2011. Sales and marketing expenses declined as percentage of revenue from 19% in 2011 to 18% in 2012. The increase in sales and marketing expenses was due primarily to increased compensation expense as a result of adding marketing personnel. We also increased the amount spent on advertising and public relations and general marketing expenses in 2012 compared to 2011. These increases were partially offset by a reduction in the amount spent period-over-period on tradeshows, in particular due to our reduced investment in the Consumer Electronics Show, or CES.

60


Table of Contents

2011 Compared to 2010

              Sales and marketing expenses decreased by $4.9 million, or 22%, in 2011 compared to 2010 and decreased as a percentage of revenue from 30% in 2010 to 19% in 2011. The decrease was primarily due to a decrease in advertising and other discretionary marketing expenses in 2011 compared to 2010 resulting from higher advertising and promotions expenses in 2010. There was also a reduction in sales and marketing compensation in 2011 compared to 2010, primarily resulting from reduced investment in resources associated with energy-related products for utilities in 2011 compared to 2010.

General and Administrative Expenses

 
  Years Ended December 31,    
   
 
 
  2011 over
2010
  2012 over
2011
 
 
  2010   2011   2012  
 
  (Dollars in thousands)
 

General and administrative expenses

  $ 8,876   $ 9,805   $ 10,150     10%     4%  

Percentage of revenue

    12%     11%     9%              

2012 Compared to 2011

              General and administrative expenses increased by $345,000, or 4%, in 2012 compared to 2011. General and administrative expenses declined as a percentage of revenue from 11% in 2011 to 9% in 2012. The increase in general and administrative expenses was due to increased cash and stock compensation expense resulting from the addition of administrative personnel. Professional services expenses, primarily external legal fees, were also higher in 2012 compared to 2011. These increased expenses were offset by lower facilities expenses resulting from the renegotiation of our corporate headquarters building lease and lower recruiting and relocation expenses in 2012 compared to 2011.

2011 Compared to 2010

              General and administrative expenses increased by $929,000, or 10%, in 2011 compared to 2010 and declined as a percentage of revenue from 12% in 2010 to 11% in 2011. The increase was due to small increases in compensation, recruiting and relocation, and facilities expenses, as well as communications-related expenses. The increases were partially offset by a decrease in professional services fees, primarily outside legal fees.

Litigation Settlement Expense

              In the third quarter of 2012, we recorded an expense of $2.9 million in connection with two separate legal settlements. In December 2012, we entered into a license agreement to settle a patent-related dispute resulting in an expense of $2.1 million. In addition, we made a payment of $750,000 to release our obligations under a long-term energy-related contract.

61


Table of Contents

Unaudited Quarterly Results of Operations and Other Data

              The following tables present our unaudited quarterly consolidated results of operations and other data for each of the nine quarters ended March 31, 2013, both in absolute dollars and as a percentage of revenue. This unaudited quarterly consolidated information has been prepared on the same basis as our audited consolidated financial statements and, in the opinion of management, the statement of operations data includes all adjustments, consisting of normal recurring adjustments, necessary for the fair presentation of the results of operations for these periods. You should read this table in conjunction with our audited consolidated financial statements and related notes located elsewhere in this prospectus. The results of operations for any quarter are not necessarily indicative of the results of operations for a full year or any future periods.

 
  Three Months Ended  
 
  March 31,
2011
  June 30,
2011
  Sept 30,
2011
  Dec 31,
2011
  March 31,
2012
  June 30,
2012
  Sept 30,
2012
  Dec 31,
2012
  March 31,
2013
 
 
  (In thousands)
 

Revenue

  $ 19,745   $ 23,772   $ 24,906   $ 24,953   $ 22,628   $ 27,614   $ 28,605   $ 30,665   $ 26,571  

Cost of revenue

    10,830     12,593     13,308     13,803     12,466     14,326     14,918     15,515     13,550  

Cost of revenue—inventory purchase commitment

                            1,840          
                                       

Gross margin

    8,915     11,179     11,598     11,150     10,162     13,288     11,847     15,150     13,021  

Operating expenses:

                                                       

Research and development

    4,789     4,655     4,667     5,100     4,813     5,148     5,158     5,191     6,066  

Sales and marketing

    4,957     4,115     4,644     3,830     5,038     5,108     5,333     4,703     5,605  

General and administrative

    2,266     2,787     2,288     2,464     2,532     2,663     2,471     2,484     2,828  

Litigation settlement

                            2,869          
                                       

Total operating expenses

    12,012     11,557     11,599     11,394     12,383     12,919     15,831     12,378     14,499  
                                       

Income (loss) from operations

    (3,097 )   (378 )   (1 )   (244 )   (2,221 )   369     (3,984 )   2,772     (1,478 )

Other income (expense):

                                                       

Interest expense, net

    (133 )   (124 )   (67 )   (68 )   (62 )   (73 )   (63 )   (66 )   (75 )

Other income (expense)

    75     33     93     26     (400 )   223     (45 )   (32 )   26  
                                       

Total other income (expense)

    (58 )   (91 )   26     (42 )   (462 )   150     (108 )   (98 )   (49 )
                                       

Income (loss) before income taxes

  $ (3,155 ) $ (469 ) $ 25   $ (286 ) $ (2,683 ) $ 519   $ (4,092 ) $ 2,674   $ (1,527 )

Income tax (expense) benefit

                                (141 )   56  
                                       

Net income (loss)

  $ (3,155 ) $ (469 ) $ 25   $ (286 ) $ (2,683 ) $ 519   $ (4,092 ) $ 2,533   $ (1,471 )
                                       

62


Table of Contents


              Includes stock-based compensation expense as follows:

 
  Three Months Ended  
 
  March 31,
2011
  June 30,
2011
  Sept 30,
2011
  Dec 31,
2011
  March 31,
2012
  June 30,
2012
  Sept 30,
2012
  Dec 31,
2012
  March 31,
2013
 
 
  (In thousands)
 

Cost of revenue

  $ 7   $ 6   $ 22   $ 14   $ 17   $ 18   $ 18   $ 25   $ 16  

Research and development

    152     109     117     114     130     129     202     243     236  

Sales and marketing

    153     139     109     122     144     138     139     159     184  

General and administrative

    191     249     165     344     440     356     363     348     402  
                                       

Total stock-based compensation expense

  $ 503   $ 503   $ 413   $ 594   $ 731   $ 641   $ 722   $ 775   $ 838  
                                       

 

 
  Three Months Ended  
 
  March 31,
2011
  June 30,
2011
  Sept 30,
2011
  Dec 31,
2011
  March 31,
2012
  June 30,
2012
  Sept 30,
2012
  Dec 31,
2012
  March 31,
2013
 
 
  (As a percentage of revenue)
 

Revenue

    100 %   100 %   100 %   100 %   100 %   100 %   100 %   100 %   100 %

Cost of revenue

    55     53     53     55     55     52     52     51     51  

Cost of revenue—inventory purchase commitment

    0     0     0     0     0     0     6     0     0  
                                       

Gross margin

    45     47     47     45     45     48     41     49     49  

Operating expenses:

                                                       

Research and development

    24     20     19     20     21     19     18     17     23  

Sales and marketing

    25     17     19     15     22     18     19     15     21  

General and administrative

    11     12     9     10     11     10     9     8     11  

Litigation settlement

    0     0     0     0     0     0     10     0     0  
                                       

Total operating expenses

    61     49     47     46     55     47     55     40     55  

Income (loss) from operations

    (16 )   (2 )   0     (1 )   (10 )   1     (14 )   9     (6 )

Other income (expense)

                                                       

Interest expense, net

    (1 )   (1 )   0     0     0     0     0     0     0  

Other income (expense)

    0     0     0     0     (2 )   1     0     0     0  
                                       

Total other income (expense)

    0     0     0     0     (2 )   1     0     0     0  
                                       

Income (loss) before income taxes

    (16 )   (2 )   0     (1 )   (12 )   2     (14 )   9     (6 )

Income tax (expense) benefit

    0     0     0     0     0     0     0     0     0  
                                       

Net income (loss)

    (16 )%   (2 )%   0 %   (1 )%   (12 )%   2 %   (14 )%   8 %   (6 )%
                                       

63


Table of Contents

Reconciliation of Non-GAAP Financial Data

Adjusted Gross Margin

 
  Three Months Ended  
 
  March 31,
2011
  June 30,
2011
  Sept 30,
2011
  Dec 31,
2011
  March 31,
2012
  June 30,
2012
  Sept 30,
2012
  Dec 31,
2012
  March 31,
2013
 

Gross margin

  $ 8,915   $ 11,179   $ 11,598   $ 11,150   $ 10,162   $ 13,288   $ 11,847   $ 15,150   $ 13,021  

Stock-based compensation expense included in cost of revenue

    7     6     22     14     17     18     18     25     16  

Cost of revenue—inventory purchase commitment

                            1,840            
                                       

Adjusted gross margin

  $ 8,922   $ 11,185   $ 11,620   $ 11,164   $ 10,179   $ 13,306   $ 13,705   $ 15,175     13,037  
                                       

Adjusted gross margin percentage

    45.2%     47.1%     46.7%     44.7%     45.0%     48.2%     47.9%     49.5%     49.1%  

Adjusted Operating Income

 
  Three Months Ended  
 
  March 31,
2011
  June 30,
2011
  Sept 30,
2011
  Dec 31,
2011
  March 31,
2012
  June 30,
2012
  Sept 30,
2012
  Dec 31,
2012
  March 31,
2013
 

Income (loss) from operations

  $ (3,097)   $ (378)   $ (1)   $ (244)   $ (2,221)   $ 369   $ (3,984)   $ 2,772   $ (1,478)  

Stock-based compensation expense

    503     503     413     594     731     641     722     775     838  

Cost of revenue—inventory purchase commitment

                            1,840          

Litigation settlement expense

                            2,869          
                                       

Adjusted operating income (loss)

  $ (2,594)   $ 125   $ 412   $ 350   $ (1,490)   $ 1,010   $ 1,447   $ 3,547   $ (640)  
                                       

              We have historically experienced seasonal variations in our revenue as a result of holiday-related factors that are common in our industry. Our revenue is generally highest in the fourth quarter due to consumers' desire to complete their home installations prior to the Thanksgiving and Christmas holidays. We generally see decreased sales in the first quarter due to the number of installations that were completed in the fourth quarter and the resulting decline in dealer activity in the first quarter. In the fourth quarter of 2011, our revenue fell below our expectations and therefore did not increase at the rate it had in the fourth quarter of prior years. Our revenue in the fourth quarter of 2012 was representative of our historical percentage increase from the third quarter to the fourth quarter.

              Our gross margin declined slightly in the fourth quarter of 2011 due to reserves that we recorded for excess and obsolete inventory in that quarter. Our gross margin in the first quarter of 2012 was equal to the fourth quarter of 2011, but lower than previous and subsequent quarters due to the mix of our product sales and higher fixed manufacturing overhead as a percentage of revenue. Our gross margin in the third quarter of 2012 was negatively impacted by the loss on inventory purchase commitments we recorded to recognize the loss resulting from our commitment to purchase energy-related products from one of our contract manufacturers that we will not use due to our decision to discontinue our energy product line for utility customers. Our gross margin in the fourth quarter of 2012 benefited from higher prices on product sales to international multi-dwelling unit customers and lower manufacturing overhead as a percentage of revenue.

64


Table of Contents

              Research and development expenses were relatively flat in absolute dollars during the four quarters of 2011, although they were slightly higher in the fourth quarter of 2011 compared to the first three quarters due to higher prototyping expenses and compliance agency fees associated with new product introductions. The increase in research and development expenses in the second, third and fourth quarters of 2012 compared to the first quarter was primarily due to higher sales and wages and higher prototyping expenses. The increase in research and development expenses in the first quarter of 2013 compared to the fourth quarter of 2012 was due primarily to higher salaries and wages resulting from the addition of product management and product development personnel late in the fourth quarter of 2012 and early in the first quarter of 2013. In addition, spending on research and development-related tools and supplies and travel associated with new product development was higher in the first quarter of 2013.

              Sales and marketing expenses are typically higher in the first and third quarters of each year due to the timing of trade shows. The Consumer Electronics Show, or CES, and Integrated Systems Europe, or ISE, trade shows occur in the first quarter and the CEDIA trade show occurs in the third quarter. In 2012, trade show expenses in the first quarter were lower than in previous years due to reduced investment in CES. In addition, increased spending on compensation, advertising and marketing promotions in the second quarter resulted in total sales and marketing expenses in the second quarter approximately equal to the first quarter of 2012. The increases in sales and marketing expenses in 2012 compared to 2011 was due to higher compensation expenses resulting from the increase in the number of sales and marketing personnel and higher discretionary marketing expenses. The decrease in sales and marketing expenses in the fourth quarter of 2012 compared to the third quarter of 2012 was due to lower trade show expenses, lower discretionary marketing expenses and lower bad debt expense.

              General and administrative expenses were higher in the second quarter of 2011 due to increased recruiting and relocation expenses and higher external legal fees. General and administrative expenses were higher in the second quarter of 2012 due to higher external legal fees related to patent litigation that was settled in the fourth quarter of 2012.

Liquidity and Capital Resources

              As of March 31, 2013, we had $14.6 million in cash and cash equivalents. We consider all highly liquid short-term investments with original maturities of three months or less at the time of purchase to be cash equivalents.

              Since inception, we have funded our operations primarily through private sales of equity securities and, to a lesser extent, from borrowings under secured credit facilities. We have raised $118.2 million through the sale of preferred stock to financial and strategic investors. Our last financing round was completed in February 2011. In that financing round, we generated net proceeds of $19.8 million from the sale of Series H Preferred Stock.

              Our cash flows from operating activities are impacted by our net income or loss and the timing of the major components of working capital, with the primary variances occurring in accounts receivable, inventory, accounts payable and accrued liabilities. We closely monitor our inventory, our days sales outstanding and our payment terms with our major vendors to maximize our cash flows from operating activities. We turn our inventory approximately 5 times per year. Our days sales outstanding has averaged 37 over the past 12 months. We have 45- and 60-day payment terms with our two major contract manufacturers.

              Our cash flows from investing activities are primarily due to our purchase of fixed assets to support the growth of the business.

65


Table of Contents

              Our cash flows from financing activities are primarily from the sale of preferred stock as well as the net proceeds from equipment loans and our revolving line of credit. We have also generated cash from the exercise of common stock options by current and former employees.

              We believe that our existing cash and cash equivalents, excluding the net proceeds from this offering, will be sufficient to fund our operations and make payments under our settlement agreements for at least the next 12 months. From time to time, we may explore additional financing sources to develop or enhance our product solutions, to fund expansion of our business, to respond to competitive pressures, or to acquire or invest in complementary products, businesses or technologies. We cannot assure you that any additional financing will be available to us on acceptable terms, if at all. If we raise additional funds through the issuance of equity or convertible debt or other equity-linked securities, our existing stockholders could suffer significant dilution, and any new equity securities we issue could have rights, preferences and privileges senior to those of holders of our common stock, including shares of common stock sold in this offering.

              Summary cash flow information for the years ended December 31, 2010, 2011 and 2012 and for the three months ended March 31, 2012 and 2013 is set forth below.

 
  Years Ended December 31,   Three Months Ended
March 31,
 
 
  2010   2011   2012   2012   2013  
 
  (In thousands)
 

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period

  $ 17,398   $ 6,054   $ 18,468   $ 18,468   $ 18,695  

Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities

    (13,078 )   (586 )   991     (1,391 )   (2,937 )

Net cash used in investing activities

    (2,344 )   (1,989 )   (2,360 )   (542 )   (1,431 )

Net cash provided by financing activities

    4,042     14,999     1,624     68     272  

Effect of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents

    36     (10 )   (28 )   (42 )   (26 )
                       

Net change in cash for the period

    (11,344 )   12,414     227     (1,907 )   (4,122 )
                       

Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the period

  $ 6,054   $ 18,468   $ 18,695   $ 16,561   $ 14,573  
                       

Net Cash Used in Operating Activities

              Historically, we have experienced negative cash flows from operating activities primarily due to our continued investment in research and development and sales and marketing resources needed to design, develop, market and sell our solutions worldwide.

              Our cash used in operating activities for the three months ended March 31, 2013 was comprised of the net loss of $1.5 million, offset by non-cash expenses of $1.5 million. Changes in working capital, other assets and long-term liabilities resulted in a net use of cash totaling $2.9 million. The non-cash expenses included in the net loss consist primarily of stock-based compensation expense of $838,000 and depreciation expense of $512,000. The changes in working capital were comprised primarily of an increase in other assets of $1.6 million and a decrease in accounts payable of $1.3 million. The increase in other assets was due primarily to deferred expenses related to this offering that have been recorded as other assets and will be offset against the proceeds of the offering. The decrease in accounts payable was due to the timing of payments to our vendors.

              Our cash used in operating activities for the three months ended March 31, 2012 was comprised of the net loss of $2.7 million, offset by non-cash expenses of $1.7 million. Changes in working capital, other assets and long-term liabilities resulted in a net use of cash totaling $400,000. The non-cash expenses included in the net loss consist primarily of stock-based compensation expense of $731,000, depreciation expense of $407,000 and warrant liability expense of $399,000. The changes in working capital were comprised primarily of an increase in inventory of $492,000, a decrease in accrued

66


Table of Contents

liabilities of $424,000 and a decrease in other long-term liabilities of $125,000. These uses of cash were offset by cash provided by an increase in accounts payable of $614,000.

              Our cash provided by operating activities for the year ended December 31, 2012 was comprised of the net loss of $3.7 million, offset by non-cash expenses of $7.2 million. Changes in working capital, other assets and long-term liabilities resulted in a net use of cash totalling $2.5 million. The non-cash expenses included in the net loss primarily consist of a loss on inventory purchase commitments of $1.8 million, depreciation expense of $1.7 million, provision for doubtful accounts of $184,000 and stock-based compensation expense of $2.9 million. The changes in working capital were comprised of an increase in accounts payable and accrued liabilities of $6.7 million, offset by an increase in inventory of $4.9 million, an increase in accounts receivable of $2.6 million. In addition, we recognized a decrease in long-term liabilities of $621,000. These increases in inventory, accounts receivable, accounts payable and accrued liabilities were all a result of increased revenue, cost of revenue and expenses during 2012. The decrease in long-term liabilities was due to the payment of a liability resulting from a litigation settlement recorded in 2008.

              Our cash used in operating activities for 2011 was comprised of net loss of $3.9 million offset by non-cash expenses of $3.8 million. Changes in working capital and long-term liabilities resulted in a net use of cash totalling $524,000. The change in working capital was due primarily to an increase in accounts receivable of $2.6 million offset by a decrease in inventory of $2.3 million and changes in other components of working capital of $363,000. In addition, we recognized a decrease in long-term liabilities of $565,000. The increase in accounts receivable was due to the increase in revenue. The decrease in inventory was the result of our concerted effort to reduce inventory levels and increase inventory turns in 2011.

              Our cash used in operating activities for 2010 was comprised of net loss of $16.3 million offset by non-cash expenses of $3.7 million. Changes in working capital and long-term liabilities resulted in a net use of cash totalling $506,000. The net loss in 2010 was a result of lower than planned revenue growth combined with increased investments in research and development expenses and sales and marketing expenses. A portion of these increased operating expense investments were tied to the start-up of our energy-related product development for utility customers and additional sales and marketing efforts. The changes in working capital and long-term liabilities was attributable primarily to an increase in inventory of $4.7 million offset by a decrease in in accounts receivable of $1.6 million and an increase in accounts payable of $2.5 million.

Net Cash Used in Investing Activities

              Net cash used in investing activities has historically been due primarily to purchases of property and equipment needed to support the growth of our business. Our purchases of property and equipment have been for computer equipment and software used internally, manufacturing tooling and test equipment that we purchase and own, but is located with our manufacturing partners, furniture and fixtures for our facilities, lab and warehouse equipment for our engineering and supply chain organizations, marketing equipment that is primarily used for trade shows, and leasehold improvements to our facilities.

              For the three months ended March 31, 2013, our cash used in investing activities was $1.4 million and consisted entirely of purchases of property and equipment for general business use.

              For the three months ended March 31, 2012, our cash used in investing activities was $542,000 and consisted entirely of purchases of property and equipment for general business use.

              For the year ended December 31, 2012, our cash used in investing activities was $2.4 million and consisted entirely of purchases of property and equipment for general business use.

67


Table of Contents

              Our cash used in investing activities in 2011 was $2.0 million, consisting of the purchase of property and equipment of $1.3 million and acquisition of intangible assets of $725,000. The purchases of property and equipment were for general business use and the acquisition of intangible assets related to technology that we purchased to allow our customers to access and control their homes via their mobile Android-based devices.

              Our cash used in investing activities in 2010 was $2.3 million, consisting of the purchase of property and equipment of $2.0 million and acquisition of intangible assets of $319,000. The purchases of property and equipment were for general business use and the acquisition of intangible assets related to technology that we purchased to allow our customers to access and control their homes via their mobile iOS-based devices.

Net Cash Provided by Financing Activities

              Net cash provided by financing activities for the three months ended March 31, 2013 was $272,000 and consisted primarily of $235,000 in net proceeds from borrowings under our equipment loan.

              Net cash provided by financing activities for the three months ended March 31, 2012 was $68,000 and consisted of net proceeds from borrowings under our equipment loan.

              Net cash provided by financing activities for the year ended December 31, 2012 was $1.6 million and consisted of $839,000 in net proceeds from borrowings under our equipment loan and $785,000 in cash generated from the exercise of common stock options.

              Net cash provided by financing activities in 2011 was $15.0 million and consisted of $19.8 million in net proceeds from the sale of Series H Preferred Stock and $1.2 million in proceeds from the exercise of common stock options. These proceeds were offset by the payment against our revolving credit line and equipment loans of $6.0 million. In 2011, we paid off the entire balance outstanding on our revolving credit line and we did not borrow against that credit line in 2012.

              Net cash provided by financing activities in 2010 was $4.0 million and consisted of net borrowings against our revolving credit line and equipment loans of $3.8 million and proceeds from the exercise of common stock options of $202,000.

Debt Obligations

              In June 2013, we entered into an Amended and Restated Loan and Security Agreement with Silicon Valley Bank, or the SVB Agreement, which consists of a revolving credit facility of $13.0 million (subject to certain borrowing base restrictions) and term borrowings to fund purchases of property and equipment. All borrowings under the SVB Agreement are collateralized by our general assets. The credit facility has a variable rate of interest of prime (as published in the Wall Street Journal) or LIBOR plus 2.50%, as selected by us. The SVB Agreement provides for $2.75 million in term borrowings to fund purchases of property and equipment. Term borrowings are payable in 42 equal monthly payments of principal plus interest and bear interest at prime plus 0.50%, which was 3.75% at March 31, 2013.

              Borrowing under the revolving credit facility is subject to certain collateral restrictions relating primarily to our accounts receivable and inventory levels. As of March 31, 2013, our total borrowing capacity was approximately $12.9 million. We have not borrowed against the revolving credit facility as of December 31, 2011 or 2012 or March 31, 2013. The revolving credit facility has a maturity date of May 29, 2015.

              The SVB Agreement contains various restrictive and financial covenants and we were in compliance with each of these covenants as of December 31, 2011 and 2012 and March 31, 2013.

68


Table of Contents

              Future principal payments on outstanding term borrowings as of December 31, 2012 are as follows (in thousands):

2013

  $ 1,321  

2014

    840  

2015

    588  

2016

    410  
       

  $ 3,159  
       

Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements

              We do not engage in off-balance sheet activities. We do not have any off-balance interest in variable interest entities, which include special purpose entities and other structured finance entities.

Contractual Obligations

              We enter into long-term contractual obligations in the normal course of business, primarily debt obligations and non-cancellable operating leases. In addition, in 2008 and 2012, we entered into settlement agreements with two different parties relating to alleged patent infringements, which included future payment obligations.

              Our contractual cash obligations at December 31, 2012 are as follows:

 
  Total   Less than
1 year
  1-3 years   3-5 years   More than
5 years
 
 
  (In thousands)
 

Long-term debt obligations, including interest

  $ 3,397   $ 1,620   $ 1,414   $ 363   $  

Operating lease obligations

    5,872     794     2,488     2,101     489  

Settlement agreements (1)

    4,200     2,400     1,200     600      

Purchase commitments

    19,479     19,479              
                       

Total contractual obligations

  $ 32,948   $ 24,293   $ 5,102   $ 3,064   $ 489  
                       

(1)
The counterparty in one of the settlement agreements has the contractual right to accelerate $900,000 of the future obligation due in 2014 to a $700,000 payment in June 2013.

              Changes in our contractual obligations during the three months ended March 31, 2013 are insignificant and consist primarily of fluctuations in our purchase commitments in the ordinary course of business.

Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk

              We are exposed to market risk in the ordinary course of our business. Market risk represents the risk of loss that may impact our financial position due to adverse changes in financial market prices and rates. Our market risk exposure is primarily a result of fluctuations in interest rates and foreign currency exchange rates. We do not hold or issue financial instruments for trading purposes.

69


Table of Contents

Interest Rate Risk

              Our exposure to market risk for changes in interest rates relates primarily to our cash and cash equivalents as we do not have any short-term investments as of December 31, 2012 and March 31, 2013. Our cash and cash equivalents as of December 31, 2012 and March 31, 2013 were $18.7 million and $14.6 million, respectively, and consisted primarily of cash and money market funds. Our primary exposure to market risk is interest income sensitivity, which is affected by changes in the general level of the interest rates in the United States. However, because of the short-term nature of our interest-bearing securities, a 10% change in market interest rates would not be expected to have a material impact on our consolidated financial condition or results of operations.

Foreign Currency Exchange Risk

              Our results of operations and cash flows are subject to fluctuations due to changes in foreign currency exchange rates, particularly changes in the Canadian dollar, the Euro and the British pound. The volatility of exchange rates depends on many factors that we cannot forecast with reliable accuracy. We believe that our operating activities act as a natural hedge for a substantial portion of our foreign currency exposure because we typically collect revenue and incur costs in the currency in the location in which we provide our solutions. Although we have experienced and will continue to experience fluctuations in our net income (loss) as a result of transaction gains (losses) related to transactions denominated in currencies other than the U.S. dollar, we believe that a 10% change in foreign exchange rates would not have a material impact on our financial condition or results of operations. To date, we have not entered into any foreign currency hedging contracts, but we may consider entering into such contracts in the future. As our international operations grow, we will continue to reassess our approach to managing our risk relating to fluctuations in foreign currency exchange rates.

Critical Accounting Estimates and Policies

              Our consolidated financial statements are prepared in accordance with GAAP. The preparation of these consolidated financial statements requires us to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, revenue, expenses and related disclosures. We evaluate our estimates and assumptions on an ongoing basis. Our estimates are based on historical experience and various other assumptions that we believe to be reasonable under the circumstances. Our actual results could differ from these estimates.

              We believe that the assumptions and estimates associated with our revenue recognition, allowance for doubtful accounts, inventories, product warranty, income taxes and stock-based compensation have the greatest potential impact on our consolidated financial statements. Therefore, we consider these to be our critical accounting policies and estimates. For further information on all of our significant accounting policies, please see Note 1 of the accompanying notes to our consolidated financial statements.

              We are choosing to "opt out" of the extended transition period provided in Section 7(a)(2)(B) of the Securities Act for complying with new or revised accounting standards and, as a result, we will comply with new or revised accounting standards on the relevant dates on which adoption of such standards is required for non-emerging growth companies. Section 107 of the JOBS Act provides that our decision to opt out of the extended transition period for complying with new or revised accounting standards is irrevocable.

Revenue Recognition

              We sell our products through a network of independent dealers and distributors and not directly to consumers. These dealers and distributors generally sell our products to the consumer as part of a bundled sale, which typically includes other third-party products and related services, project design and installation services and ongoing support.

70


Table of Contents

              Our products include embedded software that is essential to the functionality of the hardware, but the software is not sold separately and doesn't have stand-alone value. Accordingly, the hardware and software are accounted for as a combined unit and revenue is recognized when both elements are delivered. We recognize revenue when persuasive evidence of an arrangement exists, delivery has occurred, the sales price is fixed or determinable, and collection is probable. Product is considered delivered to the customer once it has been shipped and title and risk of loss have been transferred. For most of our product sales, these criteria are met at the time the product is shipped. Payments received in advance of providing products are recorded as deferred revenue and recognized as revenue when the revenue recognition criteria are met and the earnings process is complete.

              We record estimated reductions to revenue for dealer, retailer and distributor incentives, primarily comprised of volume rebates, at the time of the initial sale. The estimated reductions to revenue for rebates are based on the sales terms and our historical experience and trend analysis. The most common incentive relates to amounts paid or credited to customers for achieving defined volume levels or growth objectives.

              Software license revenue represents fees earned from activating applications that allow consumers to manage and control their automation systems using tablets, smartphones and other third-party devices. Our perpetual software licenses do not include acceptance provisions, rights to updates or post-contract customer support. We generally recognize revenue at the time the software license is provided to the customer.

              We offer a subscription service that allows consumers to control and monitor their homes remotely and allows our dealers to perform remote diagnostic services. Subscription revenue is deferred at the time of payment and recognized on a straight-line basis over the period the service is provided.

              We recognize revenue net of cost of revenue for third-party products sold through our online ordering system. While we assume credit risk on sales to our customers, we do not determine the product selling price, do not retain associated inventory risks and are not the primary obligor to the customer.

              Our agreements with dealers and distributors generally do not include rights of return or acceptance provisions. Even though contractual agreements do not provide return privileges, there are circumstances in which we will accept returns. In addition, agreements with certain retail customers contain stock rotation and other rights of return. We maintain a reserve for such returns based on retail sell-through and our historical return experience.

              Shipping charges billed to customers are included in product revenue and related shipping costs are included in cost of revenue.

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

              We extend credit to the majority of our customers, which consist primarily of small, local businesses. Issuance of credit is based on ongoing credit evaluations by us of our customers' financial condition and generally requires no collateral. Trade accounts receivable are recorded at the invoiced amount and do not bear interest. We maintain an allowance for doubtful accounts to reserve for potential uncollectible receivables. The allowance is based upon the creditworthiness of our customers, the customers' historical payment experience, the age of the receivables and current market and economic conditions. Provisions for potentially uncollectible accounts are recorded in sales and marketing expenses. We write off accounts receivable balances to the allowance for doubtful accounts when it becomes likely that they will not be collected. As of December 31, 2011 and 2012 and March 31, 2013, the allowance for doubtful accounts was $0.7 million, $0.6 million and $0.6 million, respectively.

71


Table of Contents

Inventories

              Inventories consist of hardware and related component parts and are stated at the lower of cost or market using the first-in, first-out method. We periodically assess the recoverability of our inventory and reduce the carrying value of the inventory when items are determined to be obsolete, defective or in excess of forecasted sales requirements. Inventory write-downs for excess, defective and obsolete inventory are recorded as cost of revenue and totaled $1.1 million, $1.3 million, $1.5 million and $0.4 million in 2010, 2011 and 2012 and for the three months ended March 31, 2013, respectively.

Product Warranty

              We provide our customers a limited product warranty of two years, which requires us to repair or replace defective products during the warranty period at no cost to the customer. We estimate the costs that may be incurred to replace or repair defective products and record a reserve at the time revenue is recognized. Factors that affect our warranty liability include the number of installed systems, our historical experience and management's judgment regarding anticipated rates of product warranty returns. We assess the adequacy of our recorded warranty liability each period and make adjustments to the liability as necessary. Our warranty liability was $775,000, $1.0 million, $1.2 million and $1.2 million as of December 31, 2010, 2011 and 2012 and March 31, 2013, respectively.

Income Taxes

              We recognize deferred tax assets and liabilities for the future tax consequences attributable to the differences between the financial statement carrying value of existing assets and liabilities and their respective tax bases. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured using enacted tax rates in effect for the fiscal year in which those temporary differences are expected to be recovered or settled. Valuation allowances are established when necessary to reduce deferred tax assets to the amount expected to be realized.

              We operate in various tax jurisdictions and are subject to audit by various tax authorities. We provide for tax contingencies whenever it is deemed probable that a tax asset has been impaired or a tax liability has been incurred for events such as tax claims or changes in tax laws. Tax contingencies are based upon their technical merits, relative tax law and the specific facts and circumstances as of each reporting period. Changes in facts and circumstances could result in material changes to the amounts recorded for such tax contingencies.

              We recognize uncertain income tax positions taken on income tax returns at the largest amount that is more-likely-than-not to be sustained upon audit by the relevant taxing authority. An uncertain income tax position will not be recognized if it has less than a 50% likelihood of being sustained.

              Our policy for recording interest and penalties associated with uncertain tax positions is to record such items as a component of our income tax provision. During the years December 31, 2010, 2011 and 2012 and for the three months ended March 31, 2012 and 2013, we did not record any material interest income, interest expense or penalties related to uncertain tax positions or the settlement of audits for prior periods.

Stock-Based Compensation

              Stock-based compensation is measured at the grant date based on the fair value of the award and is recognized as expense, net of estimated forfeitures, over the requisite service period, which is the vesting period of the respective award.

              Determining the fair value of stock-based awards at the grant date requires judgment. We use the Black-Scholes option-pricing model to determine the fair value of stock options. The determination of the grant date fair value of options using an option-pricing model is affected by our estimated common stock fair value as well as assumptions regarding a number of other complex and subjective variables. These variables include the fair value of our common stock, our expected stock price

72


Table of Contents

volatility over the expected term of the options, stock option exercise and cancellation behaviors, risk-free interest rates and expected dividends, which are estimated as follows:

    Fair Value of Our Common Stock.   Because our stock is not publicly traded, we must estimate the fair value of our common stock, as discussed in "Common Stock Valuations" below.

    Expected Volatility.   As we do not have a trading history for our common stock, the expected stock price volatility for our common stock was estimated by taking the average of the historical volatilities of an index fund and industry peers based on daily price observations over a period equivalent to the expected term of the stock option grants. We did not rely on implied volatilities of traded options in our industry peers' common stock because the volume of activity was relatively low. We intend to continue to consistently apply this process using the same or similar public companies until a sufficient amount of historical information regarding the volatility of our own common stock share price becomes available.

    Risk-Free Interest Rate.   The risk-free interest rate is based on the U.S. Treasury yield in effect at the time of the grant for zero-coupon U.S. Treasury notes with remaining terms similar to the expected term of the options.

    Expected Dividend Yield.   We have never declared or paid any cash dividends and do not presently plan to pay cash dividends in the foreseeable future. Consequently, we used an expected dividend yield of zero.

    Expected Term.   The expected term represents the period that the stock-based awards are expected to be outstanding. For our option grants, we used the simplified method to determine the expected term as provided by the SEC. The simplified method calculates the expected term as the average of the time-to-vesting and the contractual life of the options. We used the simplified method to determine our expected term because of our limited history of stock option exercise activity.

              In addition to the assumptions used in the Black-Scholes option-pricing model, we must also estimate a forfeiture rate to calculate the stock-based compensation for our awards. Our forfeiture rate is based on an analysis of our actual forfeitures. We will continue to evaluate the appropriateness of the forfeiture rate based on actual forfeiture experience, analysis of employee turnover and other factors. Quarterly changes in the estimated forfeiture rate can have a significant impact on our stock-based compensation expense as the cumulative effect of adjusting the rate is recognized in the period the forfeiture estimate is changed. If a revised forfeiture rate is higher than the previously estimated forfeiture rate, an adjustment is made that will result in a decrease to the stock-based compensation expense recognized in the financial statements. If a revised forfeiture rate is lower than the previously estimated forfeiture rate, an adjustment is made that will result in an increase to the stock-based compensation expense recognized in the financial statements.

              We will continue to use judgment in evaluating the expected volatility, expected terms and forfeiture rates utilized for our stock-based compensation calculations on a prospective basis. As we continue to accumulate additional data related to our common stock, we may have refinements to the estimates of our expected volatility, expected terms and forfeiture rates, which could materially impact our future stock-based compensation expense. If any of the assumptions used in the Black-Scholes model changes significantly, stock-based compensation for future awards may differ materially compared with the awards granted previously.

73


Table of Contents

              The following table presents the weighted-average assumptions used to estimate the fair value of options granted during the periods presented:

 
  Years Ended
December 31,
  Three Months
Ended
March 31,
 
 
  2010   2011   2012   2012 (1)   2013 (1)  

Expected volatility

    70-71%     71-73%     59-63%          

Expected dividends

    —%     —%     —%          

Expected term (in years)

    5.2-6.1     5.0-6.1     5.0-6.1          

Risk-free rate

    2.2-3.0%     1.1-2.5%     0.7-1.0%          

Forfeiture rate

    8.1%     11.6%     7.9%          

(1)
No options were granted during the three months ended March 31, 2012 or 2013.

Common Stock Valuations

              The fair value of the common stock underlying our stock options was determined by our board of directors, which intended all options granted to be exercisable at a price per share not less than the per share fair value of our common stock underlying those options on the date of grant. The valuations of our common stock were determined in accordance with the guidelines outlined in the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants Practice Aid, Valuation of Privately-Held-Company Equity Securities Issued as Compensation. The assumptions we use in the valuation model are based on future expectations combined with management judgment. In the absence of a public trading market, our board of directors, with input from management, exercised significant judgment and considered numerous objective and subjective factors to determine the fair value of our common stock as of the date of each option grant, including the following factors:

    Independent third-party valuations of our common stock performed as of December 31, 2011, March 30, 2012, June 30, 2012, September 30, 2012, December 31, 2012 and March 31, 2013;

    The prices, rights, preferences and privileges of our preferred stock relative to our common stock;

    Our operating and financial performance;

    Current business conditions and projections;

    Our stage of development;

    The likelihood of achieving a liquidity event for the shares of common stock underlying these stock options, such as an initial public offering or sale of our company, given prevailing market conditions;

    The market performance of comparable publicly traded companies in the consumer technology, home automation and high-growth company spaces; and

    The U.S. and global capital market conditions.

              In valuing our common stock, our board of directors determined the equity value of our business by taking a combination of the value indications under two valuation approaches, an income approach and a market approach.

              The income approach estimates the fair value of a company based on the present value of the company's future estimated cash flows and the residual value of the company beyond the forecast period. These future values are discounted to their present values to reflect the risks inherent in the company achieving these estimated cash flows. Significant inputs of the income approach (in addition to our estimated future cash flows themselves) include the long-term growth rate assumed in the

74


Table of Contents

residual value, discount rate, terminal value and normalized long-term operating margin. To estimate the value of cash flows after the defined projection period, a terminal value, which represents the estimated perpetual cash flows, was also calculated. To calculate the terminal value, a perpetual growth rate is applied to the last year of forecasted cash flows. This estimated perpetual cash flow is then divided by the capitalization rate.

              The market approach estimates the fair value of a company by applying market multiples of comparable publicly traded companies in the same industry or similar lines of business. The market multiples are based on key metrics implied by the price investors have paid for publicly traded companies. Given our significant focus on investing in and growing our business, we primarily utilized the revenue multiple when performing valuation assessments under the market approach. When considering which companies to include in our comparable industry peer companies, we focused on U.S.-based publicly traded companies with businesses similar to ours. The selection of our comparable industry peer companies requires us to make judgments as to the comparability of these companies to us. We considered a number of factors including business description, business size, market share, revenue model, development stage and historical results of operations. We then analyzed the business and financial profiles of the selected companies for relative similarities to us and, based on this assessment, we selected our comparable industry peer companies. Several of the comparable industry peer companies are our competitors and are generally larger than us in terms of total revenue and assets.

              The valuation reports prepared for us were based on the income approach. Due to the limited comparability with the guideline firms, a market approach was performed to assess the reasonableness of the income approach conclusions.

              For each valuation, the equity value was then allocated to the common stock using either the Option Pricing Method, or OPM, or Probability Weighted Expected Return Method, or PWERM.

              The OPM treats common stock and preferred stock as call options on an enterprise value, with exercise prices based on the liquidation preference of the preferred stock. Therefore, the common stock has value only if the funds available for distribution to the stockholders exceed the value of the liquidation preference at the time of a liquidity event such as a merger, sale or initial public offering, assuming the enterprise has funds available to make a liquidation preference meaningful and collectible by the stockholders. The common stock is modeled to be a call option with a claim on the enterprise at an exercise price equal to the remaining value immediately after the preferred stock is liquidated. The OPM uses the Black-Scholes option pricing model to price the call option. The OPM is appropriate to use when the range of possible future outcomes is so difficult to predict that forecasts would be highly speculative.

              The PWERM involves a forward-looking analysis of the possible future outcomes of the enterprise. This method is particularly useful when discrete future outcomes can be predicted at a high confidence level with a probability distribution. Discrete future outcomes considered under the PWERM included non-initial public offering market based outcomes as well as initial public offering scenarios. In the non-initial public offering scenarios, a large portion of the equity value is allocated to the preferred stock to reflect the preferred stock liquidation preferences. In the initial public offering scenarios, the equity value is allocated pro rata among the shares of common stock and each series of preferred stock, which causes the common stock to have a higher relative value per share than under the non-initial public offering scenario. The fair value of the enterprise determined using the initial public offering and non-initial public offering scenarios was weighted according to the board of directors' estimate of the probability of each scenario.

              Over time, as certainty developed regarding possible discrete events, including an initial public offering, or IPO, the allocation methodology utilized to allocate our enterprise value to our common stock transitioned away from exclusively the OPM, which was utilized for grants through December 31, 2011, to include a PWERM, which we utilized for grants beginning after September 26, 2012.

75


Table of Contents

              We granted stock options with the following terms between December 29, 2011 and the date of this prospectus:

Grant Date
  Number of
Options
Granted
  Exercise Price
Per Share
  Common Stock
Fair Value
Per Share
  Aggregate Grant Date
Fair Value (1)
 

December 29, 2011

    444,919   $ 6.344   $ 6.344   $ 1,806,130  

June 19, 2012

    81,720     8.840     8.840     408,640  

June 27, 2012

    173,076     8.840     8.840     915,352  

September 28, 2012

    88,456     9.152     9.152     450,576  

December 14, 2012

    28,839     9.932     9.932     156,048  

December 26, 2012

    95,187     9.932     9.932     524,169  

December 28, 2012

    247,927     9.932     9.932     1,348,583  

April 25, 2013

    86,432     11.284            (2)      

June 11, 2013

    156,724     11.284            (2)      

June 23, 2013

    146,626     11.284            (2)          (3)

(1)
Aggregate grant date fair value was determined using the Black-Scholes option pricing model.

(2)
Fair value determined for financial reporting purposes in connection with a reassessment performed in July 2013. Subsequent to the March 31, 2013 valuation of our common stock, in July 2013, we received an indication of the estimated preliminary price range for our common stock in this offering from the managing underwriters. In light of the short period of time that had elapsed between our April 25, 2013, June 11, 2013 and June 23, 2013 equity grants and the receipt of the estimated preliminary price range from the managing underwriters, we revised our estimated fair value of our common stock with respect to equity grants made on April 25, 2013, June 11, 2013 and June 23, 2013 to be $            , which is the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus.

(3)
Includes the aggregate grant date fair value of $            for 24,038 shares of common stock subject to an option granted in connection with the purchase of assets by us in June 2013, which will be recognized as part of the purchase price of such assets instead of stock-based compensation.

              The intrinsic value of all outstanding options as of June 30, 2013 was $             million, based on the estimated fair value for our common stock of $             per share, which is the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus.

December 2011 Awards

              As of December 29, 2011, our board of directors determined the fair value of the common stock to be $6.344 per share. We considered several objective and subjective factors, including our then-current stage of development, the value of comparable companies, the value of our assets, the purchase prices of our outstanding capital stock, the present value of our future cash flows (based upon projected revenue), the rights and preferences our current stockholders are entitled to, the lack of marketability of our common stock, the economy generally and a contemporaneous valuation report prepared for us in contemplation of such option grants, which report used the OPM valuation methodology described above given the difficulty of predicting possible future liquidity outcomes for the company at that time.

              Total enterprise value was calculated using both the income approach and the market approach. With respect to the income approach, total enterprise value was calculated using estimated cash flows based on cash flow projections for the year ending December 31, 2011 through the year

76


Table of Contents

ending December 31, 2021, which were discounted based on a weighted average cost of capital, or WACC, of 18.0%, given our stage of development and inherent risks. With respect to the market approach, our board of directors analyzed the financial performance of publicly traded companies in the consumer technology, home automation and high growth company spaces.

              Based on the process described above, our board of directors determined that it had greater confidence in the income approach compared to the market approach given the lack of comparable industry peers, so it gave more weight to the income approach to determine total enterprise value. The enterprise value was then allocated to the common stock utilizing an OPM methodology using the assumptions described above. As a result, the fair value of the common stock was determined to be $6.344 per share.

June 2012 Awards

              As of June 19, 2012 and June 27, 2012, our board of directors determined the fair value of the common stock to be $8.840 per share. We considered several objective and subjective factors, including our then-current stage of development, the value of comparable companies, the value of our assets, the purchase prices of our outstanding capital stock, the present value of our future cash flows (based upon projected revenue), the rights and preferences our current stockholders are entitled to, the lack of marketability of our common stock, the economy generally and an additional contemporaneous valuation report prepared for us in contemplation of such option grants, which report used the valuation methodology described above. Due to the continued difficulty of predicting possible future liquidity outcomes for the company, we continued to apply the OPM valuation methodology described above.

              Total enterprise value was calculated using both the income approach and the market approach. With respect to the income approach, total enterprise value was calculated using estimated cash flows based on cash flow projections for the year ending December 31, 2012 through the year ending December 31, 2022, which were discounted based on WACC of 17.0%. With respect to the market approach, our board of directors analyzed the financial performance of publicly traded companies in the consumer technology, home automation and high growth company spaces.

              Based on the process described above, our board of directors determined that it had greater confidence in the income approach compared to the market approach given the lack of comparable industry peers, so it gave more weight to the income approach to determine total enterprise value. The enterprise value was then allocated to the common stock utilizing an OPM methodology using the assumptions described above. As a result, the fair value of the common stock was determined to be $8.840 per share. The increase in value from the December 2011 grants was primarily due to an additional year of cash flow projections, our first quarter results of operations and an adjustment to our WACC given the slight reduction in the perceived risk associated with our company.

September 2012 Awards

              As of September 28, 2012, our board of directors determined the fair value of the common stock to be $9.152 per share. We considered several objective and subjective factors, including our then-current stage of development, the value of comparable companies, the value of our assets, the purchase prices of our outstanding capital stock, the present value of our future cash flows (based upon projected revenue), the rights and preferences our current stockholders are entitled to, the lack of marketability of our common stock, the economy generally and an additional contemporaneous valuation report prepared for us in contemplation of such option grants, which report used a hybrid of the OPM and PWERM valuation methodologies described above. Since the date of the last report, we had begun considering the possibility of an initial public offering. As a result, the range of discrete events, specifically IPO and non-IPO scenarios, became easier to predict, therefore PWERM was utilized in part to estimate the fair value of our common stock during this period.

77


Table of Contents

              The expected outcomes were weighted between an IPO scenario occurring during early to middle of 2013, which was valued using the market approach, and a non-IPO scenario that involved remaining a private company, which was valued using the income approach. The enterprise value under each of these scenarios was, in part, based on cash flow projections for year ending December 31, 2012 through the year ending December 31, 2022, which were discounted by a WACC of 17.0%. As a result, the fair value of the common stock was determined to be $9.152 per share. The increase in fair value from June 2012 was primarily due to our results of operations and our preliminary planning for an IPO, including (i) management provided our board of directors with a preliminary initial public offering timeline for consideration, and (ii) the board of directors requested that management proceed with the beginning stages of commencing an initial public offering, including conducting preliminary meetings with various investment banks.

December 2012 Awards

              As of December 14, 2012, December 26, 2012 and December 28, 2012, our board of directors, or a committee thereof, determined the fair value of the common stock to be $9.932 per share. We considered several objective and subjective factors, including our then-current stage of development, the value of comparable companies, the value of our assets, the purchase prices of our outstanding capital stock, the present value of our future cash flows (based upon projected revenue), the rights and preferences our current stockholders are entitled to, the lack of marketability of our common stock, the economy generally and an additional contemporaneous valuation report prepared for us in contemplation of such option grants, which report used a hybrid of the OPM and PWERM valuation methodologies described above. Since the date of the last report, we had taken additional steps toward an initial public offering. Given the continued potential for an IPO scenario, PWERM was utilized in part to estimate the fair value of our common stock during this period.

              The expected outcomes continued to be weighted between an IPO scenario occurring during early to middle of 2013, which was valued using the market approach, and a non-IPO scenario that involved remaining a private company, which was valued using the income approach. The enterprise value under each of these scenarios was, in part, based on cash flow projections for year ending December 31, 2012 through the year ending December 31, 2022, which were discounted by a WACC of 16.0%. As a result, the fair value of the common stock was determined to be $9.932 per share. The increase in fair value from September 2012 was primarily due to our results of operations as well as our continued steps towards an IPO, including the selection of underwriters, an organizational meeting held in early December and the preparation of a registration statement on Form S-1.

April 2013 Awards

              As of April 25, 2013, our board of directors determined the fair value of the common stock to be $11.284 per share. We considered several objective and subjective factors, including our then-current stage of development, the value of comparable companies, the value of our assets, the purchase prices of our outstanding capital stock, the present value of our future cash flows (based upon projected revenue), the rights and preferences our current stockholders are entitled to, the lack of marketability of our common stock, the economy generally and an additional contemporaneous valuation prepared for us in contemplation of such option grants, which used a hybrid of the OPM and PWERM valuation methodologies described above. Since the date of the last award, we had taken additional steps toward an initial public offering. Given the continued potential for an IPO scenario, the PWERM was utilized in part to estimate the fair value of our common stock during this period.

              The expected outcomes were weighted between an IPO scenario occurring during the middle of 2013, which was valued using the market approach, and a non-IPO scenario that involved remaining a private company, which was valued using the income approach. The enterprise value under each of these scenarios was, in part, based on cash flow projections for the year ending December 31, 2013 through the year ending December 31, 2022, which were discounted by a WACC of 16.0%. As a result,

78


Table of Contents

the fair value of the common stock was determined to be $11.284 per share. The increase in fair value from December 2012 was primarily due to our results of operations as well as our continued steps towards an IPO, including the continued preparation of a registration statement on Form S-1.

              Subsequent to the April 25, 2013 stock option grants, we revised the estimate of the fair value of our common stock for financial reporting purposes, and assigned an estimated fair value of $                        per share, which is the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, to the stock options granted on April 25, 2013. As the exercise price of the April 25, 2013 stock option grants was $11.284 per share, we are recognizing additional stock-based compensation expense over the vesting period of these stock options due to the revised estimate of the fair value.

June 2013 Awards

              As of June 11, 2013 and June 23, 2013, our board of directors determined the fair value of the common stock to be $11.284 per share. We considered several objective and subjective factors, including our then-current stage of development, the value of comparable companies, the value of our assets, the purchase prices of our outstanding capital stock, the present value of our future cash flows (based upon projected revenue), the rights and preferences our current stockholders are entitled to, the lack of marketability of our common stock, the economy generally and an additional contemporaneous valuation prepared for us in contemplation of such option grants, which used a hybrid of the OPM and PWERM valuation methodologies described above. Given the continued potential for an IPO scenario, the PWERM was utilized in part to estimate the fair value of our common stock during this period.

              The expected outcomes were weighted between an IPO scenario occurring during the middle of 2013, which was valued using the market approach, and a non-IPO scenario that involved remaining a private company, which was valued using the income approach. The enterprise value under each of these scenarios was, in part, based on cash flow projections for the year ending December 31, 2013 through the year ending December 31, 2022, which were discounted by a WACC of 16.0%. As a result, the fair value of the common stock was determined to be $11.284 per share.

              Subsequent to the June 11, 2013 and June 23, 2013 stock option grants, we revised the estimate of the fair value of our common stock for financial reporting purposes, and assigned an estimated fair value of $                        per share, which is the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, to the stock options granted on June 11, 2013 and June 23, 2013. As the exercise price of the June 11, 2013 and June 23, 2013 stock option grants was $11.284 per share, we are recognizing additional stock-based compensation expense over the vesting period of these stock options due to the revised estimate of the fair value.

Recent Accounting Pronouncements

              In May 2011, the FASB issued new guidance for fair value measurements to provide a consistent definition of fair value and ensure that the fair value measurement and disclosure requirements are similar between GAAP and International Financial Reporting Standards. The guidance changes certain fair value measurement principles and enhances the disclosure requirements, particularly for level 3 fair value measurements. We adopted this guidance prospectively January 1, 2012 and noted no significant impact on our results of operations, financial position or cash flows.

              In February 2013, the FASB issued ASU 2013-02, "Comprehensive Income: Reporting of Amounts Reclassified Out of Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income." The amended guidance requires an entity to present the effects on the line items of net income of significant reclassifications out of accumulated other comprehensive income if the amount being reclassified is required under U.S. generally accepted accounting principles to be reclassified in its entirety to net income in the same reporting period. The guidance is effective prospectively for the reporting periods beginning after December 15, 2012. We do not anticipate the adoption of the amended guidance to have significant impact on its consolidated financial statements.

79


Table of Contents

              In June 2011, the FASB issued new guidance that improves the comparability, consistency, and transparency of financial reporting and increases the prominence of items reported in other comprehensive income, or OCI, by eliminating the option to present components of OCI as part of the statement of changes in stockholders' equity. The amendments in this standard require that all non-owner changes in stockholders' equity be presented either in a single continuous statement of comprehensive income or in two separate but consecutive statements. Subsequently, in December 2011, the FASB issued additional guidance, which indefinitely defers the requirement to present on the face of the financial statements reclassification adjustments for items that are reclassified from OCI to net income in the statement where the components of net income and the components of OCI are presented. The amendments to these standards do not change the items that must be reported in OCI, when an item of OCI must be reclassified to net income, or change the option for an entity to present components. This new guidance was effective for us beginning January 1, 2012 and was required to be applied retrospectively. The adoption of this guidance did not have an impact on our results of operations, financial position or cash flows as it relates only to financial statement presentation.

80


Table of Contents


BUSINESS

Overview

              We are a leading provider of automation and control solutions for the connected home. We unlock the potential of connected devices, making entertainment systems easier to use, homes more comfortable and energy efficient, and families more secure. We provide our consumers with the ability to integrate music, video, lighting, temperature, security, communications and other functionalities into a unified home automation solution that enhances our consumers' daily lives. More than 75% of our consumers have integrated two or more of these functionalities with our solution. At the center of our solution is our advanced software platform, which we provide through our products that interface with a wide variety of connected devices that are developed both by us and by third parties.

              Our solution functions as the operating system of the home, making connected devices work together to control, automate and personalize the homes of our consumers. For example, our solution can be configured so that:

              Consumer need for simplicity and a personalized experience, combined with advances in technology, are driving rapid growth in the connected home market. As a result of the significant growth in smart devices, mobile data networks, home broadband access and in-home wireless networking, consumers are more comfortable with ubiquitous connectivity and device interoperability. Accustomed to network connectivity and control of their digital lives, consumers are now looking for affordable ways to extend this functionality into their homes, driving growth in the mainstream home automation market. According to ABI Research, this mainstream segment of the home automation market was estimated to be $571 million in 2012, and is expected to grow at a compound annual growth rate, or CAGR, of 35% to $2.6 billion by 2017.

              We were founded in 2003 to deliver a mainstream home automation solution by enabling consumers to unify their connected devices into a personalized system at an accessible and affordable entry point. Sold through our worldwide network of over 2,800 active direct dealers, our solution sits at the center of the mainstream home automation market by providing integrated and extensible control of over 6,400 third-party devices and services. These devices and services span a broad variety of product categories including music, video, lighting, temperature, security, communications and other

81


Table of Contents

devices. Our platform capabilities provide consumers with solutions that are easy to use, comprehensive, personalized, flexible and affordable.

              Based on our analysis, we estimate that we have automated more than 120,000 homes representing cumulative sales of more than 275,000 of our controller appliances, the brain of the connected home. We sell and deliver our solutions through an extensive worldwide dealer and distributor network and have solutions installed in 81 countries. Our top 100 dealers represented 24% of our total revenue in 2012.

              We generated revenue of $74.9 million, $93.4 million and $109.5 million in 2010, 2011 and 2012, respectively, and $26.6 million for the three months ended March 31, 2013. We had a net loss of $16.3 million, $3.9 million and $3.7 million in 2010, 2011 and 2012, respectively, and $1.5 million for the three months ended March 31, 2013.

Our Industry

Home Automation

              Within the last decade, the pace of innovation in the electronics industry has accelerated rapidly. Network-aware devices—such as televisions, smartphones, tablets, thermostats, appliances and security systems—that separately connect to a home network create the "connected home." Home automation technology integrates devices in the connected home, unlocking the collective potential of these devices working together to improve consumers' lives. The home automation market has reached a major inflection point and is becoming a mainstream offering accessible by a broad base of consumers.

              Home automation solutions unify the control of music, video, lighting, temperature, security, communications and other devices in the connected home to provide consumers with improved convenience, comfort, energy efficiency and security. The key functional elements of home automation include:

Market Opportunity

              Consumers are becoming more reliant on network-aware devices in their everyday lives, contributing to the creation of a large opportunity in the mainstream home automation market. Growth in smart devices, such as smartphones and tablets, and the ubiquity of wireless networks have combined to create the "connected consumer." Accustomed to connectivity, centralized access to content and control from anywhere using any device, consumers are now looking for new areas where they can extend the utility, security and enjoyment of this "always connected" capability. The home—with its increasing capabilities in the form of networks (such as broadband, ZigBee and Wi-Fi), connected

82


Table of Contents

devices (such as tablets, smartphones, TVs and multi-room audio systems) and smart systems (such as lighting, temperature and security)—is the next center of attention for the connected consumer.

              An automated home is created through technologies that unify and personalize the control of lighting, temperature, music, entertainment, security, consumer appliances and more, whether throughout the entire home or limited to a single room. The home automation market has traditionally been fragmented as participants offered point products that only control one application (such as entertainment or temperature), managed services (such as security) or luxury installations (such as an expensive whole home custom programming system that enables a single control point to turn off lights, arm the security system, lower the blinds and lock the doors). As consumers look for a unified solution at an affordable price point, they are looking beyond the traditional market participants.

              The share of the market served by the mainstream home automation segment is expanding as a number of market dynamics evolve, including:

              As consumer awareness of home automation grows and expectations for interoperable solutions increase, the mainstream segment of the home automation market is expected to expand rapidly. The mainstream segment of the home automation market was estimated to be a $571 million market in 2012 and to become a $2.6 billion market by 2017, representing a CAGR of 35%, as consumers look for centralized solutions to provide personalized control and automation of their homes.

Consumer Requirements

              For the mainstream consumer to embrace a home automation solution, the solution must have the following attributes:

83


Table of Contents

Limitations of Traditional Approaches

              The home automation market has traditionally been served by three categories that in general have been unable to meet all consumer requirements or overcome the impediments to broad market adoption.

84


Table of Contents

Our Solution

              The Control4 solution, built around our advanced software platform, sits at the center of the fast growing mainstream segment of the home automation market. We unlock the potential of connected devices, making entertainment systems easier to use, homes more comfortable and energy efficient, and families more secure. Our solution functions as the operating system of the home, integrating music, video, lighting, temperature, security, communications and other devices into a unified automation solution that enhances our consumers' lives.


The Control4 Solution

GRAPHIC

              The Control4 solution integrates more than 6,400 third-party devices and systems into a unified, easy-to-use solution for mainstream consumers. As a result, our solution provides the consumer with the following benefits:

85


Table of Contents

Our Growth Strategy

              Our goal is to be the leading provider of mainstream home automation solutions and the operating system of choice for the home. The following are key elements of our growth strategy:

86


Table of Contents

87


Table of Contents

Our Products and Services

              The primary benefits we provide consumers and dealers lie in the value and competitive differentiation of our software platform. We deliver value and differentiation to consumers and generate revenues by embedding our software into a range of physical products. Our products sit at the center of the connected home and are designed to be:

Software Platform

              At the center of the Control4 product line is the Control4 Home Operating System, which we refer to as the C4 OS, and the associated application software and software development kits, or SDKs. The high-level software components include:


Control4 Navigator Resides on Many Interface Devices

GRAPHIC

88


Table of Contents

Products with Embedded Software and Services

              Our products leverage our software platform to provide consumers with a comprehensive and easy-to-use connected home experience. We design and manufacture our products via contract manufacturers as well as certify partner products for sale through our dealers. Our products and services include:

89


Table of Contents

              Sales of our controller appliances, including software, represented 39% of our total revenue in 2012.

              Our installed solutions include functionalities in the following percentages:

Video

    100 %

Music

    57  

Lighting

    48  

Communications

    32  

Security

    29  

Temperature

    24  

              More than 75% of our consumers have integrated two or more of these functionalities with our solution.

Our Distribution Network

              In 2005, we started selling our solutions through a network of over 450 independent dealers. Since that time, our distribution network has grown to over 2,800 active direct dealers and distributors in 81 countries. Dealers range in size from small family businesses to very large organizations.

              Our dealers are home automation specialists that have significant experience in designing, installing and servicing both low- and high-voltage systems including music, video, security, communications and temperature control. Every Control4 dealer has gone through extensive training and has passed the necessary certification tests—either in one of our training facilities located in the United States or the United Kingdom, or in a training facility of one of our distributors. Every installer for each dealer must complete course work and pass pre-training examinations, as well as pass rigorous testing at the conclusion of the multi-day formal training in order to become certified to sell and install our solutions.

              We sell directly through dealers in the United States, Canada, the United Kingdom and 40 other countries. We partner with 27 distributors to serve 38 additional countries where currently we do not have dealer training and support facilities. Our distributors recruit, train and manage dealers within their region and also help dealers find country specific solutions for unique needs based on the special home automation market characteristics within each country. In recent years, we have moved more toward a dealer-direct model in specific international regions as we have added and continue to add sales and support staff, namely in the United Kingdom, China and India.

90


Table of Contents

              During the years ended December 31, 2010, 2011 and 2012 and the three months ended March 31, 2013, none of our dealers or distributors accounted for more than 5% of our revenue. None of our dealers or distributors have minimum or long-term purchase obligations. Dealer orders are typically placed on a project-by-project basis. As such, our dealers do not typically carry significant levels of inventory. The resulting just-in-time model helps reduce dealer inventory investment and also reduces dealer returns. Our dealers around the world are each responsible for local marketing, selling, installing and servicing the consumer.

Our Partners

              The home automation market is made up of a collection of thousands of electronically controllable products made by hundreds of key manufacturers. We believe that our success has come, in part, due to our success in forming relationships with many of these manufacturers. As of January 2013, we had agreements with over 130 manufacturers, of which 42 have formally submitted their devices to us for Control4 certification so that our worldwide dealer network can be assured that these third-party devices work well with our platform.

              In addition to standard interoperability with Control4, more and more manufacturers are realizing the value our technology can bring when it is embedded inside their products. For example, we recently launched our device auto-discovery technology, SDDP, which enables seamless installation of devices by embedding code at the manufacturer, making it easier for dealers and consumers to add new products to existing systems. Sony recently launched two home theater receivers with our platform embedded inside, giving consumers the full power of our software to automate the home.

              Third-party manufacturers are currently selling 22 brands through our online store. This provides manufacturers valuable reach into our trained dealer network, and it helps our dealers gain easy access to 426 products that they know are certified by Control4. We also partner with other companies for purposes of strategic initiatives.

91


Table of Contents

Our Technology

Core Automation Enabling Technology

              At the core of the Control4 platform is the C4 OS. The C4 OS consists of two main components, Director and Navigator software, that work in concert with different modules within the system to provide consumers with a unified and comprehensive connected home experience. These modules help our software platform manage media, update connected devices and interoperate using a variety of communication protocols including Ethernet, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, ZigBee, Infrared, or IR, serial interfaces and more. Our software platform does not currently support the communication protocol Z-Wave. The following diagram shows the relationship between Director and Navigator software:


Control4 OS Architecture

CHART

92


Table of Contents

Simple Device Discovery Protocol (SDDP)

              We have a patented device auto-discovery technology called Simple Device Discovery Protocol, or SDDP, that we developed to enable seamless installation of devices in our system. When a new SDDP-enabled device is installed in a home, the device sends out a signal that is immediately discovered by the system, thereby allowing the new device to easily be added.

4Sight Subscription Service

              We offer a subscription service called 4Sight that enables remote access to the connected home without exposing the installer or consumer to the complexities of communicating around firewalls and private Internet Protocol addresses. This service facilitates connections between remote client devices and our systems through a cloud-based service. Using 4Sight, consumers can remotely monitor and control their Control4 systems as if they were at their homes.

Our Research and Development

              Our flexible research and development model relies upon a combination of in-house staff and offshore design and manufacturing partners to improve and enhance our existing products and services,

93


Table of Contents

as well as develop new products, features and functionality in a cost-effective manner. We believe that our software platform is critical to expanding our leadership position within the mainstream home automation market. As a result, we devote the majority of our research and development resources to software development. We work closely with our consumers to understand their current and future needs and have designed a product development process that captures and integrates feedback from our consumers.

              As of March 31, 2013, we had 148 employees in our research and development organization, substantially all of whom were located at our headquarters in Salt Lake City, Utah. Our research and development expenses were $19.2 million in 2011, $20.3 million in 2012 and $6.1 million for the three months ended March 31, 2013. We intend to continue to significantly invest in research and development to expand our solutions and capabilities in the future.

Our Manufacturing

              We outsource the manufacturing of our hardware products to contract manufacturers. The majority of our hardware products are manufactured by Sanmina and LiteOn at their respective facilities located in southern China, with additional manufacturing performed by six contract manufacturers located throughout Asia. Our agreement with Sanmina currently has no set term and may be terminated by us in writing at any time. Our agreement with LiteOn expires in December 2014, after which it automatically renews for successive one-year terms unless either party terminates the agreement with 180 days' notice. Our manufacturing partners assemble our products using our design specifications, quality assurance programs and standards, and procure components and assemble our products based on our demand forecasts. These forecasts represent our estimates of future demand for our products based upon historical trends and analysis from our sales and product management functions. We generally plan to have an average of six weeks of inventory on hand and in transit at any given time. We maintain fulfillment centers in Salt Lake City, Utah and York, England. Our manufacturing partners currently ship all hardware products to Utah and then we ship them directly to our dealers and distributors around the world.

              We have multiple sources for most of our components. However, we do depend on single source manufacturers for certain critical components, including processors, memory modules and touch panels. We can choose to change processor and memory modules for any of our products but because of high implementation costs, we generally choose to make these changes only upon development of new products. We also rely on certain custom connectors, cables and mechanical enclosures for our hardware products that are single sourced because of the high tooling costs of sourcing the components from multiple suppliers. In each of these cases, we own the drawings and design of these custom components.

Our Marketing

              Our marketing team supports our sales channel with dealer-directed advertising and promotions, lead-generation, social media engagements and training events, as well as the design and production of consumer-facing collateral, showroom signage and market-specific advertising. Our website is the anchor to our online and social media strategy, from which we direct leads to our dealers. Control4's bi-annual magazine, Home Smart Home, features lifestyle stories of Control4 installations from around the world and is available on iTunes and on our website. The publication is also reproduced and distributed to customers and prospects on our behalf by our dealers and partners.

              We are active participants at global industry conferences and maintain a significant presence at CEDIA trade shows. Beyond CEDIA in the United States, we sponsored the 2012 CEDIA Conference in London and an exhibit at Integrated Systems Europe, or ISE, the annual industry trade show held in

94


Table of Contents

Amsterdam. We are frequently featured in the trade press and maintain strong relationships with the industry's key analysts and associations.

              In 2012, we also initiated strategic marketing alliances with partners such as Sony and Sub-Zero Wolf to broaden our marketing reach beyond the sales channel and go directly to the consumer. We also recently completed our first Control4 showroom, constructed within ABT Electronics, to bring the Control4 experience to life to their broad customer base.

              We believe that partnering with device manufacturers, leveraging co-marketing partnerships, expanding our sales channels and increasing our brand recognition among consumers are key components of our growth strategy.

Our Competition

              The market for home automation systems is fragmented, highly competitive and continually evolving. Our current competitors fall into several categories:

              Companies that provide popular point solutions have and may continue to eliminate or restrict our ability to control and be compatible with their products. For example, a thermostat company has restricted the interoperability of its products with our solutions.

              In addition, large technology companies such as Apple, Google, Microsoft and Samsung offer control capabilities among their own products, applications and services, and have ongoing development efforts to address the broader home automation market. Given the growth dynamics of this market, there are many new and existing companies targeting portions of the mainstream home automation market. To the extent that consumers adopt products, applications and services from a single large technology company or any of these companies broaden their home automation capabilities, we will face increased competition.

              The principal competitive factors in our market include the:

              We believe that our home automation solution competes favorably with respect to these factors. Nevertheless, many of our competitors have substantially greater financial, technical and other resources, greater name recognition, larger sales and marketing budgets, broader distribution channels, and larger and more mature intellectual property portfolios than we do.

95


Table of Contents

Our Intellectual Property

              Our success and ability to compete effectively depend in part on our ability to protect our proprietary technology and to establish and adequately protect our intellectual property rights. To accomplish these objectives, we rely on a combination of patent, trademark, copyright and trade secret laws in the United States and other jurisdictions, as well as license agreements, confidentiality agreements and other contractual protections.

              As of March 31, 2013, we owned 34 issued United States patents (16 of which are design patents) that are scheduled to expire between 2025 and 2030, with respect to utility patents, and between 2020 and 2022, with respect to design patents. We continue to file patent applications in multiple jurisdictions and as of March 31, 2013, we had two patent applications allowed, 13 patent applications published and 11 patent applications pending in the United States. We also had five issued patents and 14 pending patent applications under foreign jurisdictions and treaties such as Canada, Australia, New Zealand, the United Kingdom and the European Patent Convention. The claims for which we have sought patent protection apply to both our hardware and software products. Our patent and patent applications generally apply to the features and functions of our C4 OS and the applications associated with our platform.

              We also rely on several registered and unregistered trademarks to protect our brand. We have registered the trademarks Control4, Control4 My Home, the Control4 logo and design, 4Store and Everyday Easy in the United States, and Control4 in the European Union. We have an additional five unregistered trademarks in the United States and 15 in foreign jurisdictions such as the European Union, China, India, Mexico and Brazil.

              We have filed for United States copyright protection for our source code for all major releases of our software. We also license software from third parties for integration into or use with our products, including open-source software and other commercially available software.

              In addition, we seek to protect our intellectual property rights by requiring our employees and independent contractors involved in development to enter into agreements acknowledging that all inventions, trade secrets, works of authorship, developments, concepts, processes, improvements and other works generated by them on our behalf are our intellectual property, and assigning to us any rights, including intellectual property rights, that they may claim in those works.

Our Employees

              As of March 31, 2013, we had 333 full-time employees, including 310 employees in the United States and 23 employees internationally. None of our employees are represented by a labor union with respect to his or her employment with us. We have not experienced any work stoppages and we consider our relations with our employees to be good.

Our Facilities

              Our corporate headquarters are located in Salt Lake City, Utah, where we lease approximately 56,000 square feet of commercial space under a lease that expires on June 30, 2018. We use this space for sales, research and development, customer service and administrative purposes. We also lease approximately 35,000 square feet of warehouse space in Salt Lake City, Utah under a lease that expires on March 31, 2017. In addition, we lease approximately 5,624 square feet of commercial space in York, United Kingdom under two separate leases that expire on November 14, 2014 and January 1, 2016. We use these properties for sales and training purposes and as fulfillment centers for the United Kingdom.

              In connection with our sales efforts in the United States and abroad, we lease office space typically on a short-term renewable basis domestically in San Jose, California, Santa Clara, California,

96


Table of Contents

Charlotte, North Carolina and Chicago, Illinois, and internationally in York, United Kingdom, Shanghai, China, Bangalore, India and Seoul, South Korea.

              We believe that our facilities are suitable to meet our current needs. We intend to expand our existing facilities or add new facilities as we add employees and enter new geographic markets, and we believe that suitable additional or alternative space will be available as needed to accommodate any such growth. However, we expect to incur additional expenses in connection with such new or expanded facilities.

Our Legal Proceedings

              From time to time, we may become involved in legal proceedings arising in the ordinary course of our business. We are not presently a party to any legal proceedings that, if determined adversely to us, we believe would individually or in the aggregate have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations, financial condition or cash flows.

97


Table of Contents


MANAGEMENT

Executive Officers and Directors

              The following table sets forth the names, ages and positions of our executive officers and directors as of March 31, 2013:

Name
  Age   Position

Martin Plaehn

    55   President, Chief Executive Officer and Director

Dan Strong

    54   Chief Financial Officer

William B. West

    50   Founder, Chief Strategy Officer and Chairman of the Board

Eric Anderson

    54   Senior Vice President, Products

James B. Arnold

    56   Senior Vice President, Sales

Greg Bishop

    54   General Counsel and Chief Compliance Officer

Susan Cashen

    52   Senior Vice President, Marketing

Jeff Dungan

    43   Senior Vice President, Supply Chain Operations and Senior Vice President, Business Development

Rob Born (1)(3)

    45   Director

David C. Habiger (2)(3)

    44   Director

Len Jordan (2)

    47   Director

Christopher B. Paisley (1)(3)

    61   Director

Scott Petty (1)

    50   Director

Steven Vassallo (2)

    42   Director

(1)
Member of the Audit Committee

(2)
Member of the Compensation Committee

(3)
Member of the Nominating and Corporate Governance Committee

               Martin Plaehn has served as our President and Chief Executive Officer, and a member of our board of directors since September 2011. Prior to joining our company, Mr. Plaehn served as senior vice president of product and service development at RealNetworks, Inc., a provider of Internet media delivery software and services, from 2010 to 2011. Prior to that, Mr. Plaehn served as an advisor to chief executive officers, executive teams and investors for technology companies from 2008 to 2010. Prior to that, Mr. Plaehn served as the president and chief executive officer at Bungee Labs, a cloud computing and platform-as-a-service company, from 2006 to 2008. Prior to that, Mr. Plaehn served as executive vice president of technology products and services at RealNetworks, Inc., from 1999 through 2004, and then led RealNetworks, Inc.'s casual games division from 2004 to 2005. Prior to that, Mr. Plaehn served as chairman and chief executive officer of Viewpoint Digital, which was acquired by CA, Inc., an information technology management company, in 1998. Mr. Plaehn holds a Bachelor of Arts in mathematics from the University of California, San Diego and is a graduate of the Executive Program for Scientists and Engineers at the University of California, San Diego.

              We believe that Mr. Plaehn is qualified to serve as a director based on the perspective and experience he brings as our President and Chief Executive Officer and his experience as a seasoned executive.

               Dan Strong has served as our Chief Financial Officer since January 2008. Prior to joining our company, Mr. Strong served as the chief financial officer at iBAHN, a hospitality networking company, from 2004 to 2008. Prior to joining iBAHN, Mr. Strong served as vice president of financial planning and analysis, vice president and corporate controller, and interim chief financial officer at Iomega Corporation, a producer of storage hardware, from 1996 to 2004. Mr. Strong has also held executive-level corporate finance positions at Campus Pipeline, Inc., a developer of a software platform for colleges and universities. Mr. Strong holds a Bachelor of Science in accounting from the Eccles School of Business at the University of Utah.

98


Table of Contents

               William B. West co-founded our company in March 2003 and has served as the Chairman of our board of directors since October 2011. From 2003 to 2011, Mr. West served as our chief executive officer. Prior to that, Mr. West co-founded STSN (now known as iBAHN), a broadband services company designed for business travelers, and PHAST Corporation, a manufacturer of high-end home automation equipment. Mr. West holds a Bachelor of Arts in finance from the University of Utah and a Master of Business Administration from the Wharton School at the University of Pennsylvania. Mr. West also holds the Chartered Financial Analyst designation.

              We believe that Mr. West is qualified to serve as a director based on the perspective and experience he brings as one of our co-founders, his experience as a seasoned executive and his knowledge of the industry in which we operate.

               Eric Anderson has served as our Senior Vice President, Products, since June 2012. Prior to joining our company, Mr. Anderson was vice president, product management at NetIQ Corporation, a software company, from 2011 to 2012. Prior to that, Mr. Anderson held various executive positions at Novell, Inc., a security management software company, from 2006 to 2011, including chief technology officer and vice president of product management. Prior to that, Mr. Anderson, served in various management positions at BMC Software, Inc., a business service management software company, and Compaq Computer Corporation. Mr. Anderson holds a Bachelor of Science in marketing and a Master of Business Administration from Brigham Young University.

               James B. Arnold has served as our Senior Vice President, Sales, since February 2007. Prior to joining our company, Mr. Arnold served as senior vice president of sales and distribution at DIRECTV, Inc. from 2002 to 2006. Mr. Arnold holds a Bachelor of Arts in psychology and sociology from Washington University in St. Louis.

               Greg Bishop has served as our Vice President and General Counsel since March 2008. In January 2013, Mr. Bishop was also named our Chief Compliance Officer. Prior to joining our company, Mr. Bishop operated his own legal consulting firm, Outsourced GC, PLLC, from 2004 to 2008. Prior to that, Mr. Bishop was general counsel of Murex S.A. in Paris, France, a developer of software solutions for large financial institutions, from 2002 to 2004. Prior to that, Mr. Bishop held executive-level legal positions at Campus Pipeline, Inc., a developer of a software platform for colleges and universities, and Iomega Corporation, a producer of storage hardware. Prior to that, Mr. Bishop worked as legal counsel for Corning, Incorporated. Mr. Bishop holds a Bachelor of Arts in English literature, a Master of Business Administration and a Juris Doctor from Brigham Young University.

               Susan Cashen has served as our Senior Vice President, Marketing, since June 2010. Prior to that, Ms. Cashen managed marketing for our company's energy business unit from 2009 to 2010. Prior to joining our company, Ms. Cashen served as vice president of marketing at MyWaves, a mobile video service, from 2006 to 2009. Prior to that, Ms. Cashen served as the vice president of communications and vice president of marketing at TiVo Inc. from 2000 to 2005. Ms. Cashen holds a Bachelor of Arts in Russian studies from Hamilton College.

               Jeff Dungan has served as our Senior Vice President, Business Development, since April 2010, and our Senior Vice President, Supply Chain/Manufacturing, since June 2006. Prior to joining our company, Mr. Dungan held positions of senior director of information technology operations and general and administrative business solutions for BEA Systems, an enterprise infrastructure software products company, from 2001 to 2006. Mr. Dungan holds a Bachelor of Science in computer and electrical engineering from Colorado State University.

               Rob Born has been a member of our board of directors since June 2011. Mr. Born joined Thomas Weisel Venture Partners in 2001 and is currently managing the fund as a partner. Mr. Born has served on the boards of several private companies in the past. Mr. Born also holds a Bachelor of Arts in English literature from Amherst College and a Master of Business Administration and a Juris Doctor from Duke University.

99


Table of Contents

              We believe that Mr. Born is qualified to serve as a director based on his experience as a seasoned investor, a manager of a fund and a current and former director of many companies and his knowledge of the industry in which we operate.

               David C. Habiger has served as a member of our board of directors since September 2012. From 2011 to 2012, Mr. Habiger served as chief executive officer of NDS Group Ltd., a provider of video software and content security solutions, and served in that role until shortly prior to the time that the NDS business was acquired by Cisco Systems, Inc. Prior to that, Mr. Habiger served as chief executive officer of Sonic Solutions, Inc., a provider of software for digital media prior to its sale to Rovi Corporation, from 2005 to 2011. Mr. Habiger currently serves as a member of the board of directors of two public companies, RealD, Inc. and Echo Global Logistics, Inc., as well as several private companies. Mr. Habiger holds a Bachelor of Business Administration from St. Norbert College and a Master of Business Administration from the University of Chicago.

              We believe that Mr. Habiger is qualified to serve as a director based on his service on other public company boards, his prior executive leadership and his experience in and knowledge of the industry in which we operate.

               Len Jordan has been a member of our board of directors since June 2004. Mr. Jordan has served as the managing director of Madrona Venture Group since 2012 and joined Madrona Venture Group in 2010. Additionally, Mr. Jordan has served as a general partner of Frazier Technology Ventures since 2004. Prior to joining Frazier Technology Ventures, Mr. Jordan served as a senior vice president at RealNetworks, Inc. Mr. Jordan currently serves on the boards of several private companies. Mr. Jordan holds Bachelors of Science in finance and economics from the Eccles School of Business at the University of Utah.

              We believe that Mr. Jordan is qualified to serve as a director based on his experience as a seasoned investor and a current and former director of many companies and his knowledge of the industry in which we operate.

               Christopher B. Paisley has been a member of our board of directors since May 2006. Mr. Paisley served as chief financial officer of 3Com Corporation from 1985 to 2000. Mr. Paisley has served on the board of directors of Volterra Semiconductor Corporation, a semiconductor company, since 2000, Equinix, Inc., a networking company, since 2007, Ambarella Corporation, a semiconductor video processing solutions company, since 2012, Fortinet, Inc., a network security company, since 2012 and a member of its board of directors since 2004, and Bridge Capital Holdings, a holding company for venture capital banking, since 2011. Mr. Paisley served as a director of 3PAR Inc., a utility storage company that was publicly traded prior to its acquisition by Hewlett-Packard Company, from 2006 to 2010, and Electronics for Imaging, Inc., a digital printing company, from 2004 to 2008. Mr. Paisley currently also serves on the boards of several private companies. Mr. Paisley has been the Dean's Executive Professor of Accounting at the Leavey School of Business at Santa Clara University since 2001. Mr. Paisley holds a Bachelor of Arts in business economics from the University of California, Santa Barbara and a Master of Business Administration from the Anderson School at the University of California, Los Angeles.

              We believe that Mr. Paisley is qualified to serve as a director based on his service on other public company boards, broad industry expertise, extensive financial leadership experience and insight into SEC reporting and compliance.

               Scott Petty has served as a member of our board of directors since July 2003. Mr. Petty co-founded vSpring Capital (now Signal Peak Ventures) in 2000 and has been a managing director since its formation. Prior to that, Mr. Petty was chief operating officer and a member of the board of directors of Zuka Juice, Inc., a nutritional products company, from 1996 to 1999. Prior to that, Mr. Petty was a consultant with Bain & Company for seven years. Mr. Petty received a Bachelor of Science in economics from Brigham Young University and a Master of Business Administration from Harvard Business School.

100


Table of Contents

              We believe that Mr. Petty is qualified to serve as a director based on his experience as a seasoned investor and a current and former director of many companies and his knowledge of the industry in which we operate.

               Steven Vassallo has served as a member of our board of directors since March 2011. Mr. Vassallo joined Foundation Capital in 2007 and has been a general partner since 2011. Prior to that, Mr. Vassallo helped launch Ning, Inc., a consumer Internet service, from 2004 to 2006. Prior to that, Mr. Vassallo was director of engineering at Immersion Corporation, from 1999 to 2002. Mr. Vassallo earned a Bachelor of Science in mechanical engineering from Worcester Polytechnic Institute, a Master of Science in mechanical engineering from Stanford University and a Master of Business Administration from the Stanford Graduate School of Business.

              We believe that Mr. Vassallo is qualified to serve as a director based on his experience as a seasoned investor and a current and former director of many companies and his knowledge of the industry in which we operate.

              There are no family relationships among any of our directors and/or executive officers.

Board Composition

              Our board of directors is currently composed of eight members. Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and bylaws provide that the number of our directors shall be fixed from time to time by a resolution of the majority of our board of directors. Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation to be effective upon completion of this offering will divide our board of directors into three staggered classes of directors. At each annual meeting of stockholders, a class of directors will be elected for a three-year term to succeed the same class of directors whose terms are then expiring. The terms of the directors will expire upon the election and qualification of successor directors at the annual meeting of stockholders to be held during 2014 for the Class I directors, 2015 for the Class II directors and 2016 for the Class III directors.

    Our Class I directors will be Messrs. Jordan, Petty and Vassallo.

    Our Class II directors will be Messrs. Born and West.

    Our Class III directors will be Messrs. Habiger, Paisley and Plaehn.

              The division of our board of directors into three classes with staggered three-year terms may delay or prevent a change of our management or a change of control. See "Description of Capital Stock—Anti-Takeover Effects of Delaware Law and Our Certificate of Incorporation and Bylaws" for a discussion of other anti-takeover provisions found in our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and bylaws.

Director Independence

              NASDAQ rules require that independent directors must comprise a majority of a listed company's board of directors within a specified period of the completion of its offering. In addition, these rules require that, subject to specified exceptions, each member of a listed company's audit, compensation and nominating and corporate governance committees be independent. Audit committee members must also satisfy the independence criteria set forth in Rule 10A-3 under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended. In addition, NASDAQ rules state that a director will only qualify as an "independent director" if, in the opinion of that company's board of directors, that person does not have a relationship that would interfere with the exercise of independent judgment in carrying out the responsibilities of a director.

              In order to be considered independent for purposes of Rule 10A-3, a member of an audit committee of a listed company may not, other than in his or her capacity as a member of the audit committee, the board of directors or any other board committee: (1) accept, directly or indirectly, any

101


Table of Contents

consulting, advisory or other compensatory fee from the listed company or any of its subsidiaries, or (2) be an affiliated person of the listed company or any of its subsidiaries.

              On January 24, 2013, our board of directors undertook a review of its composition, the composition of its committees and the independence of each director. Based upon information requested from and provided by each director concerning his background, employment and affiliations, our board of directors has determined that none of Messrs. Born, Habiger, Jordan, Paisley, Petty or Vassallo, representing six of our eight directors, has a relationship that would interfere with the exercise of independent judgment in carrying out the responsibilities of a director and that each of these directors is "independent" as that term is defined under NASDAQ rules. Our board of directors also determined that Messrs. Born, Paisley and Petty, who comprise our audit committee, Messrs. Habiger, Jordan and Vassallo, who comprise our compensation committee, and Messrs. Born, Habiger and Paisley, who comprise our nominating and corporate governance committee, satisfy the independence standards for those committees established by applicable SEC rules and NASDAQ rules. In making this determination, our board of directors considered the relationships that each non-employee director has with our company and all other facts and circumstances our board of directors deemed relevant in determining their independence, including the beneficial ownership of our capital stock by each non-employee director.

Role of the Board in Risk Oversight

              One of the key functions of our board of directors is informed oversight of our risk management process. Our board of directors does not have a standing risk management committee, but rather administers this oversight function directly through the board of directors as a whole, as well as through its standing committees that address risks inherent in their respective areas of oversight. In particular, our board of directors is responsible for monitoring and assessing strategic risk exposure. Our audit committee is responsible for reviewing and discussing our major financial risk exposures and the steps our management has taken to monitor and control these exposures, including guidelines and policies with respect to risk assessment and risk management. Our audit committee also monitors compliance with legal and regulatory requirements, in addition to oversight of the performance of our external audit function. Our nominating and corporate governance committee monitors the effectiveness of our corporate governance guidelines. Our compensation committee reviews and discusses the risks arising from our compensation philosophy and practices applicable to all employees that are reasonably likely to have a materially adverse effect on us.

Board Committees

              Our board of directors has an audit committee, a compensation committee and a nominating and corporate governance committee, each of which has the composition and responsibilities described below. The audit committee, compensation committee and nominating and corporate governance committee all operate under charters approved by our board of directors, which will be available on our website upon the closing of this offering. Our board of directors may from time to time establish other committees.

              Audit Committee.     Our audit committee oversees our corporate accounting and financial reporting process and assists the board of directors in monitoring our financial systems and our legal and regulatory compliance. Our audit committee will also:

    Oversee the work of our independent auditors;

    Approve the hiring, discharging and compensation of our independent auditors;

    Approve engagements of the independent auditors to render any audit or permissible non-audit services;

    Review the qualifications and independence of the independent auditors;

102


Table of Contents

    Monitor the rotation of partners of the independent auditors on our engagement team as required by law;

    Review our financial statements and review our critical accounting policies and estimates;

    Review the adequacy and effectiveness of our internal controls; and

    Review and discuss with management and the independent auditors the results of our annual audit and our quarterly financial statements.

              The members of our audit committee are Messrs. Born, Paisley and Petty. Mr. Paisley is our audit committee chairperson. Our board of directors has concluded that the composition of our audit committee meets the requirements for independence under, and the functioning of our audit committee complies with, the current requirements of applicable SEC and NASDAQ rules, and that Mr. Paisley is our audit committee financial expert as defined under applicable SEC rules.

              Compensation Committee.     Our compensation committee oversees our corporate compensation programs. The compensation committee will also:

    Review and approve corporate goals and objectives relevant to compensation of our chief executive officer and other executive officers;

    Evaluate the performance of our executive officers in light of established goals and objectives;

    Review and recommend compensation of our executive officers based on its evaluations;

    Review and recommend compensation of our directors; and

    Administer the issuance of stock options and other awards under our stock plans.

              The members of our compensation committee are Messrs. Habiger, Jordan and Vassallo. Mr. Habiger is the chairperson of our compensation committee. Our board of directors has determined that each member of our compensation committee is independent under the applicable NASDAQ rules and SEC rules and regulations.

              Nominating and Corporate Governance Committee.     Our nominating and corporate governance committee oversees and assists our board of directors in reviewing and recommending corporate governance policies and nominees for election to our board of directors. The nominating and corporate governance committee will also:

    Evaluate and make recommendations regarding the organization and governance of the board of directors and its committees;

    Assess the performance of members of the board of directors and make recommendations regarding committee and chair assignments;

    Recommend desired qualifications for board of directors membership and conduct searches for potential members of the board of directors; and

    Review and make recommendations with regard to our corporate governance guidelines.

              The members of our nominating and corporate governance committee are Messrs. Born, Habiger and Paisley. Mr. Born is the chairperson of our nominating and corporate governance committee. Our board of directors has determined that each member of our nominating and corporate governance committee is independent under the applicable NASDAQ rules.

Director Compensation

              The following table sets forth information concerning compensation paid or accrued for services rendered to us by members of our board of directors for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2012. The table excludes Mr. Plaehn, who is one of our named executive officers, and Mr. West, who is one of our employees, neither of whom received any compensation from us in their role as directors in

103


Table of Contents

the fiscal year ended December 31, 2012. The compensation received during 2012 by Mr. Plaehn for his service as an employee is reflected under "Executive Compensation—Summary Compensation Table" below.

Name
  Option
Awards (1)
  Total  

Rob Born

         

David C. Habiger (2)

  $ 211,200   $ 211,200  

Len Jordan

         

Thomas R. Kuhn (3)

         

Christopher B. Paisley (4)

         

Scott Petty

         

Steven Vassallo

         

(1)
The amounts reported in the Option Awards column represent the grant date fair value of the stock options granted to the non-employee directors during 2012, computed in accordance with ASC Topic 718. The assumptions used in calculating the grant date fair value of the stock options reported in the Option Awards column are set forth in Note 1 in the notes to our consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus. The amounts reported in this column reflect the accounting cost for these stock-based awards, and do not correspond to the actual economic value that may be received by the non-employee directors from the awards.

(2)
As of December 31, 2012, Mr. Habiger held an option to purchase 23,076 shares of our common stock.

(3)
As of December 31, 2012, Mr. Kuhn held an option to purchase 46,834 shares of our common stock. Mr. Kuhn resigned from our board of directors effective on February 28, 2013.

(4)
As of December 31, 2012, Mr. Paisley held options to purchase 35,193 shares of our common stock.

104


Table of Contents

              Our policy has been and will continue to be to reimburse our non-employee directors for their travel, lodging and other reasonable expenses incurred in attending meetings of our board of directors and committees of the board of directors. In 2012, we did not maintain any standard fee arrangements for the non-employee members of our board of directors for their service as a director.

              In June 2013, our board of directors approved the following annual cash and equity retainers for our non-employee directors based on the recommendation of the compensation committee of our board of directors:

Annual Cash Retainers

 
  Cash Retainer  

Non-Employee Directors

  $ 36,000  

Board of Directors Chairperson

    24,000  

Audit Committee Chairperson

    22,000  

Audit Committee Non-Chairperson Member

    12,000  

Compensation Committee Chairperson

    12,000  

Compensation Committee Non-Chairperson Member

    6,000  

Nominating and Corporate Governance Committee Chairperson

    9,000  

Nominating and Corporate Governance Committee Non-Chairperson Member

    6,000  

Equity Retainers

 
  Fair Market Value on
the Date of Grant of
Equity Grants
Delivered as
 
 
  Stock
Options
  Restricted
Stock
Units
 

Initial Retainer for Non-Employee Directors, or Initial Grant

  $ 70,000   $ 70,000  

Annual Retainer for Non-Employee Directors, or Annual Grant

    37,500     37,500  

              The Initial Grant will be made to any new non-employee directors added to our board of directors following the completion of this offering. All shares subject to an Initial Grant for a non-employee director will vest annually over three years, provided such non-employee director continues to be a director on each such vesting date.

              The Annual Grant will be made to our non-employee directors then serving on our board of directors on the date of the annual meeting of stockholders, beginning with the annual meeting of stockholders to be held in 2014. All shares subject to an Annual Grant for a non-employee director will vest on the one-year anniversary of the grant date, provided such non-employee director continues to be a director on such date.

              Directors who are employees do not receive any compensation for their service on our board of directors.

Code of Business Conduct and Ethics

              Prior to the completion of this offering, we expect to adopt a code of business conduct and ethics that is applicable to all of our employees, officers and directors including our chief executive officer and senior financial officers, which will be available on our website upon the closing of this offering.

Compensation Committee Interlocks and Insider Participation

              During 2012, our compensation committee was comprised of Messrs. Born, Jordan and Vassallo. None of the members of our compensation committee is an officer or employee of our company. None of our executive officers currently serves, or in the past year has served, as a member of the board of directors or compensation committee of any entity that has one or more executive officers serving on our board of directors or compensation committee.

105


Table of Contents


EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION

              The following table provides information regarding the compensation of our principal executive officer and each of the named executive officers as required by Item 402(m)(2) of Regulation S-K during our fiscal year ended December 31, 2012.

Name and Principal Position
  Year   Salary   Non-Equity
Incentive Plan
Compensation (1)
  Option
Awards (2)
  All Other
Compensation
  Total  

Martin Plaehn
President and Chief Executive Officer

    2012   $ 360,000   $ 25,571   $   $   $ 385,571  

Eric Anderson
Senior Vice President, Products

   
2012
   
123,000

(3)
 
   
1,530,000

(4)
 
3,025

(5)
 
1,656,025
 

Jeff Dungan
Senior Vice President, Supply Chain Operations, and Senior Vice President, Business Development

   
2012
   
200,000

(6)
 
15,271
   
176,000

(7)
 
   
391,271
 

(1)
Amounts represent cash bonuses earned in 2012 and paid in 2013, based on the achievement of company performance objectives and other criteria deemed important by our board of directors. Our 2012 company performance objectives were related to the attainment of revenue, gross margin and net income targets.

(2)
The amounts reported in the Option Awards column represent the grant date fair value of the stock options granted to our named executive officers during 2012 as computed in accordance with ASC Topic 718. The assumptions used in calculating the grant date fair value of the stock options reported in the Option Awards column are set forth in Note 7 in the notes to our consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus. Note that the amounts reported in this column reflect the accounting cost for these stock options, and do not correspond to the actual economic value that may be received by the named executive officers from the options.

(3)
Mr. Anderson joined us as our Senior Vice President, Products in June 2012 and received a prorated base salary based on an annual base salary of $240,000. In June 2013, Mr. Anderson's base salary was increased to $250,000 effective July 1, 2013.

(4)
Represents an option to purchase 173,076 shares of our common stock. The shares underlying this option vest as follows: 25% of the shares underlying the option vest on June 27, 2013 and the remaining 75% of the shares vest in equal monthly installments over the next three years.

(5)
Represents value of beta equipment provided to Mr. Anderson in 2012.

(6)
In June 2013, Mr. Dungan's base salary was increased to $230,000 effective July 1, 2013.

(7)
Represents an option to purchase 19,230 shares of our common stock. The shares underlying this option vest as follows: 25% of the shares underlying the option vest on September 28, 2013 and the remaining 75% of the shares vest in equal monthly installments over the next three years.

106


Table of Contents

Benefits

              We provide the following benefits to our named executive officers, generally on the same basis provided to all of our employees:

    Medical, dental and vision insurance;

    401(k) plan (see "Employee Benefit Plans—Retirement Plans" below for a description of our 401(k) plan);

    Employee assistance program;

    Short- and long-term disability, life insurance, accidental death and dismemberment insurance; and

    Health and dependent care flexible spending accounts.

              We also allow our vice presidents and officers, including our named executive officers, to receive our beta equipment at no cost up to certain annual limits.

Employment Agreements and Change of Control Arrangements

              We have executed offer letters with each of our named executive officers, which are summarized below.

Mr. Plaehn

              We entered into an offer letter with Mr. Plaehn on August 20, 2011. Currently, Mr. Plaehn is entitled to receive $360,000 in annual base salary and is eligible for an incentive bonus of up to $126,000, based upon criteria established by our board of directors in its sole discretion. Mr. Plaehn is also eligible to participate in all employee benefit plans and vacation programs. For information relating to potential payments upon termination under Mr. Plaehn's offer letter, see "Potential Payments upon Termination or Change of Control."

Mr. Anderson

              We entered into an offer letter with Mr. Anderson on August 14, 2012. Currently, Mr. Anderson is entitled to receive $250,000 in annual base salary and, if our board of directors determines that our company has achieved requisite development, revenue and/or profitability milestones, Mr. Anderson may be entitled to receive an annual incentive bonus of up to $84,000. Mr. Anderson is also eligible to participate in all company employee benefit plans and vacation programs.

Mr. Dungan

              We entered into an offer letter with Mr. Dungan on August 1, 2006. Currently Mr. Dungan is entitled to receive $230,000 in annual base salary and, if our board of directors determines that our company has achieved requisite development, revenue and/or profitability milestones, Mr. Dungan may be entitled to receive an annual incentive bonus of up to $78,750. Mr. Dungan is also eligible to participate in all company employee benefit plans and vacation programs.

Compensation Risk Assessment

              We believe that our executive compensation program does not encourage excessive or unnecessary risk taking. This is primarily due to the fact that our compensation programs are designed to encourage our executive officers and other employees to remain focused on both short-term and long-term strategic goals, in particular in connection with our pay-for-performance compensation

107


Table of Contents

philosophy. As a result, we do not believe that our compensation programs are reasonably likely to have a material adverse effect on our company.

Potential Payments upon Termination or Change of Control

              Our compensation committee provides our executive officers with financial protection in the event of certain terminations of employment when it determines that such protection is necessary to attract or retain that executive. Under the terms of his offer letter, Mr. Plaehn is entitled to receive severance payments and benefits upon the occurrence of certain events, as set forth in his offer letter.

              In the event that Mr. Plaehn's employment is terminated by our company without Cause or by him for Good Reason, he will be entitled to receive the continued payment of his base salary for six months (provided that if such termination occurs within 90 days prior to or 12 months after a Change of Control, he will be entitled to receive such continued payment for 12 months), continued medical, dental and vision coverage for him and his dependents for 12 months, and earned but unpaid salary, bonuses and unreimbursed business expenses. In addition, if such termination occurs within 90 days prior to or within 12 months after a Change of Control, Mr. Plaehn is entitled to accelerated vesting of 100% of the his unvested options to purchase shares of our common stock initially granted to him upon the commencement of his employment with us, as well as the greater of: (1) 50% of the then unvested portion of the second option to purchase shares of our common stock granted to him; and (2) 25% of the total number of shares of common stock subject to such stock option.

              In addition, in the event Mr. Plaehn's employment with us is terminated by us without Cause or by Mr. Plaehn for Good Reason within 90 days prior to or within 12 months after a Change of Control, then 100% of the then unvested shares subject to the option granted to Mr. Plaehn on June 11, 2013 will vest and become exercisable.

              "Cause" means: (1) an employee's repeated failure, in the reasonable judgment of our board of directors, to perform one or more of his essential duties and responsibilities to our company after written notice thereof from our board of directors to the employee describing the employee's failure to perform such duties or responsibilities and, if such failure is remediable, his failure to remedy same within 10 days of receiving written notice; (2) an employee's refusal or failure to comply with the legal directives of our board of directors after written notice thereof from our board of directors to the employee describing the employee's failure to comply and, if such failure is remediable, his failure to remedy same within 10 days of receiving written notice; (3) an employee's material violation of any policy of our company; (4) an employee's commission or conviction of, or entry of a plea of nolo contendere to, any felony or any act of fraud, embezzlement, dishonesty, moral turpitude, misappropriation or any other misconduct that has caused or is reasonably expected to result in material injury to our company or its affiliates; (5) an employee's unauthorized use or disclosure of any proprietary information or trade secrets of our company or any other party to whom he owes an obligation of nondisclosure as a result of his relationship with our company; (6) an employee's material breach of any of his obligations under any written agreement or covenant with our company; or (7) an employee's violation of a federal or state law or regulation applicable to our company which violation was or is reasonably likely to be injurious to our company.

              "Good Reason" means that the employee's continuous status as an employee was "constructively terminated" by our company if within 90 days after the occurrence of one of the following actions by our company (unless the employee consents in writing to such action(s)), and after providing us with a reasonable opportunity to cure such action(s), the employee resigns in writing from his employment with us: (l) a material reduction in the employee's base salary as in effect immediately before such reduction; or (2) the relocation by us of the employee's then-current work site that has the effect of increasing the employee's then-current commute by more than 50 miles (not including any

108


Table of Contents

regular business travel consistent with the business travel requirements of the employee's position with us).

              "Change of Control" means our company's sale of all or substantially of its assets or property, our company's exclusive license of all or substantially all of its intellectual property, the acquisition of our company by another entity in which we are a party and pursuant to which our stockholders immediately prior to such transaction hold less than 50% of the voting power of the surviving or resulting entity.

              Except as described above, there are currently no severance agreements or arrangements in place for Messrs. Plaehn, Anderson and Dungan.

Outstanding Equity Awards at Fiscal Year-End

              The following table presents certain information concerning equity awards held by our named executive officers as of December 31, 2012.

 
  Option Awards  
 
  Number of Securities
Underlying Unexercised
Options
   
   
   
 
 
  Option
Exercise
Price
  Vesting
Start Date
  Option
Expiration
Date
 
Name
  Exercisable   Unexercisable  

Martin Plaehn

    188,831     415,429 (1) $ 6.136     9/29/2011     9/28/2021  

    33,570     92,317 (2)   6.136     9/29/2011     9/28/2021  

Eric Anderson

        173,076 (3)   8.840     6/27/2012     6/29/2022  

Jeff Dungan

    48,076     (4)   2.496     8/14/2006     9/20/2016  

    4,807     (5)   3.588     12/11/2007     12/10/2017  

    4,807     (6)   4.888     12/19/2008     12/18/2018  

    7,011     2,604 (7)   4.888     1/1/2010     1/14/2020  

    24,838     13,622 (8)   7.488     5/30/2010     7/8/2020  

    4,607     5,008 (9)   6.136     1/1/2011     5/25/2021  

    1,201     3,606 (10)   6.344     12/21/2011     12/28/2021  

        19,230 (11)   9.152     9/28/2012     9/27/2022  

(1)
The shares underlying the option vest as follows: 25% of the shares underlying the option vested on September 29, 2012 and the remaining 75% of the shares vest in equal monthly installments over the following three years. If Mr. Plaehn's employment is terminated by our company without Cause (as defined in his offer letter) or by Mr. Plaehn for Good Reason (as defined in his offer letter) within 90 days prior to or 12 months after a Change of Control (as defined in his offer letter), 100% of the unvested shares underlying this option will immediately vest and become exercisable.

(2)
The shares underlying this option vest as follows: provided that certain annual milestones agreed upon by Mr. Plaehn and our board of directors are achieved, then 25% of the shares underlying the option vest on September 29, 2012 and the remaining 75% of the shares vest in equal monthly installments over the following three years. If Mr. Plaehn's employment is terminated by the Company without Cause or by Mr. Plaehn for Good Reason within 90 days prior to or 12 months after a Change of Control, the greater of: (1) 50% of the unvested shares underlying this option; and (2) 25% of the total number of shares of underlying this option shall immediately vest and become exercisable.

(3)
The shares underlying this option vest as follows: 25% of the shares underlying the option vest on June 27, 2013 and the remaining 75% of the shares vest in equal monthly installments over the following three years.

109


Table of Contents

(4)
The shares underlying this option vested as follows: 25% of the shares underlying the option vested on August 14, 2007 and the remaining 75% of the shares vested in equal monthly installments over the following three years.

(5)
The shares underlying this option vested as follows: 25% of the shares underlying the option vested on December 11, 2008 and the remaining 75% of the shares vested in equal monthly installments over the following three years.

(6)
The shares underlying this option vested as follows: 25% of the shares underlying the option vested on December 19, 2009 and the remaining 75% of the shares vested in equal monthly installments over the following three years.

(7)
The shares underlying this option vest as follows: 25% of the shares underlying the option vested on January 1, 2011 and the remaining 75% of the shares vest in equal monthly installments over the following three years.

(8)
The shares underlying this option vest as follows: 25% of the shares underlying the option vested on May 30, 2011 and the remaining 75% of the shares vest in equal monthly installments over the following three years.

(9)
The shares underlying this option vest as follows: 25% of the shares underlying the option vested on January 1, 2012 and the remaining 75% of the shares vest in equal monthly installments over the following three years.

(10)
The shares underlying this option vest as follows: 25% of the shares underlying the option vested on December 21, 2012 and the remaining 75% of the shares vest in equal monthly installments over the following three years.

(11)
The shares underlying this option vest as follows: 25% of the shares underlying the option vest on September 28, 2013 and the remaining 75% of the shares vest in equal monthly installments over the following three years.

              On June 11, 2013, Martin Plaehn, our President and Chief Executive Officer, was granted an option to purchase 96,153 shares of our common stock at an exercise price per share of $11.284. This option was granted pursuant to our 2003 Equity Incentive Plan and is scheduled to vest, subject to Mr. Plaehn's continued role as a service provider to us, as to 25% of the total shares on September 29, 2016, with 1/48th of the total shares vesting monthly thereafter.

Employee Benefit Plans

2013 Stock Option and Incentive Plan

              In June 2013, our board of directors, upon the recommendation of the compensation committee of the board of directors, adopted our 2013 Stock Option and Incentive Plan, or the 2013 Plan, which was subsequently approved by our stockholders. The 2013 Plan will replace the 2003 Equity Incentive Plan, or the 2003 Plan, as our board of directors has determined not to make additional awards under that plan following the consummation of our initial public offering. Our 2013 Plan provides flexibility to our compensation committee to use various equity-based incentive awards as compensation tools to motivate our workforce.

              We have initially reserved 2,200,000 shares of our common stock for the issuance of awards under the 2013 Plan. The 2013 Plan provides that the number of shares reserved and available for issuance under the plan will automatically increase each January 1, beginning on January 1, 2014, by 5% of the outstanding number of shares of our common stock on the immediately preceding December 31 or such lesser number of shares as determined by our compensation committee. This

110


Table of Contents

number is subject to adjustment in the event of a stock split, stock dividend or other change in our capitalization.

              The shares we issue under the 2013 Plan will be authorized but unissued shares or shares that we reacquire. The shares of common stock underlying any awards that are forfeited, cancelled, held back upon exercise or settlement of an award to satisfy the exercise price or tax withholding, reacquired by us prior to vesting, satisfied without any issuance of stock, expire or are otherwise terminated (other than by exercise) under the 2013 Plan and 2003 Plan are added back to the shares of common stock available for issuance under the 2013 Plan.

              The 2013 Plan is administered by our compensation committee. Our compensation committee has full power to select, from among the individuals eligible for awards, the individuals to whom awards will be granted, to make any combination of awards to participants, and to determine the specific terms and conditions of each award, subject to the provisions of the 2013 Plan. Persons eligible to participate in the 2013 Plan will be those full or part-time officers, employees, non-employee directors and other key persons (including consultants and prospective employees) as selected from time to time by our compensation committee in its discretion.

              The 2013 Plan permits the granting of both options to purchase common stock intended to qualify as incentive stock options under Section 422 of the Code and options that do not so qualify. The option exercise price of each option will be determined by our compensation committee but may not be less than 100% of the fair market value of our common stock on the date of grant. The term of each option will be fixed by our compensation committee and may not exceed 10 years from the date of grant. Our compensation committee will determine at what time or times each option may be exercised.

              Our compensation committee may award stock appreciation rights subject to such conditions and restrictions as we may determine. Stock appreciation rights entitle the recipient to shares of common stock, or cash, equal to the value of the appreciation in our stock price over the exercise price. The exercise price is the fair market value of the common stock on the date of grant.

              Our compensation committee may award restricted shares of common stock and restricted stock units to participants subject to such conditions and restrictions as we may determine. These conditions and restrictions may include the achievement of certain performance goals and/or continued employment with us through a specified vesting period. Our compensation committee may also grant shares of common stock that are free from any restrictions under the 2013 Plan. Unrestricted stock may be granted to participants in recognition of past services or other valid consideration and may be issued in lieu of cash compensation due to such participant.

              Our compensation committee may grant performance share awards to participants that entitle the recipient to receive shares of common stock upon the achievement of certain performance goals and such other conditions as our compensation committee shall determine.

              Our compensation committee may grant cash bonuses under the 2013 Plan to participants, subject to the achievement of certain performance goals.

              Our compensation committee may grant awards of restricted stock, restricted stock units, performance shares or cash-based awards under the 2013 Plan that are intended to qualify as "performance-based compensation" under Section 162(m) of the Code. Those awards would only vest or become payable upon the attainment of performance goals that are established by our compensation committee and related to one or more performance criteria. The performance criteria that would be used with respect to any such awards include: earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation and amortization, net income (loss) (either before or after interest, taxes, depreciation and/or amortization), changes in the market price of our common stock, economic value-added, funds from operations or similar measure, sales or revenue, acquisitions or strategic transactions, operating income (loss), cash

111


Table of Contents

flow (including, but not limited to, operating cash flow and free cash flow), return on capital, assets, equity, or investment, stockholder returns, return on sales, gross or net profit levels, productivity, expense, margins, operating efficiency, customer satisfaction, working capital, earnings (loss) per share of stock, sales or market shares and number of customers, any of which may be measured either in absolute terms or as compared to any incremental increase or as compared to results of a peer group. From and after the time that we become subject to Section 162(m) of the Code, the maximum award that is intended to qualify as "performance-based compensation" under Section 162(m) of the Code that may be made to any one employee during any one calendar year period is 10,000,000 shares of common stock with respect to a stock-based award and $5,000,000 with respect to a cash-based award.

              The 2013 Plan provides that in the case of, and subject to, the consummation of a "sale event" as defined in the 2013 Plan, all outstanding awards will be assumed, substituted or otherwise continued by the successor entity. To the extent that the successor entity does not assume, substitute or otherwise continue such awards, then (i) all stock options and stock appreciation rights will automatically become fully exercisable and the restrictions and conditions on all other awards with time-based conditions will automatically be deemed waived, and awards with conditions and restrictions relating to the attainment of performance goals may become vested and non-forfeitable in connection with a sale event in the compensation committee's discretion and (ii) upon the effectiveness of the sale event, all stock options and stock appreciation rights will automatically terminate. In the event of such termination, individuals holding options and stock appreciation rights will be permitted to exercise such options and stock appreciation rights prior to the sale event. In addition, in connection with a sale event, we may make or provide for a cash payment to participants holding options and stock appreciation rights equal to the difference between the per share cash consideration payable to stockholders in the sale event and the exercise price of the options or stock appreciation rights.

              Our board of directors may amend or discontinue the 2013 Plan and our compensation committee may amend or cancel outstanding awards for purposes of satisfying changes in law or any other lawful purpose, but no such action may adversely affect rights under an award without the holder's consent. Certain amendments to the 2013 Plan require the approval of our stockholders.

              No awards may be granted under the 2013 Plan after the date that is 10 years from the date of stockholder approval. No awards under the 2013 Plan have been made prior to the date hereof.

2003 Equity Incentive Plan

              Our 2003 Equity Incentive Plan, or the 2003 Plan, was adopted by our board of directors and subsequently approved by our stockholders. We have reserved 6,438,575 shares of our common stock for issuance under the 2003 Plan. This number is subject to adjustment in the event of a stock split, stock dividend or other changes in our capitalization. Following the completion of this offering, any shares of common stock underlying any awards that are forfeited, cancelled, held back upon exercise or settlement of an award to satisfy the exercise price or tax withholding, reacquired by us prior to vesting, satisfied without any issuance of stock, expire or are otherwise terminated (other than by exercise) under the 2003 Plan will be added to the shares of common stock available for issuance under the 2013 Plan.

              The 2003 Plan is administered by our board of directors. Our board of directors has the authority to delegate full power and authority to one or more committees of the board, to select the individuals to whom awards will be granted, to make any combination of awards to participants, to accelerate the exercisability or vesting of any award, to provide substitute awards and to determine the specific terms and conditions of each award.

              The 2003 Plan permits us to make grants of incentive stock options, non-qualified stock options, stock appreciation rights, restricted stock units, shares of restricted stock or a direct award shares of stock to officers, employees, directors, consultants or other person providing us with services.

112


Table of Contents

              Upon a "Company Transaction" (as defined in the 2003 Plan) in which all awards are not assumed, substituted with awards issued by the successor entity, or substituted with cash consideration, the 2003 Plan and awards issued thereunder will be subject to accelerated vesting and, in the case of stock options, full exercisability, followed by the cancellation of such awards. For awards other than restricted stock, if the awards are assumed or substituted and the holder thereof is terminated without "cause" (as defined in the 2003 Plan) or resigns for "good reason" (as defined in the 2003 Plan) within six months of the sale event, then 50% of the unvested portion of such awards shall vest.

              All stock option awards that are granted to employees are covered by a stock option agreement and vest in accordance with the vesting schedule set forth in such stock option agreement. Our board of directors may accelerate the vesting schedule in its discretion. We have not engaged in any option repricing or other modification to any of the outstanding equity awards.

              Our board of directors has determined not to grant any further awards under the 2003 Plan after the completion of this offering. Following the completion of this initial public offering, we expect to make future awards under the 2013 Plan.

Retirement Plans

              We maintain a tax-qualified 401(k) retirement plan for all employees who satisfy certain eligibility requirements. Under our 401(k) plan, employees may elect to defer up to 100% of their eligible compensation subject to applicable annual limits set pursuant to the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, or the Code. We may provide a discretionary employee matching contribution and discretionary profit sharing contribution under the 401(k) plan. We intend for the 401(k) plan to qualify, depending on the employee's election, under Section 401(a) of the Code so that contributions by employees, and income earned on those contributions, are not taxable to employees until withdrawn from the 401(k) plan.

Limitation on Liability and Indemnification Matters

              Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and bylaws that will become effective upon the completion of this offering contain provisions that limit the personal liability of our directors for monetary damages to the fullest extent permitted by Delaware law. Consequently, our directors will not be personally liable to us or our stockholders for monetary damages for any breach of fiduciary duties as directors, except liability for:

    Any breach of the director's duty of loyalty to us or our stockholders;

    Any act or omission not in good faith or that involves intentional misconduct or a knowing violation of law;

    Unlawful payments of dividends or unlawful stock repurchases or redemptions as provided in Section 174 of the Delaware General Corporation Law; or

    Any transaction from which the director derived an improper personal benefit.

              Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and bylaws, each of which will become effective upon the completion of this offering, provide that we indemnify our directors and officers to the fullest extent permitted by Delaware law. Our amended and restated bylaws, that will become effective upon the completion of this offering, also provide that we shall advance expenses incurred by a director or officer in advance of the final disposition of any action or proceeding, and permit us to secure insurance on behalf of any officer, director, employee or other agent for any liability arising out of his or her actions in that capacity, regardless of whether we would otherwise be permitted to indemnify him or her under the provisions of Delaware law. We have entered and expect to continue to enter into agreements to indemnify our directors, executive officers and other employees as determined

113


Table of Contents

by the board of directors. With certain exceptions, these agreements provide for indemnification for related expenses including, among others, attorneys' fees, judgments, fines and settlement amounts incurred by any of these individuals in any action or proceeding. We believe that these bylaw provisions and indemnification agreements are necessary to attract and retain qualified persons as directors and officers. We also maintain directors' and officers' liability insurance.

              The limitation of liability and indemnification provisions in our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and bylaws, that will become effective upon the completion of this offering, may discourage stockholders from bringing a lawsuit against our directors for breach of their fiduciary duty of care. They may also reduce the likelihood of derivative litigation against our directors and officers, even though an action, if successful, might benefit us and other stockholders. Further, a stockholder's investment may be adversely affected to the extent that we pay the costs of settlement and damage awards against directors and officers. At present, there is no pending litigation or proceeding involving any of our directors, officers or employees for which indemnification is sought, and we are not aware of any threatened litigation that may result in claims for indemnification.

114


Table of Contents


CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS AND RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

              In addition to the director and executive compensation arrangements discussed above in "Management" and "Executive Compensation," we have been a party to the following transactions since January 1, 2010, in which the amount involved exceeded or will exceed $120,000, and in which any director, executive officer or holder of more than 5% of any class of our voting stock, or any member of the immediate family of or entities affiliated with any of them, had or will have a material interest. We also describe below certain transactions and series of similar transactions since January 1, 2010 with our directors, executive officers, holders of more than 5% of any class of our voting securities, or any member of the immediate family of or any entities affiliated with any of the foregoing persons to which we are party.

              We have adopted a written policy, effective upon the completion of this offering, which provides that our executive officers, directors, holders of more than 5% of any class of our voting securities, and any member of the immediate family of and any entity affiliated with any of the foregoing persons, are not permitted to enter into a related party transaction with us without the prior consent of our audit committee, or other independent members of our board of directors in the case it is inappropriate for our audit committee to review such transaction due to a conflict of interest. Pursuant to such policy, any request for us to enter into a transaction with an executive officer, director, principal stockholder, or any of their immediate family members or affiliates, in which the amount involved exceeds $120,000 must first be presented to our audit committee for review, consideration and approval. In approving or rejecting any such proposal, our audit committee is to consider the relevant facts and circumstances available and deemed relevant to the audit committee, including, but not limited to, whether the transaction is on terms no less favorable than terms generally available to an unaffiliated third party under the same or similar circumstances and the extent of the related party's interest in the transaction. All of the transactions described below were entered into prior to the adoption of this policy.

Sales of Series H Preferred Stock

              In January and February 2011, we issued and sold an aggregate of 2,014,641 shares of our Series H Preferred Stock at a per share price of $9.927, for an aggregate consideration of approximately $20.0 million. We believe that the terms obtained and consideration received in connection with the Series H financing are comparable to terms available and the amounts we would have received in an arm's length transaction.

              The table below summarizes purchases of shares of our Series H Preferred Stock by our directors, executive officers, holders of more than 5% of any class of our voting securities, or any member of the immediate family of or any entities affiliated with any of the foregoing persons. Upon the issuance of our Series H Preferred Stock, Cisco Systems, Inc., or Cisco, became a beneficial owner of more than 5% of our Series H Preferred Stock. Each outstanding share of our Series H Preferred Stock will be converted into one share of our common stock upon the completion of this offering.

Purchasers
  Shares of
Series H
Preferred Stock
  Aggregate
Purchase Price
 

Cisco Systems, Inc. 

    1,510,981   $ 15,000,000  

Warrants

              In January and February 2011, we issued warrants to purchase an aggregate of 470,082 shares of our common stock at an exercise price of $9.927 per share to Cisco. For a detailed description of these warrants, see "Description of Capital Stock—Warrants".

115


Table of Contents

Transactions with Our Significant Stockholders

              In January 2011, we entered into an OEM-in hardware (with software) purchase and license agreement with Cisco, which was amended and restated in February 2011 and further amended in June 2012. Our agreement with Cisco expires in February 2014, after which such agreement automatically renews for one-year terms unless either party receives notice of non-renewal at least 120 days prior to the expiration of the then-current term. Such notice of non-renewal by either party initiates a notice period, or Notice Period, in which the parties have agreed to define a mutually operable transition plan, which may include a new agreement. In addition, (i) either party may terminate the agreement immediately upon the bankruptcy or insolvency of the other party, (ii) either party may terminate the agreement for cause upon written notice of a material breach and if the other party does not cure such breach within 30 days of such notice, (iii) Cisco may terminate the agreement upon a change of control of our company, or (iv) we may terminate the agreement in certain situations if Cisco invests in a company that competes with our business, subject to applicable notice periods. In June 2013, we triggered the Notice Period with Cisco which will provide sufficient time to define an agreement for future periods. Although the parties intend to enter into a new agreement that would revise and optimize the current Control4 and Cisco collaboration, innovation and channel capabilities, there can be no assurance that such a revised agreement will be reached.

              We have received revenues totaling approximately $477,538, $2,597,999 and $404,026 for the years ended December 31, 2011 and 2012 and the three months ended March 31, 2013, respectively, in connection with our commercial arrangements with Cisco. Our accounts receivable totaled approximately $51,106, $1,024,374 and $172,457 as of December 31, 2011 and 2012 and the three months ended March 31, 2013, respectively, in connection with our commercial arrangements with Cisco.

Investors' Rights Agreement

              We have entered into an Eighth Amended and Restated Investors' Rights Agreement, or the Investors' Rights Agreement, with certain of our stockholders, including Christopher B. Paisley, William B. West, one or more entities affiliated with each of Cisco Systems, Frazier Technology Ventures, Foundation Capital, Thomas Weisel Partners and Signal Peak Ventures, and certain other stockholders. The Investors' Rights Agreement provides these and certain other holders of our capital stock certain information rights, a right of purchase in respect of certain issuances of our securities, including in connection with this offering (pursuant to which up to              shares may be purchased by our existing stockholders under this right; provided however, the managing underwriters of this offering may reduce such number of shares as they deem necessary to complete this offering), and certain registration rights with respect to certain shares of stock held by them. Such rights have been waived by our stockholders in connection with this offering. The right of purchase and the information rights granted to such stockholders will terminate upon the consummation of this offering. The registration rights granted to such stockholders will terminate five years following the consummation of this offering, or earlier under certain circumstances in which such stockholders may sell the shares of stock held by them without registration in compliance with Rule 144 of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended. For more information regarding the registration rights granted under this agreement, see "Description of Capital Stock—Registration Rights."

Employment Agreements

              We have entered into agreements containing compensation, termination and change of control provisions, among others, with certain of our executive officers as described under "Executive Compensation—Employment Agreements and Change of Control Arrangements."

116


Table of Contents

Advisor Agreement

              We entered into an advisor agreement, effective February 28, 2013, with Thomas R. Kuhn, who resigned from our board of directors effective on February 28, 2013. The advisor agreement provides that Mr. Kuhn will provide us with certain strategic consulting and customer relation services through April 2014, or such earlier date if the advisor agreement is terminated pursuant to its terms. Mr. Kuhn's unvested shares subject to outstanding options will continue to vest pursuant to their terms during the period Mr. Kuhn continues to provide services to us pursuant to the advisor agreement.

Indemnification of Officers and Directors

              We have also entered into indemnification agreements with each of our directors and executive officers. The indemnification agreements and our certificate of incorporation and bylaws require us to indemnify our directors and executive officers to the fullest extent permitted by Delaware law. See "Executive Compensation—Limitations on Liability and Indemnification Matters."

117


Table of Contents


PRINCIPAL STOCKHOLDERS

              The following table sets forth information regarding beneficial ownership of our common stock as of March 31, 2013 and as adjusted to reflect the shares of common stock to be issued and sold in the offering assuming no exercise of the underwriters' option to purchase additional shares, by:

              We have determined beneficial ownership in accordance with SEC rules. The information does not necessarily indicate beneficial ownership for any other purpose. Under these rules, the number of shares of common stock deemed outstanding includes shares issuable upon exercise of options and warrants held by the respective person or group which may be exercised or converted within 60 days after March 31, 2013. For purposes of calculating each person's or group's percentage ownership, stock options and warrants exercisable within 60 days after March 31, 2013 are included for that person or group but not the stock options or warrants of any other person or group. Certain options to purchase shares of our common stock included in the table below are early exercisable, and to the extent such shares are unvested as of a given date, such shares will remain subject to a right of repurchase held by us.

              Applicable percentage ownership is based on 17,801,035 shares of common stock outstanding as of March 31, 2013, assuming the conversion of all outstanding shares of our preferred stock on a one-for-one basis into 15,293,960 shares of our common stock. For purposes of the table below, we have assumed that                        shares of common stock will be outstanding upon completion of this offering, based upon an assumed initial public offering price of $            per share.

              Unless otherwise indicated and subject to applicable community property laws, to our knowledge, each stockholder named in the following table possesses sole voting and investment power

118


Table of Contents

over the shares listed. Unless otherwise noted below, the address of each person listed on the table is c/o Control4 Corporation, 11734 S. Election Road, Salt Lake City, Utah 84020.

 
  Shares Beneficially Owned
Prior to the Offering
  Shares Beneficially Owned
Following the Offering
Name and Address of Beneficial Owner
  Shares   Percentage   Shares   Percentage

5% Stockholders:

                   

Entities affiliated with Foundation Capital (1)

    5,077,358     28.5 %      

Entities affiliated with Thomas Weisel Venture Partners (2)

    2,920,230     16.4        

Entities affiliated with Signal Peak Ventures (3)

    2,264,751     12.7        

Frazier Technology Ventures II, L.P. (4)

    2,188,168     12.3        

Cisco Systems, Inc. (5)

    1,981,063     10.8        

Named Executive Officers and Directors:

                   

Martin Plaehn (6)

    299,332     1.7        

Eric Anderson

               

Jeff Dungan (7)

    101,857     *        

Rob Born (8)

    2,920,230     16.4        

David C. Habiger (9)

    5,128     *        

Len Jordan (10)

    2,188,168     12.3        

Christopher B. Paisley (11)

    69,407     *        

Scott Petty (12)

    2,264,751     12.7        

Steven Vassallo (13)

    243,016     1.4        

William B. West (14)

    627,606     3.5        

All executive officers and directors as a group (14 persons) (15)

    9,162,301     48.2        

*
Represents beneficial ownership of less than 1%.

(1)
Consists of (i) 37,559 shares held of record by FC IV Active Advisors Fund, LLC ("FC Active Advisors"); (ii) 40,364 shares held of record by Foundation Capital IV Principals Fund, LLC ("Foundation IV Principals"); (iii) 4,756,419 shares held of record by Foundation Capital IV, L.P. ("Foundation IV"); (iv) 2,684 shares held of record by Foundation Capital VI Principals Fund L.L.C. ("Foundation VI Principals"); and (v) 240,332 shares held of record by Foundation Capital VI, L.P. ("Foundation VI"). Foundation Capital Management Co. IV, LLC ("FC4M") serves as the sole manager of Foundation IV, Foundation IV Principals and FC Active Advisors. William Elmore, Kathryn Gould, Paul Koontz, Mike Schuh, Paul Holland and Warren Weiss are managing members of FC4M. FC4M exercises sole voting and investment power over the shares held by Foundation IV, Foundation IV Principals and FC Active Advisors. As managing members of FC4M, Ms. Gould and Messrs. Elmore, Koontz, Schuh, Holland and Weiss may be deemed to share voting and investment power over the shares held by Foundation IV, Foundation IV Principals and FC Active Advisors. Each of the managing members of FC4M disclaims beneficial ownership of the securities held by Foundation IV, Foundation IV Principals and FC Active Advisors, except to the extent of his or her pecuniary interest therein. Foundation Capital Management Co. VI, LLC ("FC6M") serves as the sole manager of Foundation VI and Foundation VI Principals. William Elmore, Paul Koontz, Mike Schuh, Paul Holland, Richard Redelfs, Ashmeet Sidana, Charles Moldow, Steve Vassallo, one of our directors, and Warren Weiss are managing members of FC6M. FC6M exercises sole voting and investment power over the shares held by Foundation VI and Foundation VI Principals. As managing members of FC6M, Messrs. Elmore, Koontz, Schuh, Holland, Redelfs, Sidana, Moldow, Vassallo and Weiss may be deemed to share voting and investment power

119


Table of Contents

      over the shares held by Foundation VI and Foundation VI Principals. Each of the managing members of FC6M disclaims beneficial ownership of the reported securities, except to the extent of his pecuniary interest therein. The address for these entities is 250 Middlefield Road, Menlo Park, California 94025.

(2)
Consists of (i) 2,896,199 shares held of record by Thomas Weisel Venture Partners, L.P. ("TWVP") and (ii) 24,031 shares held of record by Thomas Weisel Venture Partners Employee Fund, L.P. ("TWVP Employee Fund"). Thomas Weisel Venture Partners LLC is the sole general partner of TWVP and Thomas Weisel Capital Management LLC is the sole general partner of TWVP Employee Fund. Rob Born, one of our directors, is the fund manager for TWVP and TWVP Employee Fund, and may be deemed to have voting and dispositive power of the shares held by TWVP and TWVP Employee Fund. The address for these entities is Thomas Weisel Venture Partners, One Montgomery Street, 37 th  Floor, San Francisco, California 94104.

(3)
Consists of (i) 63,542 shares held of record by vSpring III D, L.P. ("vSpring III D"); (ii) 226,819 shares held of record by vSpring III, L.P. ("vSpring III"); (iii) 1,256 shares held of record by vSpring Partners III, L.P. ("vSpring Partners"); and (iv) 1,973,134 shares held of record by vSpring SBIC, L.P. ("vSpring SBIC"). vSpring Management III D, L.L.C. ("vSpring Management III D") is the sole general partner of vSpring III D. vSpring Management III D exercises sole voting and investment power over the shares held by vSpring III D. Each of Scott Petty, one of our directors, Dinesh Patel, Ron Heinz and Brandon Tidwell is a managing member of vSpring Management III D and may be deemed to share voting and investment power over the shares held by vSpring III D. vSpring Management III, L.L.C. ("vSpring Management III") is the sole general partner of vSpring III and vSpring Partners. vSpring Management III exercises sole voting and investment power over the shares held by vSpring III and vSpring Partners. Each of Scott Petty, Dinesh Patel, Ron Heinz and Brandon Tidwell is a managing member of vSpring Management III and may be deemed to share voting and investment power over the shares held by vSpring III and vSpring Partners. vSpring SBIC Management, L.L.C. ("vSpring SBIC Management") is the sole general partner of vSpring SBIC. vSpring SBIC Management exercises sole voting and investment power over the shares held by vSpring SBIC. Each of Scott Petty and Dinesh Patel is a managing member of vSpring SBIC Management and may be deemed to share voting and investment power over the shares held by vSpring SBIC. The address for these entities is 2795 E. Cottonwood Parkway, Suite 360, Salt Lake City, Utah 84121.

(4)
All shares are held of record by Frazier Technology Ventures II, L.P. ("Frazier"). FTVM II, L.P. ("FTVM") is the sole general partner of Frazier, and Frazier Technology Management, L.L.C. ("Frazier Tech Management") is the sole general partner of FTVM. Frazier Tech Management exercises sole voting and investment power over the shares held by Frazier. Each of Scott Darling, Paul Bialek, Frazier Management LLC and Len Jordan, one of our directors, is a managing member of Frazier Tech Management and may be deemed to share voting and investment power of the shares held by Frazier. The address for Frazier is 601 Union Street, Suite 3200, Seattle, Washington 98101.

(5)
Consists of (i) 1,510,981 shares held of record by Cisco Systems, Inc. ("Cisco") and (ii) warrants to purchase 470,082 shares exercisable within 60 days of March 31, 2013 held of record by Cisco. Cisco has sole voting and dispositive power over these securities. The address for Cisco is 170 West Tasman Drive, San Jose, California 95134.

(6)
Consists of options to purchase 299,332 shares exercisable within 60 days of March 31, 2013.

(7)
Consists of options to purchase 101,857 shares exercisable within 60 days of March 31, 2013.

120


Table of Contents

(8)
Consists of the shares held of record by TWVP and TWVP Employee Fund as disclosed in footnote (2) above. Mr. Born is a fund manager for TWVP and TWVP Employee Fund, and may be deemed to share voting and dispositive power of the shares held by TWVP and TWVP Employee Fund.

(9)
Consists of options to purchase 5,128 shares exercisable within 60 days of March 31, 2013.

(10)
Consists of the shares held of record by Frazier as disclosed in footnote (4) above. Mr. Jordan is a managing member of Frazier Tech Management and may be deemed to share voting and dispositive power of the shares held by Frazier.

(11)
Consists of (i) 48,079 shares held of record by Mr. Paisley and (ii) options to purchase 21,328 shares exercisable within 60 days of March 31, 2013.

(12)
Consists of the shares held of record by vSpring III D, vSpring III, vSpring Partners and vSpring SBIC as disclosed in footnote (3) above. Mr. Petty is a managing member of vSpring Management III D, the sole general partner of vSpring III D, and may be deemed to share voting and investment power over the shares held by vSpring III D. Mr. Petty is a managing member of vSpring Management III, the sole general partner of vSpring III and vSpring Partners, and may be deemed to share voting and investment power over the shares held by vSpring III and vSpring Partners. Mr. Petty is a managing member of vSpring SBIC Management, the sole general partner of vSpring SBIC, and may be deemed to share voting and investment power over the shares held by vSpring SBIC.

(13)
Consists of the shares held of record by Foundation VI Principals and Foundation VI as disclosed in footnote (1) above. Mr. Vassallo is a managing member of FC6M, the sole general partner of Foundation VI and Foundation VI Principals, and may be deemed to have shared voting and investment power over the shares held by Foundation VI and Foundation VI Principals. Mr. Vassallo disclaims beneficial ownership of the securities held by Foundation VI and Foundation VI Principals, except to the extent of his pecuniary interest therein.

(14)
Consists of (i) 273,076 shares held of record by Mr. West and (ii) options to purchase 354,530 shares exercisable within 60 days of March 31, 2013.

(15)
Consists of (i) 7,937,320 shares held of record by our current executive officers and directors and (ii) options to purchase 1,224,981 shares exercisable within 60 days of March 31, 2013.

121


Table of Contents


DESCRIPTION OF CAPITAL STOCK

General

              The following is a summary of the rights of our common stock and preferred stock and of certain provisions of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and bylaws, as they will be in effect upon the completion of this offering. For more detailed information, please see our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and bylaws, which are filed as exhibits to the registration statement of which this prospectus is part.

              Immediately following the completion of this offering, our authorized capital stock will consist of 525,000,000 shares, all with a par value of $0.0001 per share, of which:

              The number of authorized shares of our common stock or preferred stock may from time to time be increased or decreased (but not below the number of shares of such class outstanding) by the affirmative vote of the holders of a majority in voting power of our outstanding shares of capital stock such that the number of authorized shares of a class may be increased without the affirmative vote of the holders of such class.

              As of March 31, 2013, we had outstanding 17,974,335 shares of common stock held of record by 118 stockholders, assuming (i) the conversion of all outstanding shares of our preferred stock on a one-for-one basis into 15,293,960 shares of common stock and (ii) the issuance of 173,300 shares of common stock, on an as-converted basis, upon the net exercise of warrants to purchase 723,901 shares of capital stock outstanding as of March 31, 2013. Pursuant to the terms of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation, our preferred stock will automatically convert into common stock effective upon the closing of this offering. In addition, as of March 31, 2013, 4,609,466 shares of our common stock were subject to outstanding options and 11,715 shares of our common stock, on an as-converted basis, were issuable upon the exercise of outstanding warrants to purchase preferred stock.

Common Stock

              The holders of our common stock are entitled to one vote per share on all matters to be voted on by our stockholders. Subject to preferences that may be applicable to any outstanding shares of preferred stock, holders of common stock are entitled to receive ratably such dividends as may be declared by our board of directors out of funds legally available for that purpose. In the event of our liquidation, dissolution or winding up, the holders of common stock are entitled to share ratably in all assets remaining after the payment of liabilities, subject to the prior distribution rights of preferred stock then outstanding. Holders of common stock have no preemptive, conversion or subscription rights. There are no redemption or sinking fund provisions applicable to the common stock.

Preferred Stock

              Upon the closing of this offering, all currently outstanding shares of preferred stock will convert into shares of our common stock on a one-for-one basis, and there will be no shares of preferred stock outstanding.

              Though we currently have no plans to issue any shares of preferred stock, upon the closing of this offering and the filing of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation, our board of directors will have the authority, without further action by our stockholders, to designate and issue up to 25,000,000 shares of preferred stock in one or more series. Our board of directors may also designate the rights, preferences and privileges of the holders of each such series of preferred stock, any or all of which may be greater than or senior to those granted to the holders of common stock.

122


Table of Contents

Though the actual effect of any such issuance on the rights of the holders of common stock will not be known until such time as our board of directors determines the specific rights of the holders of preferred stock, the potential effects of such an issuance include:

Warrants

              The following table sets forth information about outstanding warrants to purchase shares of our capital stock as of March 31, 2013.

Class of Stock
  Number of
Shares of
Stock Subject
to Warrant
  Exercise
Price per
Share
  Expiration Date  
Common Stock     402,928   $ 9.927     January 21, 2014  
Common Stock     67,154   $ 9.927     February 15, 2014  
Series G-1 Preferred Stock     182,666   $ 9.259     June 24, 2014  
Common Stock     71,153   $ 7.488     October 25, 2015  
Series C Preferred Stock     7,325   $ 5.502     December 29, 2015  
Series E Preferred Stock     4,390   $ 11.388     June 13, 2017  

              Upon the conversion of all of our preferred stock into common stock immediately prior to the completion of this offering, other than the warrants with expiration dates of January 21, 2014, February 15, 2014, June 24, 2014 and October 25, 2015, which will expire upon the completion of this offering, each warrant to purchase shares of our preferred stock will be exercisable for an equivalent number of shares of common stock and will remain exercisable until the expiration date of such warrant.

Exclusive Jurisdiction

              Unless we consent in writing to the selection of an alternative forum, the Court of Chancery of the State of Delaware will be the sole and exclusive forum for (i) any derivative action or proceeding brought on behalf of us, (ii) any action asserting a claim of breach of a fiduciary duty owed by any of our directors, officers or other employees to Control4 or our stockholders, (iii) any action asserting a claim arising pursuant to any provision of the Delaware General Corporation Law or our certificate of incorporation or bylaws, or (iv) any action asserting a claim against us governed by the internal affairs doctrine. The enforceability of similar choice of forum provisions in other companies' certificates of incorporation has been challenged in legal proceedings, and it is possible that, in connection with any action, a court could find the choice of forum provisions contained in our amended and restated certificate of incorporation to be inapplicable or unenforceable in such action.

Registration Rights

              As of March 31, 2013, the holders of an aggregate of 16,130,909 shares of our common stock issued or issuable upon conversion of preferred stock are entitled to the following rights with respect to the registration of such shares for public resale under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, or the Securities Act, pursuant to an Investors' Rights Agreement by and among us and certain of our stockholders. We refer to these shares collectively as "registrable securities."

123


Table of Contents

              The registration of shares of common stock as a result of the following rights being exercised would enable the holders to trade these shares without restriction under the Securities Act when the applicable registration statement is declared effective. Ordinarily, we will be required to pay all expenses, other than underwriting discounts and commissions, related to any registration effected pursuant to the exercise of these registration rights.

              The registration rights terminate five years after completion of this offering, upon a Deemed Liquidation Event (as defined in our certificate of incorporation) or, with respect to the registration rights of an individual holder, when such holder's registrable securities represent 1% or less of our outstanding common stock and can be sold pursuant to Rule 144 of the Securities Act.

Demand Registration Rights

              If at any time after 180 days following this offering the holders of the registrable securities then outstanding request in writing that we effect a registration that has a reasonably anticipated aggregate price to the public of at least $5,000,000, we may be required to register their shares. At most, we are obligated to effect two registrations for the holders of registrable securities in response to these demand registration rights, subject to certain conditions. Depending on certain conditions, however, we may defer such registration for up to 120 days. If the holders requesting registration intend to distribute their shares by means of an underwriting, the managing underwriter of such offering will have the right to limit the number of shares to be underwritten for reasons related to the marketing of the shares.

Piggyback Registration Rights

              If at any time after this offering we propose to register any shares of our securities under the Securities Act, the holders of registrable securities will be entitled to notice of the registration and to include their shares of registrable securities in the registration, subject to certain exceptions relating to employee benefit plans and mergers and acquisitions. If our proposed registration involves an underwriting, the managing underwriter of such offering will have the right to limit the number of shares to be underwritten, subject to certain restrictions, for reasons related to the marketing of the shares.

Form S-3 Registration Rights

              If at any time after 180 days following this offering we become entitled under the Securities Act to register our shares on Form S-3 and the holders of registrable securities then outstanding request in writing that we register their shares for public resale on Form S-3 with a reasonably anticipated aggregate price to the public of at least $1,000,000, we will be required to use our best efforts to effect such registration; provided, however, that if such registration would be seriously detrimental to us or our stockholders, we may defer the registration for up to 120 days. We are only obligated to effect up to two registrations on Form S-3 in any 12-month period.

Voting Rights

              Under the provisions of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation to become effective upon completion of this offering, holders of our common stock are entitled to one vote for each share of common stock held by such holder on any matter submitted to a vote at a meeting of stockholders. Our post-offering amended and restated certificate of incorporation does not provide cumulative voting rights to holders of our common stock.

124


Table of Contents

Anti-Takeover Effects of Delaware Law and Our Certificate of Incorporation and Bylaws

              Certain provisions of Delaware law and our restated certificate of incorporation and bylaws that will become effective upon completion of this offering contain provisions that could have the effect of delaying, deferring or discouraging another party from acquiring control of us. These provisions, which are summarized below, are expected to discourage certain types of coercive takeover practices and inadequate takeover bids. These provisions are also designed in part to encourage anyone seeking to acquire control of us to first negotiate with our board of directors. We believe that the advantages gained by protecting our ability to negotiate with any unsolicited and potentially unfriendly acquirer outweigh the disadvantages of discouraging such proposals, including those priced above the then-current market value of our common stock, because, among other reasons, the negotiation of such proposals could improve their terms.

Certificate of Incorporation and Bylaws

              Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and bylaws to become effective upon completion of this offering include provisions that:

Delaware Anti-Takeover Statute

              We are subject to the provisions of Section 203 of the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware regulating corporate takeovers. In general, Section 203 prohibits a publicly-held Delaware corporation from engaging, under certain circumstances, in a business combination with an interested

125


Table of Contents

stockholder for a period of three years following the date the person became an interested stockholder unless:

              Generally, a business combination includes a merger, asset or stock sale, or other transaction resulting in a financial benefit to the interested stockholder. An interested stockholder is a person who, together with affiliates and associates, owns or, within three years prior to the determination of interested stockholder status, did own 15% or more of a corporation's outstanding voting stock. We expect the existence of this provision to have an anti-takeover effect with respect to transactions our board of directors does not approve in advance. We also anticipate that Section 203 may discourage business combinations or other attempts that might result in a premium over the market price for the shares of common stock held by our stockholders.

              The provisions of Delaware law and our restated certificate of incorporation and bylaws to become effective upon completion of this offering could have the effect of discouraging others from attempting hostile takeovers and, as a consequence, may also inhibit temporary fluctuations in the market price of our common stock that often result from actual or rumored hostile takeover attempts. These provisions may also have the effect of preventing changes in our management. It is possible that these provisions could make it more difficult to accomplish transactions that stockholders may otherwise deem to be in their best interests.

Transfer Agent and Registrar

              Upon the completion of this offering, the transfer agent and registrar for our common stock will be American Stock Transfer & Trust Company, LLC.

Listing

              We have applied to list our common stock for quotation on The NASDAQ Global Market under the trading symbol "CTRL".

126


Table of Contents


SHARES ELIGIBLE FOR FUTURE SALE

              Before this offering, there has not been a public market for shares of our common stock. Future sales of substantial amounts of shares of our common stock, including shares issued upon the exercise of outstanding options, in the public market after this offering, or the possibility of these sales occurring, could cause the prevailing market price for our common stock to fall or impair our ability to raise equity capital in the future.

              Upon the completion of this offering, a total of                        shares of common stock will be outstanding, assuming that there are no exercises of options after March 31, 2013. Of these shares, all                        shares of common stock sold in this offering by us, plus any shares sold upon exercise of the underwriters' option to purchase additional shares, will be freely tradable in the public market without restriction or further registration under the Securities Act, unless these shares are held by "affiliates," as that term is defined in Rule 144 under the Securities Act.

              The remaining                        shares of common stock will be "restricted securities," as that term is defined in Rule 144 under the Securities Act. These restricted securities are eligible for public sale only if they are registered under the Securities Act or if they qualify for an exemption from registration under Rules 144 or 701 under the Securities Act, which are summarized below.

              Subject to the lock up agreements described below and the provisions of Rules 144 and 701 under the Securities Act, these restricted securities will be available for sale in the public market as follows:

Date
  Number of
Shares
 

On the date of this prospectus

       

Between 90 and 180 days after the date of this prospectus

       

At various times beginning more than 180 days after the date of this prospectus

       

              In addition, of the 4,609,466 shares of our common stock that were subject to stock options outstanding as of March 31, 2013, options to purchase                                    shares of common stock were vested as of March 31, 2013 and will be eligible for sale 180 days following the effective date of this offering.

Lock-Up Agreements

              We and all of our directors and officers, as well as the other holders of substantially all shares of common stock outstanding immediately prior to this offering, have agreed that, without the prior written consent of Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated and Raymond James & Associates, Inc. on behalf of the underwriters, we and they will not, during the period ending 180 days after the date of this prospectus:

whether any transaction described above is to be settled by delivery of shares of our common stock or such other securities, in cash or otherwise.

127


Table of Contents

              The restrictions described in the immediately preceding paragraph do not apply to the following, provided that (1) Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated and Raymond James & Associates, Inc. receive a signed lock-up agreement for the balance of the lock-up period from each donee, trustee, distributee, or transferee, as the case may be, (2) any such transfer shall not involve a disposition for value, (3) the transfers are not required during the lock-up period to be reported with the Securities and Exchange Commission in accordance with Section 16 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and (4) the equity holder does not otherwise voluntarily effect any public filing or report regarding such transfers during the lock-up period:

              Furthermore, an equity holder may (a) sell our shares purchased on the open market following this offering if and only if (i) such sales are not required during the lock-up period to be reported in any public report or filing with the Securities Exchange Commission, or otherwise and (ii) the equity holder does not otherwise voluntarily effect any public filing or report regarding such sales during the lock-up period, (b) exercise any rights to purchase equity securities, so long as the shares received upon such exercise shall remain subject to the terms of the lock-up agreement; and (c) sell shares in connection with a merger or sale of our company or our assets.

Rule 144

              In general, under Rule 144 as currently in effect, once we have been subject to public company reporting requirements for at least 90 days, a person who is not deemed to have been one of our affiliates for purposes of the Securities Act at any time during 90 days preceding a sale and who has beneficially owned the shares proposed to be sold for at least six months, including the holding period of any prior owner other than our affiliates, is entitled to sell such shares without complying with the manner of sale, volume limitation or notice provisions of Rule 144, subject to compliance with the public information requirements of Rule 144. If such a person has beneficially owned the shares proposed to be sold for at least one year, including the holding period of any prior owner other than our affiliates, then such person is entitled to sell such shares without complying with any of the requirements of Rule 144.

              In general, under Rule 144, as currently in effect, our affiliates or persons selling shares on behalf of our affiliates are entitled to sell upon expiration of the lock-up agreements described above, within any three-month period beginning 90 days after the date of this prospectus, a number of shares that does not exceed the greater of:

128


Table of Contents

              Sales under Rule 144 by our affiliates or persons selling shares on behalf of our affiliates are also subject to certain manner of sale provisions and notice requirements and to the availability of current public information about us.

Rule 701

              Rule 701 generally allows a stockholder who purchased shares of our common stock pursuant to a written compensatory plan or contract and who is not deemed to have been an affiliate of our company during the immediately preceding 90 days to sell these shares in reliance upon Rule 144, but without being required to comply with the public information, holding period, volume limitation, or notice provisions of Rule 144. Rule 701 also permits affiliates of our company to sell their Rule 701 shares under Rule 144 without complying with the holding period requirements of Rule 144. All holders of Rule 701 shares, however, are required to wait until 90 days after the date of this prospectus before selling such shares pursuant to Rule 701.

              As of March 31, 2013,                                    shares of our outstanding common stock had been issued in reliance on Rule 701 as a result of exercises of stock options and stock awards.

Stock Options

              We intend to file a registration statement on Form S-8 under the Securities Act covering all of the shares of our common stock subject to options outstanding or reserved for issuance under our stock plans and shares of our common stock issued upon the exercise of options by employees. We expect to file this registration statement as soon as practicable after this offering. In addition, we intend to file a registration statement on Form S-8 or such other form as may be required under the Securities Act for the resale of shares of our common stock issued upon the exercise of options that were not granted under Rule 701. We expect to file this registration statement as soon as permitted under the Securities Act. However, the shares registered on Form S-8 will be subject to volume limitations, manner of sale, notice and public information requirements of Rule 144 and will not be eligible for resale until expiration of the lock up agreements to which they are subject.

Registration Rights

              Upon completion of this offering, the holders of an aggregate of 16,130,909 shares of our common stock issued or issuable upon conversion of preferred stock will be entitled to various rights with respect to the registration of these shares under the Securities Act. Registration of these shares under the Securities Act would result in these shares becoming fully tradable without restriction under the Securities Act immediately upon the effectiveness of the registration, except for shares purchased by affiliates. See "Description of Capital Stock—Registration Rights" for additional information.

129


Table of Contents


MATERIAL U.S. FEDERAL INCOME AND ESTATE TAX CONSEQUENCES FOR NON-U.S. HOLDERS

              The following is a summary of the material U.S. federal income and estate tax considerations relating to the acquisition, ownership and disposition of common stock pursuant to this offering by non-U.S. holders. This summary deals only with common stock held as a capital asset (within the meaning of Section 1221 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, (the "Code")) by such a holder and does not discuss the U.S. federal income and estate tax considerations applicable to a holder that is subject to special treatment under U.S. federal income and estate tax laws, including, but not limited to: a dealer in securities or currencies; a financial institution; a regulated investment company; a real estate investment trust; a tax-exempt organization; an insurance company; a person holding common stock as part of a hedging, integrated, conversion or straddle transaction or a person deemed to sell common stock under the constructive sale provisions of the Code; a trader in securities that has elected the mark-to-market method of accounting; a person liable for alternative minimum tax; an entity that is treated as a partnership or other pass-through entity for U.S. federal income tax purposes; a person that received such common stock in connection with services provided; a U.S. person whose "functional currency" is not the U.S. dollar; a "controlled foreign corporation;" a "passive foreign investment company;" or a U.S. expatriate.

              This summary is based upon provisions of the Code, applicable U.S. Treasury regulations promulgated thereunder, published rulings and judicial decisions, all as in effect as of the date hereof. Those authorities may be changed, perhaps retroactively, or may be subject to differing interpretations, which could result in U.S. federal income or estate tax consequences different from those discussed below. This summary does not address all aspects of U.S. federal income and estate tax, does not deal with all tax considerations that may be relevant to stockholders in light of their personal circumstances and does not address the Medicare tax imposed on certain investment income or any state, local, foreign, gift or alternative minimum tax considerations.

              For purposes of this discussion, a "U.S. holder" is a beneficial holder of common stock that is: an individual citizen or resident of the United States; a corporation (or any other entity treated as a corporation for U.S. federal income tax purposes) created or organized in or under the laws of the United States, any state thereof or the District of Columbia; an estate the income of which is subject to U.S. federal income taxation regardless of its source; or a trust if it (1) is subject to the primary supervision of a court within the United States and one or more U.S. persons have the authority to control all substantial decisions of the trust or (2) has a valid election in effect under applicable U.S. Treasury regulations to be treated as a U.S. person.

              For purposes of this discussion a "non-U.S. holder" is a beneficial holder of common stock that is neither a U.S. holder nor a partnership (or any other entity or arrangement that is treated as a partnership) for U.S. federal income tax purposes. However, neither the term U.S. holder nor the term non-U.S. holder includes any entity or other person that is subject to special treatment under the Code. If a partnership (or an entity or arrangement that is treated as a partnership for U.S. federal income tax purposes) holds common stock, the tax treatment of a partner will generally depend upon the status of the partner and the activities of the partnership. A partner of a partnership holding common stock is urged to consult its own tax advisors.

               PROSPECTIVE INVESTORS ARE URGED TO CONSULT THEIR OWN TAX ADVISORS CONCERNING THEIR PARTICULAR U.S. FEDERAL INCOME AND ESTATE TAX CONSEQUENCES IN LIGHT OFTHEIR SPECIFIC SITUATIONS, AS WELL AS THE TAX CONSEQUENCES ARISING UNDER ANY STATE, LOCAL OR NON-U.S. TAX LAWS AND ANY OTHER U.S. FEDERAL TAX LAWS (INCLUDING THE U.S. FEDERAL GIFT TAX LAWS).

130


Table of Contents

Distributions on Our Common Stock

              Distributions with respect to common stock, if any, generally will constitute dividends for U.S. federal income tax purposes to the extent paid out of current or accumulated earnings and profits, as determined for U.S. federal income tax purposes. Any portion of a distribution in excess of current or accumulated earnings and profits will be treated as a return of capital and will first be applied to reduce the holder's tax basis in its common stock, but not below zero. Any remaining amount will then be treated as gain from the sale or exchange of the common stock and will be treated as described under "—Disposition of our Common Stock" below.

              Distributions treated as dividends that are paid to a non-U.S. holder, if any, with respect to shares of our common stock will be subject to U.S. federal withholding tax at a rate of 30% (or lower applicable income tax treaty rate) of the gross amount of the dividends unless the dividends are effectively connected with the non-U.S. holder's conduct of a trade or business in the United States. If a non-U.S. holder is engaged in a trade or business in the United States and dividends with respect to the common stock are effectively connected with the conduct of that trade or business and, if required by an applicable income tax treaty, are attributable to a U.S. permanent establishment maintained by the non-U.S. holder, then although the non-U.S. holder will generally be exempt from the 30% U.S. federal withholding tax, provided certain certification requirements are satisfied, the non-U.S. holder will be subject to U.S. federal income tax on those dividends on a net income basis at regular graduated U.S. federal income tax rates in the same manner as if such holder were a resident of the United States. Any such effectively connected income received by a foreign corporation may, under certain circumstances, be subject to an additional branch profits tax equal to 30% (or lower applicable income tax treaty rate) of its effectively connected earnings and profits for the taxable year, as adjusted under the Code. To claim the exemption from withholding with respect to any such effectively connected income, the non-U.S. holder must generally furnish to us or our paying agent a properly executed IRS Form W-8ECI (or applicable successor form). A non-U.S. holder of shares of common stock who wishes to claim the benefit of an exemption or reduced rate of withholding tax under an applicable treaty must furnish to us or our paying agent a valid IRS Form W-8BEN (or applicable successor form) certifying such holder's qualification for the exemption or reduced rate. If a non-U.S. holder is eligible for a reduced rate of U.S. withholding tax pursuant to an income tax treaty, it may obtain a refund of any excess amounts withheld by filing an appropriate claim for refund with the Internal Revenue Service. Non-U.S. holders are urged to consult their tax advisors regarding their entitlement to benefits under a relevant income tax treaty.

Disposition of Our Common Stock

              Non-U.S. holders may recognize gain upon the sale, exchange, redemption or other taxable disposition of common stock. Subject to the discussion below regarding backup withholding and foreign accounts, such gain generally will not be subject to U.S. federal income tax unless: (i) that gain is effectively connected with the non-U.S. holder's conduct of a trade or business in the United States (and, if required by an applicable income tax treaty, is attributable to a U.S. permanent establishment maintained by the non-U.S. holder); (ii) the non-U.S. holder is a nonresident alien individual who is present in the United States for 183 days or more in the taxable year of that disposition, and certain other conditions are met; or (iii) we are or have been a "U.S. real property holding corporation" for U.S. federal income tax purposes at any time during the shorter of the five-year period preceding the date of disposition or the holder's holding period for our common stock, and certain other requirements are met. We believe that we are not and we do not anticipate becoming a "U.S. real property holding corporation" for U.S. federal income tax purposes.

              If a non-U.S. holder is an individual described in clause (i) of the preceding paragraph, the non-U.S. holder will generally be subject to tax on a net income basis at the regular graduated U.S. federal individual income tax rates in the same manner as if such holder were a resident of the United

131


Table of Contents

States, unless an applicable income tax treaty provides otherwise. If the non-U.S. holder is an individual described in clause (ii) of the preceding paragraph, the non-U.S. holder will generally be subject to a flat 30% tax on the gain, which may be offset by U.S. source capital losses even though the non-U.S. holder is not considered a resident of the United States, provided that the non-U.S. holder has timely filed U.S. federal income tax returns with respect to such losses. If a non-U.S. holder is a foreign corporation that falls under clause (i) of the preceding paragraph, it will be subject to tax on a net income basis at the regular graduated U.S. federal corporate income tax rates in the same manner as if it were a resident of the United States and, in addition, the non-U.S. holder may be subject to the branch profits tax at a rate equal to 30% (or lower applicable income tax treaty rate) of its effectively connected earnings and profits.

Information Reporting and Backup Withholding Tax

              We report to our non-U.S. holders and the IRS the amount of dividends paid during each calendar year and the amount of any tax withheld. All distributions to holders of common stock are subject to any applicable withholding. Information reporting requirements apply even if no withholding was required because the distributions were effectively connected with the non-U.S. holder's conduct of a United States trade or business or withholding was reduced or eliminated by an applicable income tax treaty. This information also may be made available under a specific treaty or agreement with the tax authorities in the country in which the non-U.S. holder resides or is established. Under U.S. federal income tax law, interest, dividends and other reportable payments may, under certain circumstances, be subject to "backup withholding" at the then applicable rate. Backup withholding, however, generally will not apply to distributions to a non-U.S. holder of our common stock, provided the non-U.S. holder furnishes to us or our paying agent the required certification as to its non-U.S. status, such as by providing a valid IRS Form W-8BEN or IRS Form W-8ECI, or certain other requirements are met. Notwithstanding the foregoing, backup withholding may apply if either we or our paying agent has actual knowledge, or reason to know, that the holder is a U.S. person that is not an exempt recipient. Backup withholding is not an additional tax but merely an advance payment, which may be refunded to the extent it results in an overpayment of tax and the appropriate information is timely supplied to the IRS.

Foreign Account Tax Compliance Act

              New rules in the Code generally will impose withholding taxes on certain types of payments made to "foreign financial institutions" (as specially defined under these rules), including when the foreign financial institution holds our common stock on behalf of a non-U.S. holder, and certain other non-U.S. entities if certification, information reporting and other specified requirements are not met. The legislation potentially imposes a 30% withholding tax on "withholdable payments" if they are paid to a foreign financial institution or to a foreign non-financial entity, unless (i) the foreign financial institution undertakes certain diligence and reporting obligations and other specified requirements are satisfied or (ii) the foreign non-financial entity either certifies it does not have any substantial U.S. owners or furnishes identifying information regarding each substantial U.S. owner and other specified requirements are satisfied. "Withholdable payment" generally means (i) any payment of interest, dividends, rents and certain other types of generally passive income if such payment is from sources within the United States, and (ii) any gross proceeds from the sale or other disposition of any property of a type that can produce interest or dividends from sources within the United States (including, for example, shares of our common stock). If the payee is a foreign financial institution, it generally will be required to enter into an agreement with the U.S. Treasury requiring, among other things, that it undertake to identify accounts held by certain U.S. persons or U.S.-owned foreign entities, annually report certain information about such accounts and withhold 30% on payments to account holders whose actions prevent it from complying with these reporting and other requirements. If an investor does not provide us with the information necessary to comply with the legislation, it is possible that

132


Table of Contents

distributions to such investor that are attributable to withholdable payments, such as dividends, will be subject to the 30% withholding tax. Any withholding obligations with respect to dividends on our common stock, will not begin prior to January 1, 2014, and any withholding obligations with respect to gross proceeds from a sale or other disposition of our common stock will not begin prior to January 1, 2017. Prospective investors should consult their own tax advisers regarding this legislation.

Federal Estate Tax

              An individual who at the time of death is not a citizen or resident of the United States and who is treated as the owner of, or has made certain lifetime transfers of, an interest in our common stock will be required to include the value thereof in his or her taxable estate for U.S. federal estate tax purposes, and may be subject to U.S. federal estate tax unless an applicable estate tax treaty provides otherwise. The test for whether an individual is a resident of the United States for federal estate tax purposes differs from the test used for U.S. federal income tax purposes. Some individuals, therefore, may be "Non-U.S. Holders" for U.S. federal income tax purposes, but not for U.S. federal estate tax purposes, and vice versa.

133


Table of Contents


UNDERWRITING

              Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated and Raymond James & Associates, Inc. are acting as representatives of each of the underwriters named below. Subject to the terms and conditions set forth in an underwriting agreement among us and the underwriters, we have agreed to sell to the underwriters, and each of the underwriters has agreed, severally and not jointly, to purchase from us, the number of shares of common stock set forth opposite its name below.

                       Underwriter
  Number of
Shares
 

Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith
                      Incorporated

       

Raymond James & Associates, Inc. 

       

Canaccord Genuity Inc. 

       

Cowen and Company, LLC

       

Needham & Company, LLC

       
       

                      Total

       
       

              Subject to the terms and conditions set forth in the underwriting agreement, the underwriters have agreed, severally and not jointly, to purchase all of the shares sold under the underwriting agreement if any of these shares are purchased. If an underwriter defaults, the underwriting agreement provides that the purchase commitments of the nondefaulting underwriters may be increased or the underwriting agreement may be terminated.

              We have agreed to indemnify the underwriters against certain liabilities, including liabilities under the Securities Act, or to contribute to payments the underwriters may be required to make in respect of those liabilities.

              The underwriters are offering the shares, subject to prior sale, when, as and if issued to and accepted by them, subject to approval of legal matters by their counsel, including the validity of the shares, and other conditions contained in the underwriting agreement, such as the receipt by the underwriters of officer's certificates and legal opinions. The underwriters reserve the right to withdraw, cancel or modify offers to the public and to reject orders in whole or in part.

Commissions and Discounts

              The representatives have advised us that the underwriters propose initially to offer the shares to the public at the public offering price set forth on the cover page of this prospectus and to dealers at that price less a concession not in excess of $            per share. After the initial offering, the public offering price, concession or any other term of the offering may be changed.

              The following table shows the public offering price, underwriting discount and proceeds before expenses to us. The information assumes either no exercise or full exercise by the underwriters of their option to purchase additional shares.

 
  Per Share   Without Option   With Option  

Public offering price

  $     $     $    

Underwriting discount

  $     $     $    

Proceeds, before expenses, to us

  $     $     $    

              The expenses of the offering, not including the underwriting discount, are estimated at $            and are payable by us, which includes an amount not to exceed $25,000 that we have agreed to reimburse the underwriters for certain FINRA-related expenses incurred by them in connection with this offering.

134


Table of Contents

Option to Purchase Additional Shares

              We have granted an option to the underwriters, exercisable for 30 days after the date of this prospectus, to purchase up to                                     additional shares at the public offering price, less the underwriting discount. If the underwriters exercise this option, each will be obligated, subject to conditions contained in the underwriting agreement, to purchase a number of additional shares proportionate to that underwriter's initial amount reflected in the above table.

No Sales of Similar Securities

              We, our executive officers and directors and our other existing security holders have agreed not to sell or transfer any common stock or securities convertible into, exchangeable for, exercisable for, or repayable with common stock, for 180 days after the date of this prospectus without first obtaining the written consent of Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated and Raymond James & Associates, Inc. Specifically, we and these other persons have agreed, with certain limited exceptions, not to directly or indirectly

              This lock-up provision applies to common stock and to securities convertible into or exchangeable or exercisable for or repayable with common stock. It also applies to common stock owned now or acquired later by the person executing the agreement or for which the person executing the agreement later acquires the power of disposition.

NASDAQ Global Market Listing

              We expect the shares to be approved for listing on The NASDAQ Global Market, subject to notice of issuance, under the symbol "CTRL."

              Before this offering, there has been no public market for our common stock. The initial public offering price will be determined through negotiations among us and the representatives. In addition to prevailing market conditions, the factors to be considered in determining the initial public offering price are

135


Table of Contents

              An active trading market for the shares may not develop. It is also possible that after the offering the shares will not trade in the public market at or above the initial public offering price.

              The underwriters do not expect to sell more than 5% of the shares in the aggregate to accounts over which they exercise discretionary authority.

Price Stabilization, Short Positions and Penalty Bids

              Until the distribution of the shares is completed, SEC rules may limit underwriters and selling group members from bidding for and purchasing our common stock. However, the representatives may engage in transactions that stabilize the price of the common stock, such as bids or purchases to peg, fix or maintain that price.

              In connection with the offering, the underwriters may purchase and sell our common stock in the open market. These transactions may include short sales, purchases on the open market to cover positions created by short sales and stabilizing transactions. Short sales involve the sale by the underwriters of a greater number of shares than they are required to purchase in the offering. "Covered" short sales are sales made in an amount not greater than the underwriters' option to purchase additional shares described above. The underwriters may close out any covered short position by either exercising their option to purchase additional shares or purchasing shares in the open market. In determining the source of shares to close out the covered short position, the underwriters will consider, among other things, the price of shares available for purchase in the open market as compared to the price at which they may purchase shares through the option granted to them. "Naked" short sales are sales in excess of such option. The underwriters must close out any naked short position by purchasing shares in the open market. A naked short position is more likely to be created if the underwriters are concerned that there may be downward pressure on the price of our common stock in the open market after pricing that could adversely affect investors who purchase in the offering. Stabilizing transactions consist of various bids for or purchases of shares of common stock made by the underwriters in the open market prior to the completion of the offering.

              The underwriters may also impose a penalty bid. This occurs when a particular underwriter repays to the underwriters a portion of the underwriting discount received by it because the representatives have repurchased shares sold by or for the account of such underwriter in stabilizing or short covering transactions.

              Similar to other purchase transactions, the underwriters' purchases to cover the syndicate short sales may have the effect of raising or maintaining the market price of our common stock or preventing or retarding a decline in the market price of our common stock. As a result, the price of our common stock may be higher than the price that might otherwise exist in the open market. The underwriters may conduct these transactions on The NASDAQ Global Market, in the over-the-counter market or otherwise.

              Neither we nor any of the underwriters make any representation or prediction as to the direction or magnitude of any effect that the transactions described above may have on the price of our common stock. In addition, neither we nor any of the underwriters make any representation that the representatives will engage in these transactions or that these transactions, once commenced, will not be discontinued without notice.

Electronic Distribution

              In connection with the offering, certain of the underwriters or securities dealers may distribute prospectuses by electronic means, such as e-mail.

136


Table of Contents

Other Relationships

              Some of the underwriters and their affiliates may in the future engage in investment banking and other commercial dealings in the ordinary course of business with us or our affiliates. They may in the future receive, customary fees and commissions for these transactions.

              In addition, in the ordinary course of their business activities, the underwriters and their affiliates may make or hold a broad array of investments and actively trade debt and equity securities (or related derivative securities) and financial instruments (including bank loans) for their own account and for the accounts of their customers. Such investments and securities activities may involve securities and/or instruments of ours or our affiliates. The underwriters and their affiliates may also make investment recommendations and/or publish or express independent research views in respect of such securities or financial instruments and may hold, or recommend to clients that they acquire, long and/or short positions in such securities and instruments.

Notice to Prospective Investors in the European Economic Area

              In relation to each Member State of the European Economic Area which has implemented the Prospectus Directive (each, a "Relevant Member State"), with effect from and including the date on which the Prospectus Directive is implemented in that Relevant Member State (the "Relevant Implementation Date"), no offer of shares may be made to the public in that Relevant Member State other than:

              Each person in a Relevant Member State who initially acquires any shares or to whom any offer is made will be deemed to have represented, acknowledged and agreed that (A) it is a "qualified investor" within the meaning of the law in that Relevant Member State implementing Article 2(1)(e) of the Prospectus Directive, and (B) in the case of any shares acquired by it as a financial intermediary, as that term is used in Article 3(2) of the Prospectus Directive, the shares acquired by it in the offering have not been acquired on behalf of, nor have they been acquired with a view to their offer or resale to, persons in any Relevant Member State other than "qualified investors" as defined in the Prospectus Directive, or in circumstances in which the prior consent of the representatives has been given to the offer or resale. In the case of any shares being offered to a financial intermediary as that term is used in Article 3(2) of the Prospectus Directive, each such financial intermediary will be deemed to have represented, acknowledged and agreed that the shares acquired by it in the offer have not been acquired on a non-discretionary basis on behalf of, nor have they been acquired with a view to their offer or resale to, persons in circumstances which may give rise to an offer of any shares to the public other than their offer or resale in a Relevant Member State to qualified investors as so defined or in circumstances in which the prior consent of the representatives has been obtained to each such proposed offer or resale.

              The Company, the representatives and their affiliates will rely upon the truth and accuracy of the foregoing representation, acknowledgement and agreement.

137


Table of Contents

              This prospectus has been prepared on the basis that any offer of shares in any Relevant Member State will be made pursuant to an exemption under the Prospectus Directive from the requirement to publish a prospectus for offers of shares. Accordingly any person making or intending to make an offer in that Relevant Member State of shares which are the subject of the offering contemplated in this prospectus may only do so in circumstances in which no obligation arises for the Company or any of the underwriters to publish a prospectus pursuant to Article 3 of the Prospectus Directive in relation to such offer. Neither the Company nor the underwriters have authorized, nor do they authorize, the making of any offer of shares in circumstances in which an obligation arises for the Company or the underwriters to publish a prospectus for such offer.

              For the purpose of the above provisions, the expression "an offer to the public" in relation to any shares in any Relevant Member State means the communication in any form and by any means of sufficient information on the terms of the offer and the shares to be offered so as to enable an investor to decide to purchase or subscribe the shares, as the same may be varied in the Relevant Member State by any measure implementing the Prospectus Directive in the Relevant Member State and the expression "Prospectus Directive" means Directive 2003/71/EC (including the 2010 PD Amending Directive, to the extent implemented in the Relevant Member States) and includes any relevant implementing measure in the Relevant Member State and the expression "2010 PD Amending Directive" means Directive 2010/73/EU.

Notice to Prospective Investors in the United Kingdom

              In addition, in the United Kingdom, this document is being distributed only to, and is directed only at, and any offer subsequently made may only be directed at persons who are "qualified investors" (as defined in the Prospectus Directive) (i) who have professional experience in matters relating to investments falling within Article 19 (5) of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (Financial Promotion) Order 2005, as amended (the "Order") and/or (ii) who are high net worth companies (or persons to whom it may otherwise be lawfully communicated) falling within Article 49(2)(a) to (d) of the Order (all such persons together being referred to as "relevant persons"). This document must not be acted on or relied on in the United Kingdom by persons who are not relevant persons. In the United Kingdom, any investment or investment activity to which this document relates is only available to, and will be engaged in with, relevant persons.

Notice to Prospective Investors in Switzerland

              The shares may not be publicly offered in Switzerland and will not be listed on the SIX Swiss Exchange ("SIX") or on any other stock exchange or regulated trading facility in Switzerland. This document has been prepared without regard to the disclosure standards for issuance prospectuses under art. 652a or art. 1156 of the Swiss Code of Obligations or the disclosure standards for listing prospectuses under art. 27 ff. of the SIX Listing Rules or the listing rules of any other stock exchange or regulated trading facility in Switzerland. Neither this document nor any other offering or marketing material relating to the shares or the offering may be publicly distributed or otherwise made publicly available in Switzerland.

              Neither this document nor any other offering or marketing material relating to the offering, the Company, the shares have been or will be filed with or approved by any Swiss regulatory authority. In particular, this document will not be filed with, and the offer of shares will not be supervised by, the Swiss Financial Market Supervisory Authority FINMA (FINMA), and the offer of shares has not been and will not be authorized under the Swiss Federal Act on Collective Investment Schemes ("CISA"). The investor protection afforded to acquirers of interests in collective investment schemes under the CISA does not extend to acquirers of shares.

138


Table of Contents

Notice to Prospective Investors in the Dubai International Financial Centre

              This prospectus supplement relates to an Exempt Offer in accordance with the Offered Securities Rules of the Dubai Financial Services Authority ("DFSA"). This prospectus supplement is intended for distribution only to persons of a type specified in the Offered Securities Rules of the DFSA. It must not be delivered to, or relied on by, any other person. The DFSA has no responsibility for reviewing or verifying any documents in connection with Exempt Offers. The DFSA has not approved this prospectus supplement nor taken steps to verify the information set forth herein and has no responsibility for the prospectus supplement. The shares to which this prospectus supplement relates may be illiquid and/or subject to restrictions on their resale. Prospective purchasers of the shares offered should conduct their own due diligence on the shares. If you do not understand the contents of this prospectus supplement you should consult an authorized financial advisor.

139


Table of Contents


LEGAL MATTERS

              The validity of the shares of common stock offered hereby will be passed upon for us by Goodwin Procter LLP, Menlo Park, California. Certain legal matters in connection with this offering will be passed upon for the underwriters by Cooley LLP, Palo Alto, California. Cooley LLP has in the past provided, and continues to provide, legal services to us.


EXPERTS

              The consolidated financial statements of Control4 Corporation at December 31, 2011 and 2012, and for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2012 appearing in this prospectus and registration statement, have been audited by Ernst & Young LLP, independent registered public accounting firm, as set forth in their report thereon and appearing elsewhere herein, and are included in reliance on such report given on the authority of such firm as experts in accounting and auditing.


WHERE YOU CAN FIND MORE INFORMATION

              We have filed with the SEC a registration statement on Form S-1 under the Securities Act with respect to the shares of common stock we are offering. The registration statement, including the attached exhibits and schedules, contains additional relevant information about us and our common stock. This prospectus does not contain all of the information set forth in the registration statement and the exhibits and schedules thereto. The rules and regulations of the SEC allow us to omit from this prospectus certain information included in the registration statement.

              For further information about us and our common stock, you may inspect a copy of the registration statement and the exhibits and schedules to the registration statement without charge at the offices of the SEC at 100 F Street, N.E., Washington, D.C. 20549. You may obtain copies of all or any part of the registration statement from the Public Reference Section of the SEC, 100 F Street, N.E., Washington, D.C. 20549 upon the payment of the prescribed fees.

              You may obtain information on the operation of the Public Reference Room by calling the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330. The SEC maintains a website at www.sec.gov that contains reports, proxy and information statements and other information regarding registrants like us that file electronically with the SEC. You can also inspect our registration statement on this website.

              Upon the closing of this offering, we will become subject to the reporting and information requirements of the Exchange Act, and we will file reports, proxy statements and other information with the SEC.

140


Table of Contents


INDEX TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

  F-2

Consolidated Balance Sheets

 
F-3

Consolidated Statements of Operations

 
F-4

Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Loss

 
F-5

Consolidated Statements of Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock and Stockholders' Equity (Deficit)

 
F-6

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows

 
F-7

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

 
F-8

F-1


Table of Contents


Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

The Board of Directors and Stockholders of
Control4 Corporation

              We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Control4 Corporation as of December 31, 2012 and 2011, and the related consolidated statements of operations, comprehensive loss, redeemable convertible preferred stock and stockholders' equity (deficit), and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2012. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company's management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.

              We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. We were not engaged to perform an audit of the Company's internal control over financial reporting. Our audits included consideration of internal control over financial reporting as a basis for designing audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the Company's internal control over financial reporting. Accordingly, we express no such opinion. An audit also includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, and evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

              In our opinion, the financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the consolidated financial position of Control4 Corporation at December 31, 2012 and 2011, and the consolidated results of its operations and its cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2012, in conformity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles.

Salt Lake City, Utah
March 15, 2013, except for the first paragraph of Note 10, as to which the date is July             , 2013

The foregoing report is in the form that will be signed upon the completion of the reverse stock split described in the first paragraph of Note 10 to the consolidated financial statements.

/s/ Ernst & Young LLP

Salt Lake City, Utah
July 17, 2013

F-2


Table of Contents


CONTROL4 CORPORATION

CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS

(in thousands, except share data)

 
  December 31,    
  Pro Forma
as of
March 31,
2013
 
 
  March 31,
2013
 
 
  2011   2012  
 
   
   
  (unaudited)
  (unaudited)
 

Assets

                         

Current assets:

                         

Cash and cash equivalents

  $ 18,468   $ 18,695   $ 14,573   $    

Accounts receivable, net

    10,662     13,078     13,255        

Inventories

    9,497     12,515     12,538        

Prepaid expenses and other current assets

    1,519     1,871     2,183        
                   

Total current assets

    40,146     46,159     42,549        

Property and equipment, net

    2,127     2,666     3,566        

Intangible assets, net

    1,197     926     858        

Other assets

    64     887     2,482        
                   

Total assets

  $ 43,534   $ 50,638   $ 49,455        
                   

Liabilities, redeemable convertible preferred stock and stockholders' equity (deficit)

                         

Current liabilities:

                         

Accounts payable

  $ 9,813   $ 14,435   $ 12,917        

Accrued liabilities

    4,454     6,571     6,625        

Deferred revenue

    552     542     1,035        

Current portion of notes payable

    971     1,321     1,425        
                   

Total current liabilities

    15,790     22,869     22,002        

Notes payable

    1,349     1,838     1,969        

Warrant liability

    347     601     576        

Other long-term liabilities

    2,241     1,620     1,799        
                   

Total liabilities

    19,727     26,928     26,346     25,770  

Commitments and contingencies

                         

Redeemable convertible preferred stock, $0.0001 par value; 83,163,408 shares authorized; 15,293,960 shares issued and outstanding at December 31, 2011 and 2012 and March 31, 2013 (unaudited); aggregate liquidation preference of $118,150 at December 31, 2011 and 2012 and March 31, 2013; no shares authorized, issued and outstanding, pro forma (unaudited)

    116,313     116,313     116,313      

Stockholders' equity (deficit):

                         

Preferred stock, $0.0001 par value, no shares authorized, issued and outstanding, actual; 25,000,000 shares authorized, no shares issued and outstanding, pro forma (unaudited)

                         

Common stock, $0.0001 par value; 117,836,592, 127,836,592 and 127,836,592 shares authorized; 2,245,521, 2,490,870 and 2,507,075 shares issued and outstanding at December 31, 2011 and 2012 and March 31, 2013 (unaudited), respectively; 500,000,000 shares authorized, 17,974,335 shares issued and outstanding, pro forma (unaudited)

                2  

Additional paid-in capital

    9,334     12,988     13,863     130,750  

Accumulated deficit

    (101,864 )   (105,587 )   (107,058 )   (107,058 )

Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss)

    24     (4 )   (9 )   (9 )
                   

Total stockholders' equity (deficit)

    (92,506 )   (92,603 )   (93,204 )   23,685  
                   

Total liabilities, redeemable convertible preferred stock and stockholders' equity (deficit)

  $ 43,534   $ 50,638   $ 49,455   $ 49,455  
                   

See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.

F-3


Table of Contents


CONTROL4 CORPORATION

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS

(in thousands, except per share data)

 
  Years Ended December 31,   Three Months
Ended
March 31,
 
 
  2010   2011   2012   2012   2013  
 
   
   
   
  (unaudited)
 

Revenue

  $ 74,925   $ 93,376   $ 109,512   $ 22,628   $ 26,571  

Cost of revenue

    43,357     50,534     57,225     12,466     13,550  

Cost of revenue—inventory purchase commitment

            1,840          
                       

Gross margin

    31,568     42,842     50,447     10,162     13,021  

Operating expenses:

                               

Research and development

    15,922     19,211     20,310     4,813     6,066  

Sales and marketing

    22,491     17,546     20,182     5,038     5,605  

General and administrative

    8,876     9,805     10,150     2,532     2,828  

Litigation settlement

            2,869          
                       

Total operating expenses

    47,289     46,562     53,511     12,383     14,499  
                       

Loss from operations

    (15,721 )   (3,720 )   (3,064 )   (2,221 )   (1,478 )

Other income (expense):

                               

Interest income

    7     4     13     3     3  

Interest expense

    (411 )   (396 )   (277 )   (65 )   (78 )

Other income (expense)

    (140 )   227     (254 )   (400 )   26  
                       

Total other expense

    (544 )   (165 )   (518 )   (462 )   (49 )
                       

Loss before income taxes

    (16,265 )   (3,885 )   (3,582 )   (2,683 )   (1,527 )

Income tax (expense) benefit

            (141 )       56  
                       

Net loss

  $ (16,265 ) $ (3,885 ) $ (3,723 ) $ (2,683 ) $ (1,471 )
                       

Net loss per common share, basic and diluted

  $ (9.93 ) $ (2.02 ) $ (1.58 ) $ (1.19 ) $ (0.59 )
                       

Weighted-average number of shares, basic and diluted

    1,638     1,923     2,360     2,249     2,502  
                       

Pro forma net loss per common share, basic and diluted

              $ (0.21 )       $ (0.08 )
                             

Pro forma weighted-average number of common shares, basic and diluted

                17,828           17,969  
                             

   

See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.

F-4


Table of Contents


CONTROL4 CORPORATION

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF COMPREHENSIVE LOSS

(in thousands)

 
  Years Ended December 31,   Three Months
Ended
March 31,
 
 
  2010   2011   2012   2012   2013  
 
   
   
   
  (unaudited)
 

Net loss

  $ (16,265 ) $ (3,885 ) $ (3,723 ) $ (2,683 ) $ (1,471 )

Other comprehensive income (loss):

                               

Unrealized gain (loss) on foreign currency exchange

    36     (10 )   (28 )   (42 )   (5 )
                       

Total other comprehensive income (loss)

    36     (10 )   (28 )   (42 )   (5 )
                       

Comprehensive loss

  $ (16,229 ) $ (3,895 ) $ (3,751 ) $ (2,725 ) $ (1,476 )
                       

   

See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.

F-5


Table of Contents


CONTROL4 CORPORATION

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF REDEEMABLE CONVERTIBLE PREFERRED STOCK
AND STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY (DEFICIT)

(in thousands, except share data)

 
   
   
  Stockholders' Equity (Deficit)  
 
  Redeemable
Convertible
Preferred Stock
  Common Stock    
   
   
   
 
 
   
   
  Accumulated
Other
Comprehensive
(Loss) Income
  Total
Stockholders'
Equity
(Deficit)
 
 
  Number of
Shares
   
  Additional
Paid-In Capital
  Accumulated
Deficit
 
 
  Shares   Amount   Amount  

Balance at December 31, 2009

    13,279,319   $ 97,670     1,567,357   $   $ 2,987   $ (81,714 ) $ (2 ) $ (78,729 )

Net loss

                        (16,265 )       (16,265 )

Other comprehensive income

                            36     36  

Stock-based compensation

                    1,469             1,469  

Issuance of common stock upon exercise of stock options              

            96,687         202             202  

Issuance of common stock warrants in exchange for acquired assets

                    313             313  
                                   

Balance at December 31, 2010

    13,279,319     97,670     1,664,044         4,971     (97,979 )   34     (92,974 )

Net loss

                        (3,885 )       (3,885 )

Other comprehensive loss

                            (10 )   (10 )

Issuance of Series H redeemable convertible preferred stock for cash in February 2011, net of issuance costs of $211

    2,014,641     18,643                          

Issuance of common stock warrants

                    1,146             1,146  

Stock-based compensation

                    1,988             1,988  

Issuance of common stock upon exercise of stock options              

            577,437         1,204             1,204  

Issuance of common stock in exchange for services

            4,040         25             25  
                                   

Balance at December 31, 2011

    15,293,960     116,313     2,245,521         9,334     (101,864 )   24     (92,506 )

Net loss

                        (3,723 )       (3,723 )

Other comprehensive loss

                            (28 )   (28 )

Stock-based compensation

                    2,869             2,869  

Issuance of common stock upon exercise of stock options              

            245,349         785             785  
                                   

Balance at December 31, 2012

    15,293,960     116,313     2,490,870         12,988     (105,587 )   (4 )   (92,603 )

Net loss (unaudited)

                        (1,471 )       (1,471 )

Other comprehensive loss (unaudited)

                            (5 )   (5 )

Stock-based compensation (unaudited)

                    838             838  

Issuance of common stock upon exercise of stock options (unaudited)

            16,205         37             37  
                                   

Balance at March 31, 2013 (unaudited)

    15,293,960   $ 116,313     2,507,075   $   $ 13,863   $ (107,058 ) $ (9 ) $ (93,204 )
                                   

   

See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.

F-6


Table of Contents


CONTROL4 CORPORATION

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS

(in thousands)

 
  Years Ended December 31,   Three Months
Ended
March 31,
 
 
  2010   2011   2012   2012   2013  
 
   
   
   
  (unaudited)
 

Operating activities

                               

Net loss

  $ (16,265 ) $ (3,885 ) $ (3,723 ) $ (2,683 ) $ (1,471 )

Adjustments to reconcile net loss to net cash (used in) provided by operating activities:

                               

Depreciation expense

    1,593     1,615     1,714     407     512  

Amortization of intangible assets

    21     139     271     68     68  

Provision for doubtful accounts

    470     283     184     114     70  

Loss on inventory purchase commitment

            1,840          

Loss on disposal of property and equipment

            107          

Stock-based compensation

    1,469     2,013     2,869     731     838  

Warrant liability (income) expense

    140     (227 )   254     399     (25 )

Changes in assets and liabilities:

                               

Accounts receivable

    1,561     (2,645 )   (2,600 )   (54 )   (332 )

Inventories

    (4,705 )   2,323     (4,858 )   (492 )   (94 )

Prepaid expenses and other current assets           

    (212 )   396     (352 )   (1 )   (338 )

Other assets

    (41 )   155     (823 )   1     (1,595 )

Accounts payable

    2,464     (975 )   4,622     614     (1,319 )

Accrued liabilities

    589     882     2,117     (424 )   77  

Deferred revenue

    195     (95 )   (10 )   54     493  

Other long-term liabilities

    (357 )   (565 )   (621 )   (125 )   179  
                       

Net cash (used in) provided by operating activities

    (13,078 )   (586 )   991     (1,391 )   (2,937 )

Investing activities

                               

Purchases of property and equipment

    (2,025 )   (1,264 )   (2,360 )   (542 )   (1,431 )

Acquisition of intangible assets

    (319 )   (725 )            
                       

Net cash used in investing activities

    (2,344 )   (1,989 )   (2,360 )   (542 )   (1,431 )

Financing activities

                               

Net proceeds from issuance of redeemable convertible preferred stock and common stock warrants

        19,789              

Proceeds from exercise of options for common stock

    202     1,204     785         37  

Net (repayment) borrowing against revolving line of credit

    4,314     (6,314 )            

Proceeds from notes payable

    893     1,064     1,876     311     435  

Repayment of notes payable

    (1,367 )   (744 )   (1,037 )   (243 )   (200 )
                       

Net cash provided by financing activities

    4,042     14,999     1,624     68     272  

Effect of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents

    36     (10 )   (28 )   (42 )   (26 )
                       

Net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

    (11,344 )   12,414     227     (1,907 )   (4,122 )

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period

    17,398     6,054     18,468     18,468     18,695  
                       

Cash and cash equivalents at end of period

  $ 6,054   $ 18,468   $ 18,695   $ 16,561   $ 14,573  
                       

Supplemental disclosure of cash flow information

                               

Cash paid for interest

  $ 416   $ 396   $ 278   $ 66   $ 63  

Cash paid for taxes

            26         50  

   

See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.

F-7


Table of Contents


CONTROL4 CORPORATION

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(INFORMATION AS OF MARCH 31, 2013 AND FOR THE

THREE MONTHS ENDED MARCH 31, 2012 AND 2013 IS UNAUDITED)

1. Description of Business and Summary of Significant Accounting Policies

              Control4 Corporation ("Control4" or the "Company") is a leading provider of automation and control solutions for the connected home. We unlock the potential of connected devices, making entertainment systems easier to use, homes more comfortable, appliances more comfortable and energy efficient, and families more secure. The Company was incorporated in the state of Delaware on March 27, 2003.

Reclassifications

              Certain prior-year amounts have been reclassified in order to conform to the current-year presentation. These reclassifications related primarily to customer rebates which in prior periods were included in accrued liabilities and have now been presented net with accounts receivable as well as reclassification of depreciation expense into the applicable functional captions on the statements of operations. These reclassifications had no effect on previously reported net loss.

Unaudited Financial Information

              The accompanying interim consolidated balance sheet as of March 31, 2013, the consolidated statements of operations, comprehensive loss and cash flows for the three months ended March 31, 2012 and 2013, and the consolidated statement of redeemable convertible preferred stock and stockholders' equity (deficit) for the three months ended March 31, 2013 are unaudited. These unaudited interim consolidated financial statements have been prepared in accordance with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles ("GAAP") on the same basis as the audited consolidated financial statements and, in the opinion of management, reflect all adjustments, consisting of only normal recurring adjustments, considered necessary to present fairly the Company's financial position as of March 31, 2013 and its results of operations and cash flows for the three months ended March 31, 2012 and 2013. The results of operations for the three months ended March 31, 2013 are not necessarily indicative of the results that may be expected for the year ending December 31, 2013, or any other future interim or annual period.

Unaudited Pro Forma Balance Sheet

              The unaudited pro forma balance sheet gives effect to the conversion of all outstanding shares of redeemable preferred stock into 15,293,960 shares of common stock, the net exercise of warrants to purchase capital stock into an aggregate of 173,300 shares of common stock and the reclassification of the associated warrant liability to additional paid in capital as if an initial public offering occurred on March 31, 2013 and assuming the valuation of the Company prior to such initial public offering is at least $225 million and the net proceeds to the Company from such initial public offering are not less than $35 million.

Basis of Presentation

              The consolidated financial statements include the accounts of the Company and its wholly owned subsidiaries. All intercompany balances and transactions have been eliminated in the consolidated financial statements.

F-8


Table of Contents


CONTROL4 CORPORATION

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

(INFORMATION AS OF MARCH 31, 2013 AND FOR THE

THREE MONTHS ENDED MARCH 31, 2012 AND 2013 IS UNAUDITED)

1. Description of Business and Summary of Significant Accounting Policies (Continued)

Segment Reporting

              Operating segments are identified as components of an enterprise about which separate discrete financial information is available for evaluation by the chief operating decision-maker, the Chief Executive Officer, in making decisions regarding resource allocation and accessing performance. To date, the Company has viewed its operations and manages its business as one segment.

Use of Accounting Estimates

              The preparation of financial statements in conformity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities as of the date of the financial statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. On an ongoing basis, the Company evaluates its estimates including those related to revenue recognition, sales returns, provisions for doubtful accounts, product warranty, inventory obsolescence, litigation, determination of fair value of stock options, deferred tax asset valuation allowances and income taxes. Actual results may differ from those estimates.

Revenue Recognition

              The Company sells its products through a network of independent dealers, regional and national retailers and distributors. These dealers, retailers and distributors generally sell the Company's products to the end consumer as part of a bundled sale, which typically includes other third-party products and related services, project design and installation services and on-going support.

              The Company recognizes revenue when persuasive evidence of an arrangement exists, delivery has occurred, the sales price is fixed or determinable, and collection is reasonably assured. Product is considered delivered to the customer once it has been shipped and title and risk of loss have been transferred. For most of the Company's product sales, these criteria are met at the time the product is shipped. Payments received in advance of providing products are recorded as deferred revenue and recorded as revenue when the revenue recognition criteria are met and the earnings process is complete.

              The Company records estimated reductions to revenue for dealer, retailer and distributor incentives, primarily comprised of volume rebates, at the time of the initial sale. The estimated reductions to revenue for rebates are based on the sales terms and the Company's historical experience and trend analysis. The most common incentive relates to amounts paid or credited to customers for achieving defined volume levels or growth objectives.

              Software license revenue represents fees earned from activating applications which allow end consumers to manage and control their automation systems using tablets, smartphones and other third-party devices. The Company's perpetual software licenses do not include acceptance provisions, rights to updates or post-contract customer support; the Company generally recognizes revenue at the time the software license is provided to the customer.

              The Company offers a subscription service that allows consumers to control and monitor their homes remotely and allows the Company's dealers to perform remote diagnostic services.

F-9


Table of Contents


CONTROL4 CORPORATION

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

(INFORMATION AS OF MARCH 31, 2013 AND FOR THE

THREE MONTHS ENDED MARCH 31, 2012 AND 2013 IS UNAUDITED)

1. Description of Business and Summary of Significant Accounting Policies (Continued)

Subscription revenue is deferred at the time of payment and recognized on a straight-line basis over the period the service is provided.

              Total revenue for subscription services and software represents less than 10 percent of total revenue for all periods presented.

              The Company recognizes revenue net of cost of revenue for third-party products sold through the Company's online ordering system. While the Company assumes credit risk on sales to its customers for third-party products, the Company does not determine the product selling price, does not retain associated inventory risks and is not the primary obligor to the end consumer.

              The Company's agreements with dealers and distributors generally do not include rights of return or acceptance provisions. Even though contractual agreements do not provide return privileges, there are circumstances in which the Company will accept returns. In addition, agreements with certain retail customers contain stock rotation and other rights of return. The Company maintains a reserve for such returns based on the Company's historical return experience.

              Shipping charges billed to customers are included in revenue and related shipping costs are included in cost of revenue.

Cost of Revenue

              Cost of revenue includes the following: the cost of inventory sold during the period, inventory write-down costs, payroll and other direct installation services costs, purchasing costs, royalty obligations, shipping expenses to customers and warehousing costs, which include inbound freight costs from manufacturers, rent and payroll and benefit costs.

Cash and Cash Equivalents

              The Company considers all highly liquid short-term investments with original maturities of three months or less at the time of purchase to be cash equivalents. Cash equivalents consist primarily of money market funds.

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

              The Company extends credit to the majority of its customers, which consist primarily of small, local businesses. Issuance of credit is based on ongoing credit evaluations by the Company of customers' financial condition and generally requires no collateral. Trade accounts receivable are recorded at the invoiced amount and do not bear interest. The Company maintains an allowance for doubtful accounts to reserve for potential uncollectible receivables. The allowance is based upon the creditworthiness of the Company's customers, the customers' historical payment experience, the age of the receivables and current market and economic conditions. Provisions for potentially uncollectible accounts are recorded in sales and marketing expenses. The Company writes off accounts receivable balances to the allowance for doubtful accounts when it becomes likely that they will not be collected.

F-10


Table of Contents


CONTROL4 CORPORATION

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

(INFORMATION AS OF MARCH 31, 2013 AND FOR THE

THREE MONTHS ENDED MARCH 31, 2012 AND 2013 IS UNAUDITED)

1. Description of Business and Summary of Significant Accounting Policies (Continued)

              The following table presents the changes in the allowance for doubtful accounts (in thousands):

 
  Years Ended
December 31,
   
 
 
  Three Months
Ended
March 31,
2013
 
 
  2010   2011   2012  

Balance at beginning of period

  $ 773   $ 619   $ 651   $ 643  

Provision

    470     283     184     70  

Deductions

    (624 )   (251 )   (192 )   (68 )
                   

Balance at end of period

  $ 619   $ 651   $ 643   $ 645  
                   

Concentrations of Risk

              Financial instruments that potentially subject the Company to a concentration of credit risk consist of cash and cash equivalents and accounts receivable. The Company deposits cash and cash equivalents with one high-credit-quality financial institution and maintains balances that exceed federally insured amounts. The Company has policies that limit its investments as to types of investments, maturity, liquidity, credit quality, concentration and diversification of issuers.

              The Company's accounts receivable are derived from revenue earned from customers primarily located in the United States and Canada. The Company's sales to customers located outside the United States are generally denominated in United States dollars, except for sales to customers located in the United Kingdom, which are denominated in pounds sterling. There were no individual account balances greater than 10% of total accounts receivable at December 31, 2011 and 2012 and March 31, 2013.

              No customer accounted for more than 10% of total revenue for the years ended December 31, 2010, 2011 and 2012 or for the three months ended March 31, 2012 and 2013.

              The Company relies on a limited number of suppliers for its contract manufacturing. A significant disruption in the operations of these manufacturers would impact the production of the Company's products for a substantial period of time, which could have a material adverse effect on the Company's business, financial condition and results of operations.

Geographic Information

              The Company's revenue includes amounts earned through sales to customers located outside of the United States. With the exception of Canada, no single foreign country accounted for more than 10% of total revenue during the years ended December 31, 2010, 2011 and 2012 or for the three

F-11


Table of Contents


CONTROL4 CORPORATION

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

(INFORMATION AS OF MARCH 31, 2013 AND FOR THE

THREE MONTHS ENDED MARCH 31, 2012 AND 2013 IS UNAUDITED)

1. Description of Business and Summary of Significant Accounting Policies (Continued)

months ended March 31, 2012 and 2013. The following table sets forth revenue from U.S., Canadian and all other international customers combined (in thousands):

 
  Years Ended December 31,   Three Months
Ended
March 31,
 
 
  2010   2011   2012   2012   2013  
 
   
   
   
  (unaudited)
 

Revenue—United States

  $ 53,566   $ 63,625   $ 69,957   $ 15,311   $ 17,702  

Revenue—Canada

    9,799     10,480     12,453     2,462     3,345  

Revenue—all other international sources

    11,560     19,271     27,102     4,855     5,524  
                       

Total revenue

  $ 74,925   $ 93,376   $ 109,512   $ 22,628   $ 26,571  
                       

International revenue (excluding Canada) as a percent of total revenue

    15%     21%     25%     21%     21%  

Inventories

              Inventories consist of hardware and related component parts and are stated at the lower of cost or market using the first-in, first-out method. The Company periodically assesses the recoverability of its inventory and reduces the carrying value of the inventory when items are determined to be obsolete, defective or in excess of forecasted sales requirements. Inventory write-downs for excess, defective and obsolete inventory are recorded as a cost of revenue and totaled $1.1 million, $1.3 million, $1.5 million, $0.4 million and $0.4 million for the years ended December 31, 2010, 2011 and 2012 and for the three months ended March 31, 2012 and 2013, respectively.

              In December 2012, the Company finalized termination of a sales contract and, as a result of the contract termination, recorded a $1.8 million expense associated with an anticipated loss on firm purchase commitments for components that would have been required to meet the Company's obligations under the terminated contract. The $1.8 million charge has been recorded as Cost of Revenue—Inventory Purchase Commitment in the accompanying consolidated statement of operations during the year ended December 31, 2012.

Property and Equipment

              Property and equipment are recorded at historical cost, less accumulated depreciation. Depreciation is computed using the straight-line method over the following estimated useful lives:

Furniture and fixtures

  5 years

Manufacturing tooling and test equipment

  2-3 years

Lab, marketing and warehouse equipment

  3 years

Computer equipment and software

  3 years

Marketing equipment

  1-3 years

F-12


Table of Contents


CONTROL4 CORPORATION

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

(INFORMATION AS OF MARCH 31, 2013 AND FOR THE

THREE MONTHS ENDED MARCH 31, 2012 AND 2013 IS UNAUDITED)

1. Description of Business and Summary of Significant Accounting Policies (Continued)

              Maintenance and repairs that do not extend the life of or improve the asset are expensed in the year incurred. Leasehold improvements are depreciated over the estimated useful life (usually 3-5 years) or the life of the associated lease, whichever is less.

Intangible Assets

              Intangible assets consist of acquired technology. The Company amortizes, to cost of revenue, definite-lived intangible assets on a straight-line basis over the life of the technology, which is estimated to be five years.

Impairment of Long-Lived Assets

              The carrying value of long-lived assets is reviewed for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount of an asset or asset group may not be recoverable. An impairment loss is recognized when the carrying amount of an asset exceeds the estimated undiscounted future cash flows expected to result from the use of the asset and its eventual disposition. The amount of the impairment loss to be recorded is calculated by the excess of the asset's carrying value over its fair value. Fair value is generally determined using a discounted cash flow analysis.

Product Warranty

              The Company provides its customers a limited product warranty of two years, which requires the Company to repair or replace defective products during the warranty period at no cost to the customer. The Company estimates the costs that may be incurred to replace or repair defective products and records a reserve at the time revenue is recognized. Factors that affect the Company's warranty liability include the number of installed systems, the Company's historical experience and management's judgment regarding anticipated rates of product warranty returns. The Company assesses the adequacy of its recorded warranty liability each period and makes adjustments to the liability as necessary.

              The following table presents the changes in the product warranty liability (in thousands):

 
  Years Ended
December 31,
   
 
 
  Three Months
Ended
March 31,
2013
 
 
  2010   2011   2012  
 
   
   
   
  (unaudited)
 

Balance at beginning of period

  $ 775   $ 775   $ 1,030   $ 1,155  

Warranty costs accrued

    320     727     1,050     139  

Warranty claims

    (320 )   (472 )   (925 )   (140 )
                   

Balance at end of period

  $ 775   $ 1,030   $ 1,155   $ 1,154  
                   

Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock Warrant

              Freestanding warrants and other similar instruments related to shares that are redeemable are accounted for in accordance with ASC 480, "Distinguishing Liabilities and Equity." Under ASC 480, freestanding warrants that relate to the Company's redeemable convertible preferred stock are

F-13


Table of Contents


CONTROL4 CORPORATION

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

(INFORMATION AS OF MARCH 31, 2013 AND FOR THE

THREE MONTHS ENDED MARCH 31, 2012 AND 2013 IS UNAUDITED)

1. Description of Business and Summary of Significant Accounting Policies (Continued)

classified as a liability on the balance sheet. The warrant to purchase Series G-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock is subject to re-measurement at each balance sheet date and any change in fair value is recognized as a component of other income or expense. Fair value is measured using the Black-Scholes option pricing model. The Company will continue to adjust the liability for changes in fair value until the completion of its planned initial public offering, at which time the redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants will expire or be exercised and converted into common stock and, accordingly, the liability will be reclassified to equity.

Foreign Currency Translation

              The functional currency of the Company's subsidiaries in England, China and India are the pound sterling, the Chinese Yuan and the Indian Rupee, respectively. The subsidiary's assets and liabilities have been translated to U.S. dollars using the exchange rates in effect at the balance sheet date. Statements of operations amounts have been translated using the average exchange rate for each year. Resulting gains or losses from translating foreign currency financial statements are recorded as other comprehensive income (loss). Foreign currency transaction gains (losses) resulting from exchange rate fluctuations on transactions denominated in a currency other than the local currency are included in earnings.

Stock-Based Compensation

              The Company recognizes compensation expense for all stock-based awards issued to employees and directors based on estimated grant date fair values. The Company selected the Black-Scholes option-pricing model to determine the estimated fair value at the date of grant for stock options. The Company elected to amortize compensation expense using the straight-line attribution method, under which stock-based compensation expense is recognized on a straight-line basis over the period the employee performs the related services, generally the vesting period of four years, net of estimated forfeitures. The Company has estimated forfeiture rates based on its historical experience and will update the rates, as necessary, in subsequent periods if actual forfeitures differ from initial estimates.

              The Black-Scholes option-pricing model requires management assumptions regarding various factors that require extensive use of accounting judgment and financial estimates. The Company estimates the expected term for options using the simplified method, which utilizes the weighted average expected life of each tranche of the stock option, determined based on the sum of each tranche's vesting period plus one-half of the period from the vesting date of each tranche to the stock option's expiration, because the Company's options are considered "plain vanilla." The Company computed the expected volatility using multiple peer companies for a period approximating the expected term. The risk-free interest rate was determined using the implied yield on U.S. Treasury issues with a remaining term within the expected life of the award.

              The Company accounts for stock-based instruments and awards issued to non-employees at fair value using the Black-Scholes option-pricing model. Management believes that the fair value of the stock-based awards is more reliably measured than the fair value of the services received. The fair value of each non-employee award is re-measured each period until a commitment date is reached, which is generally the vesting date.

F-14


Table of Contents


CONTROL4 CORPORATION

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

(INFORMATION AS OF MARCH 31, 2013 AND FOR THE

THREE MONTHS ENDED MARCH 31, 2012 AND 2013 IS UNAUDITED)

1. Description of Business and Summary of Significant Accounting Policies (Continued)

Income Taxes

              The Company recognizes deferred tax assets and liabilities for the future tax consequences attributable to the differences between the financial statement carrying value of existing assets and liabilities and their respective tax bases. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured using enacted tax rates in effect for the fiscal year in which those temporary differences are expected to be recovered or settled. Valuation allowances are established when necessary to reduce deferred tax assets to the amount expected to be realized.

              The Company operates in various tax jurisdictions and is subject to audit by various tax authorities. The Company provides for tax contingencies whenever it is deemed probable that a tax asset has been impaired or a tax liability has been incurred for events such as tax claims or changes in tax laws. Tax contingencies are based upon their technical merits, relative tax law and the specific facts and circumstances as of each reporting period. Changes in facts and circumstances could result in material changes to the amounts recorded for such tax contingencies.

              The Company recognizes uncertain income tax positions taken on income tax returns at the largest amount that is more-likely-than-not to be sustained upon audit by the relevant taxing authority. An uncertain income tax position will not be recognized if it has less than a 50% likelihood of being sustained.

              The Company's policy for recording interest and penalties associated with uncertain tax positions is to record such items as a component of its income tax provision.

Presentation of Certain Taxes

              The Company collects various taxes from customers and remits these amounts to the applicable taxing authorities. The Company's accounting policy is to exclude these taxes from revenue and cost of revenue.

Net Loss Per Share and Unaudited Pro Forma Net Loss Per Share

              Basic net loss per share is computed by dividing the net loss by the weighted-average number of common shares outstanding during the period. Basic and diluted net loss per share of common stock is calculated by dividing the net loss by the weighted-average number of common shares outstanding during the period. Diluted net loss per share of common stock is the same as basic net loss per share of common stock, since the effects of potentially dilutive securities are anti-dilutive. Potentially dilutive common shares result from the assumed exercise of outstanding stock options and the assumed conversion of outstanding convertible preferred stock and warrants using the if-converted method.

              Pro forma basic and diluted net loss per common share have been computed to give effect to the conversion of the Company's convertible preferred stock and warrants into common stock (using the if-converted method) as though the conversion had occurred at the beginning of the period presented.

F-15


Table of Contents


CONTROL4 CORPORATION

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

(INFORMATION AS OF MARCH 31, 2013 AND FOR THE

THREE MONTHS ENDED MARCH 31, 2012 AND 2013 IS UNAUDITED)

1. Description of Business and Summary of Significant Accounting Policies (Continued)

              The following table presents the reconciliation of the numerator and denominator used in the calculation of basic and diluted net loss per share and the shares of common stock used to compute pro forma net loss per common share (in thousands):

 
  Years Ended December 31,   Three Months
Ended
March 31,
 
 
  2010   2011   2012   2012   2013  
 
   
   
   
  (unaudited)
 

Numerator:

                               

Net loss

  $ (16,265 ) $ (3,885 ) $ (3,723 ) $ (2,683 ) $ (1,471 )
                       

Denominator:

                               

Weighted-average common shares outstanding, basic and diluted

    1,638     1,923     2,360     2,249     2,502  
                           

Assumed conversion of convertible preferred stock into shares of common stock

                15,294           15,294  

Assumed conversion of preferred warrants into shares of common stock

                174           173  
                             

Pro forma weighted-average number of common shares, basic and diluted

                17,828           17,969  
                             

              The following weighted-average common stock equivalents were anti-dilutive and therefore were excluded from the calculation of diluted net loss per share (in thousands):

 
  Years Ended December 31,   Three Months
Ended
March 31,
 
 
  2010   2011   2012   2012   2013  
 
   
   
   
  (unaudited)
 

Convertible preferred stock

    13,279     15,257     15,294     15,294     15,294  

Options to purchase common stock

    3,484     3,953     4,317     4,338     4,629  

Warrants to purchase common stock

    13     510     541     541     541  

Warrants to purchase preferred stock

    194     194     194     194     194  
                       

Total

    16,970     19,914     20,346     20,367     20,658  
                       

Fair Value of Financial Instruments

              The carrying amounts reported in the accompanying consolidated financial statements for cash and cash equivalents, accounts payable and accrued liabilities approximate their fair value because of the short-term nature of the accounts. The fair value of the notes payable approximates its carrying value based on the variable nature of interest rates and current market rates available to the Company. The fair value of the warrant liability is discussed in Notes 3 and 7.

F-16


Table of Contents


CONTROL4 CORPORATION

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

(INFORMATION AS OF MARCH 31, 2013 AND FOR THE

THREE MONTHS ENDED MARCH 31, 2012 AND 2013 IS UNAUDITED)

1. Description of Business and Summary of Significant Accounting Policies (Continued)

Recent Accounting Pronouncements

              In June 2011, the FASB issued new guidance which improves the comparability, consistency, and transparency of financial reporting and increases the prominence of items reported in other comprehensive income ("OCI") by eliminating the option to present components of OCI as part of the statement of changes in stockholders' equity. The amendments in this standard require that all non-owner changes in stockholders' equity be presented either in a single continuous statement of comprehensive income or in two separate but consecutive statements. Subsequently in December 2011, the FASB issued additional guidance, which indefinitely defers the requirement to present on the face of the financial statements reclassification adjustments for items that are reclassified from OCI to net income in the statement where the components of net income and the components of OCI are presented. The amendments to these standards do not change the items that must be reported in OCI, when an item of OCI must be reclassified to net income, or change the option for an entity to present components. This new guidance was effective for the Company beginning January 1, 2012 and was required to be applied retrospectively. The adoption of this guidance did not have an impact on the Company's results of operations, financial position, or cash flows as it relates only to financial statement presentation.

              In February 2013, the FASB issued ASU 2013-02, "Comprehensive Income: Reporting of Amounts Reclassified Out of Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income." The amended guidance requires an entity to present the effects on the line items of net income of significant reclassifications out of accumulated other comprehensive income if the amount being reclassified is required under U.S. generally accepted accounting principles to be reclassified in its entirety to net income in the same reporting period. The guidance is effective prospectively for the reporting periods beginning after December 15, 2012. The Company does not anticipate the adoption of the amended guidance to have significant impact on its consolidated financial statements.

              In May 2011, the FASB issued new guidance for fair value measurements to provide a consistent definition of fair value and ensure that the fair value measurement and disclosure requirements are similar between GAAP and International Financial Reporting Standards. The guidance changes certain fair value measurement principles and enhances the disclosure requirements, particularly for level 3 fair value measurements. The Company adopted this guidance prospectively on January 1, 2012 and noted no significant impact on the Company's results of operations, financial position, or cash flows.

F-17


Table of Contents


CONTROL4 CORPORATION

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

(INFORMATION AS OF MARCH 31, 2013 AND FOR THE

THREE MONTHS ENDED MARCH 31, 2012 AND 2013 IS UNAUDITED)

2. Balance Sheet Components

              Inventories consisted of the following (in thousands):

 
  December 31,    
 
 
  March 31,
2013
 
 
  2011   2012  
 
   
   
  (unaudited)
 

Finished goods

  $ 8,044   $ 12,306   $ 12,185  

Component parts

    1,453     209     353  
               

  $ 9,497   $ 12,515   $ 12,538  
               

              Property and equipment, net consisted of the following (in thousands):

 
  December 31,    
 
 
  March 31,
2013
 
 
  2011   2012  
 
   
   
  (unaudited)
 

Computer equipment and software

  $ 3,157   $ 3,518   $ 3,635  

Manufacturing tooling and test equipment

    2,203     2,731     3,095  

Furniture and fixtures

    1,705     1,801     1,985  

Lab and warehouse equipment

    1,631     1,974     2,197  

Marketing equipment

    503     419     419  

Leasehold improvements

    598     803     1,277  
               

    9,797     11,246     12,608  

Less: accumulated depreciation

    (7,670 )   (8,580 )   (9,042 )
               

  $ 2,127   $ 2,666   $ 3,566  
               

              Intangible assets, net consisted of the following (in thousands):

 
  December 31,    
 
 
  March 31,
2013
 
 
  2011   2012  
 
   
   
  (unaudited)
 

Acquired technology

  $ 1,357   $ 1,357   $ 1,357  

Less: accumulated amortization

    (160 )   (431 )   (499 )
               

  $ 1,197   $ 926   $ 858  
               

              Other assets consisted of the following (in thousands):

 
  December 31,    
 
 
  March 31,
2013
 
 
  2011   2012  
 
   
   
  (unaudited)
 

Deferred offering costs

  $   $   $ 1,522  

Prepaid licensing

        700     773  

Deposits

    64     187     187  
               

  $ 64   $ 887   $ 2,482  
               

F-18


Table of Contents


CONTROL4 CORPORATION

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

(INFORMATION AS OF MARCH 31, 2013 AND FOR THE

THREE MONTHS ENDED MARCH 31, 2012 AND 2013 IS UNAUDITED)

2. Balance Sheet Components (Continued)

              Accrued liabilities consisted of the following (in thousands):

 
  December 31,    
 
 
  March 31,
2013
 
 
  2011   2012  
 
   
   
  (unaudited)
 

Current portion of settlement obligations (see Notes 5 and 9)

  $ 488   $ 2,229   $ 2,235  

Sales returns and warranty accrual

    1,924     2,045     2,122  

Compensation accruals

    1,254     1,495     1,131  

Other accrued liabilities

    788     802     1,137  
               

  $ 4,454   $ 6,571   $ 6,625  
               

3. Fair Value Measurements

              The Company's financial instruments that are measured at fair value on a recurring basis consist of money market funds and redeemable preferred stock warrants. The following three levels of inputs are used to measure the fair value of financial instruments:

Level 1:   Quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities. The Company classifies its money market funds as Level 1 instruments as they are traded in active markets with sufficient volume and frequency of transactions.

Level 2:

 

Observable prices that are based on inputs not quoted on active markets, but corroborated by market data. The Company did not have any Level 2 instruments during the reported periods.

Level 3:

 

Unobservable inputs are used when little or no market data is available. The Company utilized a Black-Scholes option pricing model in order to determine the fair value of the redeemable preferred stock warrant, with such value determined on an as-converted basis. Certain inputs used in the model are unobservable. The fair values could change significantly based on future market conditions.

              The fair values of these financial assets and the redeemable preferred stock warrant were determined using the following inputs (in thousands):

 
  Fair Value Measurements at
December 31, 2011 using
 
 
  Level 1   Level 2   Level 3   Total  

Cash equivalents:

                         

Money market funds

  $ 12,539   $   $   $ 12,539  

Other liabilities:

                         

Redeemable preferred stock warrants

            347     347  

F-19


Table of Contents


CONTROL4 CORPORATION

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

(INFORMATION AS OF MARCH 31, 2013 AND FOR THE

THREE MONTHS ENDED MARCH 31, 2012 AND 2013 IS UNAUDITED)

3. Fair Value Measurements (Continued)


 
  Fair Value Measurements at
December 31, 2012 using
 
 
  Level 1   Level 2   Level 3   Total  

Cash equivalents:

                         

Money market funds

  $ 15,554   $   $   $ 15,554  

Other liabilities:

                         

Redeemable preferred stock warrants

            601     601  

 
  Fair Value Measurements at
March 31, 2013 using
 
 
  Level 1   Level 2   Level 3   Total  
 
  (unaudited)
 

Cash equivalents:

                         

Money market funds

  $ 12,407   $   $   $ 12,407  

Other liabilities:

                         

Redeemable preferred stock warrants

            576     576  

              The following table summarizes the change in value of the convertible preferred stock warrant liability (in thousands):

 
  Years Ended December 31,    
 
 
  Three Months
Ended
March 31, 2013
 
 
  2011   2012  
 
   
   
  (unaudited)
 

Balance at the beginning of the period

  $ 574   $ 347   $ 601  

Change in fair value included in other (income) expense

    (227 )   254     (25 )
               

Balance at the end of the period

  $ 347   $ 601   $ 576  
               

4. Intangible Assets

              In 2011, the Company entered into a purchase agreement to acquire software technology to be used in certain software applications. The total purchase price was determined based on a revenue-sharing formula for software licenses sold with the acquired technology between December 2011 and November 2012. The purchase agreement includes a minimum purchase price of $725,000 and a maximum purchase price of $2.0 million. In 2011, the Company recorded a finite-lived intangible asset and corresponding obligation for the minimum purchase price of $725,000, based on estimated future license sales under the agreement. Based on sales during that period, the final purchase price was $725,000. The asset is being amortized and expensed to cost of revenue on a straight-line basis over the estimated life of the associated technology, which was determined to be five years.

              In 2010, the Company completed the acquisition of software technology to be used in certain software applications for a total purchase price that consisted of a cash payment of approximately $0.3 million and the issuance of a warrant to purchase 71,153 shares of the Company's common stock. The warrant has a five-year term, was immediately exercisable in full and has an exercise price of $7.488 per share.

F-20


Table of Contents


CONTROL4 CORPORATION

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

(INFORMATION AS OF MARCH 31, 2013 AND FOR THE

THREE MONTHS ENDED MARCH 31, 2012 AND 2013 IS UNAUDITED)

4. Intangible Assets (Continued)

              The fair value of the warrant, totaling approximately $0.3 million, was calculated based on the following assumptions:

Dividend yield

    0 %

Volatility

    71 %

Risk-free interest rate

    1.20 %

Remaining contractual term (in years)

    5.0  

              The total purchase price of approximately $0.6 million was recorded as a finite-lived intangible asset and is being amortized and expensed to cost of revenue on a straight-line basis over the estimated life of the associated technology which was determined to be five years.

              Amortization of finite-lived intangible assets as of December 31, 2012 is as follows for the next four years:

2013

  $ 271  

2014

    271  

2015

    250  

2016

    134  
       

  $ 926  
       

5. Long-Term Obligations

Loan and Security Agreement

              The Company has entered into a borrowing agreement and related amendments with Silicon Valley Bank (the "SVB Agreement"), which consists of a revolving credit facility of $13.0 million (subject to certain borrowing base restrictions) and term borrowings to fund purchases of property and equipment. Borrowings under the SVB Agreement are collateralized by the general assets of the Company. The credit facility has a variable rate of interest of prime (as published in the Wall Street Journal) plus 0.25%, which was 3.50% at March 31, 2013. In addition, the Company pays an annual commitment fee of $20,000 and a quarterly unused line fee of 0.375% based on the difference between the borrowing commitment of $13.0 million and the then-current balance. Term borrowings are payable in 42 equal monthly payments of principal plus interest and bear interest at prime plus 0.50%, which was 3.75% at March 31, 2013.

              Borrowing under the revolving credit facility is subject to certain collateral restrictions relating primarily to the Company's accounts receivable and inventory levels. As of March 31, 2013, total borrowing capacity was approximately $12.9 million. The Company had not borrowed against the revolving credit facility at December 31, 2011 or 2012 or March 31, 2013. The revolving credit facility has a maturity date of May 29, 2014.

              The SVB Agreement contains various restrictive and financial covenants and the Company was in compliance with each of these covenants as of December 31, 2011 and 2012 and March 31, 2013.

F-21


Table of Contents


CONTROL4 CORPORATION

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

(INFORMATION AS OF MARCH 31, 2013 AND FOR THE

THREE MONTHS ENDED MARCH 31, 2012 AND 2013 IS UNAUDITED)

5. Long-Term Obligations (Continued)

              Future principal payments on outstanding term borrowings as of December 31, 2012 are as follows (in thousands):

2013

  $ 1,321  

2014

    840  

2015

    588  

2016

    410  
       

  $ 3,159  
       

Settlement Obligation

              The Company has entered into various settlement agreements (see Note 9) relating to alleged patent infringements, which included future payments under non-interest bearing, unsecured notes payable. The carrying value of the notes payable have been discounted using implied interest rates between 3.75% and 4.5%.

              Future annual payments on the settlement obligations as of December 31, 2012 are shown in the table below (in thousands):

2013

  $ 2,400  

2014

    600  

2015

    600  

2016

    600  
       

    4,200  

Less amount representing interest

    (296 )
       

Present value of settlement obligations

    3,904  

Less current portion of settlement obligations

    (2,229 )
       

Long-term portion of settlement obligations

  $ 1,675  
       

              The long-term portion of the settlement obligations is included in Other Long-Term Liabilities in the accompanying consolidated balance sheets.

Interest Expense on Long-Term Obligations

              The Company incurred $411,000, $396,000, $277,000, $65,000 and $78,000 of interest during each of the years ended December 31, 2010, 2011, and 2012, and for the three months ended March 31, 2012 and 2013, respectively.

F-22


Table of Contents


CONTROL4 CORPORATION

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

(INFORMATION AS OF MARCH 31, 2013 AND FOR THE

THREE MONTHS ENDED MARCH 31, 2012 AND 2013 IS UNAUDITED)

6. Income Taxes

              The domestic and foreign components of net income (loss) before income tax expense consists of the following for the periods shown below (in thousands):

 
  Years Ended December 31,  
 
  2010   2011   2012  

Income (loss) before income taxes:

                   

Domestic

  $ (16,394 ) $ (4,697 ) $ (4,055 )

Foreign

    129     812     473  
               

Total loss before income taxes

  $ (16,265 ) $ (3,885 ) $ (3,582 )
               

              The provision (benefit) for income taxes consisted of the following components (in thousands):

 
  Years Ended December 31,  
 
  2010   2011   2012  

Current:

                   

Domestic

                   

Federal

  $   $   $ 15  

State

            57  

Foreign

            69  
               

Total current tax expense

            141  
               

Deferred:

                   

Domestic

                   

Federal

    (5,397 )   (1,773 )   (710 )

State

    (587 )   (280 )   (65 )

Foreign

    36     251     88  

Valuation allowance

    5,948     1,802     687  
               

Total deferred tax expense

             
               

Total income tax expense

  $   $   $ 141  
               

              A reconciliation from the U.S. statutory federal income tax rate to the effective income tax rate follows:

 
  Years Ended December 31,  
 
  2010   2011   2012  

Federal income tax rate

    (34.0 )%   (34.0 )%   (34.0 )%

State taxes, net of federal benefit

    (3.0 )   (4.1 )   1.1  

Stock-based compensation expense

    2.5     9.1     15.0  

Research and development credits

    (3.2 )   (16.0 )    

Change in valuation allowance

    36.8     46.4     17.3  

Other, net

    0.9     (1.4 )   4.5  
               

Effective income tax rate

    (0.0 )%   (0.0 )%   3.9   %
               

F-23


Table of Contents


CONTROL4 CORPORATION

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

(INFORMATION AS OF MARCH 31, 2013 AND FOR THE

THREE MONTHS ENDED MARCH 31, 2012 AND 2013 IS UNAUDITED)

6. Income Taxes (Continued)

              Deferred tax assets and (liabilities) are comprised of the following (in thousands):

 
  December 31,  
 
  2011   2012  

Deferred Tax Assets:

             

Reserves and accruals

  $ 2,582   $ 3,396  

Inventories

    472     606  

Net operating loss carryforwards

    31,020     30,165  

Property, plant and equipment

    909     1,054  

Stock-based compensation

    419     783  

Research and development credits

    3,239     3,254  

Other

    134     204  
           

Total deferred tax assets

    38,775     39,462  

Valuation allowance

    (38,775 )   (39,462 )
           

Net deferred tax asset

  $   $  
           

              During the year ended December 31, 2012, the Company reversed the valuation allowance for deferred tax assets related to its subsidiary operating in England totaling $92,000. This subsidiary had a history of generating income and used its remaining net operating loss carryforwards in the year ended December 31, 2012.

              At December 31, 2011 and 2012, the Company had a full valuation allowance against the deferred tax assets of its domestic and other foreign operations as it believes it is more likely than not that these benefits will not be realized. Significant judgment is required in making this assessment, and it is very difficult to predict when, if ever, the assessment may conclude that the remaining portion of the deferred tax assets are realizable. The net valuation allowance increased by approximately $1.8 million and $0.7 million during the years ended December 31, 2011 and 2012, respectively.

              Net operating loss and tax credit carryforwards as of December 31, 2012 are as follows (in thousands):

 
  Amount   Expiration Years

Net operating losses, federal

  $ 83,612   2023-2031

Net operating losses, state

    83,101   2018-2031

Tax credit carryforwards, federal

    2,472   2023-2031

Tax credit carryforwards, state

    1,162   2018-2025

Net operating losses, foreign

    24   None

              Approximately $2.7 million of the net operating losses reported above represents unrecorded tax benefits for stock-based compensation, which will be recorded in additional paid in capital when realized. Utilization of the net operating loss carryforwards and credits may be subject to a substantial annual limitation due to the ownership change limitations provided by the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the "IRC"), and similar state provisions. The Company has not performed a detailed analysis to determine whether an ownership change under Section 382 of the IRC has occurred

F-24


Table of Contents


CONTROL4 CORPORATION

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

(INFORMATION AS OF MARCH 31, 2013 AND FOR THE

THREE MONTHS ENDED MARCH 31, 2012 AND 2013 IS UNAUDITED)

6. Income Taxes (Continued)

or will occur. The effect of an ownership change would be the imposition of an annual limitation on the use of net operating loss carryforwards attributable to periods before the change.

              The following is a reconciliation of the changes in the gross balance of unrecognized tax benefits, excluding interest and penalties (in thousands):

 
  Years Ended December 31,  
 
  2010   2011   2012  

Balance at the beginning of the period

  $ 1,477   $ 1,862   $ 2,318  

Current year additions

    385     456      
               

Balance at the end of the period

  $ 1,862   $ 2,318   $ 2,318  
               

              The Company does not believe there will be any material changes in its unrecognized tax benefits over the next 12 months. As of December 31, 2012, the amount of unrecognized tax benefits that would, if recognized, impact the Company's effective income tax rate is approximately $2.3 million.

              The Company files income tax returns in the United States, including various state and local jurisdictions. The Company's subsidiaries' file income tax returns in the United Kingdom. The Company is subject to examination in the United States, the United Kingdom and various state jurisdictions for periods since inception. As of December 31, 2012, the Company was not under examination by any tax authorities. Tax years beginning in 2008 are subject to examination by taxing United States tax authorities, although net operating loss and credit carryforwards from all years are subject to examinations and adjustments for at least three years following the year in which the attributes are used. Tax years beginning in 2009 are subject to examination by the taxing authorities in the United Kingdom.

              At December 31, 2012, the Company had undistributed foreign earnings of $107,000, which the Company intends to permanently reinvest in the foreign subsidiary. The Company anticipates that future overseas earnings will also be reinvested indefinitely. In accordance with the indefinite reversal criteria, the foreign currency gains recorded in other comprehensive income related to foreign currency translation have not been tax effected.

F-25


Table of Contents


CONTROL4 CORPORATION

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

(INFORMATION AS OF MARCH 31, 2013 AND FOR THE

THREE MONTHS ENDED MARCH 31, 2012 AND 2013 IS UNAUDITED)

7. Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock and Stockholders' Deficit

Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock

              Redeemable convertible preferred stock consisted of the following at December 31, 2011 and 2012 and March 31, 2013 (in thousands, except share data):

 
  Shares
Authorized
  Shares
Issued and
Outstanding
  Aggregate
Liquidation
Preference
 

Series A

    8,150,000     1,567,306   $ 4,075  

Series B

    18,124,230     3,485,425     14,735  

Series C

    14,215,791     2,726,476     15,000  

Series D

    7,789,215     1,497,921     15,890  

Series E

    5,045,662     965,927     11,000  

Series F

    5,988,024     1,151,542     20,000  

Series G

    8,677,338     1,668,707     15,450  

Series G-1

    2,073,148     216,015     2,000  

Series H

    13,100,000     2,014,641     20,000  
               

    83,163,408     15,293,960   $ 118,150  
               

              All redeemable convertible preferred stockholder agreements provide for the following:

    Voting with common stockholders in an amount equal to the number of common shares into which the preferred shares are convertible.

    Protective provisions that require the consent of holders of 50 percent of all Preferred Stockholders for certain transactions or events.

    Priority over any other class of outstanding capital stock of the Company with respect to dividend rights and liquidation, winding up or dissolution rights.

              The Series A, Series B, Series C, Series D, Series E, Series F, Series G, Series G-1 and Series H redeemable convertible preferred stockholders (collectively, the "Preferred Stockholders") are entitled to receive, when, as and if declared by the Company's Board of Directors (the "Board of Directors"), dividends at a rate of $0.208, $0.33821, $0.44013, $0.84864, $0.91104, $1.38944, $0.74048, $0.74048, and $0.79404 per share per year, respectively. To the extent that additional dividends are declared by the Board of Directors, those amounts would be distributed equally among the Preferred Stockholders and common stockholders. As of December 31, 2012, no dividends had been declared by the Board of Directors.

              In the event of any liquidation, dissolution or winding up of the Company, either voluntary or involuntary, the Preferred Stockholders are entitled to receive a liquidation preference payment prior to any distribution of any assets or surplus funds of the Company to the common stockholders. The

F-26


Table of Contents


CONTROL4 CORPORATION

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

(INFORMATION AS OF MARCH 31, 2013 AND FOR THE

THREE MONTHS ENDED MARCH 31, 2012 AND 2013 IS UNAUDITED)

7. Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock and Stockholders' Deficit (Continued)

following table lists the payment priority and preference to the respective Preferred Stockholders in the event of a liquidation of the Company:

 
  Payment
Priority
  Per Share
Preference
 

Series H

    1   $ 9.9273  

Series G-1

    1     9.2586  

Series G

    2     9.2586  

Series F

    2     17.3680  

Series E

    3     11.3880  

Series D

    4     10.6080  

Series C

    5     5.5016  

Series B

    6     4.2276  

Series A

    6     2.6000  

              Each share of Preferred Stock may be converted, at the option of the holder, into common stock at a conversion ratio determined by dividing the original issuance price per share, as defined, by the effective conversion price for such share then outstanding. As of December 31, 2012, the effective conversion price per share for Series A, Series B, Series C, Series D, Series E, Series F, Series G, Series G-1 and Series H redeemable convertible preferred stock was $2.6000, $4.2276, $5.5016, $10.6080, $11.3880, $17.3680, $9.2586, $9.2586 and $9.9273, respectively. The effective conversion price per share is subject to certain anti-dilution provisions. The Preferred Stock will automatically convert to common stock upon the consent of holders of a majority of the shares of Preferred Stock outstanding or the closing of an initial public offering of common stock that reflects a pre-money valuation of at least $225 million and results in net proceeds to the Company of not less than $35 million.

              The Company is obligated, upon election of a majority of the holders of Preferred Stock at any time on or after December 12, 2015, to redeem the Series A, Series B, Series C, Series D, Series E, Series F, Series G, Series G-1 and Series H redeemable convertible preferred stock at $2.6000, $4.2276, $5.5016, $10.6080, $11.3880, $17.3680, $9.2586, $9.2586 and $9.9273 per share, respectively, plus declared but unpaid dividends. If the Preferred Stockholders elect to redeem the preferred stock, the Series G-1 preferred shares will be redeemed 40 days following the redemption election date (the "Original Redemption Date"). Thereafter, the redemption of the remaining preferred shares will occur in three annual installments starting on the Original Redemption Date.

F-27


Table of Contents


CONTROL4 CORPORATION

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

(INFORMATION AS OF MARCH 31, 2013 AND FOR THE

THREE MONTHS ENDED MARCH 31, 2012 AND 2013 IS UNAUDITED)

7. Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock and Stockholders' Deficit (Continued)

Warrants to Purchase Stock and Preferred Stock Warrant Liability

              Warrants to purchase common and preferred stock at December 31, 2012 and March 31, 2013 are summarized in the following table:

 
  Number of
Shares Subject
to Warrant
  Exercise Price  

Warrants to purchase common shares

    71,153   $ 7.488  

Warrants to purchase common shares

    470,082     9.927  

Warrants to purchase Series C redeemable convertible preferred stock

    7,325     5.502  

Warrants to purchase Series E redeemable convertible preferred stock

    4,390     11.388  

Warrants to purchase Series G-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock

    182,666     9.259  
             

    735,616        
             

              In 2011, the Company issued warrants to purchase 470,082 shares of common stock to one Series H investor. The warrants became immediately exercisable upon the closing of the Series H financing and have a term of three years. The total proceeds of $20 million from the Series H financing were allocated between the Series H redeemable preferred stock and the common stock warrants based on their relative fair market value. The fair value of the warrants was calculated using the Black-Scholes option pricing model based on the following assumptions:

Dividend yield

    0 %

Expected volatility

    82 %

Risk-free interest rate

    1.05-1.39 %

Remaining contractual term (in years)

    3.0  

              In 2009, the Series G-1 investors received warrants to purchase 182,666 shares of Series G-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock at a price of $9.259 per share. The warrants became immediately exercisable upon the closing of the Series G-1 financing and the fair value of $0.4 million was recorded as a liability with the offsetting charge to expense. Because the holders of the preferred stock may elect to redeem the shares for cash, the Company's outstanding preferred stock warrants are classified as liabilities and are revalued at the end of each reporting period using the Black-Scholes option pricing valuation model. Changes in fair value are reflected in the Company's statements of operations as other income or expense. In the event of an initial public offering, the warrant to purchase Series G-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock must be either exercised or the warrant will expire upon the closing of the initial public offering. Upon exercise of the warrant, the purchased Series G-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock are convertible into shares of common stock. Since the strike price for the warrant equals the liquidation preference for the Series G-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock, it would only be optimal for the holder to exercise the warrant when the Company's enterprise value is high enough that it would be advantageous for the holders of the preferred stock to convert. As a result, the fair market value of the Company's common stock has been

F-28


Table of Contents


CONTROL4 CORPORATION

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

(INFORMATION AS OF MARCH 31, 2013 AND FOR THE

THREE MONTHS ENDED MARCH 31, 2012 AND 2013 IS UNAUDITED)

7. Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock and Stockholders' Deficit (Continued)

used to value the warrant liability using the Black-Scholes option pricing model. The fair value of the warrants was calculated using the income approach and is based on the following assumptions:

 
  December 31,    
 
 
  March 31,
2013
 
 
  2010   2011   2012  

Dividend yield

    0 %   0 %   0 %   0 %

Expected volatility

    87 %   60 %   54 %   44 %

Risk-free interest rate

    1.02 %   0.36 %   0.16 %   0.14 %

Remaining contractual term (in years)

    3.5     2.5     1.5     1.2  

Stock Options

              In 2003, the Board of Directors adopted the 2003 Equity Incentive Plan (the 2003 Plan), which provides for the granting of nonqualified and incentive stock options, stock appreciation rights, stock awards and restricted stock. Under the 2003 Plan, the Company may grant nonqualified and incentive stock options to directors, employees and non-employees providing services to the Company. The Board of Directors, on an option-by-option basis, determines the number of shares, terms and exercise period. Options granted generally have a ten-year life and vest over a period of four years. The exercise price of options on the date of grant is equivalent to the estimated fair value of the stock as determined by the Board of Directors based upon information available to it at the time of grant. Because there has been no public market for the common stock, the Company's Board of Directors has determined the fair value of the Company's common stock based on a variety of factors, including periodic valuations of the Company's common stock, arm's-length sales of the Company's common stock, the Company's financial position, historical financial performance, projected financial performance, valuations of publicly traded peer companies and the illiquid nature of the Company's common stock. As of March 31, 2013, an aggregate of 6,438,575 shares are authorized for issuance under the 2003 Plan. The Company's Board of Directors has determined not to grant any further awards under the 2003 Plan after the completion of the Company's initial public offering (see Note 11).

F-29


Table of Contents


CONTROL4 CORPORATION

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

(INFORMATION AS OF MARCH 31, 2013 AND FOR THE

THREE MONTHS ENDED MARCH 31, 2012 AND 2013 IS UNAUDITED)

7. Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock and Stockholders' Deficit (Continued)

              A summary of stock option activity under the Plan for the years ended December 31, 2010, 2011 and 2012 and for the three months ended March 31, 2013 is presented below:

 
  Shares Subject
to Options
Outstanding
  Weighted
Average
Grant Date
Fair Value
  Weighted
Average
Exercise Price
  Weighted
Average
Remaining
Contractual
Life (Years)

Balance at December 31, 2009

    2,699,521     1.59     2.94   7.1

Options granted

    1,016,032     3.30     5.19    

Options exercised

    (96,687 )   1.17     2.02    

Options expired

    (25,108 )   1.92     3.64    

Options forfeited

    (220,646 )   2.89     4.84    
                 

Balance at December 31, 2010

    3,373,112     2.02     3.51   6.9

Options granted

    1,988,044     3.94     6.19    

Options exercised

    (577,437 )   1.20     2.08    

Options expired

    (186,736 )   2.39     4.33    

Options forfeited

    (244,279 )   3.22     5.30    
                 

Balance at December 31, 2011

    4,352,704     2.93     4.79   7.6

Options granted

    715,205     5.31     9.45    

Options exercised

    (245,349 )   1.92     3.20    

Options expired

    (14,148 )   2.97     4.91    

Options forfeited

    (159,174 )   3.63     5.71    
                 

Balance at December 31, 2012

    4,649,238     3.33     5.56   7.2

Options granted

               

Options exercised

    (16,205 )   1.10     2.21    

Options expired

    (2,303 )   3.89     6.14    

Options forfeited

    (21,264 )   4.35     7.29    
                 

Balance at March 31, 2013

    4,609,466     3.33     5.56   6.9
                 

Exercisable options at December 31, 2012

    2,640,278     2.50     4.26   5.8

Vested during the year ended December 31, 2012

    824,083     3.69     5.93    

Vested and expected to vest at December 31, 2012

    4,280,084     3.22     5.41    

Non-vested options at December 31, 2012

    2,009,505     4.37     7.28    

Exercisable options at March 31, 2013

   
2,786,682
   
2.60
   
4.37
 

5.7

Vested during the three months ended March 31, 2013

    166,018     3.95     6.29    

Vested and expected to vest at March 31, 2013

    4,266,066     3.28     5.41    

Non-vested options at March 31, 2013

    1,822,222     4.42     7.38    

F-30


Table of Contents


CONTROL4 CORPORATION

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

(INFORMATION AS OF MARCH 31, 2013 AND FOR THE

THREE MONTHS ENDED MARCH 31, 2012 AND 2013 IS UNAUDITED)

7. Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock and Stockholders' Deficit (Continued)

              The following table summarizes information about stock options outstanding and exercisable at March 31, 2013:

 
  Options Outstanding   Options Exercisable  
Range of Exercise Prices
  Weighted
Average
Exercise
Price
  Number of
Underlying
Shares
  Weighted-
Average
Remaining
Contractual Life
(in years)
  Number of
Underlying
Shares
  Weighted-
Average
Remaining
Contractual Life
(in years)
 

0.2600 - 1.3000

    0.57     196,375     1.7     196,375     1.7  

1.3520 - 2.6000

    2.18     480,076     3.2     480,076     3.2  

2.6520 - 3.9000

    3.22     341,308     4.3     341,308     4.3  

3.9520 - 5.2000

    4.89     981,498     6.0     898,516     5.9  

5.2520 - 6.5000

    6.19     1,789,325     8.5     760,101     8.4  

6.5520 - 7.8000

    7.49     118,947     7.3     84,537     7.3  

7.8520 - 9.1000

    8.84     244,219     9.2     16,338     9.2  

9.1520 - 10.4000

    9.78     457,718     9.7     9,431     9.6  
                             

          4,609,466           2,786,682        
                             

              The following table summarizes the aggregate intrinsic-value of options exercised, outstanding and exercisable (in millions):

 
  Years Ended
December 31,
   
 
 
  Three Months
Ended
March 31, 2013
 
 
  2010   2011   2012  
 
   
   
   
  (unaudited)
 

Options Exercised

  $ 0.30   $ 2.40   $ 1.31   $ 0.14  

Options Outstanding

  $ 9.17   $ 9.11   $ 23.48   $ 26.38  

Options Exercisable

  $ 7.66   $ 7.10   $ 16.80   $ 19.26  

              The fair value of each option award is estimated on the date of grant using the Black-Scholes option pricing model with the following assumptions:

 
  Years Ended
December 31,
   
 
 
  2010   2011   2012    
 

Expected volatility

    70-71 %   71-73 %   59-63 %      

Expected dividends

    %   %   %      

Expected term (in years)

    5.2-6.1     5.0-6.1     5.0-6.1        

Risk-free rate

    2.2-3.0 %   1.1-2.5 %   0.7-1.0 %      

Forfeiture rate

    8.1 %   11.6 %   7.9 %      

              Expected volatility is based on the average volatility of similar public companies. The expected term was calculated based on the average of the vesting period and contractual term. The risk-free

F-31


Table of Contents


CONTROL4 CORPORATION

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

(INFORMATION AS OF MARCH 31, 2013 AND FOR THE

THREE MONTHS ENDED MARCH 31, 2012 AND 2013 IS UNAUDITED)

7. Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock and Stockholders' Deficit (Continued)

interest rate was determined using the implied yield on U.S. Treasury issues with a remaining term within the expected life of the award. The Company uses historical data to determine forfeiture rates.

              Total stock-based compensation expense has been classified as follows in the accompanying statements of operations (in thousands):

 
  Years Ended
December 31,
  Three Months
Ended
March 31,
 
 
  2010   2011   2012   2012   2013  
 
   
   
   
  (unaudited)
 

Cost of revenue

  $ 28   $ 49   $ 78   $ 17   $ 16  

Research and development

    249     492     704     130     236  

Sales and marketing

    546     523     580     144     184  

General and administrative

    646     949     1,507     440     402  
                       

  $ 1,469   $ 2,013   $ 2,869   $ 731   $ 838  
                       

              At March 31, 2013, there was $6.2 million of total unrecognized compensation cost related to non-vested stock option awards that will be recognized over a weighted-average period of 2.8 years.

Reserved Shares

              At March 31, 2013, the Company had reserved shares of its common stock for future issuance as follows:

Stock options under the 2003 Plan:

       

Options outstanding

    4,609,466  

Reserved for future grants

    538,344  

Convertible preferred stock:

       

Issued and outstanding (as-if-converted basis)

    15,293,960  

Warrants to purchase common and preferred stock

    735,616  
       

    21,177,386  
       

F-32


Table of Contents


CONTROL4 CORPORATION

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

(INFORMATION AS OF MARCH 31, 2013 AND FOR THE

THREE MONTHS ENDED MARCH 31, 2012 AND 2013 IS UNAUDITED)

8. Related Party Transactions

              The Company has entered into sales agreements with certain of its investors. The following table sets forth revenue from product sales to companies affiliated with these investors (in thousands):

 
  Years Ended
December 31,
  Three Months
Ended
March 31,
 
 
  2010   2011   2012   2012   2013  
 
   
   
   
  (unaudited)
 

Company 1

  $ 620   $ 995   $ 2,142   $ 226   $ 558  

Company 2

            1,807         119  

Company 3

    1,174     2,134     1,290     350     126  

Company 4

        478     791     167     285  
                       

  $ 1,794   $ 3,607   $ 6,030   $ 743   $ 1,088  
                       

              As of December 31, 2011 and 2012 and March 31, 2013, the Company had accounts receivable from these companies totaling $0.6 million, $1.5 million and $0.8 million, respectively.

9. Commitments and Contingencies

Operating Leases

              The Company leases office and warehouse space under operating leases that expire between 2013 and 2018. The terms of the leases include periods of free rent, options for the Company to extend the leases (three to five years) and increasing rental rates over time. The Company recognizes rental expense under these operating leases on a straight-line basis over the lives of the leases and has accrued for rental expense recorded but not paid.

              Rental expense was approximately $0.9 million, $1.0 million and $1.1 million for the years ended December 31, 2010, 2011 and 2012, respectively.

              In March 2012, the Company entered into a 66-month lease modification on its corporate office lease, which was set to expire on December 31, 2012. Future minimum rental payments required under non-cancelable operating leases with initial or remaining terms in excess of one year consist of the following as of December 31, 2012 (in thousands):

2013

  $ 794  

2014

    1,238  

2015

    1,250  

2016

    1,109  

2017

    992  

Thereafter

    489  
       

  $ 5,872  
       

F-33


Table of Contents


CONTROL4 CORPORATION

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

(INFORMATION AS OF MARCH 31, 2013 AND FOR THE

THREE MONTHS ENDED MARCH 31, 2012 AND 2013 IS UNAUDITED)

9. Commitments and Contingencies (Continued)

Purchase Commitments

              The Company had non-cancellable purchase commitments for the purchase of inventory, which extend through August 2013 totaling approximately $19.5 million at December 31, 2012.

Employment Agreements

              The Company has signed employment agreements with certain executive officers who are entitled to receive certain benefits if their employment is terminated by the Company, including severance payments, accelerated vesting of stock options and continuation of certain insurance benefits.

Legal Matters

              The Company is subject to various lawsuits and other claims that arise from time to time in the ordinary course of business. These actions are based on alleged patent infringement and other matters. The Company intends to defend itself vigorously against any such actions. The Company establishes reserves for specific liabilities in connection with legal actions that it deems to be probable and estimable.

              In December 2012, the Company entered into a settlement agreement relating to alleged patent infringements, which included future royalty payments on certain products and the payment of a lump sum amount totaling $2.9 million. The lump sum amount included a payment of $1.1 million which was made in December 2012 and future payments that are non-interest bearing and unsecured. The Company has recorded a liability of $1.7 million to reflect the carrying value of the future payments that have been discounted using an implied interest rate of 3.75%. The future payments are included in current liabilities as the licensor has the ability to request an accelerated but discounted payment at June 30, 2013. The lump sum amount was attributed to previous sales of products alleged to have infringed on the patents and to prepaid future sales of certain products. As a result, $700,000 has been recorded in other assets as of December 31, 2012.

              In December 2012, the Company finalized termination of a sales contract and agreed to pay a $750,000 early termination penalty. As a result of the contract termination, the Company also recorded a $1.8 million expense associated with an anticipated loss on firm purchase commitments for components that would have been required to meet the Company's obligations under the terminated contract. The $750,000 penalty and the $1.8 million charge have been recorded as Litigation Settlement and Cost of Revenue—Inventory Purchase Commitment, respectively, in the accompanying consolidated statement of operations during the year ended December 31, 2012.

              In management's opinion, the Company is not currently involved in any legal proceedings which, individually or in the aggregate, could have a material effect on the Company's financial condition, operations or cash flows.

10. Subsequent Events

              In July 2013, the Company's board of directors and stockholders approved an amendment to the Company's amended and restated certificate of incorporation. The amendment provided for a

F-34


Table of Contents


CONTROL4 CORPORATION

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

(INFORMATION AS OF MARCH 31, 2013 AND FOR THE

THREE MONTHS ENDED MARCH 31, 2012 AND 2013 IS UNAUDITED)

10. Subsequent Events (Continued)

1-for-5.2 reverse stock split of the outstanding common stock and outstanding convertible preferred stock (collectively, "Capital Stock"), which is expected to become effective on July 18, 2013. Accordingly, (i) every 5.2 shares of Capital Stock have been combined into one share of Capital Stock, (ii) the number of shares of Capital Stock into which each outstanding option or warrant to purchase Capital Stock is exercisable, as the case may be, have been proportionately decreased on a 5.2-for-1 basis, and (iii) the exercise price for each such outstanding option or warrant to purchase Capital Stock has been proportionately increased on a 1-for-5.2 basis. All of the share numbers, share prices, and exercise prices have been adjusted within these financial statements, on a retroactive basis, to reflect this 1-for-5.2 reverse stock split.

              The Company has evaluated all other subsequent events through March 15, 2013, the date on which the financial statements were available to be issued.

11. Subsequent Events (Unaudited)

              For our interim consolidated financial statement as of March 31, 2013, and for the three months then ended, we have evaluated subsequent events through July 17, 2013, which is the date the financial statements were available to be issued.

              In April 2013, the Company's Board of Directors approved an amendment to the Company's certificate of incorporation to authorize 500,000,000 shares of common stock and 25,000,000 shares of undesignated preferred stock effective on the closing of its planned initial public offering.

              The Company granted options to employees and consultants to purchase shares of common stock as summarized in the following table:

Grant Date
  Number of
Options
Granted
  Exercise
Price per
Share
  Common
Stock Fair
Value
  Aggregate
Grant Date
Fair Value (1)
 

April 25, 2013

    86,432   $ 11.284   $        (2) $    

June 11, 2013

    156,724   $ 11.284   $        (2) $    

June 23, 2013

    146,626   $ 11.284   $        (2) $        (3)
                       

    389,782               $   (3)
                       

(1)
Aggregate grant date fair value was determined using the Black-Scholes option pricing model.

(2)
Fair value determined for financial reporting purposes in connection with a reassessment performed in July 2013. Subsequent to the March 31, 2013 valuation of the Company's common stock, in July 2013, the Company received an indication of the estimated preliminary price range for the Company's common stock in this offering from the managing underwriters. In light of the short period of time that had elapsed between the Company's April 25, 2013, June 11, 2013 and June 23, 2013 equity grants and the receipt of the estimated preliminary price range from the managing underwriters, the Company revised its estimated fair value of the

F-35


Table of Contents


CONTROL4 CORPORATION

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

(INFORMATION AS OF MARCH 31, 2013 AND FOR THE

THREE MONTHS ENDED MARCH 31, 2012 AND 2013 IS UNAUDITED)

11. Subsequent Events (Unaudited) (Continued)

      Company's common stock with respect to equity grants made on April 25, 2013, June 11, 2013 and June 23, 2013 to be $            , which is the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus.

(3)
Includes the aggregate grant date fair value of $            for 24,038 shares of common stock subject to an option granted in connection with the purchase of assets by the Company in June 2013, which will be recognized as part of the purchase price of such assets instead of stock-based compensation.

              The aggregate grant date fair value of the options to purchase shares of common stock granted by the Company in the three months ended June 30, 2013 was $             million, of which the Company expects $             million will be recognized as stock-based compensation in the three months ended June 30, 2013.

              On June 11, 2013, the Company's Board of Directors adopted the 2013 Stock Option and Incentive Plan (the "2013 Plan"), which was subsequently approved by the Company's stockholders. The Company has initially reserved 2,200,000 shares of its Common Stock for issuance of awards under the 2013 Plan. The 2013 Plan provides for annual increases in the number of reserved shares of up to 5% of the outstanding number of shares of the Company's Common Stock.

              On June 17, 2013, the Company entered into an Amended and Restated Loan and Security Agreement with Silicon Valley Bank (the "New SVB Agreement") which amends and restates the Loan and Security Agreement, as amended, by and between Silicon Valley Bank and the Company. The New SVB Agreement extends the maturity date of the revolving credit facility to May 29, 2015 and changes the interest rate to either the published Wall Street Journal prime rate or LIBOR plus 2.50%, as selected by the Company. In addition, the New SVB Agreement provides for an additional $2.75 million in term borrowings to fund purchases of property and equipment.

              On June 21, 2013, the Company entered into a purchase agreement to acquire the assets, which consist primarily of software technology, and assume certain liabilities of a software technology company. As consideration for the acquisition, the Company will pay approximately $100,000 in cash and issue options to acquire shares of common stock of the Company. The acquisition will be accounted for as a business combination and therefore, the purchase price will be allocated to the assets acquired and liabilities assumed, based on estimated fair values. The Company anticipates that the fair value of the total purchase consideration will be less than $500,000. The determination of the final purchase price is subject to potential adjustment, based on the finalization of the value of the equity options. Additionally, the allocation of the purchase price may change based upon the finalization of the fair value of the identified acquired intangible assets.

F-36


GRAPHIC


Table of Contents


              Through and including,                         , 2013 (the 25th day after the date of this prospectus), all dealers effecting transactions in these securities, whether or not participating in this offering, may be required to deliver a prospectus. This is in addition to a dealer's obligation to deliver a prospectus when acting as an underwriter and with respect to an unsold allotment or subscription.

                        Shares

LOGO

Common Stock



PROSPECTUS



BofA Merrill Lynch       Raymond James

Canaccord Genuity

 

Cowen and Company

 

Needham & Company

                        , 2013

   


Table of Contents


PART II

INFORMATION NOT REQUIRED IN THE PROSPECTUS

Item 13.    Other Expenses of Issuance and Distribution.

              Estimated expenses, other than underwriting discounts and commissions, payable by the Registrant in connection with the sale of the common stock being registered under this registration statement are as follows:

SEC registration fee

  $ 8,184  

FINRA filing fee

    9,500  

NASDAQ Listing fee

    *  

Printing and engraving expenses

    *  

Legal fees and expenses

    *  

Accounting fees and expenses

    *  

Blue Sky fees and expenses (including legal fees)

    *  

Transfer agent and registrar fees and expenses

    *  

Miscellaneous

    *  
       

Total

  $ *  
       

*
To be filed by amendment.

Item 14.    Indemnification of Directors and Officers.

              On completion of this offering, the Registrant's amended and restated certificate of incorporation will contain provisions that eliminate, to the maximum extent permitted by the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware, the personal liability of the Registrant's directors and executive officers for monetary damages for breach of their fiduciary duties as directors or officers. The Registrant's amended and restated certificate of incorporation and bylaws will provide that the Registrant must indemnify its directors and executive officers and may indemnify its employees and other agents to the fullest extent permitted by the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware.

              Sections 145 and 102(b)(7) of the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware provide that a corporation may indemnify any person made a party to an action by reason of the fact that he or she was a director, executive officer, employee or agent of the corporation or is or was serving at the request of a corporation against expenses (including attorneys' fees), judgments, fines and amounts paid in settlement actually and reasonably incurred by him or her in connection with such action if he or she acted in good faith and in a manner he or she reasonably believed to be in, or not opposed to, the best interests of the corporation and, with respect to any criminal action or proceeding, had no reasonable cause to believe his or her conduct was unlawful, except that, in the case of an action by or in right of the corporation, no indemnification may generally be made in respect of any claim as to which such person is adjudged to be liable to the corporation.

              The Registrant has entered into indemnification agreements with its directors and executive officers, in addition to the indemnification provided for in its amended and restated certificate of incorporation and bylaws, and intends to enter into indemnification agreements with any new directors and executive officers in the future.

              The Registrant has purchased and intend to maintain insurance on behalf of each person who is or was a director or officer of the Registrant against any loss arising from any claim asserted against him or her and incurred by him or her in any such capacity, subject to certain exclusions.

II-1


Table of Contents

              The Underwriting Agreement (Exhibit 1.1 hereto) provides for indemnification by the underwriters of the Registrant and its executive officers and directors, and by the Registrant of the underwriters, for certain liabilities, including liabilities arising under the Securities Act.

              See also the undertakings set out in response to Item 17 herein.

Item 15.    Recent Sales of Unregistered Securities.

              During the last three years, we sold the following unregistered securities:

      (1)
      From July 1, 2010 through June 30, 2013, we sold and issued to our employees, consultants or former service providers an aggregate of 879,319 shares of common stock pursuant to option exercises under the 2003 Equity Incentive Plan at prices ranging from $0.26 to $8.84 per share for an aggregate purchase price of $2,157,653.28.

      (2)
      From July 1, 2010 through June 30, 2013, we granted options under our 2003 Equity Incentive Plan to purchase an aggregate of 3,211,978 shares of common stock to our employees, directors and consultants, having exercise prices ranging from $6.136 to $11.284 per share for an aggregate exercise price of $24,343,139.01.

      (3)
      In May 2011, we issued to a consultant an aggregate of 4,040 shares of common stock at a purchase price of $6.136 per share for an aggregate purchase price of $24,789.44. The consultant paid for the purchase price of such shares of common stock with services rendered in connection with identifying certain employee candidates for us.

      (4)
      In January and February 2011, we sold and issued 2,014,641 shares of Series H preferred stock to 3 accredited investors, at $9.927 per share, for a total consideration of $20.0 million.

              None of the foregoing transactions involved any underwriters, underwriting discounts or commissions, or any public offering, and the registrant believes that each transaction was exempt from the registration requirements of the Securities Act in reliance on the following exemptions:

    with respect to the transactions described in paragraphs (1) and (2), Rule 701 promulgated under the Securities Act as transactions pursuant to a compensatory benefit plan approved by the registrant's board of directors or Section 4(2) of the Securities Act as transactions by an issuer not involving a public offering;

    with respect to the transactions described in paragraph (3), Section 4(2) of the Securities Act as transactions by an issuer not involving a public offering; and

    with respect to the transactions described in paragraph (4), Section 4(2) of the Securities Act, or Rule 506 of Regulation D promulgated thereunder, as transactions by an issuer not involving a public offering. Each recipient of the securities in these transactions represented his or her intention to acquire the securities for investment only and not with a view to, or for resale in connection with, any distribution thereof, and appropriate legends were affixed to the share certificates issued in each such transaction. In each case, the recipient received adequate information about the Registrant or had adequate access, through his or her relationship with the registrant, to information about the Registrant.

Item 16.    Exhibits and Financial Statement Schedules.

(a)         Exhibits:

              See Exhibit Index immediately following the signature pages.

II-2


Table of Contents

(b)         Financial Statement Schedules.

              All other schedules have been omitted because the information required to be presented in them is not applicable or is shown in the consolidated financial statements or related notes.

Item 17.    Undertakings.

              The undersigned Registrant hereby undertakes to provide to the underwriters at the closing specified in the Underwriting Agreement, certificates in such denominations and registered in such names as required by the underwriters to permit prompt delivery to each purchaser.

              Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising under the Securities Act may be permitted to directors, officers and controlling persons of the Registrant pursuant to the foregoing provisions, or otherwise, the Registrant has been advised that in the opinion of the Securities and Exchange Commission such indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Securities Act and is, therefore, unenforceable. In the event that a claim for indemnification against such liabilities (other than the payment by the Registrant of expenses incurred or paid by a director, officer or controlling person of the Registrant in the successful defense of any action, suit or proceeding) is asserted by such director, officer or controlling person in connection with the securities being registered, the Registrant will, unless in the opinion of its counsel the matter has been settled by controlling precedent, submit to a court of appropriate jurisdiction the question whether such indemnification by it is against public policy as expressed in the Securities Act and will be governed by the final adjudication of such issue.

              The undersigned Registrant hereby undertakes that:

      (1)
      For purposes of determining any liability under the Securities Act, the information omitted from the form of prospectus filed as part of this Registration Statement in reliance upon Rule 430A and contained in a form of prospectus filed by the Registrant pursuant to Rule 424(b)(1) or (4) or 497(h) under the Securities Act shall be deemed to be part of this Registration Statement as of the time it was declared effective.

      (2)
      For the purpose of determining any liability under the Securities Act, each post-effective amendment that contains a form of prospectus shall be deemed to be a new registration statement relating to the securities offered therein, and the offering of such securities at that time shall be deemed to be the initial bona fide offering thereof.

      (3)
      That, for the purpose of determining liability of the registrant under the Securities Act of 1933 to any purchaser in the initial distribution of the securities: the undersigned Registrant undertakes that in a primary offering of securities of the undersigned Registrant pursuant to this registration statement, regardless of the underwriting method used to sell the securities to the purchaser, if the securities are offered or sold to such purchaser by means of any of the following communications, the undersigned Registrant will be a seller to the purchaser and will be considered to offer or sell such securities to such purchaser:

      (i)
      Any preliminary prospectus or prospectus of the undersigned Registrant relating to the offering required to be filed pursuant to Rule 424;

      (ii)
      Any free writing prospectus relating to the offering prepared by or on behalf of the undersigned Registrant or used or referred to by the undersigned Registrant;

      (iii)
      The portion of any other free writing prospectus relating to the offering containing material information about the undersigned Registrant or its securities provided by or on behalf of the undersigned Registrant; and

      (iv)
      Any other communication that is an offer in the offering made by the undersigned Registrant to the purchaser.

II-3


Table of Contents


SIGNATURES

                Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, the registrant has duly caused this registration statement to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized, in the City of Salt Lake City, State of Utah, on July 17, 2013.

    CONTROL4 CORPORATION

 

 

By:

 

/s/ MARTIN PLAEHN

Martin Plaehn
President and Chief Executive Officer

                Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, this registration statement has been signed by the following persons in the capacities and on July 17, 2013:

Signature
 
Title
/s/ MARTIN PLAEHN

Martin Plaehn
  Director, President and Chief Executive Officer
(Principal Executive Officer)

/s/ DAN STRONG

Dan Strong

 

Chief Financial Officer
(Principal Financial and Accounting Officer)

*

William B. West

 

Chairman of the Board of Directors

*

Rob Born

 

Director

*

David C. Habiger

 

Director

*

Len Jordan

 

Director

*

Christopher B. Paisley

 

Director

*

Scott Petty

 

Director

*

Steven Vassallo

 

Director

 

*By   /s/ DAN STRONG

Dan Strong
Attorney-in-Fact
   

II-4


Table of Contents


EXHIBIT INDEX

Exhibit
Number
  Exhibit Title
  1.1   Form of Underwriting Agreement.
  3.1 ** Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation of the Registrant, as currently in effect.
  3.1.1   Form of Certificate of Amendment to the Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation of the Registrant (to be filed prior to the effectiveness of the Registration Statement).
  3.2 ** Form of Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation of the Registrant, to be effective upon closing of the offering.
  3.3 ** Bylaws of the Registrant, as currently in effect.
  3.4 ** Form of Amended and Restated Bylaws of the Registrant, to be effective upon closing of the offering.
  4.1   Specimen Common Stock Certificate of the Registrant.
  4.2 ** Eighth Amended and Restated Investors' Rights Agreement, dated January 21, 2011.
  4.3 ** Warrant to Purchase Shares of the Common Stock of the Registrant issued to Control UI, LLC, dated October 25, 2010.
  4.4 ** Warrant to Purchase Stock of the Registrant issued to Silicon Valley Bank, dated December 29, 2005.
  4.5 ** Warrant to Purchase Stock of the Registrant issued to Silicon Valley Bank, dated June 13, 2007.
  5.1   Form of Opinion of Goodwin Procter LLP.
  10.1 **# Form of Director and Executive Officer Indemnification Agreement.
  10.2 **# 2003 Equity Incentive Plan and forms of option agreements thereunder.
  10.3 **# 2013 Stock Option and Incentive Plan and forms of option agreements thereunder to be in effect upon the closing of this offering.
  10.4 **# Offer Letter to Martin Plaehn, dated August 20, 2011.
  10.5 **# Employment Agreement, dated July 28, 2003 and as amended on June 17, 2004 and August 3, 2011, between the Registrant and William B. West.
  10.6 **# Employment Agreement, dated on or about January 4, 2008, between the Registrant and Dan Strong.
  10.7 **# Offer Letter to Jeff Dungan, dated August 1, 2006.
  10.8 **# Offer Letter to Eric Anderson, dated June 19, 2012.
  10.9   Relationship Agreement, dated June 27, 2013, between the Registrant and Sanmina Corporation.
  10.10   OEM Supply Agreement: OEM Design, dated December 3, 2010, between the Registrant and Lite-On Electronic Company Ltd.
  10.11 ** Amended and Restated Loan and Security Agreement, dated June 17, 2013, between the Registrant and Silicon Valley Bank.
  10.12 ** Lease dated June 29, 2004 by and between the Registrant and WDCI, Inc., as amended on May 24, 2006, February 25, 2011 and November 7, 2011.
  10.13 **# Advisor Agreement, effective as of February 28, 2013, by and between the registrant and Tom Kuhn.
  21.1 ** List of Subsidiaries of the Registrant.
  23.1   Consent of Ernst & Young LLP, Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm.
  23.2 * Consent of Goodwin Procter LLP (included in Exhibit 5.1).
  24.1 ** Power of Attorney (see page II-4 to the original filing of this registration statement on Form S-1).

*
To be filed by amendment.

**
Previously filed.

#
Indicates a management contract or compensatory plan.



Exhibit 1.1

 

 

 

Control4 Corporation

 

[                ] Shares of Common Stock

 

UNDERWRITING AGREEMENT

 

Dated:                       , 2013

 

 

 



 

Control4 Corporation

 

[                            ] Shares of Common Stock

 

UNDERWRITING AGREEMENT

 

· , 2013

 

Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith

Incorporated

Raymond James & Associates, Inc.

 

as Representatives of the several Underwriters

 

c/o

Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith

Incorporated

One Bryant Park
New York, New York 10036

 

c/o

Raymond James & Associates, Inc.

One Embarcadero Center, Suite 650

San Francisco, CA 94111

 

Ladies and Gentlemen:

 

Control4 Corporation (the “Company”) confirms its agreement with Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated (“Merrill Lynch”), Raymond James & Associates, Inc. (“Raymond James”) and each of the other Underwriters named in Schedule A hereto (collectively, the “Underwriters,” which term shall also include any underwriter substituted as hereinafter provided in Section 10 hereof), for whom Merrill Lynch and Raymond James are acting as representatives (in such capacity, the “Representatives”), with respect to (i) the sale by the Company and the purchase by the Underwriters, acting severally and not jointly, of the respective numbers of shares of Common Stock, par value $0.0001 per share, of the Company (“Common Stock”) set forth in Schedule A hereto and (ii) the grant by the Company to the Underwriters, acting severally and not jointly, of the option described in Section 2(b) hereof to purchase all or any part of [                  ] additional shares of Common Stock.  The aforesaid [                      ] shares of Common Stock (the “Initial Securities”) to be purchased by the Underwriters and all or any part of the [                      ] shares of Common Stock subject to the option described in Section 2(b) hereof (the “Option Securities”) are herein called, collectively, the “Securities.”

 

The Company understands that the Underwriters propose to make a public offering of the Securities as soon as the Representatives deem advisable after this Agreement has been executed and delivered.

 

The Company has filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission (the “Commission”) a registration statement on Form S-1 (No. 333- · ), including the related preliminary prospectus or prospectuses, covering the registration of the sale of the Securities under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the “1933 Act”).  Promptly after execution and delivery of this Agreement, the Company will

 



 

prepare and file a prospectus in accordance with the provisions of Rule 430A (“Rule 430A”) of the rules and regulations of the Commission under the 1933 Act (the “1933 Act Regulations”) and Rule 424(b) (“Rule 424(b)”) of the 1933 Act Regulations.  The information included in such prospectus that was omitted from such registration statement at the time it became effective but that is deemed to be part of such registration statement at the time it became effective pursuant to Rule 430A(b) is herein called the “Rule 430A Information.”  Such registration statement, including the amendments thereto, the exhibits thereto and any schedules thereto, at the time it became effective, and including the Rule 430A Information, is herein called the “Registration Statement.”  Any registration statement filed pursuant to Rule 462(b) of the 1933 Act Regulations is herein called the “Rule 462(b) Registration Statement” and, after such filing, the term “Registration Statement” shall include the Rule 462(b) Registration Statement.  Each prospectus used prior to the effectiveness of the Registration Statement, and each prospectus that omitted the Rule 430A Information that was used after such effectiveness and prior to the execution and delivery of this Agreement, is herein called a “preliminary prospectus.”  The final prospectus, in the form first furnished to the Underwriters for use in connection with the offering of the Securities, is herein called the “Prospectus.”  For purposes of this Agreement, all references to the Registration Statement, any preliminary prospectus, the Prospectus or any amendment or supplement to any of the foregoing shall be deemed to include the copy filed with the Commission pursuant to its Electronic Data Gathering, Analysis and Retrieval system or any successor system (“EDGAR”).

 

As used in this Agreement:

 

“1934 Act” means the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended.

 

“1934 Act Regulations” means the rules and regulations of the Commission under the 1934 Act.

 

“Applicable Time” means [    ]:00 P.M., New York City time, on [                    ] or such other time as agreed by the Company and the Representatives.

 

“General Disclosure Package” means any Issuer General Use Free Writing Prospectuses issued at or prior to the Applicable Time, the most recent preliminary prospectus that is distributed to investors prior to the Applicable Time and the information included on Schedule B-1 hereto, all considered together.

 

“Issuer Free Writing Prospectus” means any “issuer free writing prospectus,” as defined in Rule 433 of the 1933 Act Regulations (“Rule 433”), including without limitation any “free writing prospectus” (as defined in Rule 405 of the 1933 Act Regulations (“Rule 405”)) relating to the Securities that is (i) required to be filed with the Commission by the Company, (ii) a “road show that is a written communication” within the meaning of Rule 433(d)(8)(i), whether or not required to be filed with the Commission, or (iii) exempt from filing with the Commission pursuant to Rule 433(d)(5)(i) because it contains a description of the Securities or of the offering that does not reflect the final terms, in each case in the form filed or required to be filed with the Commission or, if not required to be filed, in the form retained in the Company’s records pursuant to Rule 433(g).

 

“Issuer General Use Free Writing Prospectus” means any Issuer Free Writing Prospectus that is intended for general distribution to prospective investors (other than a “ bona fide electronic road show,” as defined in Rule 433 (the “Bona Fide Electronic Road Show”)), as evidenced by its being specified in Schedule B-2 hereto.

 

2



 

“Issuer Limited Use Free Writing Prospectus” means any Issuer Free Writing Prospectus that is not an Issuer General Use Free Writing Prospectus.

 

“Testing-the-Waters Communication” means any oral or written communication with potential investors undertaken in reliance on Section 5(d) of the 1933 Act.

 

“Written Testing-the-Waters Communication” means any Testing-the-Waters Communication that is a written communication within the meaning of Rule 405 under the 1933 Act.

 

SECTION 1.         Representations and Warranties .

 

(a)           Representations and Warranties by the Company .  The Company represents and warrants to each Underwriter as of the date hereof, the Applicable Time, the Closing Time (as defined below) and any Date of Delivery (as defined below), and agrees with each Underwriter, as follows:

 

(i)            Registration Statement and Prospectuses .  Each of the Registration Statement and any amendment thereto has become effective under the 1933 Act.  No stop order suspending the effectiveness of the Registration Statement or any post-effective amendment thereto has been issued under the 1933 Act, no order preventing or suspending the use of any preliminary prospectus or the Prospectus has been issued and no proceedings for any of those purposes have been instituted or are pending or, to the Company’s knowledge, contemplated by the Commission.  The Company has complied with each request (if any) from the Commission for additional information.

 

Each of the Registration Statement and any post-effective amendment thereto, at the time it became effective, complied in all material respects with the requirements of the 1933 Act and the 1933 Act Regulations.  Each preliminary prospectus, the Prospectus and any amendment or supplement thereto, at the time each was filed with the Commission, complied in all material respects with the requirements of the 1933 Act and the 1933 Act Regulations.  Each preliminary prospectus delivered to the Underwriters for use in connection with this offering and the Prospectus was or will be identical to the electronically transmitted copies thereof filed with the Commission pursuant to EDGAR, except to the extent permitted by Regulation S-T.

 

(ii)           Accurate Disclosure .  Neither the Registration Statement nor any amendment thereto, at its effective time, at the Closing Time or at any Date of Delivery, contained, contains or will contain an untrue statement of a material fact or omitted, omits or will omit to state a material fact required to be stated therein or necessary to make the statements therein not misleading.  As of the Applicable Time, none of (A) the General Disclosure Package (B) any individual Issuer Limited Use Free Writing Prospectus, when considered together with the General Disclosure Package and (C) any individual Written Testing-the-Waters Communication, when considered together with the General Disclosure Package, included, includes or will include an untrue statement of a material fact or omitted, omits or will omit to state a material fact necessary in order to make the statements therein, in the light of the circumstances under which they were made, not misleading.  Neither the Prospectus nor any amendment or supplement thereto (including any prospectus wrapper), as of its issue date, at the time of any filing with the Commission pursuant to Rule 424(b), at the Closing Time or at any Date of Delivery, included, includes or will include an untrue statement of a material fact or omitted, omits or will omit to state a material fact necessary in order to make the statements therein, in the light of the circumstances under which they were made, not misleading.

 

3



 

The representations and warranties in this subsection shall not apply to statements in or omissions from the Registration Statement (or any amendment thereto), the General Disclosure Package or the Prospectus (or any amendment or supplement thereto) made in reliance upon and in conformity with written information furnished to the Company by any Underwriter through Merrill Lynch and Raymond James expressly for use therein.  For purposes of this Agreement, the only information so furnished shall be the information in the first paragraph under the heading “Underwriting—Commissions and Discounts,” the information in the second, third and fourth paragraphs under the heading “Underwriting—Price Stabilization, Short Positions and Penalty Bids” and the information under the heading “Underwriting—Electronic Distribution” in each case contained in the Prospectus (collectively, the “Underwriter Information”).

 

(iii)          Issuer Free Writing Prospectuses .  No Issuer Free Writing Prospectus conflicts or will conflict with the information contained in the Registration Statement or the Prospectus, and any preliminary or other prospectus deemed to be a part thereof that has not been superseded or modified.  The Company has made available a Bona Fide Electronic Road Show in compliance with Rule 433(d)(8)(ii) such that no filing of any “road show” (as defined in Rule 433(h)) is required in connection with the offering of the Securities.

 

(iv)          Testing-the-Waters Materials .  The Company (A) has not engaged in any Testing-the-Waters Communication other than Testing-the-Waters Communications with the consent of the Representatives with entities that are qualified institutional buyers within the meaning of Rule 144A under the 1933 Act or institutions that are accredited investors within the meaning of Rule 501 under the 1933 Act and (B) has not authorized anyone other than the Representatives to engage in Testing-the-Waters Communications.  The Company reconfirms that the Representatives have been authorized to act on its behalf in undertaking Testing-the-Waters Communications.  The Company has not distributed any Written Testing-the-Waters Communications other than those listed on Schedule B-3 hereto.

 

(v)           Company Not Ineligible Issuer .  At the time of filing the Registration Statement and any post-effective amendment thereto, at the earliest time thereafter that the Company or another offering participant made a bona fide offer (within the meaning of Rule 164(h)(2) of the 1933 Act Regulations) of the Securities and at the date hereof, the Company was not and is not an “ineligible issuer,” as defined in Rule 405, without taking account of any determination by the Commission pursuant to Rule 405 that it is not necessary that the Company be considered an ineligible issuer.

 

(vi)          Emerging Growth Company Status.   From the time of the initial confidential submission of the Registration Statement to the Commission through the date hereof, the Company has been and is an “emerging growth company,” as defined in Section 2(a) of the Securities Act (an “Emerging Growth Company”).

 

(vii)         Independent Accountants .  To the Company’s knowledge, the accountants who certified the financial statements and supporting schedules included in the Registration Statement, the General Disclosure Package and the Prospectus are independent public accountants with respect to the Company as required by the 1933 Act, the 1933 Act Regulations and the Public Accounting Oversight Board.

 

4



 

(viii)        Financial Statements; Non-GAAP Financial Measures   The financial statements included in the Registration Statement, the General Disclosure Package and the Prospectus, together with the related schedules and notes, present fairly in all material respects the financial position of the Company and its consolidated subsidiaries at the dates indicated and the statement of operations, stockholders’ equity and cash flows of the Company and its consolidated subsidiaries for the periods specified; said financial statements have been prepared in conformity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles (“GAAP”) applied on a consistent basis throughout the periods involved.  The supporting schedules included in the Registration Statement, if any, present fairly in all material respects in accordance with GAAP the information required to be stated therein.  The selected financial data and the summary financial information included in the Registration Statement, the General Disclosure Package and the Prospectus present fairly in all material respects the information shown therein and have been compiled on a basis consistent with that of the audited financial statements included therein. All disclosures contained in the Registration Statement, the General Disclosure Package or the Prospectus regarding “non-GAAP financial measures” (as such term is defined by the rules and regulations of the Commission) comply in all material respects with Regulation G of the 1934 Act and Item 10 of Regulation S-K of the 1933 Act, to the extent applicable. Except as included therein, no historical or pro forma financial statements or supporting schedules are required to be included or incorporated by reference in the Registration Statement, the General Disclosure Package or the Prospectus under the 1933 Act or the 1933 Act Regulations.

 

(ix)          No Material Adverse Change in Business .  Except as otherwise stated therein, since the respective dates as of which information is given in the Registration Statement, the General Disclosure Package or the Prospectus, (A) there has been no material adverse change in the condition, financial or otherwise, or in the earnings, business affairs or business prospects of the Company and its subsidiaries considered as one enterprise, whether or not arising in the ordinary course of business (a “Material Adverse Effect”), (B) there have been no transactions entered into by the Company or any of its subsidiaries, other than those in the ordinary course of business, which are material with respect to the Company and its subsidiaries considered as one enterprise, and (C) there has been no dividend or distribution of any kind declared, paid or made by the Company on any class of its capital stock.

 

(x)           Good Standing of the Company .  The Company has been duly organized and is validly existing as a corporation in good standing under the laws of the State of Delaware and has corporate power and authority to own, lease and operate its properties and to conduct its business as described in the Registration Statement, the General Disclosure Package and the Prospectus and to enter into and perform its obligations under this Agreement; and the Company is duly qualified as a foreign corporation to transact business and is in good standing in each other jurisdiction in which such qualification is required, whether by reason of the ownership or leasing of property or the conduct of business, except where the failure so to qualify or to be in good standing would not result in a Material Adverse Effect.

 

(xi)          Good Standing of Subsidiaries .  Each “significant subsidiary” of the Company (as such term is defined in Rule 1-02 of Regulation S-X) (each, a “Subsidiary” and, collectively, the “Subsidiaries”) has been duly organized and is validly existing in good standing (to the extent such concept exists) under the laws of the jurisdiction of its incorporation or organization, has corporate or similar power and authority to own, lease and operate its properties and to conduct its business as described in the Registration Statement, the General Disclosure Package and the Prospectus and is duly qualified to transact business and is in good standing (to the extent such concept exists) in each jurisdiction in which such qualification is required, whether by reason of the ownership or leasing of property or the conduct of business, except where the failure to so

 

5



 

qualify or to be in good standing would not result in a Material Adverse Effect.  Except as otherwise disclosed in the Registration Statement, the General Disclosure Package and the Prospectus, all of the issued and outstanding capital stock of each Subsidiary has been duly authorized and validly issued, is fully paid and non-assessable and is owned by the Company, directly or through subsidiaries, free and clear of any security interest, mortgage, pledge, lien, encumbrance, claim or equity.  None of the outstanding shares of capital stock of any Subsidiary were issued in violation of the preemptive or similar rights of any securityholder of such Subsidiary.  The only subsidiaries of the Company are (A) the subsidiaries listed on Exhibit 21 to the Registration Statement and (B) certain other subsidiaries which, considered in the aggregate as a single subsidiary, do not constitute a “significant subsidiary” as defined in Rule 1-02 of Regulation S-X.

 

(xii)         Capitalization .  The authorized, issued and outstanding shares of capital stock of the Company are as set forth in the Registration Statement, the General Disclosure Package and the Prospectus in the column entitled “Actual” under the caption “Capitalization” (except for subsequent issuances, if any, pursuant to this Agreement, pursuant to reservations, agreements or employee benefit plans referred to in the Registration Statement, the General Disclosure Package and the Prospectus or pursuant to the exercise of convertible securities or options referred to in the Registration Statement, the General Disclosure Package and the Prospectus).  The outstanding shares of capital stock of the Company have been duly authorized and validly issued and are fully paid and non-assessable.  None of the outstanding shares of capital stock of the Company were issued in violation of the preemptive or other similar rights of any securityholder of the Company.

 

(xiii)        Authorization of Agreement .  This Agreement has been duly authorized, executed and delivered by the Company.

 

(xiv)        Authorization and Description of Securities .  The Securities to be purchased by the Underwriters from the Company have been duly authorized for issuance and sale to the Underwriters pursuant to this Agreement and, when issued and delivered by the Company pursuant to this Agreement against payment of the consideration set forth herein, will be validly issued and fully paid and non-assessable; and the issuance of the Securities pursuant to this Agreement is not subject to the preemptive or other similar rights of any securityholder of the Company or any such preemptive or other similar rights have been waived.  The Common Stock conforms in all material respects to all statements relating thereto contained in the Registration Statement, the General Disclosure Package and the Prospectus and such description conforms in all material respects to the rights set forth in the instruments defining the same.  No holder of Securities will be subject to personal liability by reason of being such a holder.  The Company has no debt securities or preferred stock that is rated by any “nationally recognized statistical rating agency” (as that term is defined by the Commission for purposes of Rule 436(g)(2) under the 1933 Act).

 

(xv)         Registration Rights .  There are no persons with registration rights or other similar rights to have any securities registered for sale pursuant to the Registration Statement or otherwise registered for sale or sold by the Company under the 1933 Act pursuant to this Agreement, other than those rights that have been disclosed in the Registration Statement, the General Disclosure Package and the Prospectus and have been waived.

 

(xvi)        Absence of Violations, Defaults and Conflicts .  Neither the Company nor any of its subsidiaries is (A) in violation of its charter, by-laws or similar organizational document, (B) in default in the performance or observance of any obligation, agreement, covenant or condition contained in any contract, indenture, mortgage, deed of trust, loan or credit agreement, note, lease

 

6



 

or other agreement or instrument to which the Company or any of its subsidiaries is a party or by which it or any of them may be bound or to which any of the properties or assets of the Company or any subsidiary is subject (collectively, “Agreements and Instruments”), except for such defaults that would not, singly or in the aggregate, result in a Material Adverse Effect, or (C) in violation of any law, statute, rule, regulation, judgment, order, writ or decree of any arbitrator, court, governmental body, regulatory body, administrative agency or other authority, body or agency having jurisdiction over the Company or any of its subsidiaries or any of their respective properties, assets or operations (each, a “Governmental Entity”), except for such violations that would not, singly or in the aggregate, result in a Material Adverse Effect.  The execution, delivery and performance of this Agreement and the consummation of the transactions contemplated herein and in the Registration Statement, the General Disclosure Package and the Prospectus (including the issuance and sale of the Securities and the use of the proceeds from the sale of the Securities as described therein under the caption “Use of Proceeds”) and compliance by the Company with its obligations hereunder have been duly authorized by all necessary corporate action and do not and will not, whether with or without the giving of notice or passage of time or both, conflict with or constitute a breach of, or default or Repayment Event (as defined below) under, or result in the creation or imposition of any lien, charge or encumbrance upon any properties or assets of the Company or any subsidiary pursuant to, the Agreements and Instruments (except for such conflicts, breaches, defaults or Repayment Events or liens, charges or encumbrances that would not, singly or in the aggregate, result in a Material Adverse Effect), nor will such action result in any violation of any law, statute, rule, regulation, judgment, order, writ or decree of any Governmental Entity that would have a Material Adverse Effect or the provisions of the charter, by-laws or similar organizational document of the Company or any of its subsidiaries.  As used herein, a “Repayment Event” means any event or condition which gives the holder of any note, debenture or other evidence of indebtedness (or any person acting on such holder’s behalf) the right to require the repurchase, redemption or repayment of all or a portion of such indebtedness by the Company or any of its subsidiaries.

 

(xvii)       Absence of Labor Dispute .  No labor dispute with the employees of the Company or any of its subsidiaries exists or, to the knowledge of the Company, is imminent.

 

(xviii)      Absence of Proceedings .  Except as disclosed in the Registration Statement, the General Disclosure Package and the Prospectus, there is no action, suit, proceeding, inquiry or investigation before or brought by any Governmental Entity now pending or, to the knowledge of the Company, threatened, against or affecting the Company or any of its subsidiaries, which would reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect, or which would reasonably be expected to materially and adversely affect their respective properties or assets or the consummation of the transactions contemplated in this Agreement or the performance by the Company of its obligations hereunder; and the aggregate of all pending legal or governmental proceedings to which the Company or any such subsidiary is a party or of which any of their respective properties or assets is the subject which are not described in the Registration Statement, the General Disclosure Package and the Prospectus, including ordinary routine litigation incidental to the business, would not reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect.

 

(xix)        Accuracy of Exhibits .  There are no contracts or documents which are required to be described in the Registration Statement, the General Disclosure Package or the Prospectus or to be filed as exhibits to the Registration Statement which have not been so described and filed as required.

 

7



 

(xx)         Absence of Further Requirements .  No filing with, or authorization, approval, consent, license, order, registration, qualification or decree of, any Governmental Entity is necessary or required for the performance by the Company of its obligations hereunder, in connection with the offering, issuance or sale of the Securities hereunder or the consummation of the transactions contemplated by this Agreement, except (A) such as have been already obtained or as may be required under the 1933 Act, the 1933 Act Regulations, the rules of the NASDAQ Stock Market LLC, state securities laws or the rules of the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority, Inc. (“FINRA”) and (B) for such other filings with, or authorizations, approvals, consents, licenses, orders, registrations, qualifications or decrees of, any Governmental Entity the absence of which would not reasonably be expected, individually or in the aggregate, to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

(xxi)        Possession of Licenses and Permits .  The Company and its subsidiaries possess such permits, licenses, approvals, consents and other authorizations (collectively, “Governmental Licenses”) issued by the appropriate Governmental Entities necessary to conduct the business now operated by them, except where the failure so to possess would not, singly or in the aggregate, result in a Material Adverse Effect.  The Company and its subsidiaries are in compliance with the terms and conditions of all Governmental Licenses, except where the failure so to comply would not, singly or in the aggregate, result in a Material Adverse Effect.  All of the Governmental Licenses are valid and in full force and effect, except when the invalidity of such Governmental Licenses or the failure of such Governmental Licenses to be in full force and effect would not, singly or in the aggregate, result in a Material Adverse Effect.  Neither the Company nor any of its subsidiaries has received any notice of proceedings relating to the revocation or modification of any Governmental Licenses which, singly or in the aggregate, if the subject of an unfavorable decision, ruling or finding, would result in a Material Adverse Effect.

 

(xxii)       Title to Property .  The Company and its subsidiaries do not own any real property.  The Company and its subsidiaries have good and marketable title to all personal properties owned by them, in each case, free and clear of all mortgages, pledges, liens, security interests, claims, restrictions or encumbrances of any kind except such as (A) are described in the Registration Statement, the General Disclosure Package and the Prospectus or (B) would not, singly or in the aggregate, if title were so encumbered, result in a Material Adverse Effect; and all of the leases and subleases material to the business of the Company and its subsidiaries, considered as one enterprise, and under which the Company or any of its subsidiaries holds properties described in the Registration Statement, the General Disclosure Package or the Prospectus, are in full force and effect, and neither the Company nor any such subsidiary has any notice of any material claim of any sort that has been asserted by anyone adverse to the rights of the Company or any subsidiary under any of the leases or subleases mentioned above, or affecting or questioning the rights of the Company or such subsidiary to the continued possession of the leased or subleased premises under any such lease or sublease except to the extent that any impingement of the Company’s rights thereto would not result in a Material Adverse Effect.

 

(xxiii)      Possession of Intellectual Property .  The Company and its subsidiaries own or possess, or can acquire on reasonable terms, adequate patents, patent rights, licenses, inventions, copyrights, know-how (including trade secrets and other unpatented and/or unpatentable proprietary or confidential information, systems or procedures), trademarks, service marks, trade names or other intellectual property (collectively, “Intellectual Property”) necessary to carry on the business now operated by them, and neither the Company nor any of its subsidiaries has received any notice or is otherwise aware of any infringement of or conflict with asserted rights of others with respect to any Intellectual Property or of any facts or circumstances which would render any Intellectual Property invalid or inadequate to protect the interest of the Company or

 

8



 

any of its subsidiaries therein, and which infringement or conflict (if the subject of any unfavorable decision, ruling or finding) or invalidity or inadequacy, singly or in the aggregate, would result in a Material Adverse Effect.

 

(xxiv)     Environmental Laws .  Except as described in the Registration Statement, the General Disclosure Package and the Prospectus or would not, singly or in the aggregate, result in a Material Adverse Effect, (A) neither the Company nor any of its subsidiaries is in violation of any federal, state, local or foreign statute, law, rule, regulation, ordinance, code, policy or rule of common law or any judicial or administrative interpretation thereof, including any judicial or administrative order, consent, decree or judgment, relating to pollution or protection of human health, the environment (including, without limitation, ambient air, surface water, groundwater, land surface or subsurface strata) or wildlife, including, without limitation, laws and regulations relating to the release or threatened release of chemicals, pollutants, contaminants, wastes, toxic substances, hazardous substances, petroleum or petroleum products, asbestos-containing materials or mold (collectively, “Hazardous Materials”) or to the manufacture, processing, distribution, use, treatment, storage, disposal, transport or handling of Hazardous Materials (collectively, “Environmental Laws”), (B) the Company and its subsidiaries have all permits, authorizations and approvals required under any applicable Environmental Laws and are each in compliance with their requirements, (C) there are no pending or, to the Company’s knowledge, threatened administrative, regulatory or judicial actions, suits, demands, demand letters, claims, liens, notices of noncompliance or violation, investigation or proceedings relating to any Environmental Law against the Company or any of its subsidiaries and (D) to the Company’s knowledge, there are no events or circumstances that would reasonably be expected to form the basis of an order for clean-up or remediation, or an action, suit or proceeding by any private party or Governmental Entity, against or affecting the Company or any of its subsidiaries relating to Hazardous Materials or any Environmental Laws.

 

(xxv)      Accounting Controls.   The Company and each of its subsidiaries have taken all necessary actions to ensure that, in the time period required, the Company and its subsidiaries will comply with Rule 13-a15 and 15d-15 under the 1934 Act Regulations and a system of internal accounting controls sufficient to provide reasonable assurances that: (A) transactions are executed in accordance with management’s general or specific authorization; (B) transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in conformity with GAAP and to maintain accountability for assets; (C) access to assets is permitted only in accordance with management’s general or specific authorization; and (D) the recorded accountability for assets is compared with the existing assets at reasonable intervals and appropriate action is taken with respect to any differences.  Except as described in the Registration Statement, the General Disclosure Package and the Prospectus, since the end of the Company’s most recent audited fiscal year, there has been (1) no material weakness in the Company’s internal control over financial reporting (whether or not remediated) and (2) no change in the Company’s internal control over financial reporting that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the Company’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

(xxvi)     Compliance with the Sarbanes-Oxley Act.   The Company has taken all necessary actions to ensure that, upon the effectiveness of the Registration Statement, it will be in compliance with all provisions of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 and all rules and regulations promulgated thereunder or implementing the provisions thereof (the “Sarbanes-Oxley Act”) that are then in effect and with which the Company is required to comply as of the effectiveness of the Registration Statement, and is actively taking steps to enable it to be in compliance with other provisions of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act not currently in effect, upon the effectiveness of such

 

9


 

provisions, or which will become applicable to the Company at all times after the effectiveness of the Registration Statement.

 

(xxvii)    Payment of Taxes .  All United States federal income tax returns of the Company and its subsidiaries required by law to be filed have been filed and all taxes shown by such returns or otherwise assessed, which are due and payable, have been paid, except assessments against which appeals have been or will be promptly taken and as to which adequate reserves have been provided. The United States federal income tax returns of the Company through the fiscal year ended December 31, 2011 have been filed and no assessment in connection therewith has been made against the Company. The Company and its subsidiaries have filed all other tax returns that are required to have been filed by them pursuant to applicable foreign, state, local or other law except insofar as the failure to file such returns would not result in a Material Adverse Effect, and has paid all taxes due pursuant to such returns or pursuant to any assessment received by the Company and its subsidiaries, except for such taxes, if any, as are being contested in good faith and as to which adequate reserves have been established by the Company. The charges, accruals and reserves on the books of the Company in respect of any income and corporation tax liability for any years not finally determined are adequate to meet any assessments or re-assessments for additional income tax for any years not finally determined, except to the extent of any inadequacy that would not result in a Material Adverse Effect.

 

(xxviii)   Insurance .  The Company and its subsidiaries carry or are entitled to the benefits of insurance, with reputable insurers, in such amounts and covering such risks as is generally maintained by companies of established repute and of comparable size engaged in the same or similar business, and all such insurance is in full force and effect.  The Company has no reason to believe that it or any of its subsidiaries will not be able (A) to renew if desired its existing insurance coverage as and when such policies expire or (B) to obtain comparable coverage from similar institutions as may be necessary or appropriate to conduct its business as now conducted and at a cost that would not result in a Material Adverse Effect.  Neither of the Company nor any of its subsidiaries has been denied any insurance coverage that it has sought or for which it has applied.

 

(xxix)     Investment Company Act .  The Company is not required, and upon the issuance and sale of the Securities as herein contemplated and the application of the net proceeds therefrom as described in the Registration Statement, the General Disclosure Package and the Prospectus will not be required, to register as an “investment company” under the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended (the “1940 Act”).

 

(xxx)      Absence of Manipulation .  Neither the Company nor, to the Company’s knowledge, any affiliate of the Company has taken, nor will the Company or any of its subsidiaries take, directly or indirectly, any action which is designed, or would reasonably be expected, to cause or result in, or which constitutes, the stabilization or manipulation of the price of any security of the Company to facilitate the sale or resale of the Securities or to result in a violation of Regulation M under the 1934 Act.

 

(xxxi)     Foreign Corrupt Practices Act .  None of the Company, any of its subsidiaries or, to the knowledge of the Company, any director, officer, agent, employee, affiliate or other person acting on behalf of the Company or any of its subsidiaries is aware of or has taken any action, directly or indirectly, that would result in a violation by such persons of the Foreign Corrupt Practices Act of 1977, as amended, and the rules and regulations thereunder (the “FCPA”), including, without limitation, making use of the mails or any means or instrumentality of interstate commerce corruptly in furtherance of an offer, payment, promise to pay or

 

10



 

authorization of the payment of any money, or other property, gift, promise to give, or authorization of the giving of anything of value to any “foreign official” (as such term is defined in the FCPA) or any foreign political party or official thereof or any candidate for foreign political office, in contravention of the FCPA and the Company and, to the knowledge of the Company, its affiliates have conducted their businesses in compliance with the FCPA and have instituted and maintain policies and procedures designed to comply, and which are reasonably expected to continue to comply, therewith.

 

(xxxii)    Money Laundering Laws .  The operations of the Company and its subsidiaries are and have been conducted at all times in compliance with applicable financial recordkeeping and reporting requirements of the Currency and Foreign Transactions Reporting Act of 1970, as amended, the money laundering statutes of all jurisdictions, the rules and regulations thereunder and any related or similar rules, regulations or guidelines, issued, administered or enforced by any Governmental Entity (collectively, the “Money Laundering Laws”); and no action, suit or proceeding by or before any Governmental Entity involving the Company or any of its subsidiaries with respect to the Money Laundering Laws is pending or, to the best knowledge of the Company, threatened.

 

(xxxiii)   OFAC .  None of the Company, any of its subsidiaries or, to the knowledge of the Company, any director, officer, agent, employee, affiliate or representative of the Company or any of its subsidiaries is an individual or entity (“Person”) currently the subject or target of any sanctions administered or enforced by the United States Government, including, without limitation, the U.S. Department of the Treasury’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (“OFAC”), the United Nations Security Council (“UNSC”), the European Union, Her Majesty’s Treasury (“HMT”), or other relevant sanctions authority (collectively, “Sanctions”), nor is the Company located, organized or resident in a country or territory that is the subject of Sanctions; and the Company will not directly or indirectly use the proceeds of the sale of the Securities, or lend, contribute or otherwise make available such proceeds to any subsidiaries, joint venture partners or other Person, to fund any activities of or business with any Person, or in any country or territory, that, at the time of such funding, is the subject of Sanctions or in any other manner that will result in a violation by any Person (including any Person participating in the transaction, whether as underwriter, advisor, investor or otherwise) of Sanctions.

 

(xxxiv)   Lending Relationship Except as disclosed in the Registration Statement, the General Disclosure Package and the Prospectus, the Company (i) does not have any material lending or other relationship with any bank or lending affiliate of any Underwriter and (ii) does not intend to use any of the proceeds from the sale of the Securities to repay any outstanding debt owed to any affiliate of any Underwriter.

 

(xxxv)    Statistical and Market-Related Data .  Any statistical and market-related data included in the Registration Statement, the General Disclosure Package or the Prospectus are based on or derived from sources that the Company believes, after reasonable inquiry, to be reliable and accurate and, to the extent required, the Company has obtained the written consent to the use of such data from such sources.

 

(b)           Officer’s Certificates .  Any certificate signed by any officer of the Company or any of its subsidiaries delivered to the Representatives or to counsel for the Underwriters shall be deemed a representation and warranty by the Company to each Underwriter as to the matters covered thereby.

 

11



 

SECTION 2.         Sale and Delivery to Underwriters; Closing .

 

(a)           Initial Securities .  On the basis of the representations and warranties herein contained and subject to the terms and conditions herein set forth, the Company agrees to sell to each Underwriter, severally and not jointly, and each Underwriter, severally and not jointly, agrees to purchase from the Company, at the price per share set forth in Schedule A, that number of Initial Securities set forth in Schedule A opposite the name of such Underwriter, plus any additional number of Initial Securities which such Underwriter may become obligated to purchase pursuant to the provisions of Section 10 hereof, subject, in each case, to such adjustments among the Underwriters as Merrill Lynch in its sole discretion shall make to eliminate any sales or purchases of fractional shares.

 

(b)           Option Securities .  In addition, on the basis of the representations and warranties herein contained and subject to the terms and conditions herein set forth, the Company hereby grants an option to the Underwriters, severally and not jointly, to purchase up to an additional [                    ] shares of Common Stock, at the price per share set forth in Schedule A, less an amount per share equal to any dividends or distributions declared by the Company and payable on the Initial Securities but not payable on the Option Securities.  The option hereby granted may be exercised for 30 days after the date hereof and may be exercised in whole or in part at any time from time to time upon written notice by the Representatives to the Company setting forth the number of Option Securities as to which the several Underwriters are then exercising the option and the time and date of payment and delivery for such Option Securities.  Any such time and date of delivery (a “Date of Delivery”) shall be determined by the Representatives, but shall not be later than seven full business days after the exercise of said option, nor in any event prior to the Closing Time.  If the option is exercised as to all or any portion of the Option Securities, each of the Underwriters, acting severally and not jointly, will purchase that proportion of the total number of Option Securities then being purchased which the number of Initial Securities set forth in Schedule A opposite the name of such Underwriter bears to the total number of Initial Securities, subject, in each case, to such adjustments as Merrill Lynch and Raymond James in their sole discretion shall make to eliminate any sales or purchases of fractional shares.

 

(c)           Payment .  Payment of the purchase price for, and delivery of certificates for, the Initial Securities shall be made at the offices of Cooley LLP, 3175 Hanover Street, Palo Alto, California, or at such other place as shall be agreed upon by the Representatives and the Company, at 9:00 A.M. (New York City time) on the third (fourth, if the pricing occurs after 4:30 P.M. (New York City time) on any given day) business day after the date hereof (unless postponed in accordance with the provisions of Section 10), or such other time not later than ten business days after such date as shall be agreed upon by the Representatives and the Company (such time and date of payment and delivery being herein called “Closing Time”).

 

In addition, in the event that any or all of the Option Securities are purchased by the Underwriters, payment of the purchase price for, and delivery of certificates for, such Option Securities shall be made at the above-mentioned offices, or at such other place as shall be agreed upon by the Representatives and the Company, on each Date of Delivery as specified in the notice from the Representatives to the Company.

 

Payment shall be made to the Company by wire transfer of immediately available funds to a bank account designated by the Company against delivery to the Representatives for the respective accounts of the Underwriters of certificates for the Securities to be purchased by them.  It is understood that each Underwriter has authorized the Representatives, for its account, to accept delivery of, receipt for, and make payment of the purchase price for, the Initial Securities and the Option Securities, if any, which it has agreed to purchase.  Merrill Lynch, individually and not as representative of the Underwriters, may (but shall not be obligated to) make payment of the purchase price for the Initial Securities or the Option

 

12



 

Securities, if any, to be purchased by any Underwriter whose funds have not been received by the Closing Time or the relevant Date of Delivery, as the case may be, but such payment shall not relieve such Underwriter from its obligations hereunder.

 

SECTION 3.         Covenants of the Company .  The Company covenants with each Underwriter as follows:

 

(a)           Compliance with Securities Regulations and Commission Requests .  The Company, subject to Section 3(b), will comply with the requirements of Rule 430A, and will promptly notify the Representatives, and confirm the notice in writing, (i) when any post-effective amendment to the Registration Statement shall become effective or any amendment or supplement to the Prospectus shall have been filed, (ii) of the receipt of any comments from the Commission, (iii) of any request by the Commission for any amendment to the Registration Statement or any amendment or supplement to the Prospectus or for additional information, (iv) of the issuance by the Commission of any stop order suspending the effectiveness of the Registration Statement or any post-effective amendment or of any order preventing or suspending the use of any preliminary prospectus or the Prospectus, or of the suspension of the qualification of the Securities for offering or sale in any jurisdiction, or of the initiation or threatening of any proceedings for any of such purposes or of any examination pursuant to Section 8(d) or 8(e) of the 1933 Act concerning the Registration Statement and (v) if the Company becomes the subject of a proceeding under Section 8A of the 1933 Act in connection with the offering of the Securities.  The Company will effect all filings required under Rule 424(b), in the manner and within the time period required by Rule 424(b) (without reliance on Rule 424(b)(8)), and will take such steps as it deems necessary to ascertain promptly whether the form of prospectus transmitted for filing under Rule 424(b) was received for filing by the Commission and, in the event that it was not, it will promptly file such prospectus.  The Company will use its reasonable efforts to prevent the issuance of any stop order, prevention or suspension and, if any such order is issued, to obtain the lifting thereof at the earliest possible moment.

 

(b)           Continued Compliance with Securities Laws .  The Company will comply with the 1933 Act and the 1933 Act Regulations so as to permit the completion of the distribution of the Securities as contemplated in this Agreement and in the Registration Statement, the General Disclosure Package and the Prospectus.  If at any time when a prospectus relating to the Securities is (or, but for the exception afforded by Rule 172 of the 1933 Act Regulations (“Rule 172”), would be) required by the 1933 Act to be delivered in connection with sales of the Securities, any event shall occur or condition shall exist as a result of which it is necessary, in the opinion of counsel for the Underwriters or for the Company, to (i) amend the Registration Statement in order that the Registration Statement will not include an untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact required to be stated therein or necessary to make the statements therein not misleading, (ii) amend or supplement the General Disclosure Package or the Prospectus in order that the General Disclosure Package or the Prospectus, as the case may be, will not include any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary in order to make the statements therein not misleading in the light of the circumstances existing at the time it is delivered to a purchaser or (iii) amend the Registration Statement or amend or supplement the General Disclosure Package or the Prospectus, as the case may be, in order to comply with the requirements of the 1933 Act or the 1933 Act Regulations, the Company will promptly (A) give the Representatives notice of such event; provided that the Representatives shall be deemed to have received notice without any required action by the Company if such determination was made by counsel for the Underwriters, (B) prepare any amendment or supplement as may be necessary to correct such statement or omission or to make the Registration Statement, the General Disclosure Package or the Prospectus comply with such requirements and, a reasonable amount of time prior to any proposed filing or use, furnish the Representatives with copies of any such amendment or supplement and (C) file with the Commission any such amendment or supplement; provided that the Company shall not file or use any such amendment or

 

13



 

supplement to which the Representatives or counsel for the Underwriters shall object.  The Company will furnish to the Underwriters such number of copies of such amendment or supplement as the Underwriters may reasonably request.

 

(c)           Delivery of Registration Statements .  The Company has furnished or will deliver to the Representatives and counsel for the Underwriters, without charge, signed copies of the Registration Statement as originally filed and each amendment thereto (including exhibits filed therewith) and signed copies of all consents and certificates of experts, and will also deliver to the Representatives, without charge, a conformed copy of the Registration Statement as originally filed and each amendment thereto (without exhibits) for each of the Underwriters.  The copies of the Registration Statement and each amendment thereto furnished to the Underwriters will be identical to the electronically transmitted copies thereof filed with the Commission pursuant to EDGAR, except to the extent permitted by Regulation S-T.

 

(d)           Delivery of Prospectuses .  The Company has delivered to each Underwriter, without charge, as many copies of each preliminary prospectus as such Underwriter reasonably requested, and the Company hereby consents to the use of such copies for purposes permitted by the 1933 Act.  The Company will furnish to each Underwriter, without charge, during the period when a prospectus relating to the Securities is (or, but for the exception afforded by Rule 172, would be) required to be delivered under the 1933 Act, such number of copies of the Prospectus (as amended or supplemented) as such Underwriter may reasonably request.  The Prospectus and any amendments or supplements thereto furnished to the Underwriters will be identical to the electronically transmitted copies thereof filed with the Commission pursuant to EDGAR, except to the extent permitted by Regulation S-T.

 

(e)           Blue Sky Qualifications .  The Company will use its reasonable best efforts, in cooperation with the Underwriters, to qualify the Securities for offering and sale under the applicable securities laws of such states and other jurisdictions (domestic or foreign) as the Representatives may designate and to maintain such qualifications in effect so long as required to complete the distribution of the Securities; provided, however, that the Company shall not be obligated to file any general consent to service of process or to qualify as a foreign corporation or as a dealer in securities in any jurisdiction in which it is not so qualified or to subject itself to taxation in respect of doing business in any jurisdiction in which it is not otherwise so subject.

 

(f)            Rule 158 .  The Company will timely file such reports pursuant to the 1934 Act as are necessary in order to make generally available to its securityholders as soon as practicable an earnings statement for the purposes of, and to provide to the Underwriters the benefits contemplated by, the last paragraph of Section 11(a) of the 1933 Act.

 

(g)           Use of Proceeds .  The Company will use the net proceeds received by it from the sale of the Securities in the manner specified in the Registration Statement, the General Disclosure Package and the Prospectus under “Use of Proceeds.”

 

(h)           Listing .  The Company will use its reasonable best efforts to effect and maintain the listing of the Common Stock (including the Securities) on the Nasdaq Global Market.

 

(i)            Restriction on Sale of Securities .  During a period of 180 days from the date of the Prospectus, the Company will not, without the prior written consent of Merrill Lynch and Raymond James, (i) directly or indirectly, offer, pledge, sell, contract to sell, sell any option or contract to purchase, purchase any option or contract to sell, grant any option, right or warrant to purchase or otherwise transfer or dispose of any shares of Common Stock or any securities convertible into or exercisable or exchangeable for Common Stock or file any registration statement under the 1933 Act with respect to any of the foregoing or (ii) enter into any swap or any other agreement or any transaction that transfers, in

 

14



 

whole or in part, directly or indirectly, the economic consequence of ownership of the Common Stock, whether any such swap or transaction described in clause (i) or (ii) above is to be settled by delivery of Common Stock or such other securities, in cash or otherwise.  The foregoing sentence shall not apply to (A) the Securities to be sold hereunder, (B) any shares of Common Stock issued by the Company upon the exercise of an option or warrant or the conversion of a security outstanding on the date hereof and referred to in the Registration Statement, the General Disclosure Package and the Prospectus, (C) any shares of Common Stock issued or options to purchase Common Stock granted pursuant to existing employee benefit plans of the Company referred to in the Registration Statement, the General Disclosure Package and the Prospectus, (D) any shares of Common Stock issued pursuant to any non-employee director stock plan or dividend reinvestment plan referred to in the Registration Statement, the General Disclosure Package and the Prospectus, (E) securities issued by the Company in connection with the acquisition by the Company or any of its subsidiaries of the securities, business, property or other assets of another person or entity or pursuant to any plan assumed by the Company in connection with such acquisition, (F) securities issued by the Company in connection with joint ventures, commercial relationships or other strategic transactions, or (G) the filing of a registration statement on Form S-8; provided however, that securities issued by the Company pursuant to clauses (E) and (F) shall be subject to the restrictions set forth in this Section 3(i); provided, further, that that securities issued by the Company pursuant to clauses (E) and (F) may not exceed, in the aggregate, 10% of the Company’s shares of capital stock outstanding immediately following the completion of the transactions contemplated by this Agreement.

 

(j)            If Merrill Lynch and Raymond James, in their sole discretion, agree to release or waive the restrictions set forth in a lock-up agreement described in Section 5(i) hereof for an officer or director of the Company and provides the Company with notice of the impending release or waiver at least three business days before the effective date of the release or waiver, the Company agrees to announce the impending release or waiver by a press release substantially in the form of Exhibit C hereto through a major news service at least two business days before the effective date of the release or waiver.

 

(k)           Reporting Requirements .  The Company, during the period when a Prospectus relating to the Securities is (or, but for the exception afforded by Rule 172, would be) required to be delivered under the 1933 Act, will file all documents required to be filed with the Commission pursuant to the 1934 Act within the time periods required by the 1934 Act and 1934 Act Regulations.  Additionally, the Company shall report the use of proceeds from the issuance of the Shares as may be required under Rule 463 under the 1933 Act.

 

(l)            Issuer Free Writing Prospectuses .  The Company agrees that, unless it obtains the prior written consent of the Representatives, it will not make any offer relating to the Securities that would constitute an Issuer Free Writing Prospectus or that would otherwise constitute a “free writing prospectus,” or a portion thereof, required to be filed by the Company with the Commission or retained by the Company under Rule 433; provided that the Representatives will be deemed to have consented to the Issuer Free Writing Prospectuses listed on Schedule B-2 hereto and any “road show that is a written communication” within the meaning of Rule 433(d)(8)(i) that has been reviewed by the Representatives.  The Company represents that it has treated or agrees that it will treat each such free writing prospectus consented to, or deemed consented to, by the Representatives as an “issuer free writing prospectus,” as defined in Rule 433, and that it has complied and will comply with the applicable requirements of Rule 433 with respect thereto, including timely filing with the Commission where required, legending and record keeping.  If at any time following issuance of an Issuer Free Writing Prospectus there occurred or occurs an event or development as a result of which such Issuer Free Writing Prospectus conflicted or would conflict with the information contained in the Registration Statement, any preliminary prospectus or the Prospectus or included or would include an untrue statement of a material fact or omitted or would omit to state a material fact necessary in order to make the statements therein, in the light of the

 

15



 

circumstances existing at that subsequent time, not misleading, the Company will promptly notify the Representatives and will promptly amend or supplement, at its own expense, such Issuer Free Writing Prospectus to eliminate or correct such conflict, untrue statement or omission.

 

(m)          Testing-the-Waters Materials .  If at any time following the distribution of any Written Testing-the-Waters Communication there occurred or occurs an event or development as a result of which such Written Testing-the-Waters Communication included or would include an untrue statement of a material fact or omitted or would omit to state a material fact necessary in order to make the statements therein, in the light of the circumstances existing at that subsequent time, not misleading, the Company will promptly notify the Representatives and will promptly amend or supplement, at its own expense, such Written Testing-the-Waters Communication to eliminate or correct such untrue statement or omission.

 

(n)           Emerging Growth Company Status . The Company will promptly notify the Representatives if the Company ceases to be an Emerging Growth Company at any time prior to the later of (i) completion of the distribution of the Securities within the meaning of the 1933 Act and (ii) completion of the 180-day restricted period referred to in Section 3(i) hereof.

 

SECTION 4.         Payment of Expenses .

 

(a)           Expenses .  The Company will pay or cause to be paid all expenses incident to the performance of its obligations under this Agreement, including (i) the preparation, printing and filing of the Registration Statement (including financial statements and exhibits) as originally filed and each amendment thereto, (ii) the preparation, printing and delivery to the Underwriters of copies of each preliminary prospectus, each Issuer Free Writing Prospectus and the Prospectus and any amendments or supplements thereto and any costs associated with electronic delivery of any of the foregoing by the Underwriters to investors, (iii) the preparation, issuance and delivery of the certificates for the Securities to the Underwriters, including any stock or other transfer taxes and any stamp or other duties payable upon the sale, issuance or delivery of the Securities to the Underwriters, (iv) the fees and disbursements of the Company’s counsel, accountants and other advisors, (v) the qualification of the Securities under securities laws in accordance with the provisions of Section 3(e) hereof, including filing fees and the reasonable fees and disbursements of counsel for the Underwriters in connection therewith and in connection with the preparation of the Blue Sky Survey and any supplement thereto if such fees and expenses are required to be incurred, provided that the amount payable by the Company pursuant to this clause (v) shall not exceed $10,000, (vi) the fees and expenses of any transfer agent or registrar for the Securities, (vii) the costs and expenses of the Company relating to investor presentations on any “road show” undertaken in connection with the marketing of the Securities, including without limitation, expenses associated with the production of road show slides and graphics, fees and expenses of any consultants engaged in connection with the road show presentations, travel and lodging expenses of the representatives and officers of the Company and any such consultants (provided that the travel, lodging and any car travel expenses of representatives of the Underwriters shall be paid for by the Underwriters), and the cost of aircraft and other transportation chartered in connection with the road show (provided that 50% of the cost of any aircraft chartered in connection with the road show shall be paid by the Underwriters and the 50% of the cost of any aircraft chartered in connection with the road show shall be paid by the Company), (viii) the filing fees incident to, and the reasonable fees and disbursements of counsel to the Underwriters in connection with, the review by FINRA of the terms of the sale of the Securities, provided that the amount payable by the Company pursuant to this clause (viii) shall not exceed $25,000, (ix) the fees and expenses incurred in connection with the listing of the Securities on the Nasdaq Global Market and (x) the costs and expenses (including, without limitation, any damages or

 

16



 

other amounts payable in connection with legal or contractual liability) associated with the reforming of any contracts for sale of the Securities made by the Underwriters caused by a breach of the representation contained in the third sentence of Section 1(a)(ii).  If this Agreement is terminated by the Representatives in accordance with the provisions of Section 10 hereof, the Company shall reimburse the non-defaulting Underwriters for all of their reasonable documented out-of-pocket expenses, including the reasonable fees and disbursements of counsel for the Underwriters.

 

(b)           Termination of Agreement .  If this Agreement is terminated by the Representatives in accordance with the provisions of Section 5, Section 9(a)(i) or (iii) or Section 11 hereof, the Company shall reimburse the Underwriters for all of their reasonable documented out-of-pocket expenses, including the reasonable fees and disbursements of counsel for the Underwriters.

 

SECTION 5.         Conditions of Underwriters’ Obligations .  The obligations of the several Underwriters hereunder are subject to the accuracy of the representations and warranties of the Company contained herein or in certificates of any officer of the Company or any of its subsidiaries delivered pursuant to the provisions hereof, to the performance by the Company of its covenants and other obligations hereunder, and to the following further conditions:

 

(a)           Effectiveness of Registration Statement; Rule 430A Information .  The Registration Statement, including any Rule 462(b) Registration Statement, has become effective and, at the Closing Time, no stop order suspending the effectiveness of the Registration Statement or any post-effective amendment thereto has been issued under the 1933 Act, no order preventing or suspending the use of any preliminary prospectus or the Prospectus has been issued and no proceedings for any of those purposes have been instituted or are pending or, to the Company’s knowledge, contemplated by the Commission; and the Company has complied with each request (if any) from the Commission for additional information.  A prospectus containing the Rule 430A Information shall have been filed with the Commission in the manner and within the time frame required by Rule 424(b) without reliance on Rule 424(b)(8) or a post-effective amendment providing such information shall have been filed with, and declared effective by, the Commission in accordance with the requirements of Rule 430A.

 

(b)           Opinion of Counsel for Company .  At the Closing Time, the Representatives shall have received an opinion, dated the Closing Time, of Goodwin Procter LLP, counsel for the Company, in form and substance satisfactory to counsel for the Underwriters, together with signed or reproduced copies of such letter for each of the other Underwriters to the effect set forth in Exhibit A hereto and to such further effect as counsel to the Underwriters may reasonably request.

 

(c)           Opinion of Counsel for Underwriters .  At the Closing Time, the Representatives shall have received the favorable opinion, dated the Closing Time, of Cooley LLP, counsel for the Underwriters, together with signed or reproduced copies of such letter for each of the other Underwriters with respect to such matters as the Representatives may require.  In giving such opinion such counsel may rely, as to all matters governed by the laws of jurisdictions other than the law of the State of New York, the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware and the federal securities laws of the United States, upon the opinions of counsel satisfactory to the Representatives.  Such counsel may also state that, insofar as such opinion involves factual matters, they have relied, to the extent they deem proper, upon certificates of officers and other representatives of the Company and its subsidiaries and certificates of public officials.

 

(d)           Officers’ Certificate .  At the Closing Time, there shall not have been, since the date hereof or since the respective dates as of which information is given in the Registration Statement, the General Disclosure Package or the Prospectus, any material adverse change in the condition, financial or otherwise, or in the earnings, business affairs or business prospects of the Company and its subsidiaries

 

17



 

considered as one enterprise, whether or not arising in the ordinary course of business, and the Representatives shall have received a certificate of the Chief Executive Officer or the President of the Company and of the chief financial or chief accounting officer of the Company, dated the Closing Time, to the effect that (i) there has been no such material adverse change, (ii) the representations and warranties of the Company in this Agreement are true and correct with the same force and effect as though expressly made at and as of the Closing Time, (iii) the Company has complied with all agreements and satisfied all conditions on its part to be performed or satisfied as set forth herein at or prior to the Closing Time, and (iv) no stop order suspending the effectiveness of the Registration Statement under the 1933 Act has been issued, no order preventing or suspending the use of any preliminary prospectus or the Prospectus has been issued and no proceedings for any of those purposes have been instituted or are pending or, to their knowledge, contemplated.

 

(e)           Accountant’s Comfort Letter .  At the time of the execution of this Agreement, the Representatives shall have received from Ernst & Young LLP a letter, dated such date, in form and substance satisfactory to the Representatives, together with signed or reproduced copies of such letter for each of the other Underwriters containing statements and information of the type ordinarily included in accountants’ “comfort letters” to underwriters with respect to the financial statements and certain financial information contained in the Registration Statement, the General Disclosure Package and the Prospectus.

 

(f)            Bring-down Comfort Letter .  At the Closing Time, the Representatives shall have received from Ernst & Young LLP a letter, dated as of the Closing Time, to the effect that they reaffirm the statements made in the letter furnished pursuant to subsection (e) of this Section, except that the specified date referred to shall be a date not more than three business days prior to the Closing Time.

 

(g)         Approval of Listing .  At the Closing Time, the Securities shall have been approved for listing on the Nasdaq Global Market, subject only to official notice of issuance.

 

(h)         No Objection .  FINRA has confirmed that it has not raised any objection with respect to the fairness and reasonableness of the underwriting terms and arrangements relating to the offering of the Securities.

 

(i)          Lock-up Agreements .  At the date of this Agreement, the Representatives shall have received an agreement substantially in the form of Exhibit B hereto signed by the persons listed on Schedule C hereto.

 

(j)            Conditions to Purchase of Option Securities .  In the event that the Underwriters exercise their option provided in Section 2(b) hereof to purchase all or any portion of the Option Securities, the representations and warranties of the Company contained herein and the statements in any certificates furnished by the Company and any of its subsidiaries hereunder shall be true and correct as of each Date of Delivery and, at the relevant Date of Delivery, the Representatives shall have received:

 

(i)            Officers’ Certificate .  A certificate, dated such Date of Delivery, of the President or a Vice President of the Company and of the chief financial or chief accounting officer of the Company confirming that the certificate delivered at the Closing Time pursuant to Section 5(d) hereof remains true and correct as of such Date of Delivery.

 

(ii)           Opinion of Counsel for Company .  If requested by the Representatives, an opinion of Goodwin Procter LLP, counsel for the Company, in form and substance satisfactory to counsel for the Underwriters, dated such Date of Delivery, relating to the Option Securities to be

 

18



 

purchased on such Date of Delivery and otherwise to the same effect as the opinion required by Section 5(b) hereof.

 

(iii)          Opinion of Counsel for Underwriters .  If requested by the Representatives, the favorable opinion of Cooley LLP, counsel for the Underwriters, dated such Date of Delivery, relating to the Option Securities to be purchased on such Date of Delivery and otherwise to the same effect as the opinion required by Section 5(c) hereof.

 

(iv)          Bring-down Comfort Letter If requested by the Representatives, a letter from Ernst & Young LLP, in form and substance satisfactory to the Representatives and dated such Date of Delivery, substantially in the same form and substance as the letter furnished to the Representatives pursuant to Section 5(e) hereof, except that the “specified date” in the letter furnished pursuant to this paragraph shall be a date not more than three business days prior to such Date of Delivery

 

(v)           Additional Documents .  At the Closing Time and at each Date of Delivery (if any) counsel for the Underwriters shall have been furnished with such documents and opinions as they may reasonably require for the purpose of enabling them to pass upon the issuance and sale of the Securities as herein contemplated, or in order to evidence the accuracy of any of the representations or warranties, or the fulfillment of any of the conditions, herein contained; and all proceedings taken by the Company in connection with the issuance and sale of the Securities as herein contemplated shall be satisfactory in form and substance to the Representatives and counsel for the Underwriters.

 

(k)           Termination of Agreement .  If any condition specified in this Section shall not have been fulfilled when and as required to be fulfilled, this Agreement, or, in the case of any condition to the purchase of Option Securities on a Date of Delivery which is after the Closing Time, the obligations of the several Underwriters to purchase the relevant Option Securities, may be terminated by the Representatives by notice to the Company at any time at or prior to Closing Time or such Date of Delivery, as the case may be, and such termination shall be without liability of any party to any other party except as provided in Section 4 and except that Sections 1, 6, 7, 8, 15, 16 and 17 shall survive any such termination and remain in full force and effect.

 

SECTION 6.         Indemnification .

 

(a)           Indemnification of Underwriters .  The Company agrees to indemnify and hold harmless each Underwriter, its affiliates (as such term is defined in Rule 501(b) under the 1933 Act (each, an “Affiliate”)), its selling agents and each person, if any, who controls any Underwriter within the meaning of Section 15 of the 1933 Act or Section 20 of the 1934 Act as follows:

 

(i)            against any and all loss, liability, claim, damage and expense whatsoever, as incurred, arising out of any untrue statement or alleged untrue statement of a material fact contained in the Registration Statement (or any amendment thereto), including the Rule 430A Information, or the omission or alleged omission therefrom of a material fact required to be stated therein or necessary to make the statements therein not misleading or arising out of any untrue statement or alleged untrue statement of a material fact included (A) in any preliminary prospectus, any Issuer Free Writing Prospectus, any Written Testing-the-Waters Communication,  the General Disclosure Package or the Prospectus (or any amendment or supplement thereto), or (B) in any materials or information provided to investors by, or with the prior written approval of, the Company in connection with the marketing of the offering of the Stock (“Marketing Materials”), including any roadshow or investor presentations made to investors by the Company

 

19


 

(whether in person or electronically), or the omission or alleged omission in any preliminary prospectus, Issuer Free Writing Prospectus, any Written Testing-the-Waters Communication, Prospectus or in any Marketing Materials of a material fact necessary in order to make the statements therein, in the light of the circumstances under which they were made, not misleading;

 

(ii)           against any and all loss, liability, claim, damage and expense whatsoever, as incurred, to the extent of the aggregate amount paid in settlement of any litigation, or any investigation or proceeding by any governmental agency or body, commenced or threatened, or of any claim whatsoever based upon any such untrue statement or omission, or any such alleged untrue statement or omission; provided that (subject to Section 6(d) below) any such settlement is effected with the written consent of the Company;

 

(iii)          against any and all expense whatsoever, as incurred (including the fees and disbursements of counsel chosen by Merrill Lynch and Raymond James), reasonably incurred in investigating, preparing or defending against any litigation, or any investigation or proceeding by any governmental agency or body, commenced or threatened, or any claim whatsoever based upon any such untrue statement or omission, or any such alleged untrue statement or omission, to the extent that any such expense is not paid under (i) or (ii) above;

 

provided, however, that this indemnity agreement shall not apply to any loss, liability, claim, damage or expense to the extent arising out of any untrue statement or omission or alleged untrue statement or omission made in the Registration Statement (or any amendment thereto), including the Rule 430A Information, the General Disclosure Package or the Prospectus (or any amendment or supplement thereto) in reliance upon and in conformity with the Underwriter Information.

 

(b)           Indemnification of Company, Directors and Officers.   Each Underwriter severally agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Company, its directors, each of its officers who signed the Registration Statement, and each person, if any, who controls the Company within the meaning of Section 15 of the 1933 Act or Section 20 of the 1934 Act, against any and all loss, liability, claim, damage and expense described in the indemnity contained in subsection (a) of this Section, as incurred, but only with respect to untrue statements or omissions, or alleged untrue statements or omissions, made in the Registration Statement (or any amendment thereto), including the Rule 430A Information, the General Disclosure Package or the Prospectus (or any amendment or supplement thereto) in reliance upon and in conformity with the Underwriter Information.

 

(c)           Actions against Parties; Notification .  Each indemnified party shall give notice as promptly as reasonably practicable to each indemnifying party of any action commenced against it in respect of which indemnity may be sought hereunder, but failure to so notify an indemnifying party shall not relieve such indemnifying party from any liability hereunder to the extent it is not materially prejudiced as a result thereof and in any event shall not relieve it from any liability which it may have otherwise than on account of this indemnity agreement.  In the case of parties indemnified pursuant to Section 6(a) above, counsel to the indemnified parties shall be selected by Merrill Lynch and Raymond James, subject to the Company’s approval, which shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed, and, in the case of parties indemnified pursuant to Section 6(b) above, counsel to the indemnified parties shall be selected by the Company, subject to the Representatives’ approval, which shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed.  An indemnifying party may participate at its own expense in the defense of any such action; provided, however, that counsel to the indemnifying party shall not (except with the consent of the indemnified party) also be counsel to the indemnified party.  In no event shall the indemnifying parties be liable for the reasonable fees and expenses of more than one counsel (in addition to any local counsel) separate from their own counsel for all indemnified parties in connection with any one action or separate but similar or related actions in the same jurisdiction arising out of the same general allegations

 

20



 

or circumstances.  No indemnifying party shall, without the prior written consent of the indemnified parties, settle or compromise or consent to the entry of any judgment with respect to any litigation, or any investigation or proceeding by any governmental agency or body, commenced or threatened, or any claim whatsoever in respect of which indemnification or contribution could be sought under this Section 6 or Section 7 hereof (whether or not the indemnified parties are actual or potential parties thereto), unless such settlement, compromise or consent (i) includes an unconditional release of each indemnified party from all liability arising out of such litigation, investigation, proceeding or claim and (ii) does not include a statement as to or an admission of fault, culpability or a failure to act by or on behalf of any indemnified party.

 

(d)           Settlement without Consent if Failure to Reimburse .  If at any time an indemnified party shall have requested an indemnifying party to reimburse the indemnified party for fees and expenses of counsel, such indemnifying party agrees that it shall be liable for any settlement of the nature contemplated by Section 6(a)(ii) effected without its written consent if (i) such settlement is entered into more than 45 days after receipt by such indemnifying party of the aforesaid request, (ii) such indemnifying party shall have received notice of the terms of such settlement at least 30 days prior to such settlement being entered into and (iii) such indemnifying party shall not have reimbursed such indemnified party in accordance with such request prior to the date of such settlement.

 

SECTION 7.         Contribution .  If the indemnification provided for in Section 6 hereof is for any reason unavailable to or insufficient to hold harmless an indemnified party in respect of any losses, liabilities, claims, damages or expenses referred to therein, then each indemnifying party shall contribute to the aggregate amount of such losses, liabilities, claims, damages and expenses incurred by such indemnified party, as incurred, (i) in such proportion as is appropriate to reflect the relative benefits received by the Company, on the one hand, and the Underwriters, on the other hand, from the offering of the Securities pursuant to this Agreement or (ii) if the allocation provided by clause (i) is not permitted by applicable law, in such proportion as is appropriate to reflect not only the relative benefits referred to in clause (i) above but also the relative fault of the Company, on the one hand, and of the Underwriters, on the other hand, in connection with the statements or omissions which resulted in such losses, liabilities, claims, damages or expenses, as well as any other relevant equitable considerations.

 

The relative benefits received by the Company, on the one hand, and the Underwriters, on the other hand, in connection with the offering of the Securities pursuant to this Agreement shall be deemed to be in the same respective proportions as the total net proceeds from the offering of the Securities pursuant to this Agreement (before deducting expenses) received by the Company, on the one hand, and the total underwriting discount received by the Underwriters, on the other hand, in each case as set forth on the cover of the Prospectus, bear to the aggregate initial public offering price of the Securities as set forth on the cover of the Prospectus.

 

The relative fault of the Company, on the one hand, and the Underwriters, on the other hand, shall be determined by reference to, among other things, whether any such untrue or alleged untrue statement of a material fact or omission or alleged omission to state a material fact relates to information supplied by the Company or by the Underwriters and the parties’ relative intent, knowledge, access to information and opportunity to correct or prevent such statement or omission.

 

The Company and the Underwriters agree that it would not be just and equitable if contribution pursuant to this Section 7 were determined by pro rata allocation (even if the Underwriters were treated as one entity for such purpose) or by any other method of allocation which does not take account of the equitable considerations referred to above in this Section 7.  The aggregate amount of losses, liabilities, claims, damages and expenses incurred by an indemnified party and referred to above in this Section 7 shall be deemed to include any legal or other expenses reasonably incurred by such indemnified party in

 

21



 

investigating, preparing or defending against any litigation, or any investigation or proceeding by any governmental agency or body, commenced or threatened, or any claim whatsoever based upon any such untrue or alleged untrue statement or omission or alleged omission.

 

Notwithstanding the provisions of this Section 7, no Underwriter shall be required to contribute any amount in excess of the underwriting commissions received by such Underwriter in connection with the Shares underwritten by it and distributed to the public.

 

No person guilty of fraudulent misrepresentation (within the meaning of Section 11(f) of the 1933 Act) shall be entitled to contribution from any person who was not guilty of such fraudulent misrepresentation.

 

For purposes of this Section 7, each person, if any, who controls an Underwriter within the meaning of Section 15 of the 1933 Act or Section 20 of the 1934 Act and each Underwriter’s Affiliates and selling agents shall have the same rights to contribution as such Underwriter, and each director of the Company, each officer of the Company who signed the Registration Statement, and each person, if any, who controls the Company within the meaning of Section 15 of the 1933 Act or Section 20 of the 1934 Act shall have the same rights to contribution as the Company.  The Underwriters’ respective obligations to contribute pursuant to this Section 7 are several in proportion to the number of Initial Securities set forth opposite their respective names in Schedule A hereto and not joint.

 

SECTION 8.         Representations, Warranties and Agreements to Survive .  All representations, warranties and agreements contained in this Agreement or in certificates of officers of the Company or any of its subsidiaries submitted pursuant hereto, shall remain operative and in full force and effect regardless of (i) any investigation made by or on behalf of any Underwriter or its Affiliates or selling agents, any person controlling any Underwriter, its officers or directors or any person controlling the Company and (ii) delivery of and payment for the Securities.

 

SECTION 9.         Termination of Agreement .

 

(a)           Termination .  The Representatives may terminate this Agreement, by notice to the Company, at any time at or prior to the Closing Time (i) if there has been, in the judgment of the Representatives, since the time of execution of this Agreement or since the respective dates as of which information is given in the Registration Statement, the General Disclosure Package or the Prospectus, any material adverse change in the condition, financial or otherwise, or in the earnings, business affairs or business prospects of the Company and its subsidiaries considered as one enterprise, whether or not arising in the ordinary course of business, or (ii) if there has occurred any material adverse change in the financial markets in the United States or the international financial markets, any outbreak of hostilities or escalation thereof or other calamity or crisis or any change or development involving a prospective change in national or international political, financial or economic conditions, in each case the effect of which is such as to make it, in the judgment of the Representatives, impracticable or inadvisable to proceed with the completion of the offering or to enforce contracts for the sale of the Securities, or (iii) if trading in any securities of the Company has been suspended or materially limited by the Commission or the Nasdaq Global Market, or (iv) if trading generally on the New York Stock Exchange or in the Nasdaq Global Market has been suspended or materially limited, or minimum or maximum prices for trading have been fixed, or maximum ranges for prices have been required, by any of said exchanges or by order of the Commission, FINRA or any other governmental authority, or (v) a material disruption has occurred in commercial banking or securities settlement or clearance services in the United States, or (vi) if a banking moratorium has been declared by either Federal or New York authorities.

 

22



 

(b)           Liabilities .  If this Agreement is terminated pursuant to this Section, such termination shall be without liability of any party to any other party except as provided in Section 4 hereof, and provided further that Sections 1, 6, 7, 8, 15, 16 and 17 shall survive such termination and remain in full force and effect.

 

SECTION 10.       Default by One or More of the Underwriters .  If one or more of the Underwriters shall fail at the Closing Time or a Date of Delivery to purchase the Securities which it or they are obligated to purchase under this Agreement (the “Defaulted Securities”), the Representatives shall have the right, within 24 hours thereafter, to make arrangements for one or more of the non-defaulting Underwriters, or any other underwriters, to purchase all, but not less than all, of the Defaulted Securities in such amounts as may be agreed upon and upon the terms herein set forth; if, however, the Representatives shall not have completed such arrangements within such 24-hour period, then the Company shall be entitled to a further period of 24-hours within which to procure other persons satisfactory to the Representative to purchase Defaulted Securities upon such terms.  After giving effect to any arrangement for the purchase of the Defaulted Securities by the Representative and the Company as provided in the preceding sentence:

 

(i)            if the number of Defaulted Securities does not exceed 10% of the number of Securities to be purchased on such date, each of the non-defaulting Underwriters shall be obligated, severally and not jointly, to purchase the full amount thereof in the proportions that their respective underwriting obligations hereunder bear to the underwriting obligations of all non-defaulting Underwriters, or

 

(ii)           if the number of Defaulted Securities exceeds 10% of the number of Securities to be purchased on such date, this Agreement or, with respect to any Date of Delivery which occurs after the Closing Time, the obligation of the Underwriters to purchase, and the Company to sell, the Option Securities to be purchased and sold on such Date of Delivery shall terminate without liability on the part of any non-defaulting Underwriter.

 

No action taken pursuant to this Section shall relieve any defaulting Underwriter from liability in respect of its default.

 

In the event of any such default which does not result in a termination of this Agreement or, in the case of a Date of Delivery which is after the Closing Time, which does not result in a termination of the obligation of the Underwriters to purchase and the Company to sell the relevant Option Securities, as the case may be, either (i) the Representatives or (ii) the Company shall have the right to postpone Closing Time or the relevant Date of Delivery, as the case may be, for a period not exceeding seven days in order to effect any required changes in the Registration Statement, the General Disclosure Package or the Prospectus or in any other documents or arrangements.  As used herein, the term “Underwriter” includes any person substituted for an Underwriter under this Section 10.

 

SECTION 11.       Default by the Company . If the Company shall fail at the Closing Time or a Date of Delivery, as the case may be, to sell the number of Securities that it is obligated to sell hereunder, then this Agreement shall terminate without any liability on the part of any nondefaulting party; provided, however, that the provisions of Sections 1, 4, 6, 7, 8, 15, 16 and 17 shall remain in full force and effect.  No action taken pursuant to this Section shall relieve the Company from liability, if any, in respect of such default.

 

SECTION 12.       Notices .  All notices and other communications hereunder shall be in writing and shall be deemed to have been duly given if mailed or transmitted by any standard form of telecommunication.  Notices to the Underwriters shall be directed to Merrill Lynch at One Bryant Park,

 

23



 

New York, New York 10036, attention of Syndicate Department (facsimile: (646) 855-3073), with a copy to ECM Legal (facsimile: (212) 230-8730); notices to the Company shall be directed to it at 11734 S. Election Road, Salt Lake City, Utah 84020, attention of General Counsel.

 

SECTION 13.       No Advisory or Fiduciary Relationship .  The Company acknowledges and agrees that (a) the purchase and sale of the Securities pursuant to this Agreement, including the determination of the initial public offering price of the Securities and any related discounts and commissions, is an arm’s-length commercial transaction between the Company, on the one hand, and the several Underwriters, on the other hand, (b) in connection with the offering of the Securities and the process leading thereto, each Underwriter is and has been acting solely as a principal and is not the agent or fiduciary of the Company, any of its subsidiaries, or their respective stockholders, creditors, employees or any other party, (c) no Underwriter has assumed or will assume an advisory or fiduciary responsibility in favor of the Company with respect to the offering of the Securities or the process leading thereto (irrespective of whether such Underwriter has advised or is currently advising the Company or any of its subsidiaries on other matters) and no Underwriter has any obligation to the Company with respect to the offering of the Securities except the obligations expressly set forth in this Agreement, (d) the Underwriters and their respective affiliates may be engaged in a broad range of transactions that involve interests that differ from those of the Company, and (e) the Underwriters have not provided any legal, accounting, regulatory or tax advice with respect to the offering of the Securities and the Company has consulted its own respective legal, accounting, regulatory and tax advisors to the extent it deemed appropriate.

 

SECTION 14.       Parties .  This Agreement shall each inure to the benefit of and be binding upon the Underwriters and the Company and their controlling persons, officer and directors and their respective successors, heirs and legal representatives, as applicable.  Nothing expressed or mentioned in this Agreement is intended or shall be construed to give any person, firm or corporation, other than the Underwriters and the Company and their respective successors and the controlling persons and officers and directors referred to in Sections 6 and 7 and their heirs and legal representatives, any legal or equitable right, remedy or claim under or in respect of this Agreement or any provision herein contained.  This Agreement and all conditions and provisions hereof are intended to be for the sole and exclusive benefit of the Underwriters and the Company and their respective successors, and said controlling persons and officers and directors and their heirs and legal representatives, and for the benefit of no other person, firm or corporation.  No purchaser of Securities from any Underwriter shall be deemed to be a successor by reason merely of such purchase.

 

SECTION 15.       Trial by Jury .  The Company (on its behalf and, to the extent permitted by applicable law, on behalf of its stockholders and affiliates) and each of the Underwriters hereby irrevocably waives, to the fullest extent permitted by applicable law, any and all right to trial by jury in any legal proceeding arising out of or relating to this Agreement or the transactions contemplated hereby.

 

SECTION 16.       GOVERNING LAW .  THIS AGREEMENT AND ANY CLAIM, CONTROVERSY OR DISPUTE ARISING UNDER OR RELATED TO THIS AGREEMENT SHALL BE GOVERNED BY, AND CONSTRUED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LAWS OF, THE STATE OF NEW YORK WITHOUT REGARD TO ITS CHOICE OF LAW PROVISIONS.

 

SECTION 17.       Consent to Jurisdiction; Waiver of Immunity . Any legal suit, action or proceeding arising out of or based upon this Agreement or the transactions contemplated hereby (“Related Proceedings”) shall be instituted in (i) the federal courts of the United States of America located in the City and County of New York, Borough of Manhattan or (ii) the courts of the State of New York located in the City and County of New York, Borough of Manhattan (collectively, the “Specified Courts”), and each party irrevocably submits to the exclusive jurisdiction (except for proceedings instituted in regard to the enforcement of a judgment of any such court (a “Related Judgment”), as to which such jurisdiction is

 

24



 

non-exclusive) of such courts in any such suit, action or proceeding.  Service of any process, summons, notice or document by mail to such party’s address set forth above shall be effective service of process for any suit, action or other proceeding brought in any such court.  The parties irrevocably and unconditionally waive any objection to the laying of venue of any suit, action or other proceeding in the Specified Courts and irrevocably and unconditionally waive and agree not to plead or claim in any such court that any such suit, action or other proceeding brought in any such court has been brought in an inconvenient forum.

 

SECTION 18.       TIME . TIME SHALL BE OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS AGREEMENT. EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE SET FORTH HEREIN, SPECIFIED TIMES OF DAY REFER TO NEW YORK CITY TIME.

 

SECTION 19.       Counterparts .  This Agreement may be executed in any number of counterparts, each of which shall be deemed to be an original, but all such counterparts shall together constitute one and the same Agreement.

 

SECTION 20.       Effect of Headings .  The Section headings herein are for convenience only and shall not affect the construction hereof.

 

25



 

If the foregoing is in accordance with your understanding of our agreement, please sign and return to the Company a counterpart hereof, whereupon this instrument, along with all counterparts, will become a binding agreement among the Underwriters, and the Company in accordance with its terms.

 

 

 

Very truly yours,

 

 

 

Control4 Corporation

 

 

 

 

 

By

 

 

 

Title:

 

CONFIRMED AND ACCEPTED,
                as of the date first above written:

 

MERRILL LYNCH, PIERCE, FENNER & SMITH
INCORPORATED

 

RAYMOND JAMES & ASSOCIATES, INC.

 

 

By: MERRILL LYNCH, PIERCE, FENNER & SMITH
INCORPORATED

 

 

By

 

 

 

Authorized Signatory

 

 

By: RAYMOND JAMES & ASSOCIATES, INC.

 

 

By

 

 

 

Authorized Signatory

 

 

For themselves and as Representatives of the other Underwriters named in Schedule A hereto.

 

26



 

SCHEDULE A

 

The initial public offering price per share for the Securities shall be $ · .

 

The purchase price per share for the Securities to be paid by the several Underwriters shall be $ · , being an amount equal to the initial public offering price set forth above less $ · per share, subject to adjustment in accordance with Section 2(b) for dividends or distributions declared by the Company and payable on the Initial Securities but not payable on the Option Securities.

 

 

 

Number of
Initial Securities

 

Name of Underwriter

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith
Incorporated

 

 

 

Raymond James & Associates, Inc.

 

 

 

Canaccord Genuity Inc. 

 

 

 

Cowen and Company, LLC.

 

 

 

Needham & Company, LLC.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total

 

 

 

 

Sch A-1


 

SCHEDULE B-1

 

Pricing Terms

 

1.              The Company is selling · shares of Common Stock.

 

2.              The Company has granted an option to the Underwriters, severally and not jointly, to purchase up to an additional · shares of Common Stock.

 

3.              The initial public offering price per share for the Securities shall be $ · .

 

Sch B-1 - 1



 

SCHEDULE B-2

 

Free Writing Prospectuses

 

[None.]

 

Sch B-2 - 1



 

SCHEDULE B-3

 

Written Testing-the-Waters Communication

 

PowerPoint slides presented in May 2013 at the Raymond James Capital Markets Conference.

 

Sch B-3 - 1



 

SCHEDULE C

 

List of Persons and Entities Subject to Lock-up

 

Name

Acomb, Stanford

Acton, David

Adams, Nathan

Aladjoff, Ivan

Allen, Ben

Allen, Jared

Alvord, Cortney

Anderson, Eric

Anderson, Nate

Andrews, Christopher

Armstrong, Scott

Arnold, Jim

Ashcroft, Alan

Avetta, James

Baker, David

Baker, Jeremy

Baker, Kevin

Baldwin, Brad

Banta, Alan

Barrus, David

Benack, Jaclyn

Bennett, Larry

Bernal, Balarama

Best Buy Co., Inc.

Bishop, Darren

Bishop, Greg

Bjelde, Donald

Bluemel, Thomas

Bolton, Matthew

Borrowman, Ryan

Bowman, Timothy

Bray, Robert

Brown, Jonathan

Bruhn, Robert

Bryan, David

Burgoyne, Nathan

Bytheway, David

Cabrera, Carlos

Cabriales, Carlos

Cannon, Richard

Capell, Raymond

 

Sch C - 1



 

Name

Cargile, JD

Cargile, Sara A.

Carnell, Christian

Carney, Shanan

Carpenter, Michael

Cashen, Susan

Chappidi, Lakshmi

Chase, Jodi

Chase, Jordan

Chaston, Tara

Chesley, Tyler

Christensen, Marc

Cisco Systems, Inc.

Clapp, Glenn

Clark, William

Clyde, Steven

Colburn, Kevin

Colburn, Michele

Collier, Michael P.

Conder, Craig

Conder, Darrell C.

Connett, Joel

Cosenza, Peter

Coulter, Ernie

Cox, Curtis

Dailey, Michael

Danoyan, Alexander

Delgado, Marie

Demke, Caleb

Denney, Michael

Derry, David

Deru, Kimberly

Doubek, Joe

Drew, Kelly

Dubek, Joe

Duff, Jennifer

Dungan, Jeff

Dutson, Ryan

Dykhuizen, Alison

Eagar, John

Ellis, Joshua

Epeneter, John

Erbe, Lowell

 

Sch C - 2



 

Name

Erickson, Jacob

Erickson, Loren

Erickson, Ryan

Fallows, Tim

Fay, David

FC IV Active Advisors Fund, LLC

Fisher, Christopher

Flick, Nitai S.

Flint, Kevin

Floresca, Frederick

Fogg, Brian

Foundation Capital IV Principals Fund, LLC

Foundation Capital IV, L.P.

Foundation Capital VI Principals Fund L.L.C.

Foundation Capital VI, L.P.

Fowler, John

Frazier Technology Ventures II, L.P.

Freston, David

Frost, Jeremy

Fuller, Carole

Fuller, Robert

Gallegos, Chad

Garretson, Kevin

Girardier, Jason

Gomez, Luis

Gomm, Tom

Goodman, Katherine

Goodwin, Nicole

Gouff, Noel

Greenwood, Eldon

Griffith, David

Grow, John

GSV Capital Corp.

Gull, Aaron

Habiger, David

Hale, Blake

Halloran, Michael

Haney, Keith

Hanks, Jesse

Hardcastle, Sara

Harmer, Lisa

Harmon, Joe

Harmon, Stephen

 

Sch C - 3



 

Name

Hart, Daniel

Hart, Paul

Hatch, Matthew

Hawkins, Jamie

Hellewell, Wendell

Hemingway, Lauren

Heninger, Thane

Heninger, Troy

Hess, Darin

Hesson, Kevin

Heugly, Eric

Higbee, Carrie

Hinrichsen, Heinee

Holt, Kelly

Holtby, Troy

Horsley, Rodney

Horton, Jeremy

Howell, Gregory

Hudson, Charles

Huebner, Troy

Hughes, Joseph

Hulick, Mark

Ingham, Mark

Jackson, Shaun

Jarvis, Charles

Jeffery, Scott

Jensen, Monty

Johnson, Brandon

Johnson, Kristin

Johnson, Zara

Jones, Kieran

Jones, Suzanne

Josephson, James

Kearns, Steven

Kim, Casey

King, Sidney

Kinkade, Kevin

Kirby, Pauline

Kirk, Tracy

Kirsten, Cindy

Klekas, Michael

Knavel, Ryan

Knolle, Randy

 

Sch C - 4


 

Name

Knorr, Cheree

Koutsky, Bryan

Kuhn (Term), Tom

Kuhn, Tom

Larsen, Audrey

Larsen, Marti

Larsen, Ty

Lawrence, Brian

Leung, Jordan

Lewis, Jason

Liganor, Paul

Lind, David

Lindenlaub, Quyen

Liu, Chingyao

Livingston, Ross

Longaker, Amy

Lutz, Willis

Mackay, Rachel

Madsen, Brent

Mahoney, Ben

Major, John

Makkena, Sujatha

Mar, John

Martin, James

Martin, Jason

Mathis, Terry

McAllister, Michael

McBride, Dustin

McGeever, Jim

McNamara, Michael

Mears, Spencer

Mecklenburg, Robert

Mella, Glen

Mella, Gordon

Mercato Partners Q.P., L.P.

Mercato Partners, L.P.

Midgley, Roger

Mierkey, Brian

Miller, Todd

Milligan, Thomas

Molen, Brett

Moore, Joseph

Muenzenberger, Daniel

 

Sch C - 5



 

Name

Munford, Karl

Murphy, Roy

Nagel, Paul

Neale, Hamish

Neilson, Natalee

Nelson, Christiana

Nelson, Jon

Nelson, Michael

Nettles, Jason

Nguyen, Richard

Nielson, Alison

Nielson, Cheri

Nitzen, Leana

Norman, Jim

Novakovich, Mark S.

Noyce, Beverly

Ohlwiler, Mark

Oleson, John

Osborn, Jaime

Oviatt, David

Owens, Fred

Painter, Jenni

Paisley, Chris

Pankratz, Bob

Parker, Andrew

Parker, Kim

Partridge, Ryan

Patten, James

Peasley, Sam

Peel, Nathan

Pendleton, David

Perez, Miguel

Perry, Clinton

Petty, Douglas

Pfeifer, Jeremy

Phelps, Parry

Pittard, Robert

Plaehn, Martin

Plaehn, Michael

Primavera, Matthew

Prue, Lonn

Quinney, Eric

Radford, Coleman

 

Sch C - 6



 

Name

Raghunathan, Archana

Raimer, Jason

Raymond, Jaclyn

Reams, Amy

Reay, Alan

Reed, Tyler

Renslow, Melvin

Renzema, David

Rice, Matthew

Riddle, Greg

Romney, Nathan

Rosado, Nicholas

Rose, Brian

Rowell, Russell

Rowland, Todd

Russell, James

Rutz, Paul

Salzman, Scott Don

Sanchez, Ricky

Sand, Matthew

Sandberg, Jeff

SAP Ventures Fund I, L.P.

Sawyer, Michael

Schneider, Andrew

Schonle, Bill

Schritter, Shannon

Schulz, Thomas

Severson, Monique

Seyler, Terry

Shake, Francis

Shaw, Christopher

Shetty, Roshan

Sivertsen, Norma

Skidmore, David

Slaughenhaupt, Dale

Smith, Allen

Smith, Allyson

Smith, Eric W.

Smith, Gregory H

Smith, Gregory S

Soto, Victor

Spens, Tim

Spoerri, Christie

 

Sch C - 7



 

Name

Stephenson, Michael

Stephenson, Scott

Strong, Dan

Tang, Cheng

Tarpenning, Daren

Taylor, Timothy

Thomas Weisel Venture Partners Employee Fund, L.P.

Thomas Weisel Venture Partners, L.P.

Thomas, Marion

Tiffany, John

Timm, Richard

Tuke, Cassidy

Tyson, Misti

Van Cleave, Blake

Van Uitert, Andrew

Van Uitert, Scot

Vaughn, Kordon

Vernon, Bruce

vSpring III D, L.P.

vSpring III, L.P.

vSpring Partners III, L.P.

vSpring SBIC, L.P.

Wade, Sandra

Walker, Benjamin

Walker, Richard

Wallengren, Eric

Watts, Crystal

Weight, Gordon

West, Jennifer

West, William B.

Wheeler, Thomas M.

Whipple, Jacob

Whipple, Randall

Whitman, Marc

Whitney, Colby

Williams, Eric

Williams, Paul

Winters, Nicole

Woebel, Eric

Woodall, Stephanie

Woods, Mike

Wright, Greg

Wright, Troy

 

Sch C - 8



 

Name

Yanagihara-Brooks, Mark

Yogya, Stephen

Yoon, John

Zekas, Dean

Zimmerman, Brent

Zollinger, Scott

Rob Born

Len Jordan

Scott Petty

Steven Vassallo

AJ Munford

 

Sch C - 9


 

Exhibit A

 

FORM OF OPINION OF COMPANY’S COUNSEL
TO BE DELIVERED PURSUANT TO SECTION 5(b)

 

[                          ], 2013

 

Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith

Incorporated

Raymond James & Associates, Inc.

As Representatives of the

Several Underwriters

 

c/o

Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith

Incorporated

One Bryant Park

New York, New York 10036

 

c/o

Raymond James & Associates, Inc.

One Embarcadero Center, Suite 650

San Francisco, California 94111

 

Re:  Control4 Corporation

 

Ladies and Gentlemen:

 

We have acted as counsel for Control4 Corporation, a Delaware corporation (the “Company”) in connection with the sale to the Underwriters (as defined below) by the Company of [                  ] shares (the “Primary Shares”) of common stock, $0.0001 par value per share (the “Common Stock”), of the Company.  We are furnishing this opinion letter to you pursuant to Section 5(b) of the Underwriting Agreement, dated as of [                    ], 2013 (the “Underwriting Agreement”), among the Company and the Underwriters listed on Schedule A to the Underwriting Agreement, for whom you are acting as Representatives (the “Underwriters”).

 

The Company’s Registration Statement on Form S-1 (File No. 333-[              ]) filed by the Company with the Securities and Exchange Commission (the “Commission”) on [                    ], 2013, as amended, in the form in which it became effective on [                          ], including the information deemed to be included in it at the time of effectiveness pursuant to Rule 430A under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the “Securities Act”), is referred to in this opinion letter as the “Registration Statement,” and the prospectus included in it, as filed pursuant to Rule 424(b) under the Securities Act on [                  ], 2013, is referred to in this opinion letter as the “Prospectus.”

 

We have reviewed the agreements filed as an exhibit to the Registration Statement (the “Listed Agreements”) and made such investigation of law as we have deemed appropriate to give the opinions set forth below.  We have relied, without independent verification, on certificates of public officials and, as to matters of fact material to the opinions set forth below, on representations made in the Underwriting Agreement, and certificates and other inquiries of officers of the Company.

 

A-1



 

Our opinion regarding valid existence and good standing in numbered paragraph 1 is based solely on a certificate of the Delaware Secretary of State and, in the case of valid existence, a review of the Company’s certificate of incorporation (the “Certificate of Incorporation”) and an officer’s certificate confirming that the Company has taken no action looking to its dissolution.  Our opinions in numbered paragraph 4 below regarding the due qualification and good standing of the Company as a foreign corporation are based solely on certificates of the Secretaries of State or other appropriate officials of the respective jurisdictions identified on Schedule A to this opinion letter in which the Company is qualified as a foreign corporation.  We express no opinion as to the tax good standing of the Company in any jurisdiction.

 

In connection with our opinion in numbered paragraph 9 below, we have relied exclusively on the letter, dated [                  ], 2013, from [                  , of The NASDAQ Stock Market, Inc. to [NAME], [TITLE] of the Company, a copy of which has been made available to your counsel.

 

For purposes of our opinion in numbered paragraph 8(c), we have interpreted the terms of the contracts addressed by that opinion as they would be understood in California.

 

The opinions set forth below are limited to California law, the Delaware General Corporation Law and the federal law of the United States.  Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, we express no opinion with respect to (i) state securities or “Blue Sky” laws, or (ii) state or federal antifraud laws.

 

Based upon the foregoing, and subject to the additional qualifications set forth below, we are of the opinion that:

 

1.                                       The Company is validly existing as a corporation and in good standing under Delaware law.

 

2.                                       The Company has the corporate power to own its properties and conduct its business as described in the Prospectus and to execute and deliver, and to perform its obligations under, the Underwriting Agreement.

 

3.                                       The Company is duly qualified to do business and is in good standing as a foreign corporation in the jurisdictions set forth opposite its name on Exhibit A hereto.

 

4.                                       The issued and outstanding shares of capital stock of the Company have been duly authorized and validly issued, and are fully paid and non-assessable.

 

5.                                       Any required filing of the Prospectus pursuant to Rule 424(b) under the Securities Act has been made in the manner and within the time period required by such Rule.

 

6.                                       The Underwriting Agreement has been duly authorized, executed and delivered by the Company.

 

7.                                       The Primary Shares have been duly authorized and, when issued delivered and paid for in accordance with the Underwriting Agreement, will be validly issued, fully paid and nonassessable.  The issuance and sale of the Primary Shares is not subject to any preemptive right under the Delaware General Corporation Law or the Company’s Certificate of Incorporation or the Bylaws of the Company (the “Bylaws”), or similar contractual rights under any of the Listed Agreements, except for any such preemptive or contractual rights that have been waived.

 

8.                                       The execution and delivery  by the Company of the Underwriting Agreement  and its issuance and sale of the Primary Shares do not: (a) require any consent, approval, license or exemption by, order or authorization of, or filing, recording or registration by the Company with any Delaware governmental authority pursuant to the Delaware General Corporation Law or any California or federal

 

A-2



 

governmental authority, except those that have been obtained or made under the Securities Act, (b) violate the Certificate of Incorporation or the Bylaws, the Delaware General Corporation Law or any California or federal statute, rule or regulation, or (c) result in a breach of, or constitute a default under, any of the Listed Agreements.

 

9.                                       The Primary Shares to be delivered in accordance with the provisions of the Underwriting Agreement have been approved for listing, subject to notice of issuance, on the NASDAQ Global Market.

 

10.                                The statements in the Prospectus under the captions “Description of Common Stock”, insofar as such statements contain descriptions of statutes, rules or regulations, or the terms of agreements or the terms of the Company’s Certificate of Incorporation or Bylaws, are correct in all material respects.

 

11.                                The Company is not, and after giving effect to the issuance of the Primary Shares and the application of the proceeds as described in the Prospectus, will not be, an “investment company,” as that term is defined in the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended.

 

This opinion letter and the opinions it contains shall be interpreted in accordance with the Legal Opinion Principles issued by the Committee on Legal Opinions of the American Bar Association’s Business Law Section as published in 53 Business Lawyer 831 (May 1998).

 

This opinion letter is being furnished by us solely for the benefit of the several Underwriters as underwriters in connection with the issuance to the Underwriters of the Primary Shares, and neither it nor the opinions it contains may be relied on for any other purpose or by anyone else.

 

 

Very truly yours,

 

 

GOODWIN PROCTER LLP

 

A-3



 

EXHIBIT A

 

Jurisdiction(s) in which the Company is Qualified as a Foreign Corporation

 

California

Utah

 

A-4



 

[                          ], 2013

 

Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith

Incorporated

Raymond James & Associates, Inc.

As Representatives of the

Several Underwriters

c/o

Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith

Incorporated

One Bryant Park

New York, New York 10036

 

c/o

Raymond James & Associates, Inc.

One Embarcadero Center, Suite 650

San Francisco, California 94111

 

Re:  Control4 Corporation

 

Ladies and Gentlemen:

 

Reference is made to the registration under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the “Securities Act”) of the offering and sale of  [                            ] shares of common stock, $0.0001 par value per share (the “Common Stock”), of Control4 Corporation (the “Company”) pursuant to a registration statement on Form S-1 (No. 333-[              ]) (the “Registration Statement”) that was declared effective under the Securities Act on [                    ], 2013.  When the Registration Statement was declared effective by the Securities and Exchange Commission (the “Commission”), the form of prospectus included in it omitted certain information in reliance upon Rule 430A under the Securities Act.  That information is contained in the prospectus as filed pursuant to Rule 424(b)(4) of the Securities Act on [                    ], 2013, which is deemed to be a part of the Registration Statement as of the time it was declared effective (the “Prospectus”).  The Prospectus also updates or supplements certain information contained in the Registration Statement.  Reference is also made to the preliminary prospectus included in the Registration Statement immediately prior to [8:30] p.m. (Eastern time) on [                      ], 2013, (the “Applicable Time”), as supplemented by the documents (if any) listed on Appendix A hereto and the information contained in Appendix B hereto (collectively, the “Pricing Disclosure Package”).  We are furnishing this letter to you pursuant to Section 5(b) of the Underwriting Agreement, dated as of [                    ], 2013 (the “Underwriting Agreement”), among the Company and the several underwriters listed on Schedule A to the Underwriting Agreement, for whom you are acting as Representatives (the “Underwriters”), in connection with the sale to the Underwriters by the Company of [                ] shares of Common Stock (the “Shares”).

 

As counsel to the Company, we reviewed the Registration Statement, the Prospectus and the Pricing Disclosure Package, and participated in discussions with your representatives, those of counsel for the several Underwriters, and those of the Company and its independent public accountants, at which the contents of the Registration Statement, the Prospectus and the Pricing Disclosure Package were discussed.

 

A-5



 

Between the Applicable Time and the time of the delivery of this letter, we participated in further discussions with your representatives, those of counsel for the Underwriters, and those of the Company and its independent public accountants, and we reviewed certain certificates of officers of the Company and public officials and letters from the Company’s independent public accountants delivered to you today.

 

The purpose of our engagement was not to establish or to confirm factual matters set forth in the Registration Statement, the Prospectus and the Pricing Disclosure Package, and we have not undertaken any obligation to verify independently any of the factual matters set forth in the Registration Statement, the Prospectus and the Pricing Disclosure Package.  Moreover, many of the determinations required to be made in the preparation of the Registration Statement, the Prospectus and the Pricing Disclosure Package involve matters of a non-legal nature.

 

Subject to the foregoing, we confirm to you that, on the basis of the information that we gained in the course of performing the services referred to above, nothing came to our attention that caused us to believe that: (a) the Registration Statement, as of its effective date, contained an untrue statement of a material fact or omitted to state a material fact required to be stated therein or necessary to make the statements therein not misleading, (b) the Pricing Disclosure Package, at the Applicable Time, contained an untrue statement of a material fact or omitted to state a material fact necessary to make the statements therein in light of the circumstances under which they were made, not misleading, or (c) the Prospectus, as of its date and as of the date and time of delivery of this letter, contained or contains any untrue statement of a material fact or omitted or omits to state any material fact necessary to make the statements therein, in light of the circumstances under which they were made, not misleading; provided, however , that we do not assume any responsibility for the accuracy, completeness or fairness of the statements contained in the Registration Statement, the Pricing Disclosure Package or the Prospectus, and we do not express any belief as to the financial statements and related notes or financial statement schedules, or other financial, statistical or accounting data or information contained in or omitted from the Registration Statement, the Pricing Disclosure Package or the Prospectus.  In the first sentence of this paragraph, “attention” refers to the conscious awareness of each of the lawyers in our firm who actively participated in the preparation of the Registration Statement, the Pricing Disclosure Package and the Prospectus; and “believe” refers to the actual, subjective, good faith belief of each of those lawyers.  In addition, we express no opinion or belief as to the conveyance of the Pricing Disclosure Package or the information contained therein to investors.

 

We inform you that the Registration Statement became effective under the Securities Act on [              ], 2013 and, based solely on our review of the Commission’s “Stop Orders” web page (http://sec.gov/litigation/stoporders.shtml), that no stop order suspending the effectiveness of the Registration Statement has been issued under the Securities Act.

 

We are not representing the Company in any pending litigation in which it is a named defendant that challenges the validity or enforceability of, or seeks to enjoin the performance of, the Underwriting Agreement.

 

Further, we confirm to you that the Registration Statement, as of its effective date, and the Prospectus, as of its date, appeared to us on their face to respond in all material respects to the requirements of the form on which the Registration Statement was filed, except that the foregoing statement does not address any requirement relating to financial statements or related notes or financial statement schedules, or other financial or accounting data or information contained in or omitted from the Registration Statement or Prospectus.

 

A-6



 

This letter is being furnished by us solely for the benefit of the several Underwriters as underwriters in connection with the sale to you of the Shares pursuant to the Underwriting Agreement, and it may not be relied on for any other purpose by you or anyone else.

 

 

 

Very truly yours,

 

 

 

 

 

GOODWIN PROCTER LLP

 

A-7


 

Appendix A

 

[None.]

 

A-8



 

Appendix B

 

Issuer :  Control4 Corporation (NASDAQ: CTRL) (the “Company”)

 

Shares Offered by the Company :

 

Shares Offered by the Company included in Underwriters’ Option to Purchase Additional Shares :

 

Price to Public :

 

Underwriting Discount :

 

Proceeds to the Company before expenses and before exercise of Underwriters’ Option to Purchase Additional Shares :

 

Trade Date :

 

Settlement Date :

 

A-9



 

Exhibit B

 

                                      , 2013

 

Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith

Incorporated

Raymond James & Associates, Inc.

as Representatives of the several
Underwriters to be named in the
within-mentioned Underwriting Agreement

 

c/o

Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith

Incorporated

One Bryant Park
New York, New York 10036

 

c/o

Raymond James & Associates, Inc.

One Embarcadero Center, Suite 650

San Francisco, CA 94111

 

Re:          Proposed Public Offering by Control4 Corporation

 

Dear Sirs:

 

The undersigned, a stockholder  of Control4 Corporation (the “Company”), understands that Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated (“Merrill Lynch”) and Raymond James & Associates, Inc. (“Raymond James”) propose to enter into an Underwriting Agreement (the “Underwriting Agreement”) with the Company and the Selling Stockholders providing for the public offering of shares (the “Securities”) of the Company’s common stock, par value $0.0001 per share (the “Common Stock”).  In recognition of the benefit that such an offering will confer upon the undersigned as a stockholder of the Company, and for other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged, the undersigned agrees with each underwriter to be named in the Underwriting Agreement that, during the period beginning on the date hereof and ending on the date that is 180 days from the date of the Underwriting Agreement (the “Lock-Up Period”), the undersigned will not, without the prior written consent of Merrill Lynch and Raymond James, directly or indirectly, (i) offer, pledge, sell, contract to sell, sell any option or contract to purchase, purchase any option or contract to sell, grant any option, right or warrant for the sale of, or otherwise dispose of or transfer any shares of the Company’s Common Stock or any securities convertible into or exchangeable or exercisable for Common Stock, whether now owned or hereafter acquired by the undersigned or with respect to which the undersigned has or hereafter acquires the power of disposition (collectively, the “Lock-Up Securities”), or exercise any right with respect to the registration of any of the Lock-Up Securities, or file or cause to be filed any registration statement in connection therewith, under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the “Securities Act”), or (ii) enter into any swap or any other agreement or any transaction that transfers, in whole or in part, directly or indirectly, the economic consequence of ownership of the Lock-Up Securities, whether any such swap or transaction is to be settled by delivery of Common Stock or other securities, in cash or otherwise. If the undersigned is an officer or director of the Company, the undersigned further agrees that the foregoing provisions shall be equally applicable to any issuer-directed Securities the undersigned may purchase in the offering.

 

B-1



 

If the undersigned is an officer or director of the Company, (1) Merrill Lynch and Raymond James agree that, at least three business days before the effective date of any release or waiver of the foregoing restrictions in connection with a transfer of shares of the Common Stock, Merrill Lynch and Raymond James will notify the Company of the impending release or waiver, and (2) the Company will agree in the Underwriting Agreement to announce the impending release or waiver by press release through a major news service at least two business days before the effective date of the release or waiver.  Any release or waiver granted by Merrill Lynch and Raymond James hereunder to any such officer or director shall only be effective two business days after the publication date of such press release.  The provisions of this paragraph will not apply if (i) the release or waiver is effected solely to permit a transfer not for consideration and (ii) the transferee has agreed in writing to be bound by the same terms described in this letter to the extent and for the duration that such terms remain in effect at the time of the transfer.

 

Notwithstanding the foregoing, and subject to the conditions below, the undersigned may transfer the Lock-Up Securities during the Lock-Up Period without the prior written consent of Merrill Lynch and Raymond James, provided that (1) Merrill Lynch and Raymond James receive a signed lock-up agreement for the balance of the Lock-Up Period from each donee, trustee, distributee, or transferee, as the case may be, (2) any such transfer shall not involve a disposition for value, (3) in the case of clauses (i) — (iv), such transfers are not required during the Lock-Up Period to be reported with the Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”) on Form 4 in accordance with Section 16 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “Exchange Act”), and (4) the undersigned does not otherwise voluntarily effect any public filing or report regarding such transfers during the Lock-Up Period:

 

(i)                                      as a bona fide gift or gifts; or

 

(ii)                                   to any immediate family member of the undersigned or any trust for the direct or indirect benefit of the undersigned or the immediate family of the undersigned (for purposes of this lock-up agreement, “immediate family” shall mean any relationship by blood, marriage or adoption, not more remote than first cousin); or

 

(iii)                                as a distribution to limited partners, stockholders, members or other equity holders of the undersigned;

 

(iv)                               to the undersigned’s affiliates or to any investment fund or other entity controlled or managed by, or under common control or managed by, the undersigned;

 

(v)                                  by operation of law, such as pursuant to a qualified domestic order or in connection with a divorce settlement; or

 

(vi)                               by will or intestate succession upon the death of the undersigned.

 

Furthermore, during the Lock-Up Period, the undersigned may (a) sell shares of Common Stock purchased by the undersigned on the open market following the offering if and only if (i) such sales are not required during the Lock-Up Period to be reported in any public report or filing with the Securities Exchange Commission, or otherwise and (ii) the undersigned does not otherwise voluntarily effect any public filing or report regarding such sales during the Lock-Up Period, (b) exercise any rights to purchase (including by means of a cashless exercise), exchange or convert any stock options granted pursuant to the Company’s equity incentive plans or warrants or any other such securities convertible into or exchangeable or exercisable for Common Stock, so long as the shares of Common Stock received upon such exercise, exchange or conversion shall remain subject to the terms of this lock-up agreement; and (c) sell Lock-Up Securities in connection with a merger or sale of the Company or its assets regardless of how such a transaction is structured (it being further understood that this lock-up agreement shall not

 

B-2



 

restrict the undersigned from entering into any agreement or arrangement in connection therewith, including an agreement to vote in favor of any such transaction or take any other action in connection with any such transaction).

 

Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, nothing herein shall prevent the undersigned from establishing a 10b5-1 trading plan that complies with Rule 10b5-1 under the Exchange Act (“10b5-1 trading plan”) or from amending an existing 10b5-1 trading plan so long as there are no sales of Lock-Up Securities under such plans during the Lock-Up Period; and provided that, the establishment of a 10b-5 trading plan or the amendment of a 10b5-1 trading plan shall only be permitted if (i) the establishment or amendment of such plan is not required to be reported in any public report or filing with the Securities Exchange Commission, or otherwise and (ii) the undersigned does not otherwise voluntarily effect any public filing or report regarding the establishment or amendment of such plan.

 

Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, nothing herein shall prevent the undersigned from selling shares of Common Stock to the underwriters pursuant to the Underwriting Agreement.

 

The undersigned agrees and consents to the entry of stop transfer instructions with the Company’s transfer agent and registrar against the transfer of the Lock-Up Securities except in compliance with the foregoing restrictions.

 

This lock-up agreement shall automatically terminate, and the undersigned shall be released from its obligations hereunder, upon the earliest to occur, if any, of (i) the Company advises Merrill Lynch and Raymond James in writing, that it has determined not to proceed with the offering, (ii) the Company files an application to withdraw the registration statement related to the offering, (iii) the Underwriting Agreement is executed but is terminated prior to the closing of the offering (other than the provisions thereof which survive termination) prior to payment for and delivery of the shares of Common Stock to be sold thereunder, or (iv) December 31, 2013, in the event that the Underwriting Agreement has not been executed by such date.

 

[signature page follows]

 

B-3



 

 

Very truly yours,

 

 

 

 

 

Signature:

 

 

 

 

 

Print Name:

 

 

B-4



 

Exhibit C

 

FORM OF PRESS RELEASE

TO BE ISSUED PURSUANT TO SECTION 3(j)

 

Control4 Corporation
[Date]

 

Control4 Corporation (the “Company”) announced today that BofA Merrill Lynch and Raymond James, the lead book-running managers in the Company’s recent public sale of [                  ] shares of common stock, are [waiving] [releasing] a lock-up restriction with respect to                shares of the Company’s common stock held by [certain officers or directors] [an officer or director] of the Company.  The [waiver] [release] will take effect on      ,              20     , and the shares may be sold on or after such date.

 

This press release is not an offer for sale of the securities in the United States or in any other jurisdiction where such offer is prohibited, and such securities may not be offered or sold in the United States absent registration or an exemption from registration under the United States Securities Act of 1933, as amended.

 

C-1




Exhibit 3.1.1

 

CERTIFICATE OF AMENDMENT TO THE
AMENDED AND RESTATED
CERTIFICATE OF
INCORPORATION OF
CONTROL4 CORPORATION

 

The undersigned does hereby certify on behalf of Control4 Corporation (the “ Corporation ”), a corporation organized and existing under the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware, as follows:

 

FIRST:                                             That he is the duly elected and acting Chief Executive Officer of the Corporation.

 

SECOND:                              That the Certificate of Incorporation of the Corporation was originally filed with the Secretary of State of the State of Delaware on March 27, 2003, under the name “Control4 Corporation.”

 

THIRD:                                        Pursuant to Section 242 of the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware, this Certificate of Amendment (the “ Certificate of Amendment ”) to the Corporation’s Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation, as amended (the “ Restated Certificate ”), further amends the provisions of the Restated Certificate.

 

FOURTH:                             That pursuant to Section 242 of the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware, a paragraph is added to Article IV prior to Section A of the Restated Certificate to read as follows:

 

“At the initial date and time of the effectiveness of this Certificate of Amendment (the “ Reverse Split Effective Time ”), the following recapitalization (the “ Reverse Stock Split ”) shall occur: (i) each 5.2 shares of Common Stock of the Corporation issued and outstanding immediately prior to the Reverse Split Effective Time shall be exchanged and combined into one share of Common Stock; (ii) each 5.2 shares of Series A Preferred Stock of the Corporation issued and outstanding immediately prior to the Reverse Split Effective Time shall be exchanged and combined into one share of Series A Preferred Stock; (iii) each 5.2 shares of Series B Preferred Stock of the Corporation issued and outstanding immediately prior to the Reverse Split Effective Time shall be exchanged and combined into one share of Series B Preferred Stock; (iv) each 5.2 shares of Series C Preferred Stock of the Corporation issued and outstanding immediately prior to the Reverse Split Effective Time shall be exchanged and combined into one share of Series C Preferred Stock; (v) each 5.2 shares of Series D Preferred Stock of the Corporation issued and outstanding immediately prior to the Reverse Split Effective Time shall be exchanged and combined into one share of Series D Preferred Stock; (vi) each 5.2 shares of Series E Preferred Stock of the Corporation issued and outstanding immediately prior to the Reverse Split Effective Time shall be exchanged and combined into one share of Series E Preferred Stock; (vii) each 5.2 shares of Series F Preferred Stock of the Corporation issued and outstanding immediately prior to the Reverse Split Effective Time shall be exchanged and combined into one share of Series F Preferred Stock;

 



 

(viii) each 5.2 shares of Series G Preferred Stock of the Corporation issued and outstanding immediately prior to the Reverse Split Effective Time shall be exchanged and combined into one share of Series G Preferred Stock; (ix) each 5.2 shares of Series G-1 Preferred Stock of the Corporation issued and outstanding immediately prior to the Reverse Split Effective Time shall be exchanged and combined into one share of Series G-1 Preferred Stock; and (x) each 5.2 shares of Series H Preferred Stock of the Corporation issued and outstanding immediately prior to the Reverse Split Effective Time shall be exchanged and combined into one share of Series H Preferred Stock.  Any fractional shares resulting from such combination shall be rounded down to the nearest whole share.  The Reverse Stock Split shall occur automatically without any further action by the holders of the shares of Common Stock and Preferred Stock (as defined below) affected thereby.  All rights, preferences and privileges of the Common Stock and the Preferred Stock have been adjusted to reflect the Reverse Stock Split (that is, all numeric references and other provisions included in this Certificate of Amendment have already given effect to, and no further adjustment shall be made on account of, the Reverse Stock Split).

 

The following is a statement of the designations and the powers, privileges and rights, and the qualifications, limitations or restrictions thereof in respect of each class of capital stock of the Corporation, after giving effect to the Reverse Stock Split.”

 

FIFTH:                                            That pursuant to Section 242 of the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware, Article IV, Section B(1)(a) of the Restated Certificate is hereby amended to read in its entirety as follows:

 

“(a) The holders of Preferred Stock shall be entitled to receive dividends at the rate of $0.20800, $0.33821, $0.44013, $0.84864, $0.91104, $1.38944, $0.74048, $0.74048 and $0.79404 per share of Series A Preferred, Series B Preferred, Series C Preferred, Series D Preferred, Series E Preferred, Series F Preferred, Series G Preferred, Series G-l Preferred and Series H Preferred, respectively (as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, stock splits, reclassifications and the like with respect to such shares) per annum, payable out of funds legally available therefor and in preference to any declaration or payment of any dividend (payable other than in Common Stock or other securities and rights convertible into or entitling the holder thereof to receive, directly or indirectly, Additional Shares of Common Stock of the Corporation, provided that an adjustment to the respective Conversion Price (as defined below) of such other securities or rights has been made in accordance with Section 3(d)(ii) below).  Such dividends shall be payable when, as, and if declared by the Board of Directors, acting in its sole discretion.  The right to receive dividends shall not be cumulative, and no right shall accrue to holders of any shares by reason of the fact that dividends on such shares are not declared and paid in any prior year.  No dividend shall be paid or declared and set aside in any period with respect to the Common Stock unless and until dividends have been paid or declared and set aside for payment in such year with respect to every outstanding series of Preferred Stock in an amount for each such series of Preferred Stock equal to the annual dividend rates stated above.”

 

2



 

SIXTH:                                          That pursuant to Section 242 of the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware, Article IV, Sections B(2)(a)-(f) of the Restated Certificate are hereby amended to read in its entirety as follows:

 

“(a)  The holders of the Series H Preferred and the Series G-l Preferred shall be entitled to receive, prior and in preference to any distribution of any of the assets or surplus funds of the Corporation to the holders of the Series G Preferred, the Series F Preferred, the Series B Preferred, the Series D Preferred, the Series C Preferred, the Series B Preferred, the Series A Preferred or Common Stock, the amount of $9.9273 per share of Series H Preferred and $9.2586 per share of Series G-l Preferred, respectively (as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, stock splits, reclassification or the like with respect to such shares), plus all accrued or declared but unpaid dividends on such shares.  If the assets and funds available for distribution to the holders of the Series H Preferred and the Series G-1 Preferred shall be insufficient to pay the stated preferential amounts in full, then the entire assets and funds of the Corporation legally available for distribution shall be distributed to the holders of the Series H Preferred and Series G-l Preferred in proportion to the preferential amount each such holder is otherwise entitled to receive.

 

(b)  After payment in full of the amount due the holders of Series H Preferred and Series G-l Preferred under Article IV, Section B(2)(a) above, the holders of the Series F Preferred and Series G Preferred shall be entitled to receive, prior and in preference to any distribution of any of the assets or surplus funds of the Corporation to the holders of the Series E Preferred, Series D Preferred, the Series C Preferred, the Series B Preferred, Series A Preferred or Common Stock, the amount of $17.3680 per share of Series F Preferred and $9.2586 per share of Series G Preferred, respectively (as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, stock splits, reclassification and the like with respect to such shares), phis all accrued or declared but unpaid dividends on such shares.  If the assets and funds available for distribution to the holders of the Series F Preferred and Series G Preferred shall be insufficient to pay the stated preferential amounts in full, then the entire assets and funds of the Corporation legally available for distribution to the holders of the Series F Preferred and Series G Preferred shall be distributed to the holders of the Series F Preferred and the Series G Preferred in proportion to the preferential amount each such holder is otherwise entitled to receive.

 

(c)  After payment in full of the amount due the holders of Series F Preferred and Series G Preferred under Article IV, Section B(2)(b) above, the holders of the Series E Preferred shall be entitled to receive, prior and in preference to any distribution of any of the assets or surplus funds of the Corporation to the holders of the Series D Preferred, the Series C Preferred, the Series B Preferred, Series A Preferred or Common Stock, the amount of $11.3880 per share of Series E Preferred (as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, stock splits, reclassification and the like with respect to such shares), plus all accrued or declared but unpaid dividends on such shares.  If the assets and funds available for distribution to the holders of the Series E Preferred shall be insufficient to pay the stated preferential amounts in full, then the entire assets and funds of the Corporation legally available for distribution to the holders of the Series E Preferred shall

 

3



 

be distributed to the holders of the Series E Preferred in proportion to the preferential amount each such holder is otherwise entitled to receive.

 

(d)  After payment in full of the amount due the holders of Series E Preferred under Article IV, Section B(2)(c) above, the holders of the Series D Preferred shall be entitled to receive, prior and in preference to any distribution of any of the assets or surplus funds of the Corporation to the holders of the Series C Preferred, the Series B Preferred, Series A Preferred or Common Stock, the amount of $10.6080 per share of Series D Preferred (as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, stock splits, reclassification and the like with respect to such shares), plus all accrued or declared but unpaid dividends on such shares.  If the assets and funds available for distribution to the holders of the Series D Preferred shall be insufficient to pay the stated preferential amounts in full, then the entire assets and funds of the Corporation legally available for distribution to the holders of the Series D Preferred shall be distributed to the holders of the Series D Preferred in proportion to the preferential amount each such holder is otherwise entitled to receive.

 

(e)  After payment in full of the amount due the holders of Series D Preferred under Article IV, Section B(2)(d) above, the holders of the Series C Preferred shall be entitled to receive, prior and in preference to any distribution of any of the assets or surplus funds of the Corporation to the holders of the Series B Preferred, Series A Preferred or Common Stock, the amount of $5.5016 per share of Series C Preferred (as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, stock splits, reclassification and the like with respect to such shares), plus all accrued or declared but unpaid dividends on such shares.  If the assets and funds available for distribution to the holders of the Series C Preferred shall be insufficient to pay the stated preferential amounts in full, then the entire assets and funds of the Corporation legally available for distribution to the holders of the Series C Preferred shall be distributed to the holders of the Series C Preferred in proportion to the preferential amount each such holder is otherwise entitled to receive.

 

(f)  After payment in full of the amount due the holders of Series C Preferred under Article IV, Section B(2)(e) above, the holders of the Series A Preferred, and Series B Preferred shall be entitled to receive, prior and in preference to any distribution of any of the assets or surplus funds of the Corporation to the holders of the Common Stock, the amount of $2.6000 and $4.2276 per share of Series A Preferred and Series B Preferred, respectively (as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, stock splits, reclassification and the like with respect to such shares), plus all accrued or declared but unpaid dividends on such shares.  If the assets and funds available for distribution to the holders of the Series A Preferred and the Series B Preferred shall be insufficient to pay the stated preferential amounts in full, then the entire assets and funds of the Corporation legally available for distribution to the holders of the Series A Preferred and Series B Preferred shall be distributed to the holders of the Series A Preferred and the Series B Preferred in proportion to the preferential amount each such holder is otherwise entitled to receive.”

 

4



 

SEVENTH:                      That pursuant to Section 242 of the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware, Article IV, Section B(2.5)(a) of the Restated Certificate is hereby amended to read in its entirety as follows:

 

“(a)  Upon the election in writing by the holders of a majority of the outstanding shares of Preferred Stock (the “ Redemption Election ”) at any time on or after the date that is 40 days before January 21, 2016, the Corporation shall redeem the then outstanding Preferred Stock in three equal annual installments (each a “ Redemption Date ”), from any funds legally available for such purpose beginning on the date that is 40 days after the date of the Redemption Election (the “ Original Redemption Date ”). The redemption of the Preferred Stock shall occur in three annual installments, with the first such installment occurring on the Original Redemption Date, the second on the first anniversary thereof, and the third on the second anniversary thereof (each such date hereinafter referred to as a “ Redemption Date ”). Any redemption effected pursuant to this Section 2.5 shall be made on a pro rate basis among the holders of the Preferred Stock based upon the total Redemption Price (as defined below) applicable to each holder’s shares of Preferred Stock. The number of shares to be redeemed from each holder of Preferred Stock on each Redemption Date shall equal the total number of shares of Preferred Stock held by such holder on the date of the Redemption Notice (as defined below), divided by the number of Redemption Dates remaining as of the date of the Redemption Notice, minus the number of shares of Preferred Stock that such holder converts into Common Stock after the date of the Redemption Notice and prior to such Redemption Date. The Corporation shall effect redemption on the applicable Redemption Dates by paying cash in an aggregate amount equal to $2.6000, $4.2276, $5.5016, $10.6080, $11.3880, $17.3680, $9.2586, $9.2586 and $9.9273 per share of Series A Preferred, Series B Preferred, Series C Preferred, Series D Preferred, Series E Preferred, Series F Preferred, Series G Preferred, Series G-l Preferred and Series H Preferred, respectively (as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, stock splits, reclassification or the like with respect to such shares) plus all accrued or declared but unpaid dividends on such shares (the “ Redemption Prices ”).”

 

EIGHTH:                               That pursuant to Section 242 of the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware, Article IV, Section B(3)(a) of the Restated Certificate is hereby amended to read in its entirety as follows:

 

“(a)  Right to Convert .  Each share of Preferred Stock shall be convertible, at the option of the holder thereof, at any time after the date of issuance of such share, at the office of the Corporation or any transfer agent for such stock, into such number of fully paid and nonassessable shares of Common Stock as is determined by dividing (x) the Original Issue Price for that series of Preferred Stock by (y) the then effective Conversion Price for that series of Preferred Stock (such result, the “ Conversion Rate ”).  The “ Original Issue Price ” for each Series of Preferred Stock shall be as follows:  the Series A Original Issue Price shall be $2.6000; the Series B Original Issue Price shall be $4.2276; the Series C Original Issue Price shall be $5.5016; the Series D Original Issue Price shall be $10.6080; the Series E Original Issue Price shall be $11.3880; the Series F Original Issue Price shall be $17.3680; the Series G Original Issue Price shall be $9.2586; the Series G-l Original Issue Price shall be $9.2586; and the Series H Original Issue Price

 

5



 

shall be $9.9273.  The “ Conversion Price ” for each Series of Preferred Stock shall be as follows:  the initial Series A Conversion Price shall be $2.6000; the initial Series B Conversion Price shall be $4.2276; the initial Series C Conversion Price shall be $5.5016; the initial Series D Conversion Price shall be $10.6080; the initial Series E Conversion Price shall be $11.3880; the initial Series F Conversion Price shall be $17.3680; the initial Series G Conversion Price shall be $9.2586; the initial Series G-l Conversion Price shall be $9.2586; and the initial Series H Conversion Price shall be $9.9273.  The Conversion Prices are subject to adjustment as provided in this Section 3.”

 

NINTH:                                        That the foregoing Certificate of Amendment to the Certificate of Incorporation of the Corporation has been duly adopted and approved by the Board of Directors and stockholders of the Corporation in accordance with the applicable provisions of Sections 141, 228 and 242 of the Delaware General Corporation Law.

 

* * * * * * * *

 

6



 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned hereby further declares and certifies under penalty of perjury that the facts set forth in the foregoing certificate are true and correct to his own knowledge, and that this certificate is his own act and deed.

 

Executed on July     , 2013.

 

 

By:

 

 

 

Martin Plaehn

 

 

Chief Executive Officer

 

7




Exhibit 4.1

 

 DELAWARE MARCH 27, 2003 SEAL CONTROL4 CORPORATION CORPORATE COUNTERSIGNED AND REGISTERED: AMERICAN STOCK TRANSFER & TRUST COMPANY, LLC (NEW YORK, NY) TRANSFER AGENT AND REGISTRAR BY: AUTHORIZED SIGNATURE This certifies that is the record holder of Dated: CL INCORPORATED UNDER THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF DELAWARE FULLY PAID AND NONASSESSABLE SHARES OF COMMON STOCK, $0.0001 PAR VALUE, OF CONTROL4 CORPORATION transferable on the books of the Corporation in person or by duly authorized attorney upon surrender of this Certificate properly endorsed. This Certificate is not valid until countersigned by the Transfer Agent and registered by the Registrar. WITNESS the facsimile seal of the Corporation and the facsimile signatures of its duly authorized officers. CUSIP 21240D 10 7 SEE REVERSE FOR CERTAIN DEFINITIONS GENERAL COUNSEL, CHIEF COMPLIANCE OFFICER & SECRETARY PRESIDENT & CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER ™ ™

 


The Corporation shall furnish without charge to each stockholder who so requests a statement of the powers, designations, preferences and relative, participating, optional or other special rights of each class of stock of the Corporation or series thereof and the qualifications, limitations or restrictions of such preferences and/or rights. Such requests shall be made to the Corporation’s Secretary at the principal office of the Corporation. The following abbreviations, when used in the inscription on the face of this certificate, shall be construed as though they were written out in full according to applicable laws or regulations: Additional abbreviations may also be used though not in the above list. TEN COM – as tenants in common TEN ENT – as tenants by the entireties JT TEN – as joint tenants with right of survivorship and not as tenants in common COM PROP – as community property UNIF GIFT MIN ACT – Custodian (Cust) (Minor) under Uniform Gifts to Minors Act (State) UNIF TRF MIN ACT – Custodian (until age ) (Cust) under Uniform Transfers (Minor) to Minors Act (State) FOR VALUE RECEIVED, _____________________________________________________ hereby sell(s), assign(s) and transfer(s) unto PLEASE INSERT SOCIAL SECURITY OR OTHER IDENTIFYING NUMBER OF ASSIGNEE shares of the capital stock represented by within Certificate, and do hereby irrevocably constitute and appoint attorney-in-fact to transfer the said stock on the books of the within named Corporation with full power of the substitution in the premises. Dated NOTICE: THE SIGNATURE TO THIS ASSIGNMENT MUST CORRESPOND WITH THE NAME AS WRITTEN UPON THE FACE OF THE CERTIFICATE IN EVERY PARTICULAR, WITHOUT ALTERATION OR ENLARGEMENT OR ANY CHANGE WHATSOEVER. BY THE SIGNATURE(S) SHOULD BE GUARANTEED BY AN ELIGIBLE GUARANTOR INSTITUTION, (BANKS, STOCKBROKERS, SAVINGS AND LOAN ASSOCIATIONS AND CREDIT UNIONS WITH MEMBERSHIP IN AN APPROVED SIGNATURE GUARANTEE MEDALLION PROGRAM), PURSUANT TO S.E.C. RULE 17Ad-15. GUARANTEES BY A NOTARY PUBLIC ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE. SIGNATURE GUARANTEES MUST NOT BE DATED. Signature(s) Guaranteed: (PLEASE PRINT OR TYPEWRITE NAME AND ADDRESS, INCLUDING ZIP CODE, OF ASSIGNEE) X X

 



Exhibit 5.1

 

(GOODWIN PROCTER LLP LETTERHEAD)

 

July     , 2013

 

Control4 Corporation

11734 S. Election Road

Salt Lake City, Utah 84020

 

Re:          Securities Registered under Registration Statement on Form S-1

 

Ladies and Gentlemen:

 

We have acted as counsel to you in connection with your filing of a Registration Statement on Form S-1 (File No. 333-189736) (as amended or supplemented, the “Registration Statement”) pursuant to the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the “Securities Act”), relating to the registration of the offering by Control4 Corporation, a Delaware corporation (the “Company”) of up to [                        ] shares (the “Shares”) of the Company’s Common Stock, $0.0001 par value per share, including Shares purchasable by the underwriters upon their exercise of an over-allotment option granted to the underwriters by the Company. The Shares are being sold to the several underwriters named in, and pursuant to, an underwriting agreement among the Company and such underwriters (the “Underwriting Agreement”).

 

We have reviewed such documents and made such examination of law as we have deemed appropriate to give the opinions set forth below.  We have relied, without independent verification, on certificates of public officials and, as to matters of fact material to the opinions set forth below, on certificates of officers of the Company.

 

The opinion set forth below is limited to the Delaware General Corporation Law (which includes reported judicial decisions interpreting the Delaware General Corporation Law).

 

Based on the foregoing, we are of the opinion that the Shares have been duly authorized and, when the price and other terms upon which the Shares are to be sold have been approved by the Board of Directors of the Company (or a duly authorized committee of the Board of Directors) and the Shares have been issued and delivered against payment in accordance with such terms, the Shares will be validly issued, fully paid and non-assessable.

 

We hereby consent to the inclusion of this opinion as Exhibit 5.1 to the Registration Statement and to the references to our firm under the caption “Legal Matters” in the Registration Statement.  In giving our consent, we do not admit that we are in the category of persons whose consent is required under Section 7 of the Securities Act or the rules and regulations thereunder.

 

 

Very truly yours,

 

 

 

 

 

GOODWIN PROCTER LLP

 




Exhibit 10.9

 

Contract No.

 

Relationship Agreement

 

Supplier: Sanmina Corporation

Primary Contact:

Address:

2700 North First Street

Phone:

 

San Jose, California 95134

Email:

 

 

Fax:

Effective Date:

June 27, 2013

Web Site:

 

This Relationship Agreement (“Agreement”) is made as of the Effective Date identified above, by and between Control4 Corporation, a Delaware corporation with offices located at 11734 S. Election Road, Salt Lake City, Utah 84020 (“Control4”) and the supplier identified above (“Supplier”).  Supplier has entered into this Agreement upon behalf of itself and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

 

This Agreement incorporates by reference the General Terms and Conditions set forth below and all mutually agreed Schedules entered into by the Parties.  As of the Effective Date of this Agreement, it is acknowledged and agreed by the Parties that only Schedule A — Contract Manufacturing Services shall be in effect.  Schedule B and Schedule C shall be subject to further good faith negotiations between the Parties and shall be added to this Agreement, by separate written amendment, upon the completion of such good faith negotiations.

 

Supplier – Sanmina Corporation

 

Control4 Corporation

 

 

 

Signature:

/s/ Richard V. LaPonzina

 

Signature:

/s/ Jeff Dungan

 

 

 

 

 

Name:

Richard V. LaPonzina

 

Name:

Jeff Dungan

 

 

 

 

 

Title:

Vice President Corporate Sales Services

 

Title:

SVP, Supply Chain

 

Terms and Conditions

 

1      Definitions . Terms with initial capital letters contained in Section 1 of this Relationship Agreement shall have the meanings ascribed to them in this Section 1 or elsewhere in this Agreement.   Additional Terms with initial capital letters contained in Schedule A, B, or C, respectively, shall have the meanings ascribed to them in the applicable Schedule and shall only be applicable to the specific services or performed by Supplier pursuant to the applicable Schedule A, B, or C.

 

1.1. Confidential Information .  Confidential Information” means all technical information, financial information, proprietary information that each Party hereunder may deliver to the other Party during the course of performing this Agreement, or acquired by the one Party about the other during the course of performing this Agreement, including without limitation all Proprietary Information, non-public information about each Party’s business affairs, financing, finances, methods of operation, technical or scientific information, data systems, procedures, computer programs, circuitry schematics, software or algorithms.

 

1.2. End Customer .  “End Customer” means the ultimate purchaser and end user of the Products

 

1.4  Intellectual Property . “Intellectual Property” shall mean the applicable Party’s proprietary intellectual property, including without limitation the Patent Rights and the Marks, and proprietary information that is not generally known, including, and whether or not patentable, all trade secrets, know-how, data, software code, designs, specifications, material lists, drawings, algorithms, formulas, patterns, compilations, programs, samples, devices, protocols, methods, techniques, processes, procedures and results of experimentation and testing.

 

1.5  Marks Marks” means the applicable Party’s current and future logos, trade names, and trademarks.

 

1.6  Party . “Party” means Control4 or Supplier individually as the context requires.  “Parties” means both Control4 and Supplier.

 

1.7    Proprietary Information .  “Proprietary Information” means Inventions, Works, Intellectual Property, and any and all confidential, proprietary or secret information, including, without limitation, information relating to products, best-practices, templates, methodologies, research, technology, developments, services, clients, End Customers, suppliers, employees, business, operations or activities, and also similar information of any third party also divulged by the disclosing Party in connection with this Agreement.

 

1.8    Purchase Order .   “Purchase Order” means a written order issued by Control4 to Supplier containing information with respect to each purchase made pursuant to this Agreement, including a description of the Services or Product to be purchased, the purchase quantity, the purchase delivery schedule, the nominated carrier, the routing instructions, the destination, and confirmation of the Price.

 

1.9    Schedules .  The following Schedules are appended hereto and incorporated herein as a part of this Agreement (which Schedules may be amended by the parties from time to time in a signed writing):

 

·       Schedule A    Product Specifications and Pricing

·       Schedule B    Terms of Delivery

·       Schedule C    Quality Assurance

·       Schedule D    Manufacturing and Core Requirements

·       Schedule E    Out-of-Warranty Repair Process and Fees

·       Schedule F    Additional Customization & Work

 

1.10  Services Services” means the specialized services to be provided by Supplier to Control4 pursuant to this Agreement.

 

1.11  Trade Secret(s) . “Trade Secret(s)” means any scientific or technical data, information, design, process, procedure, formula, or improvement that is commercially valuable to the owner and not generally known in the industry.  The obligations set forth in this Agreement as they pertain to Trade Secret(s) shall survive termination of this Agreement and continue for so long as the relevant information remains a Trade Secret(s).

 

2                  General Rights and Obligations.

 

2.4    Supplier and Control4 acknowledge that the Intellectual Property of each Party constitutes valuable trade secrets of such

 



 

Party.  Accordingly, Supplier and Control4 each agree that it will not do any of the following without the other Party’s prior written consent: (a) modify, adapt, alter, translate, or create Derivative Works from the Intellectual Property of the other Party; (b) sublicense or sell the Intellectual Property of the other Party to any third party; (c) reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to derive the source code, if any, for the Intellectual Property of the other Party.

 

2.5    Pre-Existing Intellectual Property .  Nothing herein shall be deemed to constitute a transfer, sale or conveyance by one Party to the other Party of any ownership interest in such Party’s Intellectual Property that was owned or developed by it prior to the Effective Date.

 

3                  Purchase Orders.

 

3.1  The purchase and sale of the Products or the performance of the Services by Supplier under Schedule A, B, or C, shall be made against specific written Purchase Orders submitted by Control4 to Supplier during the term of this Agreement.  All Purchase Orders for Product or Services submitted by Control4 (by either facsimile or email) shall state the following: (a) Control4’s name and address; (b) the description of the Products or Services ordered; (c) the quantities of Products ordered [if applicable]; (d) the desired delivery dates; (e) the destination of the Products or Services ordered; and (f) the price(s) or compensation for the Products or services ordered.  Control4 shall mail, email and/or fax each Purchase Order to Supplier.  Each such Purchase Order shall specify which of Schedule – A, B, or C – that said Purchase Order is being issued under.

 

3.2  Purchase Order Acceptance .  All Purchase Orders (and any amendments thereto) for the manufacture and delivery of Product manufactured by Supplier pursuant to Schedule A are subject to acceptance by Supplier, which acceptance may not be withheld for any Purchase Order falling within the scope of the agreed quantities, delivery dates and lead times for Product set forth in Schedule E (or otherwise agreed by the Parties in writing).  Notwithstanding the foregoing, if the Product Price is incorrect or if the delivery date cannot be met, Supplier will notify Control4 and the parties will negotiate in good faith to resolve the matter.  Acceptance of a Purchase Order issued under either Schedule A, B, or C, shall be indicated by return of an email or facsimile from Supplier, so as to indicate acceptance, conditional or otherwise, of any such order of Products, whether contract manufactured or OEM,  or Services .  Any Purchase Order that is not rejected by Supplier within five (5) business days of the day of receipt by Supplier shall be deemed automatically accepted by Supplier, unless otherwise agreed by the parties.

 

3.3  Conflicting Provisions .  If any conflict arises between the terms stated in any Purchase Order and the terms and conditions of this Agreement (and including the terms and conditions as set forth in Schedule A, B, or C) , the terms and conditions of this Agreement (and including the terms and conditions as set forth in Schedule A, B, or C) shall prevail.  Any term of a Purchase Order that is in conflict with, omitted or contradictory to this Agreement will be null and void.  The remaining terms and commitment of the accepted Purchase Order will still remain valid and binding with the exception of any “pre-printed” terms and conditions, which shall be null and void.

 

3.4  Affiliates .  This Agreement is entered into by Control4 for the benefit of itself and its affiliated companies (if any), each of which shall be deemed to be a third-party beneficiary of this Agreement.  Control4’s affiliated companies will be entitled to place Purchase Orders with Supplier subject to the terms and conditions herein contained and subject to prior credit review and approval by Supplier of such Conrol4 affiliated company, such approval to be performed in accordance with Supplier’s internal credit review policies.

 

3.4  Deviation from Purchase Orders .  Following acceptance of a Purchase Order, Supplier may not reject or deviate from the Purchase Order without Control4’s written approval in Control4’s sole discretion.

 

4                 Taxes, Yield Data and Audits.

 

4.1  Taxes .  The Prices  for the manufacture of the Product under  Schedule A  or Schedule C or the performance of Services under Schedule B or the applicable Purchase Order for each Product or Service are exclusive of any other federal, state or local sales, use, excise, or other similar taxes or duties, which Supplier may be required to collect or pay as a consequence of the sale or delivery of any Products to Control4.  Supplier shall include all required taxes as a separate line item on each invoice.  Control4 shall not be responsible for any taxes based on Supplier’s income.

 

4.2  Audits .  Upon at least ten (10) business days prior written notice, Control4 may conduct (or have conducted) an audit of Supplier’s compliance with this Agreement.  Such audits will not generally occur more than once in any annual period and the right to conduct such audits shall continue for two (2) years following termination of this Agreement.  The costs of conducting this audit will be paid by Supplier if the audit discloses that the amount of overpayment exceeds five percent (5%) of the amount due for the period audited or other non-monetary noncompliance.

 

5                  Delivery .

 

5.1  General .  All Products shall be delivered to Control4 (or its designated location) as specified in Schedule A, B, or C, or the applicable Purchase Order, subject to Supplier’s acceptance, using Control4’s specified standard shipping. The Product shall be packed and marked for shipment in accordance with the Specification and Schedule E.

 

5.2  Title; Risk of Loss .  Unless otherwise specified in Schedule A or C, title to and risk of loss or damage on any Product shall pass to Control4 upon Supplier’s delivery of such Product to the carrier specified by Control4.  Risk of loss and title respect to Deliverables under Schedule B shall transfer to Control4 as more fully detailed in Schedule B.

 

5.3  Time of the Essence .  Subject to Section 5.1 above, Each Party acknowledges that timely delivery of the Product and Deliverable under  the applicable Purchase Order and/or Statement of Work are of the essence and vital to the success of this business arrangement set forth herein.

 

5.4  Testing, Certifications and Standards .  The parties may identify on Schedule D or any future Purchase Order or Statement of Work any testing, technical certifications and standards which Products must receive or meet, respectively.  Unless specifically provided in the Specification, Supplier shall not be responsible for causing applicable Products to achieve specified certifications and standards prior to delivery.

 

5.5  Initial Delivery Time Frame .   Subject to the availability of all requisite parts and/or components on the open market through normal commercial channels within the time frame that was specified for parts purchasing in the Specification, Supplier will adhere to the initial delivery time frame specified in Schedule A, B, or C.  Subsequent delivery time frames will be set forth in the applicable Purchase Orders, Specifications and Statements of Work, as mutually agreed by Control4 and Supplier.

 

6      Limitation of Liability .  The limitation of liability, as mutually agreed to by Control4 and Supplier shall be as expressly stated in Schedules A, B, and C.

 

7      Payment and Invoice.

 

5.1    Payment Terms .  Unless otherwise agreed in Schedule A, B, or C, payment for any Purchase Orders shall be due forty-five (45) days from the date of Supplier’s invoice and Supplier invoices upon shipment. All transactions must be valued and paid in United States currency.

 

5.2    Partial Shipments . When partial shipments are made, Supplier shall invoice Control4 in accordance with this Agreement for

 

2



 

the quantity of conforming Products shipped at the agreed upon Price for such Products.

 

6      Term and Termination.

 

6.1    Term .  Unless terminated as provided herein, this Agreement (and expressly including Schedule A, B, and C) will be effective for a period of four (4) years from the Effective Date (“Initial Term”).  Upon the expiration of the Initial Term, this Agreement will automatically renew for successive periods of one (1) year (each a “Renewal Term”) unless this Agreement or any of Schedule A, B. or C, is terminated, subject to Section 13.3,  at the end of the Initial Term or any Renewal Term by Supplier or Control4 by delivering written notice of the intent to terminate not less than (or a minimum of) ninety  (90) days prior to the end of the Initial Term or Renewal Term, as applicable. Control4 or Supplier may terminate this Agreement or any Purchase Order hereunder for any reason upon one hundred and twenty (120) days prior written notice to the other Party, subject to Section 13.3.

 

6.2    Termination for Breach .  Subject to Section 13.3, either Party may terminate this Agreement if the other Party violates any material provision of this Agreement (or of Schedule A, B, or C) and fails to correct or cure any such violation within thirty (30) days after receipt of written notice of such violation.  In addition, subject to Section 13.3, should either Party be adjudicated to be bankrupt or insolvent, or should a receiver or liquidator be appointed for its business or assets, or should an assignment be made for the benefit of such Party’s creditors, or should such Party file or have filed against it a petition for winding up its affairs, or should such Party file or have filed against it a petition under any applicable bankruptcy statutes or regulations or should such Party attempt to assign this Agreement without the written consent of the other Party being first obtained, then the other Party shall be entitled to terminate this Agreement effective immediately upon delivery of notice of such election to the other Party.

 

6.3    Effect of Termination .  (a) At the request of Control4, Supplier shall fulfill any valid outstanding Purchase Orders under Schedule A, B. or C, as the case may be, as of the date of expiration or termination.

 

(b)   Termination for Reasons other than Supplier’s Breach .  In the event this Agreement or an Order hereunder is terminated for any reason other than an uncured material breach by Supplier (including but not limited to a force majeure or other termination under this Section 13), Control4 shall pay Supplier for (1) the contract price for all finished Product existing at the time of termination; (2) Supplier’s cost (including labor, raw materials/components) for all work in process; and (3) any Excess Inventory pursuant to Schedule B – Section 1.

 

(c)  Termination Resulting from Supplier’s Breach .  In the event Control4 terminates this Agreement or any Order hereunder as a result of an uncured material breach by Supplier, Control4 shall pay Supplier for (1) the contract price for all finished Product existing at the time of termination; (2) Supplier’s cost (including labor, raw materials/components) for all work in process; and (3) the Excess Inventory pursuant to Schedule B – Section 1.

 

6.4            Survival .   The expiration or termination of this Agreement shall not terminate vested rights of either party from any liabilities or obligations incurred under this Agreement prior to or which by their nature are intended to survive expiration or termination, including but not limited to provisions relating to confidentiality, warranty, limitation of liability, Component  Liability, indemnification, and proprietary rights.  Any undisputed and properly invoiced payment obligations of Control4 owed to Supplier shall survive expiration or termination of this agreement for any reason, including any Inventory Costs due at the time of termination in accordance with the terms of Section 4.f of Schedule B.

 

6.5  Force Majeure.  Neither Party to this Agreement shall be liable to the other for non-performance due to causes not reasonably within its control (a “force majeure event”); a force majeure event may include but is not limited to (i) fire, flood, war, embargo, riot, terrorist act, or intervention of any governmental authority,  provided, however, that the Party suffering such delay immediately notifies the other Party in writing, of the reasons for the delay and, if possible, the duration of such delay.

 

7      Confidentiality; Non-Solicitation.

 

7.1    Proprietary Materials . From time to time during the performance of this Agreement, each Party may deliver certain Proprietary Information to the other Party hereunder.  All such Proprietary Information shall be deemed “Confidential Information” as described in this Section 15, and, as between the Parties hereto, the Party providing such materials shall be deemed the owner, except as otherwise provided in this Agreement.

 

7.2    Confidentiality Obligations . During the term of this Agreement and for a period of five (5) years thereafter, each Party hereto shall hold the Confidential Information in strict confidence and shall not permit the use or disclosure of any such Confidential Information by or to any person or entity (excluding party employees, attorneys, and subcontractors who may have access to Confidential Information on a need-to-know basis) unless such use or disclosure is specifically authorized in writing by the Party providing the Confidential Information.

 

7.3    Treatment of Confidential Information .  Each Party shall take appropriate action and utilize the same effort to safeguard Confidential Information as it utilizes to protect its own trade secrets or proprietary information, but at a minimum, each Party shall undertake reasonable precautions to protect the Confidential Information.  Without limitation on the foregoing, each Party shall: (i) advise its own employees who have access to the Confidential Information and others for whom the other Party has given written consent to disclose the Confidential Information, of the confidential nature of the Confidential Information; (ii) ensure by agreement or otherwise that the confidential Information is prohibited from being disclosed to any additional third parties except to the extent required to carry out obligations under this Agreement; and (iii) require that such Confidential Information be kept in a reasonably secure location.

 

7.4    Compliance with Law .  In the event that a Party hereto is required by law or by any legal process, including interrogatories, requests for information or documents, subpoena, civil investigative demand, depositions, or similar legal process, to disclose any Confidential Information, such Party shall provide the other Party with reasonably prompt, written notice of such request or requirement so that the other Party may seek, at its own cost, an appropriate protective order if it deems it appropriate to do so. If, in the absence of a protective order or the receipt of a waiver hereunder, the compelled Party is nonetheless, based on the advice of the Party’s legal counsel, required by law to disclose Confidential Information, such Party may disclose only that portion of the Confidential Information which such Party’s counsel reasonably believes the Party is legally required to disclose.

 

7.5    Use of Confidential Information .  The Confidential Information shall be used by each Party solely in the course of performing its obligations hereunder. The Parties shall not make Confidential Information available for use by or for the benefit of any other third party (other than for the purposes of obtaining price quotations to support the manufacture of the Products by Supplier), whether or not for consideration.

 

7.6    Return of Confidential Information . Each Party will return to the other Party or destroy (and certify to the other Party that such destruction has taken place) all Confidential Information in written form provided by the other Party, including any copies, upon termination of this Agreement.  Notwithstanding the foregoing, neither Party shall be required to destroy any of the other Party’s Confidential Information that is stored electronically as part of such Party’s disaster recovery program (provided that such Party shall maintain the confidentiality of any such electronically retained Confidential Information).

 

3



 

7.7    Limitations .  The obligations set forth in this Section 15 do not apply if and to the extent the Party receiving Confidential Information establishes that:  (i) the information disclosed to it was already known to it without obligation to keep it confidential; (ii) it received the information in good faith from a third party lawfully in possession thereof without obligation to keep such information confidential; (iii) the information was publicly known at the time of its receipt by it or has become publicly known other than by a breach of this Agreement; (iv) the information is independently developed by it without use of the other Party’s Confidential Information; or (v) it was disclosed under operation of Law, provided that the receiving Party has promptly notified the disclosing Party of any legal process requiring production of Confidential Information prior to compliance  in order to permit the disclosing party an opportunity to pursue precautions, including a protective order if possible, to insure confidential treatment of any information.

 

8      Notices.

 

8.1    General .  All notices permitted or required pursuant to this Agreement shall be written in  the English language and shall be either (1) hand-delivered, (2) deposited with a nationally recognized overnight delivery service, (3) deposited with the United States Post Office, certified mail, return receipt requested, postage prepaid.  All notices other than those sent by facsimile transmission shall be deemed to have been served when actually received, or upon refusal of delivery.  All notices shall be addressed to the parties to whom such notices are intended as set forth below:

 

If to Control4:

 

Control4 Corporation

Attn: S.V.P Supply Chain

11734 S. Election Road, Suite 200

Salt Lake City, Utah 84020-6432

 

Copy to: Control4 General Counsel

 

If to Supplier:

 

 

With a copy to:

SANMINA Corporation

SANMINA Corporation

2700 N. First Street

2700 N. First Street

San Jose, California 95134

San Jose, California 95134

Att’n: EVP, Sales

Att’n: Vice President & Corporate Counsel

Phone: (408) 964-3600

Phone: (408) 964-3600

Fax: (408) 964-3636

Fax: (408) 964-3636

 

8.2    Change of Address .  Either Party may change its address by giving notice to the other in accordance with this Section.

 

8.3    Exceptions .  Regular business communications such as Purchase Orders, engineering Change Orders, corrective action requests, and the like may be sent via electronic mail or facsimile to appropriate individuals within either Supplier.  Any regular business communication that will be relied upon as a material legal document must be delivered via one of the means noted in Section 9.1 above.

 

9      Insurance.

 

9.1    Comprehensive / Commercial General Liability .  Supplier will procure and maintain throughout the term of this Agreement a policy of comprehensive general or commercial general liability insurance with a combined single limit of not less than one million dollars ($1,000,000) for each occurrence.

 

9.2    Umbrella Coverage .  Supplier will procure and maintain throughout the term of this Agreement Umbrella coverage of not less than five million dollars ($5,000,000).

 

9.3    Requirements . Supplier will supply Control4 with a Certificate of Insurance with respect to each of the foregoing policies, except Workers Compensation, that names Control4 Corporation as an Additional Insured.  The insurance required hereunder will be issued by an insurance company or companies authorized to do business in the United States.  Supplier’s insurance will be primary and required to respond to and pay claims prior to other coverage.

 

10   General.

 

10.1  Independent Contractors .  In performing their respective obligations hereunder, each of the Parties shall operate as and have the status of an independent contractor and shall not act as or be joint venturers, or an agent or employee of the other Party.  Neither Party shall have any right or authority to assume or create any obligations of any kind or to make any representations or warranties on behalf of the other party, whether express or implied, or to bind the other party in any respect whatsoever.

 

10.2  Amendments .  Any mutually agreed terms which may be specified during the continuance of this Agreement, or any extension hereof, shall be incorporated into this Agreement in the form of an addendum signed by both Parties and attached hereto.

 

10.3  No Waiver .  No failure or delay by either Party in exercising any right, power, or remedy under this Agreement shall operate as a waiver of any such right, power, or remedy.  No waiver of any term or condition of this Agreement shall be effective, unless it is in writing and signed by the Party against whom such waiver or modification is sought to be enforced.  The express waiver of any right or default hereunder shall be effective only in the instance given and shall not operate as or imply a waiver of any similar right or default on any subsequent occasion.

 

10.4  Invalidity .  Should any provision of this Agreement be determined to be void, invalid or otherwise unenforceable by any court or tribunal of competent jurisdiction, such determination shall not affect the remaining provisions hereof which shall remain in full force and effect.

 

10.5  Choice of Law; Jurisdiction .

 

10.5.1     This Agreement shall be governed by and interpreted in accordance with the laws of the State of Utah, USA, without regard to provisions relating to conflicts of laws.  The provisions of the United Nations Conventions on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply to this Agreement.

 

10.5.2     The Parties agree that if any legal proceeding is commenced to interpret or enforce the provisions of this Agreement, the Utah District Court in and for the County of Salt Lake shall have exclusive jurisdiction over the matter.  Control4 and Supplier each consents to the personal jurisdiction of such Court. The prevailing Party shall be entitled to recover its costs and reasonable attorney’s fees from the non-prevailing Party in any legal dispute.

 

10.6  Entire Agreement .  The headings, font and bold and underlined type to the portions of this Agreement are for the convenience of the Parties only and have no legal effects.  This Agreement along with its Schedules constitutes the entire agreement between the Parties and may only be amended by an express, written document signed by the authorized representatives of both Parties.

 

10.7  Copies .  All copies duly signed and executed by both Parties shall be deemed to be originals of this Agreement

 

10.8  Authority .  The persons executing this Agreement on behalf of Control4 and Supplier represent and warrant that they each have the requisite corporate authority to do so and that their execution of this Agreement is not subject to any further ratification or approval whatsoever

 

10.9  Assignment .  Neither this Agreement nor any rights or obligations hereunder shall be transferred or assigned by either Party without the written consent of the other Party, which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed.  Notwithstanding the foregoing, this Agreement may be assigned in whole or in part by either Party with notice to the other Party (1) to any Affiliate of such Party provided that such Party remains secondarily liable under this

 

4



 

Agreement; and (2) to a successor in interest as a result of a reorganization, restructuring, demutualization or other change of control.  Notwithstanding the foregoing, either Party may assign its right to payment to a third party without the need for consent from the other Party.

 

5


 

Schedule A

Product Specifications and Pricing

 

Supplier is granted access to the Control4 PLM system where all of the Specifictions are stored for all Products to be manufactured by Supplier Consistent with the Agreement, upon completion of the design and effective when volume production commences, and unless an alternate timeframe is mutually agreed upon by both Parties in advance and in writing, Control4 must be notified prior to any changes to the bill of materials, approved vendor list or any other ECO changes at least four (4) weeks in advance of the implementation of any such change.  Depending on the type of change, Control4 may elect to have Supplier re-qualify such changes for the affected Product(s) to confirm there are no negative changes to form, fit, or function of the below specified Product(s).  Any Product changes not approved in advance in writing by Control4 may be deemed non-conforming material and in such event shall be rejected and returned to Supplier for repair or replacement at Supplier’s expense.

 

Product Specifications shall be delivered to Supplier through access to the Control4 PLM system, which includes bill of materials, approved MFG list, drawing, assembly specifications, programming specifications, functionality, certifications and test specifications.

 

Pricing for the Products is quoted originally and mutually agreed upon in writing by the Parties prior to production-released manufacturing.  Subsequent pricing shall be discussed at least twice per year during the semiannual price reduction exercise between the Parties, but may be reviewed more frequently based on any component price or availability event affecting any particular Product.

 

6



 

Schedule B — Terms of Delivery

 

1. Terms of Delivery

 

a.               Delivery is FCA Port for Ocean shipments and Ex Works for Control4 authorized air shipments (Incoterms 2011).

 

b.               All units shall be packaged and ,where applicable over packed in accordance with the drawings and specifications included in the Product definition in the Control4 PLM system.

 

c.                Shipments shall include accompanying documentation for build date and test data in accordance with the Specifications.

 

d.               From time to time Control4 may request Supplier pull in or push out the delivery of a given Purchase Order.  Supplier shall make commercially reasonable efforts to accommodate such a request(s).  In the case of a pull in, Control4 may assist Supplier, as needed, with expediting raw materials, finding raw materials in the open market or paying expedite fees to aid with the pull in of an affected Purchase Order.  Control4 may request Supplier push out or cancel the delivery of a given Purchase Order, Supplier shall make commercially reasonable efforts to reschedule raw materials, push out raw material deliveries, or other means to delay the shipment of the Purchase Order to avoid or reduce the costs or liability to Control4.  Control4 shall assist with any cancelation or storage fees where presented and agreed to in writing in advance.

 

f.             Supplier shall use commercially reasonable efforts to mitigate the cost and amount of all obsolete or excess component inventory purchased by Supplier either (1) with Control4 prior written or email approval; or (2) in support of a valid Purchase Order by either returning such inventory to the original vendor or using it in other Supplier projects, and Control4 shall only be liable for any remaining obsolete or excess component inventory (“Excess Inventory”). Within a reasonable time after the end of each calendar quarter, Supplier shall advise Control4 in writing of any Excess Inventory and its Inventory Cost (as defined below).  For the purpose of this Agreement, “Inventory Cost” shall mean Supplier’s quoted cost as stated on the bill of materials. Control4 shall pay Supplier its Inventory Cost for the Excess Inventory within sixty (60) days of the date of any undisputed invoice.  In the event the Parties cannot agree as to the Excess Inventory, Control4 shall pay Supplier for all non-disputed Excess Inventory in accordance with this Section. Upon request, Control4 will provide disposition instructions for specified Excess Inventory.

 

g.             Any two (2) contiguous production shipments in which Supplier provides less than 98.5% on time delivery, due to causes solely within Supplier’s control, as measured by the delivery date stated on a Purchase Order and accepted by Supplier, may be considered a material breach of the Agreement by Supplier.  [SANM Legal:  This requirement will need to be further discussed by the parties.]

 

2. Purchase Orders and Forecasts

 

a.               Purchase Orders .  Purchase orders will be provided by Control4 to Supplier five months prior to the expected ship date (six months prior to delivery for ocean shipments).  Each Purchase Order submitted by Control4 will be binding upon the Parties upon acceptance by Supplier. Supplier will be deemed to have accepted a Purchase Order if Supplier fails to reject such Purchase Order by notifying Control4 within forty eight (48) hours of its receipt thereof (excluding weekends and local government holidays).  Following acceptance of a Purchase Order, Supplier may not reject or deviate from such Purchase Order without Control4’s written approval, which Control4 may grant or withhold in its sole discretion.

 

b.               Forecast .  Control4 shall use commercially reasonable efforts to provide Supplier with a rolling one year, three hundred sixty-five (365) day, forecast of expected Product order quantities.  Supplier shall make purchase commitments (including purchase commitments for Long Lead-time raw materials and components no sooner than the Lead-time of such raw materials plus two weeks transformation time and whatever the requested freight method is for the applicable valid Purchase Order) to its materials and component suppliers (“ Vendors ”) based upon the then-current valid Production Orders and, as needed for components with longer lead times than the valid Purchase Orders allow for, the Forecast where approved in writing on a quarterly basis, and Control4 shall be responsible for all such raw materials and components.  Control4 acknowledges that it shall be financially liable for all raw materials and components ordered in accordance with this Section, including such reasonable expenses or overages such as Minimum Order Quantities required by Vendor but not including Economic Order Quantities or pre-purchase scheduled deliveries designed to benefit Supplier margins, and single partial reel quantities or otherwise reasonable amounts of raw material WIP that is not returnable to Vendor. At Control4’s request, Supplier shall use commercially reasonable efforts to minimize Control4’s liability for such raw materials and components by attempting to return them to the Vendor; provided, however, that Supplier shall not be obligated to attempt to return to Vendor Components, which are, in the aggregate, worth less than $1,000.

 

7



 

Schedule C — Quality Assuance Requirements

 

1.               Scope of this Schedule ]

 

1.1              Minimum Quality Guideline .  This Schedule defines the work to be performed and delivered to Control4 by Supplier according to the conditions specified in the Agreement.  This Schedule will set expectations and provide minimum guidelines for Supplier policies, procedures, and standards for quality assurance.

1.2              Quality Practice Agreement .  This Schedule is the basis for technical capability, organizational conditions, and processes which are applied by Supplier and Control4 in order to meet quality goals of both companies.

1.3              Costs .  Any costs related to performing the Services are the sole responsibility of Supplier.

 

2.               Definitions

 

Business Day

 

One of the standard, generally accepted days of business operation each week, apart from federal holidays, in the United States of America.

 

 

 

Catastrophic Issue

 

A Product failure that represents possible safety issues; which may include burns, flameouts, smoke, and any risk to persons, property, and/or the environment.

 

 

 

Chronic Case

 

A continuing Product failure that has been identified by Supplier, by Control4, or by Supplier’s sub-supplier.

 

 

 

Component

 

Means all materials, individual components and assemblies, which are ultimately to be incorporated into a Product or are designated to be incorporated into a Product.

 

 

 

Corrective Action

 

Means an action to eliminate the cause of a detected nonconformity and to prevent reoccurrence; more than one (1) nonconformity may exist in an FA Case.

 

 

 

Customer

 

Means an end-user and/or purchaser of a Product.

 

 

 

FA Case

 

Means a request for RCFA, which includes any related Product(s), derivative analysis, and supporting information describing the related failure event(s).

 

 

 

Failure Analysis

 

Means the same as RCFA.

 

 

 

Finished Assembly

 

Means all assemblies manufactured by Supplier or Supplier affiliates or any third party, including any Components included within that Finished Assembly, which are ultimately to be incorporated into a Product or are designated to be incorporated into a Product.

 

 

 

Initial Report

 

Means a report of preliminary RCFA findings, including problem description, fault isolation and testing strategies, and theory of failure, created per those requirements in the RCFA Procedures.

 

 

 

IQA/IQC

 

Incoming Quality Audit or Control

 

 

 

Quality Management System

 

The organizational structure, procedures, processes and resources needed to implement quality management plan.

 

 

 

RMA

 

Means Returned Merchandise (or Materials) Authorization.

 

 

 

Root Cause

 

Means the specific event or malfunction that caused failure in a Product, which if repaired or removed, another like event or malfunction would not occur.

 

 

 

Services

 

Means the activities provided by Supplier to Control4 in accordance with this Schedule, including Product receipt, handling, storage, failure analysis, data collection, RCFA, shipment, and disposition; in addition, report writing and presentation of data and findings.

 

3.               Quality Requirements

 

3.1              Supplier Quality . Supplier shall provide technical and organizational conditions in order to produce and supply high quality Products.

3.2              Control4 In-Bound Quality . If at any point the failure rates at Control4’S IQC exceed 0.5%, for Supplier related failures, Control4, at its sole discretion, may consider Supplier to be in material breach of this Agreement.

3.3              Warranty .  During the applicable Product warranty period (as defined in the Agreement), if any units have been returned for repair and shipped back to Control4 with multiple instances of test failure or failure to meet specifications as defined in this Agreement, Supplier shall replace the unit with a new unit at no extra charge or cost to Control4.

3.4              Corrective Action .  Supplier shall investigate and determine Root Cause of quality defects, with the purpose of implementing corrective actions that prevent like failure events.

 

8



 

4.               Quality Management System at Supplier Location

 

4.1              Supplier agrees to introduce and maintain a Quality Management System based on ISO 9001:2000 with the obligation to set a zero-defect goal and to continuously improve performance.

4.2              Production, inspection and/or packaging equipment provided by Control4 shall be included in the Quality Management System.

4.3              Control4 is interested in the protection and maintenance of our environment. Therefore, Supplier shall use an Environmental Management System based on ISO 14001 or similar.

 

5.               Quality Management System at Sub-Suppliers Location

 

5.1. If Production or inspection equipment, software, services, material or any other components are provided by sub-Suppliers, they will be part of Supplier´s Quality Management System. Otherwise Supplier will secure quality by adequate actions.

5.2. Supplier also shall require its sub-suppliers, or with written approval from Control4 for exception, introduce and maintain a Quality Management System based on ISO 9000 with the obligation for sub-suppliers to also set a zero-defect goal and to continuously improve their performance.

5.3. Control4 may demand documented evidence from Supplier showing the effectiveness of the Quality Management System utilized by its Sub-suppliers.

 

6.               Information

 

6.1. If it becomes evident that any quality requirements, such as quality characteristics, schedules or delivered quantities, cannot be met, Supplier shall inform Control4 immediately. Supplier shall also notify Control4 immediately of any deviations detected after delivery.

6.2. To support a rapid solution, Supplier shall disclose all necessary data and facts. Supplier agrees to seek approval of Control4 prior to:

 

·                   Changing of sub-suppliers

·                   Changing test methods/equipment

·                   Relocating Production sites

·                   Relocating Production equipment at the same site

·                   Outsourcing

·                   Substitution

 

6.3. In order to be able to check the impact of changes above, Supplier shall inform Control4 BEFORE, or notify Control4 in writing as soon as possible, any of the above are implemented. Duty to inform will not be applied in case of non Control4 specific standard parts.

 

7.              Audit

 

7.1.          Supplier shall authorize Control4 to determine through audits whether its quality assurance activities meet the requirements of Control4. The audit can be conducted as a system, process or Product audit. Supplier shall support even short-term audit date requests. Reasonable restrictions imposed by Supplier to safeguard business will be accepted and confidentiality will be warranted.

7.2.          In the event of quality problems, Supplier shall enable Control4 to conduct an audit at its sub-suppliers.

7.3.          Control4 shall communicate audit results to Supplier.

7.4.          If Control4 considers corrective actions to be needed, Supplier agrees to immediately prepare an action plan and implement it on schedule through Control4’s Supplier Corrective Action (SCAR) system.

7.5.          Supplier shall notify Control4 of all progress made.

 

8.               Product and process agreements

 

8.1.          The Products shall comply with agreed or warranted conditions (e.g. specification, data sheets, drawings, sample parts). Supplier shall promptly examine all documentation provided by Control4 (e.g. specifications, data sheets, drawings) within its Arena system. Supplier must use the Control4 Arena implementation as the official Product definition or “Product master”. All changes to the Products will be tracked in the Arena system.

8.2.          If Supplier finds that the Control4 documentation is incorrect, unclear, incomplete or different than a sample part, Supplier shall inform Control4 in writing prior to start of mass Production or performance of services.

8.3.          Mass Production and First Article Acceptance Report

 

·                                      Prior to starting mass Production, Supplier shall, if not agreed otherwise, submit a mass Production process validation plan, similar to PPAP per QS9000. Verification of applicability and capability shall be provided.

·                                      Prior to starting mass Production, Supplier shall submit initial samples of the Product built under mass Production conditions in agreed quantities and on schedule.

·                                      Mass Production may not be started until it is released by Control4 through the FAAR (First Article Acceptance Report) program.

 

9.               Process capability

 

9.1.          For all process characteristics, Supplier shall perform process planning (work plans, test plans, operating supplies, tooling, machinery, etc.).

9.2.          For functional and process critical characteristics Supplier shall review the suitability of the manufacturing facilities and shall document the results. Documented test results and process data must be made available to Control4 electronically.

9.3.          Product quality is monitored with periodic audits. “Special characteristics”, identified and agreed on between Control4 and Supplier shall, if applicable, be monitored electronically by statistic process control.

 

9



 

9.4.          Special characteristics and process capabilities shall be determined and documented.

9.5.          If not agreed otherwise, the following values shall be maintained:

 

Type Term Capability

Machine capability MFU Cmk > 1,33

Short-term process capability PFU Ppk > 1,

Long-term process capability PFU Cpk > 1,33

If the value above cannot be met, Supplier shall perform and document a 100% inspection prior to shipping, until the root cause has been determined and fixed.

In the case of process disruptions and quality deviations, Supplier shall analyze the causes, shall initiate improvement measures and review their effectiveness.

 

C pk

 

Sigma
level (σ)

 

Area under the  probability
density function
 Φ(σ)

 

Process yield

 

Process fallout (in terms
of DPMO/PPM)

 

0.33

 

1

 

0.6826894921

 

68.27%

 

317311

 

0.67

 

2

 

0.9544997361

 

95.45%

 

45500

 

1.00

 

3

 

0.9973002039

 

99.73%

 

2700

 

1.33

 

4

 

0.9999366575

 

99.99%

 

63

 

1.67

 

5

 

0.9999994267

 

99.9999%

 

1

 

2.00

 

6

 

0.9999999980

 

99.9999998%

 

0.002

 

 

10.        Control4’s quality expectation

 

10.1.                 Supplier is committed to achieving zero defects in delivered Product in the same way as Control4 is towards its customers. If the zero-defect goal is not attainable short-term, Control4 together with its Supplier shall set temporary upper limits for defect rates as an interim goal. Supplier shall propose and agree with Control4 on improvement actions. If the defect rate is below the upper limit, this does not release Supplier from its responsibility to process all complaints and to proceed with continuous improvement activities.

10.2.                 Based on a periodic Supplier rating, the quality performance of Supplier will be monitored and reported by Control4. It is expected that Supplier will monitor its quality performance as well. Within the Warranty Period , Supplier guarantees that all Products, which are only assembled or sold without modification, are free of defects, which might be caused by material defects or poor processing.

10.3.                 Control4 shall implement incoming inspections, functional tests, and manual test at its IQC using its sole discretion. All Products will be 100% inspected that have externally apparent shipping damage and conformation of the quantity and part number of the ordered Product will be verified according to supplied shipping documentation.

10.4.                 Discrepancies and failures are reported without delay. If the defect is not detected directly after delivery, Supplier will waive the claim of late notification of defects within the applicable warranty period defined above in the Agreement.

10.5.                 If, in exceptional cases, Supplier is unable to supply Products conforming to the specification, Supplier must obtain a concession from Control4 prior to delivery.

10.6.                 Control4 may, following notification to Supplier, at Supplier’s expense, hire an inspector to be located at Supplier’s manufacturing facility to perform outgoing quality inspections until such time that failure rates at the facility fall below the mutually agreed upon upper failure limit.

10.7.                 Prototype and pre-production units are exempted as well as other shipments where Control4 has agreed to such in advance.  Supplier shall work closely with the Control4 to rectify any reported defects from the initial product shipments units.

10.8.                 Supplier agrees to implement mutually agreed upon comments and ideas from Control4 to improve Product quality by modifying Production and quality assurance activities.

10.9.                 If the supply of components is not conforming to specifications, should threaten to cause a Production interruption at Control4 or its customers, Supplier, in consultation with Control4, must seek a remedy through suitable mutually agreed immediate actions (substitute delivery, sorting, rework, special shifts, rush shipment etc.).Supplier then analyzes defects without delay, with support from Control4 to the extent necessary and possible.

10.10.          Defective parts shall be returned to Supplier. Supplier agrees to analyze each deviation and to notify Control4 promptly of the cause of the deviation, initiated corrective and preventive measures as well as their effectiveness.

 

11.       Safety and Environmental Regulations

 

11.1.                 Supplier commits to complying with all legal regulations regarding the environment, health, and striving to avoid all negative effects on humans and environment through an adequate organization and realization of environmental protection in the company.

11.2.                 For this, the implementation and further development of an Environmental and Occupational Safety Management Systems is required.

11.3.                 If there is an exception for these requirements it must be clearly communicated to Control4 in writing for every single case.

 

12.        Failure Analysis (FA) of Returned Products

 

12.1.                 FA Case Prioritization

 

·                                      Prioritization of FA Cases will be determined and communicated by Control4 to Supplier.

·                                      If Supplier should determine that an FA Case is, or may be, a Catastrophic Issue and thus qualifies for Priority 1 status (see Section “ Priority Definitions ” below), Supplier must notify Control4 within one business day of determination, and prepare the Product for shipment to Control4. Supplier must also verify, by written acknowledgment of receipt by Control4, that such notification was received by Control4.

·                                      Priority Definitions

 

·                   Priority 1 (“P1”) — Catastrophic Events : A catastrophic Product failure that represents possible safety

 

10



 

issues, which may include burns, flameouts, smoke, and any risk to persons, property and/or the environment.

·                   Priority 2 (“P2”)  High Priority Cases: A Product failure event with a significant impact; this event may occur at any time post-sale and is not constrained by the age of the Product.

·                   Priority 3 (“P3”) — Standard Cases: As defined per Product.

·                   Priority 4 (“P4”) — Extended Cases: As defined per Product.

 

12.2.                 Priority Service Levels

 

·                                      For FA Case Initial Report: The time from FA Case receipt to when FA Case Fault Duplication and Initial Report must be completed and submitted to Control4:

 

·                   Priority 1 — as soon as possible — immediate and consistent work must be performed until FA Case closure

·                   Priority 2 — Three (3) Business Days

·                   Priority 3 — Ten (10) Business Days

·                   Priority 4 — Twenty (20) Business Days

 

·                                      For FA Case Root Cause results: The time from FA Case receipt to when FA Case Fault Isolation and Root Cause results must be completed and submitted to Control4:

 

·                   Priority 1 — as soon as possible — immediate and consistent work must be performed until FA Case closure

·                   Priority 2 — Ten (10) Business Days

·                   Priority 3 — Twenty (20) Business Days

·                   Priority 4 — Thirty (30) Business Days

 

13.        FA Case Receiving Procedures

 

13.1                    Receiving Product

 

·                                      Control4 must request an RMA from Supplier.  Control4 can contact Supplier’s technical support or Logistics RMA Coordinator to receive the RMA.

·                                      Once the Product associated with the FA Case is physically received, Supplier must:

 

·                   Notify Control4 within one (1) Business Day; and

·                   Immediately assign the FA Case into Supplier workflow according to its priority; and

·                   Assign a case owner to the FA Case within one (1) Business Day of receiving an FA Case.  The “Case Owner” is the technical point of contact for an FA Case and will own the FA Case until it is closed and/or reassigned by Supplier.

 

13.2                    Product Inspection

 

·                                      If it is determined and/or suspected that the Product or the packaging incurred physical damage during transportation, Supplier must take a photograph of the evidence and archive it digitally with the FA Case.

·                                      Discrepant Receipt or Incomplete Information

 

·                   If the Product received does not match the Product detailed in the FA Case (i.e. is a discrepant receipt), then Supplier must:

·                   Record the following Product information with the FA Case and send a notification to Control4 including Product’s serial number, RMA number, Product ID, and digital photograph of packaging and Product; and

·                   Wait for further instructions from Control4 before proceeding to disposition of the Product.

·                   If Product does not match failure information, or if Product is not fully configured as recorded, Case Owner will contact Control4, notifying him/her of FA Case inadequacies.  For situations where FA Case data is missing as listed above, Case Owner will:

·                   Send an inquiry to Control4 within one (1) Business Day of identifying specific issues and/or data needed to proceed with the FA Case.

·                   If requested information is received, and/or if dialog with Control4 is initiated where requested information is forthcoming, then Case Owner will confirm receipt of requested information and proceed to Section “Initial Inspection and Supporting Information.”

·                   If requested information is not received within five (5) days despite active pursuit by Case Owner, then Case Owner must write a report detailing: (i) steps taken to retrieve the required information; and (ii) justification for closing the FA Case without information. Case Owner must recommend the FA Case for closure to Control4   for reason of “Insufficient Information” and proceed to Section “FA Case Approval.”

 

14.        FA Case Investigation

 

14.1                    FA Case investigation must be conducted in a manner so as to fully understand failure issues and for the following purposes (“Case Investigation”):

 

·                                      Associate similar active FA Cases to consolidate work.

·                                      Identify similar failures in manufacturing and/or repair services.

·                                      Identify known issues to prevent redundancy of work.

·                                      Supplier shall make every effort to ensure that the cause of the failure is not removed or destroyed during all phases of RCFA, including the inspection, testing, and investigation of the FA Case.

 

14.2                    Case Owner will investigate all available history regarding Products associated with an FA Case, including but not limited to:

 

·                                      Test history of Product

·                                      Manufacturing repair/rework history of Product(s)

·                                      Service repair/rework history of Product(s)

·                                      Software-related issues of the same version of the FA Case resulting in similar issues described in the FA Case

·                                      Corrective Action FA Case number(s) relating to the Product(s)

·                                      Existing field notice number(s) relating to Product(s)

 

11



 

14.3                    Supplier will aggressively monitor ongoing FA Cases for the purpose of identifying and escalating any suspected Chronic Case, and associating similar failure events which may occur in multiple FA Cases.  If similar events or associated FA Cases are discovered, then Supplier must:

 

·                                      Assign one internal Case Owner to the similar events.

·                                      Notify all current Case Owners with possible similar event FA Cases of the suspected similar failure events.

·                                      If Case Owner determines that the FA Case may be a Chronic Case, then Case Owner must notify Control4 within one (1) Business Day.

·                                      Supplier will use all reasonable efforts in gathering information, investigating previous reference FA Cases, and communicating with prior Case Owners during the investigation to prevent redundancy of work with prior failure events.

 

15.        Fault Duplication

 

15.1                    The FA Case fault duplication phase will include the following actions (“Fault Duplication”):

 

·                                      Create and execute appropriate test plans for the purpose of duplicating a specific FA Case failure.

·                                      Capture and log all lessons learned and knowledge gained in a structure that will add value to future FA Cases by creating a clear and concise knowledge base.

·                                      Identify known issues to prevent redundancy of work and to associate similar active FA Cases to consolidate work.

·                                      If, at any time during Fault Duplication, more information regarding the application of the Product is needed, the Case Owner will contact Control4 to request the necessary information.

 

15.2                    If a fault is confirmed through Fault Duplication, then:

 

·                                      For the purpose of creating a knowledge base for future reference, Case Owner must capture and log, with the FA Case, the specific test plan and/or technique required to duplicate the fault AND the specific result (i.e. error code, Product behavior, etc.) that represents the fault determined to be the failure issue.

·                                      Proceed to Section “Fault Isolation;” else continue to next step in this Section.

·                                      If a fault other than that which the Customer-reported is confirmed through Fault Duplication:

·                                      For the purpose of creating a knowledgebase for future reference, Case Owner must capture and log, with the FA Case, the specific test plan and/or technique required to duplicate the fault AND the specific result (i.e. error code, Product behavior, etc.) that represents the fault determined to be the Customer’s issue.

·                                      Case Owner must update the FA Case accordingly and contact Control4 to validate that the failure duplicated by Supplier was not witnessed by the Customer.

 

15.3                    If a fault is found to represent a Customer-witnessed failure, proceed to Section “Fault Isolation;” else notify Control4 of the fault.

15.4                    In the event the FA Case failure or any anomaly was not confirmed during the specific and exhaustive investigation conducted by Supplier, then Case Owner must log all Fault Duplication efforts with the FA Case within one hour after completion of the investigation.  Upon review, Supplier and Control4 will agree upon a course of action:

 

·                                      That Supplier will continue testing and will revamp the test plan and log new investigation plans with the FA Case; or

·                                      To determine justification for FA Case closure if it is agreed that failure is not a hardware failure; Case Owner will log the justification in the FA Case and will proceed to Section “FA Case Approval.”

 

15.5                    If the Case Owner has exhausted all means of duplicating the failure and these have been sufficiently documented, then Case Owner must write a report summarizing all steps taken and theories pursued in Fault Duplication, and a clear justification for the FA Case to be closed as “Can Not Duplicate,” then proceed to Section “FA Case Approval.”

 

16.        Initial Report

 

16.1                    The Initial Report for each FA Case must be logged with the FA Case within the time specified in Section “Priority Service Levels.”

16.2                    Required Initial Report topics may already be recorded with the FA Case as an ongoing part of Case Investigation and Fault Duplication.  Supplier must include the following information in the Initial Report:

 

·                                      “Problem Description,” which should include:

A detailed description of the problem reported by the Customer; this description may already have been entered with the FA Case when it was opened.  If the original problem description is unclear or incomplete, the Case Owner will author a summary of the problem description in the Initial Report.

 

·                                      “Case Details,” which should include:

 

·                   Details of the FA Case, including FA Case number, Product identification information (“PID”), confirmed serial numbers of Products, etc.

·                   “Fault Duplication Plan,” which should include:

 

·                                      Details of the testing method that will be used to reproduce the failure, and instructions on how the failure will be reproduced.

·                                      “Fault Duplication Results,” which should include:

 

·                   Details of the Fault Duplication findings.

 

·                                      “Explanation of Impact,” which should include:

 

·                   Description of indicative failure’s impact on Customer operations and/or field.

·                   References to previous reported like failures.

·                   Reference to any trend information indicating the failure may reoccur.

·                   Instructions on what action can be taken in the event this failure reoccurs.

·                   Instructions on a work-around procedure or prevention action available for the Customer.

 

17.        Fault Isolation

 

17.1                    The FA Case fault isolation phase will include the following actions (“Fault Isolation”):

 

·                                      Create and execute a customized investigation plan for the purpose of identifying the reason why the failure occurred.

·                                      Capture and log all lessons learned and knowledge gained in a structure that will add value to future FA Cases by creating a clear and concise knowledge base.

·                                      Identify known issues to prevent redundancy of work, and associate and coordinate work on similar active FA Cases.

 

12



 

17.2                    If at any time during Fault Isolation it is determined that the FA Case under investigation is a known failure, refer to Section “Associating FA Cases.”

17.3                    The Fault Isolation results for each FA Case must be logged with the FA Case within the time specified in Section “Priority Service Levels.”

 

18.        Theory of Failure

 

18.1                    Once an FA Case completes Fault Duplication, the Case Owner shall develop a “theory of failure.” The theory of failure is a hypothesis of the cause of the failure event, which Supplier will assume when proceeding with Fault Isolation and with Root Cause investigation (see Sections “Fault Isolation” and “Root Cause” below for description).  The theory of failure must be recorded with the FA Case.

18.2                    Supplier will initiate Fault Isolation phase, logging all efforts in the FA Case as they are conducted.

18.3                    Case Owner must update the theory of failure in the FA Case whenever evidence is found that changes the theory of failure.

 

19.        Notification & Containment

 

19.1                    The purpose of notification and containment is to prevent further exposure of the failure in the field.

19.2                    In the FA Case, the Case Owner must record the Explanation of Impact (See Section “Topics for Initial Report” above).

19.3                    Case Owner must copy Control4 via email on any communications to Supplier’s Product manufacturing and Supplier’s repair services organizations regarding any new FA Case failure (not a failure mode that is known, but a failure that falls outside previously identified exposure, etc.).

19.4                    All notifications must include instructions on how to duplicate the failure, as well as a method for positively determining bad Product from good.  Methods may include Product and/or Component date code information; specific non-standard manufacturing tests used to expose failure; and/or visual inspection methods.

19.5                    Control4, with the active involvement of the Case Owner, will determine what actions to take and whom to communicate with in executing any actions deemed required to contain the failure.

19.6                    In the FA Case, Case Owner will log all plans, actions, and results of any containment action(s) taken, including:

 

·                                      Yield results of any screening technique implemented at the manufacturing and/or service repair site (attach spreadsheets, etc.).

·                                      Contact information for owners of containment actions.

·                                      Reference to relevant Corrective Action(s) already initiated or containment actions against FA Case failure mode already being pursued.

 

20.        Fault Isolation Processes

 

20.1                    Case Owner shall perform as complete IPC-610 inspection as possible without disturbing any evidence of the theorized failure and record results.

20.2                    Case Owner shall exhaust all non-destructive methods of isolation prior to pursuing any destructive methods.  Examples of non-destructive methods include: X-ray, logic analyzer, ICT, boundary scan/flying probe, configuration modification, fault injection, etc.

20.3                    Upon exhausting all non-destructive methods relevant to the FA Case, update the FA Case with all findings, both positive and negative.  Updates should be recorded in a timely manner.

20.4                    Proceed with destructive isolation methods if necessary.  Case Owner must take into account both the available linked FA Cases (demonstrating like failures), and the population of Product available for analysis when planning any destructive Fault Isolation methods.

20.5                    Upon achieving Fault Isolation of the cause of the failure event:

 

·                                      Case Owner must log in the FA Case the methodology and/or technique, which was required to isolate the fault. Information should be logged with the intent of creating a knowledge base for future reference.

·                                      Case Owner must log the specific result (i.e. error code, Product behavior, etc.) that identifies the isolated fault.  Information should be logged with the intent of creating a knowledge base for future reference.

·                                      Case Owner must update the FA Case accordingly and proceed to Section “Root Cause;” else continue to next step in this Section.

 

21.        Failure to Isolate Fault

 

21.1                    If the Case Owner has exhausted all means in attempting to isolate the failure that has been duplicated, the Case Owner will write a report summarizing all steps taken, all theories pursued, and a clear justification for recommending one of the following actions:

 

·                                      Nominate the FA Case for escalation to Control4; or

·                                      Nominate the FA Case be closed as “Can Not Duplicate” or “Can Not Isolate” and proceed to Section “FA Case Approval.”

 

22.        Proceed to Root Cause

 

22.1                    Upon completion of the Fault Isolation, Case Owner will advance the FA Case to Root Cause.  Proceed to Section “Root Cause.”

22.2                    If Case Owner believes that Root Cause should not be pursued for a specific FA Case, then proceed to Section “FA Case Approval.”

 

23.        Root Cause Analysis

 

23.1                    Case Owner shall conduct a Root Cause Analysis for each applicable FA Case

 

·                                      The purpose of Root Cause analysis is to identify the specific event or malfunction that caused failure in a Product, which if repaired or removed, another like event or malfunction would not occur.

·                                      The Root Cause analysis will endeavor to achieve the following:

 

·                   Identify field exposure of failure.

·                   Provide data and recommendations for failure containment.

·                   Provide engineering evidence to drive conformance by Component Supplier and/or Product manufacturer to specifications and corrective actions.

·                   Provide engineering expertise to improve design and manufacturing processes and procedures.

 

13



 

·                   Identify correlations of failure modes among Products.

·                   Provide clear supporting data and recommendations for implementation of Corrective Actions.

 

24.        Root Cause Investigation

 

24.1                    Case Owner will initiate the Root Cause investigation phase and will log all efforts with the FA Case as they occur. The Case Owner of the FA Case during the Root Cause phase may be different from the Case Owner of the FA Case during previous phases of RCFA.

24.2                    For all FA Cases, Supplier is accountable for discovering the Root Cause “event” that caused the failure, either by Contact FA’s own means or through the use of external facilities as necessary.

24.3                    Every effort must be made in ensure that non-destructive analysis methods are pursued and exhausted prior to using any destructive analysis method.

24.4                    Special attention must be made to qualify Products available for destructive analysis to prevent inconclusive Root Cause analysis results.

24.5                    Case Owner must design the tests to validate or disprove Root Cause theories.  FA Case Owner is responsible for coordinating with the appropriate organizations in Case Owner’s company to procure resources required for such tests.

24.6                    Case Owner must log the following information with the FA Case at a minimum interval as defined above in Section “Priority Service Levels.”

 

·                                      Component disposition changes.

·                                      Changes in Root Cause theory.

·                                      A journal of tests to be performed, when, by who, and their results (including photos, charts, video and raw data).

·                                      Conclusions drawn from test results.

·                                      Tracking information from carriers, when onward shipping is required.

 

 

25.        Third Party RCFA Analysis

 

25.1                    Supplier is responsible for managing the relationship with any third party when submitting a Component to the third party for Failure Analysis.

25.2                    Supplier will manage the third party to perform within a reasonable timeline for providing status updates and FA Case conclusions, and Supplier will ensure that any third party failure analysis results meet the definitions of Root Cause Analysis and Corrective Action.

25.3                    Case Owner is responsible for authoring the final report based on findings provided by the third party.

 

26.        Root Cause Report

 

26.1                    Supplier shall draft a Root Cause Report that describes the story of the entire life of the failure: from the point when the possibility of a failure was introduced, to describing the impact of the failure on the Product, to identifying a complete list of affected Products, through to a recommendation for a Corrective Action which will remove the possibility of the failure occurring again.

26.2                    The Root Cause Report must include all information relevant to the FA Case, including but not limited to the following information, as applicable:

 

·                                      Root Cause closure reason

·                                      Corrective Actions and Corrective Actions Case number(s) relating to the Case

·                                      Field notice number(s) relating to the Case

·                                      Top level assembly

·                                      Serial number/MAC Address/Zigbee Address

·                                      Control4 part number

·                                      Component manufacturer

·                                      Component manufacturer part number

·                                      Location of failure on the printed circuit board assembly

·                                      All relevant date and lot codes

·                                      Any other information relevant to the FA Case

 

27.        Corrective Actions

 

27.1                    For all Corrective Actions implemented, it is the Case Owner’s responsibility to ensure that it will sufficiently and effectively address the Root Cause identified and will likely prevent similar failures from occurring.

27.2                    Case Owner must determine if a Corrective Action recommended and/or implemented by Supplier and/or a third party engaged by Supplier for RCFA adequately addresses the Root Cause.  Case Owner will ensure that such Corrective Action is documented in detail and logged with the FA Case.

27.3                    Corrective Actions, both those recommended by Case Owner and those implemented by a third party and/or Supplier, must include the following information:

 

·                                      Date of implementation.

·                                      Method of identifying the Component / Product manufactured using the corrected process.

·                                      Method of identifying the Component / Product manufactured using the faulty process.

·                                      Plan for and/or data confirming that the Corrective Action is successful in resolving the Root Cause.

 

28.        FA Case Approval

 

28.1                    FA Case Approval Procedure

 

·                                      To close an FA Case after completion of Root Cause analysis, Case Owner must complete the topics required for the Root Cause report.  Case Owner must also provide any additional information agreed upon by Supplier and Control4.

·                                      To close an FA Case if the FA Case did not proceed to Root Cause analysis, Case Owner must fully justify, in writing with the FA Case, the FA Case closure reason or the reason for not pursuing Root Cause analysis, and submit this to Control4.

·                                      FA Cases pending closure approval will be reviewed by Control4 or Case Owner cannot close an FA Case without approval from Control4.

 

14



 

29.        RCFA Administration

 

29.1                    Communications and Reporting

 

·                                      Supplier must designate an operations manager (“Supplier Operations Manager “) and proxy as primary and secondary points of contact for all operational topics related to RCFA.

·                                      Control4 Quality Manager will be Supplier’s first point of contact for all communications to parties within Control4, unless otherwise directed.

·                                      For all Supplier communications with other parties, Supplier must copy Control4 on each message to ensure that Control4 is kept informed.

·                                      Supplier must provide the following written reports to Control4 as requested:

 

·                   FA Case receipt and backlog report

·                   FA Case closure report, with summary of findings

·                   Inventory of Products

·                   Product disposition report

 

·                                      Supplier will attend daily/weekly/monthly calls or operational meetings, as necessary, upon the request of the Control4 to ensure acceptable performance of the Services.

 

30.        Supplier Product Readiness

 

30.1                    Supplier must be ready to perform RCFA on any Product from the date of first shipment of the Product to Control4 unless otherwise agreed between Supplier and Control4.

30.2                    Control4 reserves the right to verify that Supplier is RCFA-ready at the point of first shipment to Control4 for each Product.

 

31.        Escalation

 

31.1                    Supplier must escalate issues, which may impact performance of the Services, including requests for more FA Case information, to Control4.

31.2                    Supplier must copy Control4 on any escalation-related communications, which are related to the performance or response, or lack thereof, of any sub-supplier.

 

32.        Shipping

 

32.1                    Shipping Requirements

 

·                                      Supplier may be required, for the purposes of RCFA, to ship Product to worldwide destinations designated by Control4.

·                                      Supplier must use industry-standard operating procedures to ship the FA Case Product in its entirety to the appropriate location and contact person named by Control4, and inform the destination party of relevant tracking information.  Supplier must mark the FA Case number in a prominent location on the external package.

·                                      Supplier is responsible for scheduling shipments, defining shipping requirements, shipment configuration, labeling, shrink-wrapping, and performing pallet utilization and preparation to optimize cost and service for any shipment necessary in performing the Services.

·                                      Supplier must maintain, and produce upon request, all physical and electronic documentation and data relating to the importation, exportation and international transport of the Product (e.g., Commercial Invoice, Packing List, Airway Bill, Customs Entry Documents, export and import permits, VAT and indirect tax payment receipts, proof of delivery, etc.) and any relevant safety handling forms for a period of not less than five (5) years from the date of each shipment or as otherwise required by law.  Supplier will monitor compliance with such requirements.

 

32.2                    Costs

 

·                                      In-warranty units: Supplier shall provide a detailed RCFA of Control4 field failed units at no cost to Control4.

·                                      Out-of warranty units: Supplier shall provide a detail RCFA of Control4 field failed units at the rate to be agreed by the Parties in writing.

 

32.3                    Shipping

 

·                                      Shipment of any Product back to Supplier for the purpose of performing RCFA is the sole responsibility of Supplier and must be conducted per the RCFA procedures.

 

33.        Inventory Management

 

33.1                    Inventory Requirements

 

·                                      Supplier must have the ability to locate a Product by serial number, MAC/Zigbee address and/or FA Case number at all times and immediately upon request.

·                                      Supplier must verify the physical location a specified Product within four (4) business hours of any request by Control4.

·                                      Supplier must provide an inventory count of all Products on Supplier premises as requested for the operational meetings.

·                                      If requested by Control4, Supplier must provide Control4 with an accurate yearly physical inventory count of all Products on Supplier premises.

·                                      Supplier must submit an inventory report to Control4 within two (2) Business Days of conducting a physical inventory.

 

34.        Performance Evaluation

 

34.1                    Supplier must attend operational reviews with Control4 as requested, and must provide supporting data for performance metrics and other measurements relevant to the Company’s performance of the RCFA Services.  Performance will be evaluated through Control4’s Supply Management team.

 

15


 

 

Schedule D — Manufacturing and Core Requirements

 

1.               Purpose

 

This Schedule I establishes the core manufacturing and quality assurance requirements for Supplier, and wherever applicable, Supplier shall ensure that Supplier and its contract manufacturers comply with the requirements contained herein as well as any other requirements or terms of delivery communicated to Supplier from time to time by Control4.  This Schedule further describes the standard by which Control4 will review and assess Supplier’s performance and ability to deliver the Products.  Any deviation from these manufacturing core requirements must be noted and approved by Control4 in writing prior to such deviation.

 

2.               Scope

 

Supplier is responsible for the quality management of the entire product life cycle from concept to End of Life (EOL).

 

This Schedule does not address the business and the design engineering aspects.  Following these expectations does not guarantee product qualification; product qualification will be based on actual results of the qualification process.  Additional requirements may be specified in the Supplier Agreement, the Control4 technical specification, PRD (Product Requirements Definition) or otherwise in writing by Control4.

 

3.               Manufacturing Core Requirements

 

3.1.          Manufacturing Quality Requirements

 

3.1.1          Components within the Products

 

Supplier shall ensure that all the components used on the Products have fulfilled component level reliability qualifications per appropriate industry standards.  Moreover, Supplier shall also ensure that the components used meet the performance criteria specified by the component vendors as applicable to the Products.

 

3.1.2          Traceability

 

3.1.2.1            Component Traceability

 

Control4 requires traceability for all components and sub-assemblies used within the Products.  Exceptions to this requirement may be made by Control4 in the applicable Statement of Work (SOW).

 

3.1.2.2            Product Traceability

 

Supplier shall have the ability to trace Products by lot code, date code, or unique identifier (e.g. product MAC ID or serial number).  Supplier shall have the ability to conform to a Product specific serialization scheme if required by Control4 in an SOW.  The records shall be readily provided to Control4 upon request.  Supplier shall also have the ability to identify the process and repair history of a Product.  The process and repair history of a Product shall be included in the Engineering Failure Analysis (EFA)/Root Cause Failure Analysis (RCFA) report or provided to Control4 upon request.

 

3.1.3          Compliance Requirement

 

3.1.3.1            Requirements for Lead-free

 

Supplier shall ensure that the Products meets lead-free the requirements defined in the current European Union RoHS specification.  In addition, Supplier shall ensure the lead free components used in its Products meet applicable industry standard reliability expectations.

 

Supplier shall have the ability to track and ensure that its component/sub-assembly vendors are providing compliant/ reliable materials.  Supplier shall provide Certificates of Compliance for all Products that are supplied to Control4.  All non-consumer lead-free products shall have solder-joint reliability and tin whisker testing completed and meet requirements per industry standards IPC/JEDEC JP002 - Current Tin Whiskers Theory and Mitigation Practices Guideline and JEDEC/JESD201 - Requirements for Tin Whisker Susceptibility of Tin and Tin Alloy Surface Finishes on components used within its Products. Supplier shall maintain and have readily available all records related to lead-free qualifications for up to seven (7) years or as otherwise agreed by Control4.

 

3.1.3.2            China RoHS

 

Supplier shall comply with all of the requirements of “China RoHS” for all Products.  Supplier shall affix the needed documentation and/or labeling on Products, when specified in the Control4 technical specification or PRD.

 

3.1.3.3            Conflict Minerals.

 

Supplier represents and warrants that it is in full compliance with conflict minerals laws, including, without limitation, Section 1502 of the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act of 2010 as it may be amended from time to time and any regulations, rules, decisions or orders relating thereto adopted by the Securities and Exchange Commission or successor governmental agency responsible for adopting regulations relating thereto (collectively, “Dodd-Frank Section 1502”).  Supplier must cooperate with Control4 to make available to Control4 and/or its agents, full material declarations that identify the sources of and amount of all substances contained in the Products. Unless Control4 specifically agrees in writing that a particular Product may contain a particular material, Supplier will also provide a statement that the Products do not contain various materials at issue in applicable laws and regulations. Supplier must declare each Product’s compliance to all applicable hazardous material legislation and identify any substances that are banned or must be declared under applicable laws. In addition, Supplier will make available any documentation that supports the declaration. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, Supplier agrees to disclose to Control4, upon Control4’s request, to the extent known or discoverable by

 

16



 

Supplier following inquiry, the original source of all minerals contained in the Product. If Supplier does not know the original source of the minerals, Supplier agrees to cooperate with Control4, including disclosing from whom Supplier purchased the minerals and urging others to disclose such information, so that the original source of minerals can be accurately determined and reported. Supplier shall comply with all laws regarding the sourcing of minerals, including, without limitation, laws prohibiting the sourcing of minerals from mines controlled by combatants and Dodd-Frank Section 1502.  Without any further consideration, Supplier shall provide such further cooperation as Control4 may reasonably require in order to meet any obligations it may have under conflict minerals laws, including, without limitation, under Dodd-Frank Section 1502.

 

3.1.4          Workmanship Standards

 

3.1.4.1            Cosmetic/Workmanship Inspection Specification

 

Supplier shall comply with Control4’s Cosmetic Inspection Specification. Unless an alternate cosmetic specification agreed upon in the SOW, the above mentioned specification shall serve as the default cosmetic specification for all Products manufactured or produced for Control4.

 

3.1.4.2            Printed Circuit Board Assembly (PCBA) Acceptability

 

All PCBAs used within the Products shall comply with the IPC-A-610, Class 2 standard (latest revision) - Acceptability of Electronic Assemblies for visual quality acceptability of electronic assemblies.

 

3.1.4.3            PCB workmanship quality

 

IPC-A-600 Class 2 standard (latest revision) - Acceptability of Printed Boards shall serve as the acceptability criteria for all PCBs used within the Products. PCB’s used within Products shall meet the requirements of IPC-6012 (latest revision).

 

3.1.4.4            Screening and rework process

 

Supplier shall comply with the IPC-7711 (latest revision) - Rework of Electronic Assemblies and the IPC-7721 (latest revision) - Repair and Modification of Printed boards and Electronic assemblies for screening or rework processes required on PCBAs used within the Products.

 

3.1.4.5            Packaging

 

Supplier will package Products in accordance with good commercial practice, and in a manner acceptable to common carriers for shipment and adequate to ensure undamaged arrival of the Products.  Packaging provided by Supplier shall ensure that all material arrives at Control4 or it’s customers undamaged given normal wear and tear under standard shipping and handling conditions.

 

3.1.5            Process Control

 

Supplier is solely responsible and liable for the quality of the Product(s) and/or components procured, manufactured, or repaired for Control4. Any approval of Supplier’s methods or processes by Control4 does not release Supplier of this responsibility and liability.

 

3.1.5.1            Statistical Process Control (SPC)

 

Supplier shall define and implement an SPC system involving all critical process nodes, including any factory shop floor controls, critical equipment capabilities, preventive maintenance, and calibration procedures performed according to EIA-557 (latest revision) - Statistical Process Control Systems. Supplier shall also provide applicable reports to Control4 when requested.

 

3.1.5.2            Electro Static Discharge (ESD)

 

Supplier shall comply with applicable industry standard ESD practices in its operations, including but not limited to JEDEC JESD22-A114 (latest revision) - Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitivity Testing Human Body Model (HBM) and JEDEC JESD22-A115 (latest revision) - Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitivity Testing Machine Model (MM).  The use of equivalent industry standards is acceptable.

 

3.1.5.3            Shelf life, Moisture Sensitivity Level (MSL) and Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS)

 

Supplier shall have documented policies and procedures around component shelf life, MSL and use of hazardous materials. Supplier shall comply with the industry standards J-STD-20 - Moisture/Reflow Sensitivity Classification for Nonhermetic Solid State Surface Mount Devices and J-STD-033 - Standard for Handling, Packing, and Shipping and Use of Moisture/Reflow sensitive surface mount devices.

 

3.1.5.4            Work Instruction

 

Supplier shall have controlled work instructions readily available to production personnel, including detail information such as equipment/tools, equipment parameter settings, process parameters, process flow charts, drawings, visual template, etc.

 

17



 

3.1.5.5            Environment Control

 

Supplier shall monitor and control the production environment to ensure that critical process parameters are met.  For example, controlled temperature/ humidity conditions on the shop floor, lighting, and other conditions as required by Control4.

 

3.1.5.6            Repair Process Control

 

Supplier shall ensure that reworked Products (for in-process defects) continue to meet Product quality and reliability expectations. The rework process flow shall include any necessary inspection and tests to ensure the above.

 

3.1.6          Engineering Failure Analysis (EFA)

 

3.1.6.1            Field Failures

 

When necessary, Supplier shall perform Failure Analysis as per Control4’s RCFA procedures.

 

3.1.6.2            Factory Failures

 

Supplier shall promptly remove components or materials causing factory failures and design defects out of its Work In Progress (“WIP”) to ensure that it can contain failures within its factory and thereby prevent field exposure. Supplier shall provide Control4 notification of any such failures or defects which may impact Control4 or its customers as it relates to the form, fit or function of a Product.

 

3.1.7          Test and Quality Records

 

Supplier shall have a system of maintaining test and quality records and data and shall promptly retrieve and transmit such records and data to Control4 upon request. Supplier shall archive all test records and reports, yield reports, field return rate reports and failure analysis reports up to five (5) years or as agreed to by Control4.

 

Supplier shall provide the following data monthly, or in some cases weekly, or on a different frequency agreed between Supplier and Control4:

 

·                   Manufacturing process data, trends, and target goals (with explanation about how the goals were established).

·                   List or information on corrective actions (process improvements, training, documentation, etc) in areas where monthly goals are not being met.

·                   Pareto of Top Ten MFG defects by Product and process area.

 

The above data and the associated reports shall be provided in a format recommended by Control4, or in an equivalent format agreed upon between Control4 and Supplier, that facilitates the automated importation of such data into Control4’s Quality Management System.   Supplier shall also meet with Control4 personnel on a weekly or monthly basis, or when necessary, or as mutually agreed upon to review the reports.

 

Some important data such manufacturing process data, including test results, will be electronically transferred to Control4 in a format and at a frequency agreed upon by the Parties.

 

3.1.8          Quality Systems and Processes

 

3.1.8.1            Notifications

 

Supplier shall notify Control4 in writing if any of the below-listed events occur:

 

1.               Epidemic failures or systemic issues

2.               Line stops with shipment / field impact to Control4

3.               Out of Box Audits (OBA) failures with shipment/field impact to Control4

4.               Test escapes with potential impact to Control4

5.               Design defects

6.               Yield below threshold established

 

Following discovery by Supplier, Supplier shall provide such notification to Control4 within:

 

·                   1 Business Day in the event of epidemic failures or Line stops with shipment / field impact to Control4

·                   5 Business Days for all other notifications

 

The notification by Supplier shall include the following minimum details:

 

·                   Problem description with detail information such as test station, yield rate, failure symptom, Date/Lot Code etc.

·                   Engineering Failure Analysis - if available at that time

·                   Root Cause - if available at that time

·                   Field impact and Risk evaluation

·                   Impact to other Products

·                   Containment/purge plan

·                   Short/long term action

·                   Recovery Plan.

 

18



 

3.1.8.2            Maverick Lots

 

Supplier shall have a process to identify “out of norm” batches and establish action steps in response to them. Supplier shall also analyze and demonstrate the reliability of the “out of norm” batch if there is a need to ship these Products. While doing so, Supplier shall notify Control4 and secure written approval for the “out of norm” shipments.

 

Supplier shall use TDN or another agreed upon temporary change notification process to control maverick lots.

 

3.1.8.3            Non-Conforming Product Control / Containment/Notification

 

Supplier shall have a methodology to separate non-conforming material from production material and a process to dispose non-conforming material. Once a potential defect is identified, Supplier needs to be able to contain the defect within its factory through processes such as raw material review, purge processes, MRB, WIP rework processes as well as perform field risk assessment. If there is a field risk identified, then Supplier shall have an immediate notification system or a proactive notification system or methodology to notify Control4.

 

3.1.8.4            Line Stops (Production Stops)

 

Supplier shall have an established process to determine line stops, establish cause and provide a closed-loop corrective action. Supplier shall have a system for notifying Control4 when it impacts Product quality, reliability or delivery.

 

3.1.8.5            Yield Goal Setting and Management

 

Supplier shall meet yield goals that are product-specific and mutually agreed with Control4 quality management. Supplier needs to have a process in place for atypical batches, in case yields fall below a minimum threshold or continuously trends downward.

 

3.1.8.6            First Article Inspection (FAI)

 

Supplier must also perform FAI on initial sample of production units, and provide to Control4 the Test/Inspection Plans and Test/Inspection data for review and approval. Control4 may require Supplier to provide either samples for internal verification or further data for validation.

 

3.1.8.7            Incoming Quality Control (IQC) and Outgoing Quality Control (OQC)

 

Supplier shall have a documented inspection process, which includes pass or fail criteria approved by Control4, and maintain records for both incoming and outgoing material traceable to Part number, ECO level, Serial number/MAC Address, and Date code.  Supplier shall also have a proper communication system, record maintenance procedure and a containment process for rejects.

 

3.1.8.8            Field Performance Requirements

 

Control4’s standard field failure rate goal is less than 5000 Defects per Million (DPM). Unless otherwise specified in the SOW or mutually agreed in writing, Supplier shall deliver Products that meet this goal. Quality levels apply to Products both inside and outside of the warranty period. Supplier is encouraged to work with individual C4 quality teams to determine appropriate failure rate goals for Products, if the above are not applicable targets.

 

Supplier shall also deliver Products at a dock-to-stock quality level once released to production.  Specifically, this means zero defects at Control4’s incoming inspection area.

 

Supplier shall have a system and the necessary tools for tracking Product shipments and returns. Supplier shall be able to track all shipments and return rates by month. Supplier shall also have the ability to track Control4 IQC/RMA returns by month, time-based return rates by 0-6, 7-18, >19 months and to estimate field MTBF.  Supplier shall also have the ability to track the breakdown of field returns to critical component/sub assembly level, and identify causes for the returns.

 

3.1.8.9            Key component Defects per Million Opportunities (DPMO)

 

Supplier shall have a system to measure and provide the DPMO for critical components both within Supplier’s factory and from the field where applicable.

 

3.1.8.10                 Sampling plan and Acceptable Quality Level (AQL)

 

The sampling plan and AQL shall be clearly defined for Supplier inspections such as IQC, OQC and OBA as per applicable industry standards, ANSI/ASQC Z1.4-2008- Sampling Procedures and Tables for Inspection by Attributes and Z1.4-2008- Sampling Procedures and Tables for Inspection by Variables for Percent Nonconforming.  Use of a similar industry standard is acceptable.  Supplier shall have a procedure to address any inspection failures.

 

3.1.8.11     Defect Reduction / On Going Performance Monitoring

 

Supplier shall participate in performance monitoring efforts on a frequency specified by Control4 based on factory and field failure trends, particularly in the event of epidemic failures.  Supplier shall provide the following data where applicable:

 

·                   Field RMA/IQC Trend data along with target goals (with explanation about how the goals were established)

·                   Pareto of Top Ten RMA, IQC

·                   RCFA per Control4 RCFA Procedures.

 

The report can be provided in a format recommend by Control4 or equivalent as agreed upon between Control4 and Supplier.  Supplier shall also meet with Control4 personnel on a weekly basis, when necessary, or as mutually agreed upon.

 

19



 

3.1.8.12                 Training programs

 

Supplier shall ensure that its contract manufacturer maintain a system to track the required training and retraining of its employees.

 

3.1.8.13                             Corrective Action System

 

Supplier shall maintain a system to track all corrective action issues with details including, but not limited to, Problem description, Root Cause Analysis, Containment Actions, Corrective Actions, Effectiveness verification.

 

3.1.9                                  Reliability

 

3.1.9.1            Failure rate and wear out estimation

 

Supplier shall be able to use applicable industry accepted standards to provide predicted MTBF or Annualized Failure Rate (AFR) values to Control4, including MIL-HDBK-217 Reliability Prediction of Electronic Equipment and the Telcordia Electronic Reliability Prediction US Commercial Telecommunication Standard SR-332, Issue 3 or 4. Supplier shall also state both operating conditions as well as the failure-rate source while reporting the values to Control4.  Upon Control4’s request, Supplier shall provide the expected service life, or time at which the failure rate will increase (wear out) and reliability decreases.

 

3.1.9.2            Reliability validation/qualification testing

 

Upon Control4’s request and at mutually agreed to testing and reporting details, Supplier shall demonstrate the reliability of Products through validation testing on production representative products/configurations.  Supplier shall also provide details of testing upon Control4’s request. This includes: typical sample size, test environment conditions, type of equipment used and acceleration factors. Unless otherwise specified in the ETRD/SOW, at least 60% of confidence level for reliability testing shall be achieved prior to Product shipment to Control4 and 90% confidence level for reliability testing by TTQV.  Supplier shall also provide EFA and corrective action for any failure during the qualification testing.

 

3.1.9.3            Continuous reliability validation

 

Upon Control4’s request and at mutually agreed testing and reporting times, Supplier shall demonstrate on-going reliability of Products through validation testing on production representative products/configurations unless otherwise stated in the SOW/ETRD. Supplier shall also, upon Control4’s request, provide details of tests including: typical sample size, test environment conditions, type of equipment used and acceleration factors. Supplier shall additionally provide EFA and corrective action on failures.

 

3.2                    Manufacturing Test

 

3.2.1          High Level Core Test Requirements

 

Unless otherwise provided by Control4, Supplier must provide all information necessary to:

 

·                   Demonstrate hardware coverage requirements as defined in the applicable SOW

·                   Demonstrate Product quality — IQA (Incoming Quality Audit) , RMA (Return Material Authorization), DOA (Dead on Arrival) yields as defined in the SOW

·                   Demonstrate test process control, software loading/verification control, test system maintenance, and test data management

 

Unless otherwise provided by Control4, Supplier must provide information on overall test process flow and details of each test step. When requested, Supplier shall provide access to test system(s) design, documentation, and source code.

 

Supplier must demonstrate the capability to provide test related data for automated processing used by Control4.

 

Supplier is required to have an Automated Test Process (i.e. perform structural/functional testing and test recording in an automated fashion) as this allows for a consistent and repeatable test execution.

 

3.2.2          Manufacturing Test Plan

 

Unless otherwise provided by Control4, Supplier must provide details of the test process(s) that the Product will go through during the manufacturing process.    It is expected that the test implementation is in accordance with the following details.

 

3.2.2.1            Test Philosophy

 

Unless otherwise provided by Control4, Supplier is expected to develop and execute its own Functional Test programs for Products purchased by Control4 that the supplier develops (OEM/JDM).  Control4 reserves the right to request a review of Supplier’s functional test documentation, source code, and test plans at any time in order to verify adequate coverage and sufficient process control.  Control4 reserves the right to define the functional test acceptance criteria, including parametric measurements. All products that do not meet the functional test acceptance shall be deemed defective and returned to Supplier. Upon Control4’s request, Supplier shall provide the following details to support their test philosophy.

 

General description of test flow

 

·                   Component level test descriptions (if applicable)

·                   Board level test descriptions (if applicable)

 

20



 

·                   System level test descriptions (if applicable)

·                   System configuration check description (if applicable)

·                   MAC Address and other GUID programming.  Supplier to ensure uniqueness and consistent GUID control process (if  applicable)

·                   Certificate programming process description (if applicable)

 

List functional block diagrams for system and sub-assemblies (if applicable) and assess test coverage for each functional block (see appendix 5 for sample guideline)

Test environmental conditions (temperature, electrical, voltage margin etc.) to evaluate stress test coverage

Test equipment descriptions

Test system documentation, including schematics, BOMs, wiring diagrams, and source code.

Pass/fail database management description

Troubleshooting capabilities and descriptions

Failure analysis and corrective action procedures

Test Capacity needed as compared to production build plan, and plan on how to respond to upside demands

CND/NTF/NDF handling process to cover intermittent failures.

 

3.2.2.2            Test Coverage

 

Unless otherwise provided by Control4, Supplier’s test process must ensure an appropriate level of test coverage for the given technology.  The test coverage analysis shall be performed and provided to Control4 for review and approval prior to mass production.

 

Test coverage analysis shall (i) cover different types of coverage such as structural and functional; (ii) include goals of the test(s) performed, such as to detect circuitry connectivity; (iii) perform high bandwidth utilization; (iv) bring out component infant mortality; and (v) report parametric compliance.

 

Hardware test coverage for all Product functional blocks and categorized as Zero, Low, Medium, High according to test coverage template provided at the end of this Schedule. Software test coverage (if applicable) shall be explained in detail.

 

The test coverage analysis shall also discuss any test gaps, any areas where there is no test coverage and any risk of test escapes to the field.  Particular emphasis shall be given to areas identified as Zero, Low, and Medium coverage as these would be expected to be the sources of test gap or possible test escape. Please use the OEM/ODM/JDM Test Coverage Template Example in the appendix.

 

3.2.2.3            Test Fixtures

 

If any test fixture is required by the SOW, the fixture shall provide sufficient protection to the Product from ESD and cosmetic damage.

 

3.2.3          Test Implementation

 

3.2.3.1            Test Execution

 

3.2.3.1.1            Automated Test Scripts

 

Unless otherwise provided by Control4, Supplier shall implement the test process in an automated fashion as this allows for a consistent and repeatable test execution.    If Supplier cannot support test automation, Control4’s Quality, Test Engineering and Product teams must approve this exception in writing before Supplier is qualified as a Control4 supplier.

 

3.2.3.1.2                               Manual Tests

 

In some exceptional circumstances, a test step is authorized to be implemented manually, where an operator will perform the test instead of an automated system.   In this case, the manual test needs to be designed such that it can be replicated in a consistent manner with clearly defined and easily followed pass/fail criteria.  Specific description of these tests will be provided by Supplier with identification of controls around pass/fail recording.

 

3.2.3.2            Test Flow Control

 

3.2.3.2.1                               Test Area Checking

 

At each test step, there shall be a consistent method to verify that a prior test step was performed and passed.   The current test process shall not be allowed to proceed if the required prior test step was not performed or did not receive a pass result.

 

3.2.3.2.2                               Retest

 

Supplier shall establish and maintain a controlled and documented method for sending units back through test which defines the point of test entry based on the test failure and root cause / corrective action. A proper CND/NTF/NDF handling process shall be taken into consideration to cover intermittent failures, with multiple retests. The Supplier shall define and justify the maximum allowed re-tries through test process(s).

 

3.2.3.3            Test Records

 

There shall be an electronic test record for each test step performed. The use of manual test logs by a Supplier must be approved by Control4 before the Supplier is qualified as a Control4 supplier. The history test record shall be recorded for tracking purpose.  The test record shall contain the following information:

 

·                   Product’s serial number

·                   Product mac/zigbee address(s) (if applicable)

·                   Product’s name

 

21



 

·                   Time test started (optional)

·                   Time test stopped (optional)

·                   Total test time (optional)

·                   Test area

·                   Test result (pass, fail)

·                   Test limits and measured value(s)

·                   Other relevant information (test logs, product data, screen captures etc.) (optional)

 

3.2.3.4            Serial Number and Mac Address Requirements

 

It is required that each Product contains a unique serial number and MAC address (if applicable). Supplier is required to demonstrate a clearly defined system or method that ensures uniqueness of serial numbers and MAC addresses for every product produced and tested.  Supplier is also required to demonstrate that consistency of serial number and MAC address in all forms (bar-coded, human readable and stored electronically) is ensured for every Product.

 

3.2.4          Test Document Control and Change Management

 

3.2.4.1            Test Document Control and Change Notification

 

Unless otherwise provided by Control4, Supplier shall have (or ensure that it’s contract manufacturers have) documented procedures for creating the test procedures, manuals, design, documents, technical drawings, work instructions, audit documents, etc.  Supplier shall have a document control policy that address the record retention, document distribution and obsolete document recovery process.  Supplier shall notify Control4 for consultation and approval of any major test plan changes that impacts Product form, fit, or function.

 

3.2.4.2            Test Process Change Management

 

Unless otherwise provided by Control4, Supplier shall have documented procedures for Engineering Change Order (ECO), deviations, and purges implementation process.  Supplier shall have a system to monitor the timeliness and accuracy of the implementation in the test processes.

 

Supplier shall have a documented test process change management process/policy including changes in the test flow, test scripts, and standard operating procedures.

 

3.2.4.3            Test Capacity, Equipment Maintenance and Calibration

 

3.2.4.3.1                     Test Capacity

 

Supplier is required to monitor its production test capacity on a regular basis to ensure adequate production test capacity which in turn ensures On-Time-Ship and the ability to scale upon demand increases.

 

3.2.4.3.2                     Equipment Maintenance

 

Unless otherwise provided by Control4, Supplier shall have a documented process for equipment maintenance, including preventive maintenance.  An inspection plan shall also be documented for all test accessories including any pluggable modules to prevent damage to the Product during test.

 

3.2.4.3.3                     Equipment Calibration

 

Unless otherwise provided by Control4, Supplier is required to ensure all test equipment(s) are properly calibrated to industry standard specifications at all times while in production use.

 

3.3                    Document Control and Change Management

 

3.3.1           Document Control

 

Supplier shall ensure that it has documented procedures for the quality manual, process control documents, design documents, technical drawings, work instructions, audit documents and etc.  The document control policy shall address the record retention, document distribution and obsolete document recovery process.

 

3.3.2           Product Change Management

 

Supplier shall have documented procedures for Engineering Change Order (ECO), deviations/red-lined changes, and purge process.  The procedures shall also address the distribution/approval of the documents to all affected functional areas.  Supplier shall have a system to record, distribute, and monitor the timeliness/accuracy of the implementation of ECO, Deviation, and Purge processes.  Supplier’s contract manufacturers shall have a process to receive and implement its customer’s ECO/deviation notification and content.

 

Suppliers shall have a closed loop documented product change management process/policy for its customers/suppliers.  Supplier shall inform Control4 about changes per Control4 Product Change Notification and EOL Notification Requirements. Supplier shall ensure its vendors follow industry standards or its established requirements for the change notification.  An example of an industry standard for change notification is JEDEC/JESD46-B - Customer Notification of Product/Process Changes by Semiconductor Suppliers.

 

Supplier shall have a documented process to address the PCN analysis when a PCN is received from its supplier.  Supplier shall have a sample buying process to ensure the sample ordered will reflect the proposed changes of the PCN.

 

22



 

3.4                    Country of Origin

 

3.4.1          Supplier shall be responsible for determining the Country of Origin (CO) for each Product, and Supplier shall ensure that each Product delivered in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations.  Product shall be marked in compliance with Control4’s Product marking specifications.  Supplier shall provide Control4 the required CO data as scheduled via the semi-annual quotation process framework or upon request by Control4 in a timely manner.

 

3.4.2          Periodically, Control4 may seek to qualify goods under special sales programs or Free Trade Agreements such as North American Free Trade Agreement, Trade Agreements Act, Export Import Bank or other similar type programs.  In support of qualification under such programs, Supplier shall cooperate with and provide, as requested, information to Control4 regarding CO determinations.  Control4 shall be entitled to obtain Supplier information in support of CO determinations.  Supplier shall be responsible for complying with Control4 requests for information in a timely manner.

 

3.5                    Supply Chain Management

 

3.5.1          Supplier Continuity

 

Supplier shall participate in Control4’s BCP process and participate in ongoing risk assessments.

Supplier shall have ability to provide supply capability and supply commit reports.

Supplier must have process to communicate and manage EOL components, and must have process(s) to manage last time buys for EOL components

Supplier must have capacity planning process and must be able to supply capacity capability reports.

Supplier must have a process for BOM risk analysis and mitigation throughout the product lifecycle.

 

3.5.2          Vendor Selection and Management

 

Supplier must have a documented vendor qualification process BOM (with the Supplier part numbers), AML (with the vendor part numbers) and strategies around determining PSL

Supplier must assure business continuity using appropriate risk mitigation strategies when selecting vendors.  These include, but are not limited to documented second sourcing strategy, documented disaster recovery plans from vendors and EOL strategies.

 

Supplier must have a regular scorecard review with its vendors to rate and monitor performance as well as a mechanism to provide feedback and drive corrective action.  Supplier should highlight or flag to Control4 any high risk vendors and mitigation plans.

 

3.5.3          Flexible PSL for Critical Components

 

For critical components, Control4 and Supplier must agree in advance upon vendor selection.  Critical components list must be defined and agreed upon by Control4 and Supplier.  Supplier, and where applicable with Control4’s assistance, will be accountable for all aspects of managing the critical components including cost, quality and delivery.

 

3.5.4          Supply Chain Design: Flow Requirements

 

Upon request, Supplier must provide Control4 with a supply chain diagram outlining material flow from raw components to finished product.  This map should include critical vendors and factory locations.

 

3.5.5          Service Logistics (RMA)

 

Supplier should establish, maintain and demonstrate to Control4, an RMA process that it adheres to when dealing with its vendors.  The actual terms of the RMA can vary.

 

3.5.6          Control4 Lean

 

Supplier must have the capability to support B2B demand/supply reporting, as well as ROP management, if Supplier is operating as a Control4 DF site.

 

3.5.7          Planning

 

Supplier must have ability to convert Control4’s SKU level demand to component level demand to its vendors.

If setup as a DF Site, All DF sites must be on ROP (pull) and have consistent demand propagation methodologies to ODM/OEM Supplier.

OEM/ODM Supplier free to set demand planning approach

Supplier must have capability to receive Control4’s demand signal and transmit supply commits electronically

Supplier buffering strategy must be clearly communicated to Control4 and measured by Supplier.

Supplier must have ability to define, measure, and communicate ability to react to demand upside.  Supplier has methodology and tools to support material and capacity scenario modeling to communicate ability to react to demand upside.

 

3.6                    Fulfillment

 

If fulfilling through Control4 DF site, Supplier will ship to a designated Control4 site.

 

Appendix – OEM/ODM/JDM Test Coverage Template Example

 

23


 

 

Appendix — Abbreviations

 

Table 0-1: Definitions of Terms and Acronyms

 

Terms and
Acronyms

 

Definition/Explanation

AQL

 

Acceptable Quality Level

AML

 

Approved Manufacturer List

BCP

 

Business Continuity Planning

BOM

 

Bill of Materials

CE

 

Component Engineering

CND/NTF/NDF

 

Can Not Duplicate/No Trouble Found/Non-Duplicate Failure

DF

 

Direct Fulfillment

CO

 

Country of Origin

DPMO

 

Defects Per Million Opportunities

ECO

 

Engineering Change Order

EDCS

 

Engineering Document Control System

EFA

 

Engineering Failure Analysis

EOL

 

End of Life

ETRD

 

External Technical Requirement Document

ESD

 

Electro Static Discharge

FAI

 

First Article Inspection

FMEA

 

Failure Modes and Effects Analysis

GSM

 

Global Supply Management

HBM

 

Human Body Model

IP

 

Intellectual Property

 

24



 

IQA/IQC

 

Incoming Quality Audit/Control

IR

 

Immediate Return

JDM

 

Joint Development Model

JEDEC

 

Joint Electron Device Engineering Council

MCN

 

Manufacturing Change Notice

MM

 

Machine Model

MRB

 

Material Review Board

MTBF

 

Mean Time Between Failures

OBA

 

Out of Box Audit

ODM

 

Outsource Design Model

OEM

 

Original Equipment Manufacturer

OQC

 

Oncoming Quality Check

PCB

 

Printed Circuit Board

PCBA

 

Printed Circuit Board Assembly

PCN

 

Product Change Notification

PID

 

Product Identifier

PSL

 

Preferred Supplier List

RCCA

 

Root Cause and Corrective Action

RCFA

 

Root Cause Failure Analysis

RMA

 

Return Material Authorization

RoHS

 

Restriction on Hazardous Substances

ROP

 

Re-Order Point

SOW

 

Statement of Work

TAC

 

Technical Assistance Center

TAN

 

Top Assembly Number

TTQV

 

Time To Quality and Volume

WIP

 

Work in Process

 

25



 

Schedule E — Out-of-Warranty Repair Process and Fees

 

Out-of-Warranty Repair Process Supplier to Control4

 

1.1          The out-of-warranty Repair Process shall be the same as the RTV Process except that repair time, component cost and shipping and handling charges shall be invoiced to Control4.

 

1.2          Out-of-warranty Repair Fees to Control4 shall be charged per incident based on the work and the components involved, plus labor cost

 

26



 

Schedule F — Customizations and Additional Work

 

Pricing for extra work that has been requested by Control4 and agreed to by Supplier with an executed Change Order or Request for Proposal is to be quoted on a case by case basis.  Control4 is not responsible for any work performed by Supplier without a valid Control4 Purchase Order.

 

27


 

Exhibit A

 

Contract Manufacturing Services

 

1.              Definitions. Terms with initial capital letters shall have the meanings ascribed to them in this Section 1 or elsewhere in this Exhibit A — Contract Manufacturing Services.

 

1.1           Documentation .  “ Documentation ” means the written instructions, user guides, and user manuals for the Products, whether in electronic or paper form, provided by Control4 upon delivery of Products and any such materials provided by Control4 in connection with any updates, modifications and improvements to any software provided hereunder.

 

1.2           Epidemic Failure .  “ Epidemic Failure ” means the occurrence of one or more recurring material failures in a Product, as supplied by Supplier during its Warranty Period (as defined below in Section 7.1), due to a recurring single root cause in Supplier Workmanship (also as defined in Section 7.1) discovered either in testing or in the field at a failure rate over any rolling 90 day period exceeding five percent (5%) of such Product delivered during such period.

 

1.3           Price .  “ Price ” means the “FCA” [Incoterms 2010] price to Control4 for the applicable Product as set forth in Schedule A (or as otherwise agreed in writing by the Parties).

 

1.4           Product Support Materials .  “Product Support Materials” means those materials which Supplier is required to provide supplemental to the Product, and which are identified in the applicable Specifications.  Such materials may include, by way of example and not limitation, Product installation guides, user manuals for End Customers, Q&A knowledgebase documentation, and documentation with information for tracking and identifying installed Products such as MAC, serial number, and installation code information.

 

1.5           Specifications . “ Specifications ” means the physical, technical, functional and/or performance requirements for the Products as set forth more specifically in Schedule A, a Purchase Order, Statement of Work and the Documentation, and including without limitation the data sheet, specification sheet, build of materials, drawing specification, approved manufacturing list, assembly instruction specification and/or test specifications delivered to Supplier through the agreed document control server prior to the acceptance by Supplier of the applicable Purchase Order.  This Agreement specifically incorporates all such documents herein by reference.

 

2. Obligations.   Subject to Supplier’s compliance with its obligations hereunder, Control4 agrees to purchase via Purchase Order the Products according to the terms of this Agreement.   In consideration of Control4’s purchase commitments in this Agreement, Supplier will manufacture and ship to Control4 the Products in accordance with the Specifications and required delivery dates as contained in the Supplier accepted Purchase Orders.

 

3.              License Grant by Control4.  During the Term, Control4 grants to Supplier, and Supplier accepts a personal, non-transferable, indivisible, revocable and non-exclusive license in and to that portion of the Control4 Intellectual Property required to manufacture the Products and perform the Services, or that Control4 delivers or discloses to Supplier from time to time and indicates, at the time of such disclosure, that such Control4 Intellectual Property, and the disclosure thereof by Control4 to Supplier, is subject to

 



 

the terms of this Agreement, solely for Licensee’s use in manufacturing each Product, and selling the same to Control4 only.

 

4 .              Price.

 

4.1           The initial Price for each Product ordered hereunder is set forth in Schedule A or the applicable initial Purchase Order for such Product.  Prices shall not be increased except through a product pricing review meeting which shall occur every six (6) months during the Term (“Price Review”) or if component price variation occurs due to a force majeure event, as defined in Section 6.5 of the Agreement, or other manufacturer- or supplier-driven cost increase and, in such event, Supplier shall obtain advance written approval to make such component purchase.  It is understood and agreed that Prices shall be subject to mutual written agreement of the Parties during each such Price Review.  Notwithstanding the foregoing, in no circumstances shall Prices for Products be increased for accepted Purchase Orders issued by Control4 to Supplier.

 

4.2           Cost Reductions .  Supplier shall provide Control4 access to a detailed bill of material, including itemized costs, exploded to the raw component level along with manufacturer’s part numbers and Supplier and Control4 approved vendor list.  Control4 shall work with Supplier to help obtain raw component pricing improvements and any such improvements shall be applied to the next Price reduction review (as described below).  Supplier and Control4 agree that there will be a Price review every January and July with any resulting agreed price reductions taking effect in February and August respectively each year.  The Parties agree that they will target a net Product Price reduction of two percent (2%) in each semi annual review (July and January of each year).

 

5               Delivery.

 

5.1           General .  All Products shall be delivered to Control4 (or its designated location) FCA at the named shipping point (Incoterms 2010) or as specified in the applicable Purchase Order, using Control4’s specified standard shipping. The Product shall be packed and marked for shipment in accordance with the Specification and Schedule B.  Supplier shall have no liability for any events occurring during shipment except in cases where Product is not packaged in accordance with the Specification and Schedule B.  In the event that Supplier is unable to meet the delivery date at the specified location as set forth in the Purchase Order due to causes solely within Supplier’s control.  Upon notification by Supplier to Control4 that a delivery date will be delayed along with the reason or cause for the delay, the parties will discuss to determine if Control4 is responsible for the delay or if the delay was caused by a third party component supplier, where such component delay was beyond Sanmina’s reasonable control during its management of the supply chain, or a force majeure event and if not, Control4 will consider if the delivery date can be modified to accommodate such delay.   However,  if Control4 determines in its sole discretion that the original delivery date must be met and the delay in delivery is solely within Supplier’s control, Supplier will be responsible for any incremental fees associated with expedited shipping to ensure fastest freight and delivery to Control4 for the delayed shipment.  For the avoidance of doubt, delays caused by Control4 or the occurrence of force majeure event shall not be deemed to be “within Supplier’s control”.

 

5.2           Changes Submitted by Control4 .  Control4 may, by written Change Order, request changes in the drawings, designs, specifications, software, packaging or packing requirements concerning the Product, and/or request additional services from Supplier.  Such Change Order should include any applicable component disposition instructions, including any excess and obsolete

 



 

raw materials and components, implementation timing instruction, and general description along with the detailed specification change for the Product.  Should any of this content be missing, Supplier may request and Control4 shall provide such missing information for the Change Order request to be considered valid. Upon Supplier’s receipt of a valid proposed Change Order, Supplier shall determine within ten (10) business days any corresponding change in Price, and shall provide Control4 with a statement setting forth any cost impacts.  Control4 and Supplier agree to consider and address any proposed price impact related to such Change Order request within twenty (20) business days.  In the event Supplier does not receive written confirmation of Control4’s desire to proceed with the change within thirty (30) days after Supplier provides Control4 with the summary of any cost impacts the proposed change shall be deemed cancelled.

 

5.3           Effect of Product or Design Changes .  Any mutually agreed to and executed Product changes, whether suggested by Control4 or Supplier, shall be governed by and shall not change any other terms of this Agreement, including Supplier’s warranty of Product, unless mutually agreed to in writing and attached as an amendment hereto.  Such Product changes shall be subject to a mutually agreed “Change” process.

 

5.4           Effect of Change Orders .   Upon agreement by the Parties as to any proposed Change Order, any resulting Price change shall either (i) apply to any subsequent Purchase Order with for the Product impacted by the change or (ii) be calculated based on open Purchase Order demand between the date of implementation and the next price review period and the resulting price variance will be handled through the mutually agreed purchase price variance (PPV) process.  Modifications or changes to Products which by their nature require additional effort or deliverables on the part of the Supplier may considered as extra work and any corresponding Price changes shall be invoiced separately.

 

5.5           Additional Products . Additional Products may be added to Schedule A upon the mutual agreement and written Change Order or Statement of Work agreed upon by both Control4 and Supplier.  In such event, the manufacturing, and sale of such additional Products shall be made in accordance with the terms of this Agreement and the applicable Specification.

 

6               Inspection and Acceptance.

 

6.1           Testing and Inspection .  Control4 may inspect and perform tests of the Products at any reasonable time and place.  If such inspection or testing is made on Supplier’s premises, Control4 shall provide Supplier with ten (10) business days advance written notice and Supplier shall provide reasonable facilities for such inspection and testing.

 

6.2           Acceptance .  Final inspection and acceptance by Control4 shall be conducted within fifteen (15) days of the receipt of the applicable Products at Control4’s specified receiving destination (except as otherwise agreed in writing, signed by both Parties).  Any Products not rejected, as defined below in Section 6.3, within such fifteen (15) day period shall be deemed to be accepted by Control4 (“Acceptance”).

 

6.3           Rejection .   Control4 may, within fifteen (15) days of receipt of any Products at Control4’s receiving destination, reject Products that fail to conform to the Specifications.  In the

 



 

event of a rejection, Supplier shall pay all costs and expenses to return, repair or replace such nonconforming Product.  In the event a Product is rejected, Supplier shall have a reasonable opportunity to cure any defect which led to such rejection and should Control4 confirm that expedited shipping is required, Supplier shall be liable for any incremental fees associated with expedited shipping to ensure fastest freight and delivery to Control4 for such rejected Product.

 

7       Warranty.

 

7.1           Supplier Manufacturing Warranty .  Supplier warrants to Control4 and its End Customers that for a period of fifteen (15) months from the date of transition of ownership to Control4 per FCA Incoterm (excluding prototype or qualification units not intended for delivery to End Customers), that the Products will conform to the Specifications, and will be free from manufacturing defects in Workmanship under normal use and service.  “Workmanship” shall mean the Supplier manufacturing processes (including Supplier’s incoming inspection procedures and handling/storage of Components in accordance with manufacturer specifications) used to manufacture, assemble and/or test the Products and package the Products.

 

In the event that there is an issue with one of Supplier’s component suppliers that results in an issue for Control4 that has not been previously specified, Supplier will provide support to work with such component supplier to correct the issue.  As set forth below in Section 8 of this Exhibit, Control4 may return directly to Supplier any defective Product covered under Warranty that does not conform to the Specifications.  Any repaired or replaced Product shall be warranted as set forth in this Section for a period equal to the greater of (i) the balance of the applicable warranty period relating to such Product or (ii) sixty (60) days after it is received by Control4.

 

7.2           Exclusions . The warranty in Section 7.1 above does not include Products that have defects or failures resulting from (a) Control4’s design of Products; (b) accident, disaster, neglect, abuse or misuse;  (c) alterations, modifications or repairs by Control4 or third parties; or defective Control4-provided test equipment or test software.  For all Products designed by Control4, Control4 bears all design responsibility for the Product.

 

7.3           EPIDEMIC FAILURE .  IN THE EVENT THAT THERE IS AN EPIDEMIC FAILURE WITH ANY PRODUCT PROVIDED BY SUPPLIER TO CONTROL4 THAT REQUIRES A FIELD RECALL FOR PRODUCTS UNDER WARRANTY AND IT IS DETERMINED THAT SUCH EPIDEMIC FAILURE IS DUE TO    A RECURRING ERROR IN SUPPLIER’S WORKMANSHIP AT OR ABOVE THE LEVELS AS SPECIFIED IN SECTION 1.2 ABOVE, SUPPLIER ACTIONS WILL BE SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS:

 

(a)            Upon receipt of written notice by Control4 that there has been an Epidemic Failure, Supplier shall promptly review the defective Product and data to determine whether the alleged Epidemic Failure resulted from a common root cause or causes which are covered by the Supplier’s warranty (a “ Covered Epidemic Failure ”).  If it is mutually determined that there is a Covered Epidemic Failure, then Supplier shall within three (3) business days, unless otherwise agreed by the parties develop a plan to eliminate the defects in all continuing production and to correct the problem in all affected units (including defective units and units known to be subject to or containing the systemic root cause failure that has been identified) of Product previously sold and delivered to Control4 during the period of Epidemic Failure, and Supplier shall submit the plan to Control4 for Control4’s acceptance. Upon receiving Control4’s approval of such plan, which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed given Control4’s unique circumstances and end user needs, Supplier shall implement the

 



 

corrective action at its expense.  If such plan is not reasonably acceptable to Control4 or if exigent circumstances require that Control4 take immediate action, then, for the affected Products, (i) Supplier will extend the Warranty Period by an additional fifteen (15) months, (ii) Control4 can require Supplier to replace, at Supplier’s cost and as mutually agreed to by both Parties, all defective Product resulting from the Covered Epidemic Failure and (iii) Supplier will compensate Control4 for up to Three Million Dollars ($3,000,000) worth of Control4’s documented direct costs to remove the defective Product from the field.  The Parties agree to use commercially reasonable efforts to complete the replacement of the Defective Product within a mutually-agreed time frame.  In no event shall Supplier be required to conduct a product recall.

 

(b)  In the event the Epidemic Failure does not result from a defect for which Supplier is responsible under the Product Warranty (e.g., is not a Covered Epidemic Failure), then Supplier shall use commercially reasonable efforts to assist Control4, at Control4’s expense, to implement the corrective action required to remedy such Epidemic Failure.  In such case Control4 shall be responsible for any expenses set forth herein, and Supplier shall obtain Control4’s written approval prior to incurring any such expenses.  At Control4’s request and at Control4’s expense, Supplier shall take such legal action, including commencing and pursuing litigation or arbitration, if required in the underlying agreement, against any supplier/vendor in order to enforce Supplier’s/Control4’s warranty and/or other rights of recovery against any such supplier/vendor, it being the intention of the parties that Control4 shall be entitled to any and all sums or amounts recovered in such action.  In pursuing such recovery, Supplier shall at all times cooperate with and assist Control4 in such matter, shall use counsel that has been approved in writing by Control4 and shall permit Control4 to control the prosecution of any such action.  Control4 shall be responsible for all pre-approved out of pocket expenses, including reasonable attorney’s fees, incurred by Supplier in reasonably pursuing such litigation, including mutually agreed and reasonable internal or administrative costs or time expended by Supplier in managing pursuit of such recovery or in cooperating with and assisting Control4 in such litigation.

 

(c)  The remedies provided for in this Section 7.3 shall be the sole and exclusive remedies for any claim arising out of or relating to Epidemic Failure under this Agreement.

 

7.4           Additional Warranties .  Supplier hereby represents and warrants to Control4 that Supplier has and will convey to Control4, upon payment in full, good title to the Products, free and clear of all liens and other security interests;

 

7.5           No Other Warranties .  EXCEPT AS SPECIFIED HEREIN, CONTROL4 AND SUPPLIER EACH HEREBY DISCLAIM ALL EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR COMPLIANCE WITH ROHS AND WEEE DIRECTIVE (AND SIMILAR LOCAL REQUIREMENTS) OTHER THAN TO INSURE THAT SUPPLIER’S MANUFACTURING PROCESSES ARE ROHS COMPLIANT.

 

8               Return-to-Vendor Process.

 

8.1           General .  All Products returned to Supplier under a warranty claim require a Return To Vendor (RTV) number, which will be issued by Supplier upon request.  All Products returned to Supplier must have the RTV number clearly marked on the outside of each box returned.  Returned Product must be packaged in a way that prevents any damage during shipment.  Supplier shall pay all transportation costs for valid returns of the Products to Supplier’s facility and shall bear all risk of loss or damage to such Products while in transit. For invalid or “no defect found” returns, Control4

 



 

shall pay these charges.  Upon receipt of defective unit(s) during the Warranty Period, Supplier shall issue a credit to Control4 for purchase price paid for the defective unit(s) and Control4 will issue a PO to purchase back the repaired units at a ‘-BX’ level.  Supplier agrees to fulfill repaired or replacement units in ‘like-new’ condition (including but not limited to new manufacturing quality packaging, any non-attached accessories or cables, any documentation, labels, etc) against the PO for repaired or replaced units at the —BX level.

 

8.2   Non-Warranty Repair .  For any Products deemed to be out of warranty in Supplier’s reasonable judgment, Control4 must be notified of the change in return status within thirty (30) days of Supplier’s receipt of such Product.  At Control4’s option, the Product can then be repaired according to Schedule E or returned “as is” to Control4.  Supplier warrants such repairs for three (3) months (workmanship only).

 

9       Limitation of Liability.  WITH THE EXCEPTION OF BREACHES OF SECTION 8 OF THE RELATIONSHIP AGREEMENT  (CONFIDENTIALITY),  NEITHER PARTY WILL BE LIABLE, IN ANY EVENT, FOR ANY INDIRECT, PUNITIVE, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN ANY ACTION ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO THIS AGREEMENT, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), INTENTIONAL CONDUCT OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES RELATING TO THE LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS, INCOME OR GOODWILL, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER SUCH PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES FOR THE PURPOSE OF THIS SECTION, BOTH LOST PROFITS AND DAMAGES RESULTING FROM VALUE ADDED TO THE PRODUCT BY CONTROL4 SHALL BE CONSIDERED CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL SUPPLIER’S LIABILITY FOR A PRODUCT (WHETHER ASSERTED AS A TORT CLAIM OR CONTRACT CLAIM) EXCEED THE AMOUNTS PAID TO SUPPLIER FOR SUCH PRODUCT HEREUNDER. IN NO EVENT WILL SUPPLIER BE LIABLE FOR COSTS OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE PRODUCT BY CUSTOMER.  EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN ITEMS (I) THROUGH (V), INCLUSIVE, IN THIS SECTION 9, IN NO EVENT SHALL SUPPLIER’S LIABILITY FOR ALL CLAIMS ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THIS EXHIBIT A EXCEED A “CAP” OF THREE MILLION USD ($3,000,000.00) DURING THE TERM OF MANUFACTURING SERVICES UNDER THIS EXHIBIT A. THESE LIMITATIONS SHALL APPLY NOTWITHSTANDING ANY FAILURE OF ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF ANY LIMITED REMEDY.  PROVIDED, HOWEVER, THAT THE CAP ON LIABILITY SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION IS NOT INTENDED TO LIMIT (I) CONTROL4’S OBLIGATION FOR TERMINATION-RELATED PAYMENTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 6 OF THE AGREEMENT, (II) ACTUAL DAMAGES REQUIRED TO BE PAID TO ANY THIRD PARTY AS A RESULT OF THIRD PARTY INFRINGEMENT CLAIM, (III) AN EPIDEMIC FAILURE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 7.3 OF THIS EXHIBIT AND, (IV) A PARTY’S OBLIGATION TO INDEMNIFY THE OTHER PARTY AGAINST ANY THIRD PARTY CLAIM FOR PERSONAL INJURY, DEATH, OR PROPERTY DAMAGE, AND (V) SUPPLIER’S OBLIGATIONS UNDER SECTION 8.1 OF THIS EXHIBIT.  THE LIMITATIONS SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION SHALL APPLY WHERE THE DAMAGES ARISE OUT OF OR RELATE TO THIS AGREEMENT.

 

10    Indemnification.

 

10.1         By Supplier .  Supplier will indemnify, defend, and hold Control4, its affiliates, directors, officers, employees, contractors, agents and other representatives (the “ Customer-Indemnified Parties ”), harmless from and against any and all third party demands, claims, actions, causes of action, proceedings, suits, assessments, liabilities, damages, settlements, judgments, fines, interest, losses, costs and expenses (including fees and disbursements of counsel) (each a “Claim” and, collectively, “ Claims ”)  (i) based upon personal injury or death or injury to property (other than

 



 

damage to the Product itself, which is handled in accordance with Section  7 “Warranty”) to the extent any of the foregoing is caused by the negligent or willful acts or omissions of Supplier or its officers, employees, subcontractors or agents,; and/or (iii) arising from or relating to any actual or alleged infringement or misappropriation of any patent, trademark, mask work, copyright, trade secret, or any actual or alleged violation of any other intellectual property rights arising from or in connection with the use of the Supplier’s manufacturing processes (including Supplier-owned or Supplier-manufactured tools) used in the manufacture of the Products.

 

10.2         By Control4 .    Control4 will indemnify, defend, and hold Supplier, its affiliates, directors, officers, employees, contractors, agents and other representatives (the “ Supplier-Indemnified Parties ”), harmless from and against any and all third party Claims (i) based upon personal injury or death or injury to property to the extent any of the foregoing is caused by a defective Product, which defect was caused by the negligent or willful acts or omissions of Control4, or its officers, employees, subcontractors or agents, and/or (ii) arising from or relating to any actual or alleged infringement or misappropriation of any patent, trademark, mask work, copyright, trade secret or any actual or alleged violation of any other intellectual property rights arising from or in connection with the use of materials or designs provided to Supplier by Control4.

 

10.3         General .  The Party entitled to indemnity under this Section (“ Indemnified Party ”) shall give the other Party (“ Indemnifying Party ”) written notice of any claims resulting in an obligation of indemnification under this Section.  The Indemnified Party shall provide reasonable assistance in the defense and the settlement of a claim at the Indemnifying Party’s expense.  The Indemnifying Party shall not settle a claim without the written consent of the Indemnified Party; such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld.  The Indemnifying Party will obtain the prior written approval, which approval will not be unreasonably delayed or withheld, of the Indemnified Party in respect of any non-cash aspects of a proposed settlement of such claim from the Indemnified Party before entering into any settlement of such claim or ceasing to defend against such claim.

 

11.0           Conflict Minerals . Under the Dodd-Frank Act, as of the Effective Date, the following minerals and their derivatives are defined as conflict minerals:

 

·       Columbite-tantalite (Coltan) >> refined into tantalum (Ta)

·       Cassiterite >> refined into tin (Sn)

·       Wolframite >> refined into tungsten (W)

·       Gold (Au)

 

Supplier supports government and industry initiatives to avoid the use of conflict minerals purchased from sources whose revenue is believed to finance or benefit armed groups who commit human rights abuses in the Democratic Republic of the Congo and adjoining countries.

 

Supplier will comply with the conflict minerals reporting rules adopted under the Dodd-Frank Act. We expect our suppliers to provide required information to support our due diligence efforts. Supplier further agrees to reasonably assist Control4 in maintaining compliance with the laws to any applicable governmental or regulatory authority regarding conflict minerals and Control4’s compliance with the

 



 

Dodd-Frank Act.

 

Supplier will take the required steps over time to source from socially responsible suppliers when the choice of supplier is within the company’s control. Supplier will also encourage customers and suppliers to do the same.

 




Exhibit 10.10

 

 

Supplier: Lite-On Electronic Company Ltd.

Primary Contact:

Address:

Phone:

 

Email:

 

Fax:

Effective Date:

December 3, 2010

Web Site:

 

This OEM Supply Agreement: OEM Design (“Agreement”) is made as of the Effective Date identified above, by and between Control4 Corporation, a Delaware corporation with offices located at 11734 S.  Election Road, Salt Lake City, Utah 84020 (“Control4”) and the supplier identified above (“Supplier”).  This Agreement incorporates by reference the Terms and Conditions set forth below (including all Schedules thereto).

 

Supplier

 

Control4 Corporation

 

 

 

Signature:

/s/ Andrew Hou

 

Signature:

/s/ Jeff Dungan

 

 

 

Name: Andrew Hou

 

Name: Jeff Dungan

 

 

 

Title: Vice President & G.M. SSBU

 

Title: VP Manufacturing

 

Terms and Conditions

 

1.                                       Definitions .  Terms with initial capital letters shall have the meanings ascribed to them in this Section 1 or elsewhere in this Agreement.

 

1.1          Agreement .  “Agreement” means this OEM Supply Agreement: OEM Design.

 

1.2          Change Order .  “Change Order” means a written order from Control4 to Supplier requesting one or more changes to the Product that Control4 desires to have made, including but not limited to changes in the drawings, designs, Specifications, method of shipment, and/or packaging of the Products.

 

1.3          Confidential Information .  “Confidential Information” shall include all technical information, financial information, proprietary information that each Party hereunder may deliver to the other Party during the course of performing this Agreement, or acquired by the one Party about the other during the course of performing this Agreement, including without limitation all Proprietary Information, non-public information about each Party’s business affairs, financing, finances, methods of operation, technical or scientific information, data systems, procedures, computer programs, circuitry schematics, software or algorithms.

 

1.4          Deliverable .  “Deliverable” means any item, project, material, documentation, software code (both Object Code and Source Code), or object, or the physical embodiment of the same, required to be delivered by Supplier to Control4 pursuant to this Agreement.

 

1.5          Derivative Work .  “Derivative Work” means a work based on Products, Intellectual Property, or Confidential Information (collectively, “Prior Work”), including, but not limited to: (i) for material subject to copyright protection, any work that is based upon one or more Prior Works, such as a revision, modification, translation, abridgment, condensation, expansion, collection, compilation or any other form in which such pre-existing works may be recast, transformed or adapted; (ii) for patentable or patented inventions, any adaptation, subset, addition, improvement or combination of any Prior Work; and (iii) for material subject to trade secret protection, any new material, information or data relating to and derived from Confidential Information.

 

1.6          Documentation .  “Documentation” means the written instructions, user guides, and user manuals for the Products, whether in electronic or paper form, provided by Supplier upon delivery of Products and any such materials provided by Supplier in connection with any updates,

 



 

modifications and improvements to any software provided hereunder.

 

1.7          End Customer .  “End Customer” means the ultimate purchaser and end user of the Products.

 

1.8          Epidemic Failure .  “Epidemic Failure” shall mean the occurrence of one or more material failures in Hardware (including in any embedded Firmware) supplied by Supplier during its Hardware Warranty Period (as defined below), due to a single root cause, discovered either in testing or in the field at a failure rate over any roiling 90 day period exceeding five percent (5%) of such Hardware delivered during such period.

 

1.9          Error .  “Error” means a reproducible failure of the Licensed Software or Firmware to perform in substantial conformity with the Specifications and applicable Documentation accompanying such Licensed Software or Firmware (if any) when delivered to Control4.  The priority level of an Error shall be determined in accordance with Schedule D.

 

1.10        Firmware .  Firmware means Licensed Software that is embedded in a Product.

 

1.11        Hardware .  “Hardware” means tangible devices or tangible system components, including any embedded Firmware that Supplier makes available to Control4 or an End Customer under this Agreement.

 

1.12        Intellectual Property .  “Intellectual Property” shall mean the applicable Party’s proprietary intellectual property, including without limitation the Patent Rights and the Marks, and proprietary information that is not generally known, including, and whether or not patentable, all trade secrets, know-how, data, software code, designs, specifications, material lists, drawings, algorithms, formulas, patterns, compilations, programs, samples, devices, protocols, methods, techniques, processes, procedures and results of experimentation and testing.

 

1.13        Inventions .  “Inventions” means any and all ideas, designs, concepts, techniques, technology, know-how, processes, methods, configurations, inventions, discoveries, and improvements, regardless of whether they are patentable or subject to protection under applicable copyright, trademark, trade secret or other laws governing the protection of Intellectual Property.

 

1.14        Licensed Software .  “Licensed Software” means the machine-readable,  Object-Code version of Supplier’s software (whether or not embedded in a Product as Firmware), including all related Documentation, and including any modified, updated or enhanced versions of the software or Documentation, that Supplier makes available to Control4 or an End Customer under this Agreement.

 

1.15        Major Release .  “Major Release” means a new release of Software supported by Supplier that adds features and functionality improving overall Product performance, efficiency and/or usability, and designated by Supplier as a replacement for a Product.

 

1.16        Marks .  “Marks” shall mean the applicable Party’s current and future logos, trade names, and trademarks.

 

1.17        Manufacturing     Know-How .  “Manufacturing Know-How” means the Specifications and information, including without limitation engineering designs, bill of materials, drawings, and the like, necessary to manufacture the Products, as well as the names and contact information for all of Supplier’s then-current suppliers and manufacturers with respect to the Products.

 

1.18        Minor Release .  “Minor Release” means a Supplier-designated correction, extension, or fix to an existing release of a Product, generally designed to address one or more errors or reduce the effects thereof.  A Minor Release may also include enhanced, improved or modified functionality (as determined in Supplier’s sole discretion).  All Minor Releases are provided on an “AS IS” basis only and in object code only.

 

1.19        Object Code .  “Object Code” means the machine-readable, executable instructions for computer programs or applications.

 

1.20        Party .  “Party” mean Control4 or Supplier as the context requires.  “Parties” means both Control4 and Supplier.

 

1.21        Patent Rights .  “Patent Rights” shall mean the patents and patent applications owned, licensed or filed by the applicable Party anywhere in the world, and all continuations, continuations-in-part, divisions, reissues, reexaminations, substitutions, additions and extensions thereof, and all supplementary protection certificates.

 

1.22        Price .  “Price” means the “Ex Works” price for the applicable Product as set forth in Schedule B (or as otherwise agreed to in writing by the Parties).

 

1.23        Product .  “Product” means those Hardware, Firmware, and Licensed Software created, designed and/or manufactured, and those Services performed by Supplier as specified in Schedule A.

 

1.24        Product Support Materials .  “Product Support Materials” mean those materials which Supplier is

 

2



 

required to provide supplemental to the Hardware, and which are identified on Schedule A.  Such materials may include, by way of example and not limitation, Product installation guides, user manuals for End Customers, Q&A knowledgebase documentation, and documentation with information for tracking and identifying installed Products such as MAC, serial number, and installation code information.

 

1.25        Proprietary Information .  “Proprietary Information” means Inventions, Works, Intellectual Property, and any and all confidential, proprietary or secret information, including, without limitation, information relating to products, best-practices, templates, methodologies, research, technology, developments, services, clients, End Customers, suppliers, employees, business, operations or activities, and also similar information of any third party also divulged by the disclosing Party in connection with this Agreement.

 

1.26        Purchase Order .  “Purchase Order” means a written order issued by Control4 to Supplier containing information with respect to each purchase made pursuant to this Agreement, including a description of the Product to be purchased, the purchase quantity, the purchase delivery schedule, the nominated carrier, the routing instructions, the destination, and confirmation of the Price.

 

1.27        Schedules .  The following Schedules are appended hereto and incorporated herein as a part of this Agreement (which Schedules may be amended by the parties from time to time in a signed writing):

 

·                   Schedule A    Product Specifications and Support Materials

·                   Schedule B    Pricing and Terms of Delivery

·                   Schedule C    Project and Delivery Schedule and Deliverables

·                   Schedule D    Product Support

·                   Schedule E    Quality Assurance

·                   Schedule F    Out-of-Warranty Repair Process and Fees

·                   Schedule G    Customization & Works beyond Schedule A

·                   Schedule H   Control Intellectual Property; Supplier Intellectual Property

 

1.28        Services .  “Services” shall mean the specialized services to be provided by Supplier to Control4 pursuant to this Agreement.

 

1.29        Source Code .  “Source Code” means the instructions for computer programs and applications that are designed to be readable by the human eye, which when compiled or otherwise altered become usable by a computer.  Source Code includes all related diagrams, flow charts, and programmers notes.

 

1.30        Specifications .  “Specifications” means the physical, technical, functional and/or performance requirements for the Products as set forth more specifically in Schedule A.

 

1.31        Trade Secret(s) .  “Trade Secret(s)” means any scientific or technical data, information, design, process, procedure, formula, or improvement that is commercially valuable to the owner and not generally known in the industry.  The obligations set forth in this Agreement as they pertain to Trade Secret(s) shall survive termination of this Agreement and continue for so long as the relevant information remains a Trade Secret(s).

 

1.32        Work Product .  “Work Product” means all Intellectual Property associated with any Services, Inventions, Deliverables, Works or works of authorship developed or created by Supplier during the course of performing Services pursuant to this Agreement.

 

1.33        Works .  “Works” means products, devices, equipment, information, data and works of authorship, including, without limitation, processes, methodologies, templates, best-practices, lists, computer source and object code, devices, formulas, drawings, artwork, notes, memoranda, specifications, and documents of any nature, and all copies thereof, whether stored electronic or otherwise.

 

2.                                       Grant of Rights.

 

2.1          Control4 Appointment .  Subject to the terms of this Agreement, Supplier hereby appoints Control4, and Control4 hereby accepts appointment, as an exclusive reseller to sell and license the Products worldwide to Control4 customers and End Customers.  The foregoing appointment is subject to the license and the other terms and conditions set forth herein.

 

2.2          License Grants .  Subject to the terms of this Agreement:

 

2.2.1       Supplier grants to Control4, and Control4 accepts a perpetual, exclusive royalty-free license in and to that portion of the Supplier Intellectual Property identified on Schedule H, for Control’s use in making, having made, marketing and selling the Products worldwide.

 

2.2.2       During the Term, Control4 grants to Supplier, and Supplier accepts a personal, non-transferable, indivisible, revocable and non-exclusive license in and to that portion of the Control4 Intellectual Property identified on Schedule H, or that Control4 delivers or discloses to Supplier from time to time and indicates, at the time of such disclosure, that such Control4 Intellectual Property, and the disclosure thereof by Control4 to Supplier, is subject to the terms of this Agreement, solely for Licensee’s use in developing and

 

3



 

manufacturing each Product, and selling the same to Control4 only.

 

2.2.3       Restrictions on Use .

 

2.2.3.1    Supplier acknowledges that the Control4 Intellectual Property constitutes valuable trade secrets of Control4.  Accordingly, Supplier will not do any of the following without Control4’s prior written consent: (a) modify, adapt, alter, translate, or create Derivative Works from the Control4 Intellectual Property; (b) sublicense or sell the Control4 Intellectual Property to any third party; (c) reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to derive the source code for the Control4 Intellectual Property.

 

2.2.3.2    Control4 acknowledges that the Supplier Intellectual Property constitutes valuable trade secrets of Supplier.  Accordingly, Control4 will not do any of the following without Supplier’s prior written consent: (a) modify, adapt, alter, translate, or create Derivative Works from the Supplier Intellectual Property; (b) sublicense or sell the Supplier Intellectual Property to any third party except as specifically permitted in this Agreement; (c) reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to derive the source code for the Control4 Intellectual Property

 

2.3          Products .  Supplier will design, manufacture and ship to Control4 the Products in accordance with the Specifications set forth in Schedule A, including any applicable Hardware, Firmware and Licensed Software.

 

2.4          Testing, Certifications and Standards .  The parties may identify on Schedule A any testing, technical certifications and standards which Products must receive or meet, respectively; and the parties may identify on Schedule B any additional compensation (if any) for Supplier related to such certifications and standards.  Unless specifically provided on Schedule A, Supplier shall not be responsible for causing applicable Products to achieve specified certifications and standards prior to delivery.

 

2.5          Initial Delivery Time Frame .  Subject to the availability of all requisite parts and/or components on the open market through normal commercial channels within the time frame that was specified for parts purchasing in the Schedule A, Supplier will adhere to the initial delivery time frame specified in Schedule C.  Subsequent delivery time frames will be set forth in the applicable Purchase Orders.

 

2.6          Change of Product Specifications: Design Changes .  Supplier may not exclude or discontinue Products set forth on Schedule A, nor make changes or modifications in Specifications, construction, or design of said Products to be delivered to Control4, during the Term, without first receiving Control4’s written consent, which shall not be unreasonably withheld.

 

2.7          Effect of Product or Design Chances .  Any mutually agreed to and executed Product changes, whether suggested by Control4 or Supplier, shall be governed by and shall not change any other terms of this Agreement, including Supplier’s warranty of Product, unless mutually agreed to in writing and attached as an amendment hereto.

 

2.8          Additional Products .  Additional Products may be added to Schedule A upon the mutual agreement and written Change Order agreed upon by both Control4 and Supplier.  In such event, the development, manufacturing, and sale of such additional Products shall be made in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.

 

2.9          Product Support .  Supplier will provide to Control4 support for each Product as set forth more specifically in the Service Level Agreement appended as Schedule D (“Product Support”).

 

2.10        Control4’s Obligation .  Subject to Supplier’s compliance with its obligations hereunder, Control4 agrees to purchase via Purchase Order the Products specified in Schedule A at the price specified in Schedule B.

 

2.11        Supplier’s Obligation .  In consideration of Control4’s purchase commitments in this Agreement, Supplier agrees to commit to the design and development, production, and manufacturing of the Product, including without limitation completing all necessary design implementations, hiring necessary staff and other resources, and committing to the development of proper tooling for manufacturing and/or applicable testing of the Products set forth in Schedule A.

 

2.12        Pre-Existing Intellectual Property .  Nothing herein shall be deemed to constitute a transfer, sale or conveyance by one Party to the other Party of any ownership interest in such Party’s Intellectual Property that was owned or developed by it prior to the Effective Date.

 

2.13        Works Made for Hire .  Any and all Services, Inventions, Works, Work Product and Deliverables, prepared by Supplier pursuant to this Agreement (whether or not they are made, conceived or reduced to practice using Control4’s data or facilities) which are made, conceived, developed, reduced to practice, or created by Supplier (whether alone or jointly with Control4 and/or one or more independent contractors), shall be considered “WORKS-MADE-FOR-HIRE” and shall be the sole property of Control4.  Supplier agrees to and hereby does assign to Control4, without further compensation, all right, title and interest in any such Services, Inventions, Work Product, Deliverables and Works, and in all Intellectual Property contained therein.  Supplier hereby grants Control4 a perpetual, royalty-free license to use any pre-

 

4



 

existing materials, concepts, processes or information contained or expressed in Supplier’s work, Services, Work Product or Deliverables hereunder.

 

2.14        Assignment of Intellectual Property .  Supplier will promptly disclose to Control4 any and all Inventions and Intellectual Property and will assist Control4 in obtaining and enforcing, for Control4’s benefit, patents and any other Intellectual Property rights relating thereto in any country.  Upon request, Supplier will execute all applications, assignments, instruments and papers and perform all acts necessary or desired by Control4 to assign all such Inventions, and Intellectual Property relating thereto, fully and completely to Control4 and to enable Control4, (including its successors, assigns and nominees) to secure and enjoy the full benefits and advantages thereof.  In the event Supplier fails or refuses to sign any document or documents reasonably requested by Control4 to allow it to apply for or prosecute any patent, copyright or mask work registration, or other right or protection relating to an Invention, Deliverable, Work or Work Product, whether because of Supplier’s physical or mental incapacity or for any other reason, Supplier hereby irrevocably appoints Control4 and its authorized officers and agents as its agent and attorney-in-fact, to act in Supplier’s behalf to execute and file any such application or applications and to do all other lawfully permitted acts to further the prosecution and issuance of patent, copyright or mask work registrations, or similar protections with the same legal force and effect as if executed by Supplier.

 

2.15        Residual Rights .  Notwithstanding anything to the contrary herein, Supplier shall be free to use and employ its general skills, know-how and expertise gained or learned during the course of any Work Order, so long as it acquires such information without disclosure or use of any Control4 Proprietary Information or any Work Product, Works, Deliverables, Inventions or Intellectual Property of Control4.

 

3.                                       Ordering and Delivery of Products.

 

3.1          General .  The purchase and sale of the Products shall be made against specific written Purchase Orders submitted by Control4 to Supplier during the term of this Agreement.  All Purchase Orders for Product submitted by Control4 (by either facsimile or email) shall state the following: (a) Control4’s name and address; (b) the description of the Products ordered; (c) the quantities of Products ordered as per Schedule A; (d) the desired delivery dates; (e) the destination of the Products ordered; and (f) the price(s) for the Products ordered.  Control4 shall mail, email and/or fax each Purchase Order to Supplier.  Supplier shall acknowledge by facsimile or email the details of the Purchase Order within two (2) business days of receipt of the Purchase Order.

 

3.2          Acceptance .  All Purchase Orders (and any amendments thereto) are subject to acceptance by Supplier, which acceptance may not be withheld for any Purchase Order falling within the scope of the agreed quantities and delivery dates set forth in Schedule B (if any) and issued within the agreed upon Product lead time.  Acceptance shall be indicated by return of an email or facsimile appropriately signed by Supplier, so as to indicate acceptance, conditional or otherwise, of any such order of Products.  Any Purchase Order that is not rejected by Supplier within five (5) business days of the day sent by Control4 shall be deemed automatically accepted by Supplier.

 

3.3          Conflicting Provisions .  If any conflict arises between the terms stated in any Purchase Order and the terms and conditions of this Agreement, the terms and conditions of this Agreement shall prevail.  Any term of a Purchase Order that is in conflict with, omitted or contradictory to this Agreement will be null and void.  The remaining terms and commitment of the Purchase Order will still remain valid and binding.

 

3.4          Affiliates .  This Agreement is entered into by Control4 for the benefit of itself and its affiliated companies (if any), each of which shall be deemed to be a third-party beneficiary of this Agreement.  Control4’s affiliated companies will be entitled to place Purchase Orders with Supplier subject to the terms and conditions herein contained.

 

3.5          Deviation from Purchase Orders .  Following acceptance of a Purchase Order, Supplier may not reject or deviate from the Purchase Order without Control4’s written approval in Control4’s sole discretion.  Control4 may from time to time need to pull in a delivery date or push out a delivery date to accommodate changes in schedules and End Customer demand.  Such changes can be made in accordance with the terms outlined in the Pricing and Terms of Delivery Schedule of this Agreement.

 

3.6          Time of the Essence .  Time is of the essence with respect to delivery of ordered Products by specified delivery dates.  [LIQUIDATED DAMAGES?]

 

4.                                       Term .  Unless terminated as provided herein, this Agreement will be effective for a period of four (4) years from the Effective Date (“Initial Term”).  Upon the expiration of the Initial Term, this Agreement will automatically renew for successive periods of one (1) year (each a “Renewal Term”) unless terminated at the end of the Initial Term or any Renewal Term by either Party by delivering written notice of the intent to terminate not less than (or a minimum of) one hundred and eighty (180) days prior to the end of the Initial Term or Renewal Term, as applicable.

 

5



 

5.                                       Pricing .

 

5.1          Prices .  The applicable Price for each Product ordered hereunder is set forth in Schedule B,

 

5.2          Taxes .  The Prices specified in Schedule B for each Product are exclusive of any other federal, state or local sales, use, excise, or other similar taxes or duties, which Supplier may be required to collect or pay as a consequence of the sale or delivery of any Products to Control4.  Supplier shall include all required taxes as a separate line item on each invoice.  Control4 shall not be responsible for the payment or reimbursement of any tax not properly invoiced by Supplier, or for any taxes based on Supplier’s income.

 

5.3          Price Changes .  Any change in the Price payable for any Product shall be made only upon written agreement of the Parties.

 

5.4          Cost Reductions .  Supplier shall provide to Control4 regular cost reductions to occur semi-annually from the date of execution of this Agreement or as mutually agreed between the Parties in writing.  Such reductions may be either through manufacturing efficiency gains, through component pricing improvements or through cost reductions, so long as any component changes are approved by Control4 in advance and in writing.

 

6.                                       Delivery .

 

6.1          General .  All Products shall be delivered to Control4 (or its designated location) Ex Works Supplier’s facility as specified in the applicable Purchase Order, using Control4’s specified standard shipping.  The Product shall be packed and marked for shipment in accordance with Schedules A and B.  Supplier shall have no liability for any events occurring during shipment except in cases where Product is not packaged in accordance with Schedule A.  In the event that Supplier is unable to meet the delivery date at the specified location as set forth in the Purchase Order, Supplier is responsible for any incremental fees associated with expedited shipping to ensure fastest freight and delivery to Control4, as well as incremental expediting fees associated with ongoing shipments, until Supplier is caught up on deliveries to Control4.

 

6.2          Title: Risk of Loss .  Title to and risk of loss or damage on any Product shall pass to Control4 upon Supplier’s delivery of such Product to the carrier specified by Control4.

 

6.3          Time of the Essence .  Each Party acknowledges that timely completion of applicable development schedule milestones, as outlined in Schedule C, are of the essence and vital to the success of this business arrangement set forth herein.

 

7.                                       Inspection and Acceptance.

 

7.1          Testing and Inspection .  Control4 may inspect and perform tests of the Products at any reasonable time and place.  If such inspection or testing is made on Supplier’s premises, Control4 shall provide Supplier with ten (10) business days advance notice and Supplier shall provide reasonable facilities for such inspection and testing.

 

7.2          Acceptance .  Final inspection and acceptance by Control4 shall be conducted within ten (10) business days of the receipt of the applicable Products at Control4’s specified receiving destination (except as otherwise agreed in writing, signed by both Parties).  Any Products not rejected within such ten (10) business day period shall be deemed to be accepted by Control4.

 

7.3          Rejection .  Control4 may, within ten (10) business days of receipt of any Products at Control4’s receiving destination, reject Products that fail to conform to the applicable specifications and test procedures specified in Schedule A.  In the event of a rejection, the provisions of Section 8 shall apply to any such rejected Products.

 

8.                                       Warranty .

 

8.1          Product Warranty .  Supplier warrants to Control4 and its End Customers that for a period of twenty-four (24) months from the date of sale by Control4 to the End Customer (excluding prototype or qualification units not intended for delivery to End Customers), that the Products will conform to the Specifications as per Schedule A, and will be free from manufacturing defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and service.  In the event that there is an issue with one of Supplier’s component suppliers that results in an issue for Control4 that has not been previously specified, Supplier will provide support to work with such component supplier to correct the issue.  As set forth below in Section 9, Control4 may return directly to Supplier any defective Product that does not conform to the Specifications.  For products out-of-warranty or damaged due to misuse, Control4 may request that Supplier perform repairs, in which event Control4 agrees to pay the specified repair fees as per Schedule F.  Supplier warrants such repairs for three (3) months (workmanship only).

 

8.2          Software or Firmware Warranty; Enhancement .  Where applicable and as part of the Product Warranty set forth above, Supplier shall fix, without charge, any reproducible software or firmware defect that is documented by Control4.  In the event that a reproducible software or firmware defect occurs following release of an update or upgrade to a Control4 controller, and in the event the firmware is demonstrated to work properly with the prior version of the Control4 controller, then revising the software or firmware to attain compatibility with the new release shall

 

6



 

be categorized as an enhancement project which is performed as Additional Work as described in Schedule G.

 

8.3          Refund .  Supplier’s liability for warranty claims hereunder is limited to a refund of the purchase price then paid to Supplier for any defective Products, whether Supplier’s liability arises from any breach of Supplier’s express warranty, breach of any obligation arising from breach of warranty, or otherwise with respect to the manufacture and sale of any Products hereunder.

 

8.4          CLASS QUALITY ISSUE .  IN THE EVENT THAT THERE IS A CLASS QUALITY ISSUE WITH ANY PRODUCT PROVIDED BY SUPPLIER TO CONTROL4 THAT REQUIRES A FIELD RECALL FOR PRODUCTS UNDER WARRANTY AND IT IS DETERMINED THAT QUALITY ISSUE IS RELATED TO MANUFACTURING OR COMPONENT ISSUES OR ERRORS IN THE PRODUCT SPECIFICATION BY SUPPLIER, SUPPLIER WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIFIC COSTS RELATED TO THE RECALL, REPAIR, AND REPLACEMENT OF PRODUCT IN THE FIELD.

 

8.5          Additional Warranties .  Supplier hereby represents and warrants to Control4 that:

 

8.5.1       Supplier has and will convey to Control4, upon payment in full, good title to the Products, free and clear of all liens and other security interests;

 

8.5.2       The Products and any accompanying user manuals and product documentation (if any; “Materials”)), and the use, distribution, and resale thereof by Control4 do not and shall not infringe upon, misappropriate, or violate any patent, copyright, trade secret, trade name, trademark, or any other proprietary right of any third party; and

 

8.5.3       The Products and Materials shall be compliant with all applicable government or administrative electrical, environmental and emissions standards in countries for which they are designed for use (as specified in Schedule A); any additional compliance and/or markings are Control4’s responsibility.

 

8.6          No Other Warranties .  EXCEPT AS SPECIFIED HEREIN, CONTROL4 AND SUPPLIER EACH HEREBY DISCLAIM ALL EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY , EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID.

 

9.                                       Return-to-Vendor Process.

 

9.1          General .  All Products returned to Supplier under a warranty claim require a Return To Vendor (RTV) number, which will be issued by Supplier upon request.  All Products returned to Supplier must have the RTV number clearly marked on the outside of each box returned.  Returned Product must be packaged in a way that prevents any damage during shipment.  Any Product that is damaged in shipment will be the responsibility of the Party making the shipment.  Control4 is responsible for one-way freight to Supplier for returned product and the Supplier is responsible for one-way freight to Control4.

 

9.2          Non-Warranty Repair .  Clear signs of Control4 caused damage or Products that appear to have been used in a manner contrary to the Product specifications are subject to be processed under “Non-Warranty Repair.” In such case, Control4 will be notified of the change in return status.  At Control4’s option, the Product can then be repaired at cost or returned “as is” to Control4.  In the case of any non-warranty repair, Control4 shall assume all shipping charges.

 

9.3          All authorized RTV’s will be either be replaced with conforming product shipped to Control4 at Supplier’s expense at the time of receipt of non-conforming product, or Supplier will issue a credit to Control4 for the full purchase price of the Product.  In the

 

10.                                Limitation of Liability .  EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR IN THIS AGREEMENT, NEITHER PARTY WILL BE LIABLE FOR ANY PUNITIVE, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN ANY ACTION ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO THIS AGREEMENT, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), INTENTIONAL CONDUCT OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES RELATING TO THE LOSS OF PROFITS, INCOME OR GOODWILL, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER SUCH PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, THAT THIS SECTION IS NOT INTENDED TO LIMIT AND SHALL NOT BE CONSTRUED TO LIMIT THE OBLIGATIONS OF EITHER PARTY TO DEFEND AND FULLY INDEMNIFY THE OTHER PARTY AGAINST CLAIMS ASSERTED BY THIRD PARTIES TO THE EXTENT REQUIRED BY SECTION 16.

 

11.                                Change Orders

 

11.1        Change Orders Submitted by Control4 .  Control4 may, by written Change Order, request changes in the drawings, designs, specifications, software, packaging or packing requirements concerning the Product, and/or request

 

7



 

additional services from Supplier.  Upon Supplier’s receipt of a proposed Change Order, Supplier shall determine within twenty (20) business days any corresponding change in Price, and shall provide Control4 with a statement setting forth any such Price changes.  Change Orders shall not be effective until signed by both Parties.

 

11.2        Change Orders Submitted by Supplier .  At any time, Supplier may recommend to Control4 proposed changes in the drawings, designs, specifications, process changes, or packaging or packing requirements that are expected to result in improved Product reliability or cost reduction.  Implementation of Supplier’s recommendations shall only be made upon receipt of authorization by Control4 in the form of a written Change Order.  Change Order costs shall be negotiated between Supplier and Control4 and shall be outlined in the applicable signed Change Order.

 

11.3        Effect of Change Orders .  Upon written agreement by the Parties as to any proposed Change Order, any resulting Price change shall apply to any subsequent Purchase Order with respect to which the change is effective, and Schedule B shall be amended accordingly.  Modifications or changes to Products that are not provisioned in Schedule A, which by their nature require additional effort or deliverables on the part of the Supplier, are considered as extra work and shall be invoiced separately.  The costs of such modifications are calculated on an hourly basis and charged as per Schedule G.

 

12.                                Discontinuation and Modification of Product

 

12.1        Availability of Products .  Except as provided below in Section 12.2, during the term of this Agreement, Supplier shall continue to manufacture and offer each of the Products for sale to Control4.

 

12.2        Discontinuation of a Product .  Supplier may discontinue providing any particular Product to Control4 upon nine (9) months prior written notice.  After the discontinuation of any particular Product, Supplier shall continue to honor all warranty and the RTV processes outlined in Sections 8 and 9 for twenty four (24) months.

 

12.3        Modification of Products .  Any Product modification developed specifically for Control4 by Supplier shall be work made for hire and shall be the property of Control4 (including but not limited to all IP, documentation, and tooling).  All such modifications will be maintained with latest, up to date information/items, and shall be deemed to be Control4 Confidential.

 

13.                                Payment and Invoice.

 

13.1        Payment Terms .  Unless otherwise agreed in Schedule B or a writing by Control4, payment for any Purchase Orders shall be due sixty (60) days from delivery of the Products to Control4.  All transactions must be valued and paid in United States currency.

 

13.2        Partial Shipments .  When partial shipments are made, Supplier shall invoice Control4 in accordance with this Agreement for the quantity of conforming Products shipped at the agreed upon Price for such Products,

 

14.                                Termination.

 

14.1        Termination for Breach .  Either Party may terminate this Agreement if the other Party violates any material provision of this Agreement and fails to correct or cure any such violation within thirty (30) days after receipt of written notice of such violation.  In addition, should either Party be adjudicated to be bankrupt or insolvent, or should a receiver or liquidator be appointed for its business or assets, or should an assignment be made for the benefit of such Party’s creditors, or should such Party file or have filed against it a petition for winding up its affairs, or should such Party file or have filed against it a petition under any applicable bankruptcy statutes or regulations or should such Party attempt to assign this Agreement without the written consent of the other Party being first obtained, then the other Party shall be entitled to terminate this Agreement effective immediately upon delivery of notice of such election to the other Party.

 

14.2        Effect of Termination .  Any undisputed and properly invoiced payment obligations of Control4 owed to Supplier shall survive expiration or termination of this Agreement for any reason.

 

14.3        Right to Market and Distribute .  In the any event resulting in Termination, Control4 shall retain the right to market and distribute any remaining inventory purchased from Supplier.

 

15.                                Source Code Escrow

 

15.1        Escrow Deposit .  Within thirty (30) days of the Effective Date, Supplier shall enter into a third party escrow agreement (“Software Escrow Agreement”) approved by Control4, with an escrow agent (“Software Escrow Agent”) for the benefit of Control4, and within five (5) days thereafter shall deposit a copy of the current version of the source code for the Supplier Intellectual Property identified in Schedule H with the Software Escrow Agent under the Software Escrow Agreement.  Supplier will update the escrow with the source code as soon as reasonably possible after they are made generally available to Supplier’s customers or made available to Control4 (whichever comes sooner).

 

15.2        Release Conditions .  Control4 shall have the right to obtain from the Software Escrow Agent one copy of

 

8


 

all source code in escrow, under any of the following conditions (each a “Release Condition”):

 

15.2.1     A receiver, trustee, or similar officer is appointed for the business or property of Supplier;

 

15.2.2     Supplier files a petition in bankruptcy, files a petition seeking any reorganization, makes an arrangement, composition, or similar relief under any law regarding insolvency or relief for debtors, or makes an assignment for the benefit of creditors;

 

15.2.3     Any involuntary petition or proceeding under bankruptcy or insolvency laws is instituted against Supplier and not stayed, enjoined, or discharged within thirty (30) days;

 

15.2.4     Supplier takes any corporate action authorizing any of the foregoing;

 

15.2.5     Any similar or analogous proceedings or event to those in sub paragraphs (a) through (d) above occurs in respect of Supplier within any jurisdiction outside the USA; or

 

15.2.6     Control4 determines in good faith that Supplier has failed to or is unable to support, maintain, manufacture and/or deliver the Licensed Software, or the Products, as applicable, as required under this Agreement for a period of at least twenty (20) days, Control4 gives written notice of such determination to Supplier, and Control4 in good faith determines that Supplier has failed to support and maintain the Licensed Software or Products as required under this Agreement within ten (10) days following receipt of such notice; or

 

15.2.7     A force majeure event (as described below) prevents Supplier from supporting, maintaining, manufacturing and/or delivering the Licensed Software or Product as required under this Agreement for a period of at least thirty (30) days/

 

16.                                Escrow of Manufacturing Know-How

 

16.1        Escrow Deposit .  Within thirty (30) days of the Effective Date, Supplier shall enter into a third-party escrow agreement (“Manufacturing Escrow Agreement”) approved by Control4 with an escrow agent ( “Manufacturing Escrow Agent”), and within five (5) days thereafter shall deposit a copy of its current Manufacturing Know-How with the Manufacturing Escrow Agent under the Manufacturing Escrow Agreement.  Supplier will update the escrow with the up-to-date Manufacturing Know-How as soon as reasonably possible after material changes are known to Supplier.

 

16.2        Release Conditions .  Control4 shall have the right to obtain from the Manufacturing Escrow Agent one (1) copy of the Manufacturing Know-How, upon the occurrence of a Release Condition.

 

16.3        License Grant .  Upon release of the Manufacturing Know-How from escrow pursuant to this Section (“Escrow of Manufacturing Know-How”), Control4 may, directly or through its contractors and suppliers:

 

16.3.1     Use the Manufacturing Know-How (including without limitation all Supplier Intellectual Property Rights related thereto) to manufacture or have manufactured Products solely for resale and uses of Products otherwise permitted under this Agreement, and to improve, enhance and create Derivative Works of the Products and various components thereof.  Control4 shall own all such Derivative Works created by or for Control4.  Supplier shall execute such documents and take such steps as Control4 reasonably requests to perfect Control4’s ownership of the intellectual Property Rights in such Derivative Works.

 

16.3.2     Enter into agreements with Supplier and/or Supplier’s suppliers for the continuing supply of Products to Control4.  In addition, Control4 shall be permitted to share access to the Manufacturing Know-How with other customers and contractors of Supplier who otherwise have access to Supplier’s Manufacturing Know-How.

 

16.4        Assistance .  If Control4 elects to have the Manufacturing Know-How released from escrow pursuant to this Section, Supplier shall provide reasonable and prompt cooperation to assist Control4 in establishing a source of Products supply using the Manufacturing Know-How.

 

17.                                Force Majeure :  Neither Party to this Agreement shall be liable to the other for non-performance due to causes not reasonably within its control; including but not limited to fire, flood, war, embargo, riot, or intervention of any governmental authority, provided, however, that the Party suffering such delay immediately notifies the other Party in writing, of the reasons for the delay and, if possible, the duration of such delay.

 

18.                                Confidentiality; Non-Compete; Non-Solicitation

 

18.1        Proprietary Materials .  From time to time during the performance of this Agreement, each Party may deliver certain Proprietary Information to the other Party hereunder.  All such Proprietary Information shall be deemed “Confidential information” as described in this Section 16, and, as between the Parties hereto, the Party providing such materials shall be deemed the owner, except as otherwise provided in this Agreement.

 

9



 

18.2        Confidentiality Obligations .  During the term of this Agreement and for a period of five (5) years thereafter, each Party hereto shall hold the Confidential Information in strict confidence and shall not permit the use or disclosure of any such Confidential Information by or to any person or entity (excluding party employees, attorneys, and subcontractors who may have access to Confidential Information on a need-to-know basis) unless such use or disclosure is specifically authorized in writing by the Party providing the Confidential Information.

 

18.3        Treatment of Confidential Information .  Each Party shall take appropriate action and utilize the same effort to safeguard Confidential Information as it utilizes to protect its own trade secrets or proprietary information, but at a minimum, each Party shall undertake reasonable precautions to protect the Confidential Information.  Without limitation on the foregoing, each Party shall: (i) advise its own employees who have access to the Confidential Information and others for whom the other Party has given written consent to disclose the Confidential Information, of the confidential nature of the Confidential Information; (ii) ensure by agreement or otherwise that the confidential Information is prohibited from being disclosed to any additional third parties except to the extent required to carry out obligations under this Agreement; and (iii) require that such Confidential Information be kept in a reasonably secure location.

 

18.4        Compliance with Law .  In the event that a Party hereto is required by law or by any legal process, including interrogatories, requests for information or documents, subpoena, civil investigative demand, depositions, or similar legal process, to disclose any Confidential Information, such Party shall provide the other Party with reasonably prompt, written notice of such request or requirement so that the other Party may seek, at its own cost, an appropriate protective order if it deems it appropriate to do so.  If, in the absence of a protective order or the receipt of a waiver hereunder, the compelled Party is nonetheless, based on the advise of the Party’s legal counsel, required by law to disclose Confidential Information, such Party may disclose only that portion of the Confidential Information which such Party’s counsel reasonably believes the Party is legally required to disclose, and will undertake reasonable efforts to obtain assurance that the Confidential Information will receive confidential treatment.

 

18.5        Use of Confidential Information .  The Confidential Information shall be used by each Party solely in the course of performing its obligations hereunder.  The Parties shall not make Confidential Information available for use by or for the benefit of any other third party, whether or not for consideration.

 

18.6        Return of Confidential Information .  Each Party will return to the other Party or destroy (and certify to the other Party that such destruction has taken place) all Confidential Information in written form provided by the other Party, including any copies, upon termination of this Agreement Notwithstanding the foregoing, neither Party shall be required to destroy any of the other Party’s Confidential Information that is stored electronically as part of such Party’s disaster recovery program (provided that such Party shall maintain the confidentiality of any such electronically retained Confidential Information).

 

18.7        Limitations .  The obligations set forth in this Section 16 do not apply if and to the extent the Party receiving Confidential Information establishes that: (i) the information disclosed to it was already known to it without obligation to keep it confidential; (ii) it received the information in good faith from a third party lawfully in possession thereof without obligation to keep such information confidential; (iii) the information was publicly known at the time of its receipt by it or has become publicly known other than by a breach of this Agreement; (iv) the information is independently developed by it without use of the other Party’s Confidential information; or (v) it was disclosed under operation of Law, provided that the receiving Party has promptly notified the disclosing Party of any legal process requiring production of Confidential Information prior to compliance and has taken all reasonable precautions, including a protective order if so requested by disclosing party to insure confidential treatment of any information.

 

19.                                Indemnification .

 

19.1        By Supplier .  Supplier will indemnify, hold harmless and defend Control4, at Supplier’s expense, against any loss, injury, expense or damage arising from any claim brought against Control4 alleging that its sale of the Products in accordance with the terms of this Agreement infringes a third party’s copyright, patent or trade secret or other intellectual property rights, and will indemnify and hold Control4 harmless against all losses in connection with any such claims.

 

19.2        By Control4 .  Control4 will indemnify, hold harmless and defend Supplier, at Control4’s expense, any claim brought against Supplier alleging that Supplier’s use, in accordance with the terms of this Agreement and where applicable, of materials provided to Supplier by Control4 infringes a third person’s copyright, trade secret or patent, and will indemnify and hold Supplier harmless against alt losses in connection with any such claims.

 

19.3        General .  The Party entitled to indemnity under this Section (“Indemnified Party”) shall give the other Party (“Indemnifying Party”) written notice of any claims resulting in an obligation of indemnification under this Section.  The Indemnified Party shall provide reasonable assistance in the defense and the settlement of a claim at the

 

10



 

Indemnifying Party’s expense.  The Indemnifying Party shall not settle a claim without the written consent of the Indemnified Party; such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld.  The Indemnifying Party will obtain the prior written approval, which approval will not be unreasonably delayed or withheld, of the Indemnified Party in respect of any non-cash aspects of a proposed settlement of such claim from the Indemnified Party before entering into any settlement of such claim or ceasing to defend against such claim.

 

20.                                Notices .

 

20.1        General .  All notices permitted or required pursuant to this Agreement shall be written in the English language and shall be either (1) hand-delivered, (2) deposited with a nationally recognized overnight delivery service, (3) deposited with the United States Post Office, certified mail, return receipt requested, postage prepaid.  All notices other than those sent by facsimile transmission shall be deemed to have been served when actually received, or upon refusal of delivery.  All notices shall be addressed to the parties to whom such notices are intended as set forth below:

 

20.1.1     If to Control4:

 

Control4 Corporation
Attn:                                
11734 S.  Election Road, Suite 200
Salt Lake City, Utah 84020-6432

 

Copy to Control4 General Counsel

 

20.1.2     If to Supplier:

 


                                          

20.2        Change of Address .  Either Party may change its address by giving notice to the other in accordance with this Section.

 

20.3        Exceptions .  Regular business communications such as Purchase Orders, engineering Change Orders, corrective action requests, and the like may be sent via electronic mail or facsimile to appropriate individuals within either Supplier, Any regular business communication that will be relied upon as a material legal document must be delivered via one of the means noted above.

 

21.                                General .

 

21.1        Independent Contractors .  In performing their respective obligations hereunder, each of the Parties shall operate as and have the status of an independent contractor and shall not act as or be joint venturers, or an agent or employee of the other Party.  Neither Party shall have any right or authority to assume or create any obligations of any kind or to make any representations or warranties on behalf of the other party, whether express or implied, or to bind the other party in any respect whatsoever.

 

21.2        Amendments .  Any mutually agreed terms which may be specified during the continuance of this Agreement, or any extension hereof, shall be incorporated into this Agreement in the form of an addendum signed by both Parties and attached hereto.

 

21.3        No Waiver .  No failure or delay by either Party in exercising any right, power, or remedy under this Agreement shall operate as a waiver of any such right, power, or remedy.  No waiver of any term or condition of this Agreement shall be effective, unless it is in writing and signed by the Party against whom such waiver or modification is sought to be enforced.  The express waiver of any right or default hereunder shall be effective only in the instance given and shall not operate as or imply a waiver of any similar right or default on any subsequent occasion.

 

21.4        Invalidity .  Should any provision of this Agreement be determined to be void, invalid or otherwise unenforceable by any court or tribunal of competent jurisdiction, such determination shall not affect the remaining provisions hereof which shall remain in full force and effect.

 

21.5        Choice of Law; Jurisdiction

 

21.5.1     This Agreement shall be governed by and interpreted in accordance with the laws of the State of Utah, USA, without regard to provisions relating to conflicts of laws.

 

21.5.2     The Parties agree that if any legal proceeding is commenced to interpret or enforce the provisions of this Agreement, the Utah District Court in and for the County of Salt Lake shall have exclusive jurisdiction over the matter.  Control4 and Supplier each consents to the personal jurisdiction of such Court.  All legal fees including but not limited to attorney fees will be paid by the non-prevailing Party in any Segal dispute.

 

21.6        Entire Terms and Conditions .  The headings, font and bold and underlined type to the portions of this Agreement are for the convenience of the Parties only and have no legal effects.  This Agreement along with its Schedules constitutes the entire agreement between the Parties and may only be amended by an express, written document signed by the authorized representatives of both Parties.

 

11



 

21.7        Copies .  All copies duly signed and executed by both Parties shall be deemed to be originals of this Agreement.

 

21.8        Authority .  The persons executing this Agreement on behalf of Control4 and Supplier represent and warrant that they each have the requisite corporate authority to do so and that their execution of this Agreement is not subject to any further ratification or approval whatsoever.

 

12



 

Schedule A - Product Specifications; Product Support Materials

 

Below are the technical specifications for the Products) to be designed and/or manufactured by Supplier for Control4.  Consistent with the Agreement, upon completion of the design and effective when volume production commences, and unless an alternate timeframe is mutually agreed upon by both Parties in advance and in writing, Control4 must be notified prior to any changes to the bill of materials, approved vendor list or any other ECO changes at least four (4) weeks in advance of the implementation of any such change.  Depending on the type of change, Control4 may elect to have Supplier re-qualify such changes for the affected Product(s) to confirm there are no negative changes to form, fit, or function of the below specified Product(s).  Any Product changes not approved in advance by Control4 may be deemed non-conforming material and in such event shall be rejected and returned to Supplier for repair or replacement at Supplier’s expense.

 

1.                                       Product Specifications for all Hardware, Firmware and Licensed Software will be agreed upon in a writing signed by both parties after the Effective Date.

 

2.                                       The Acceptance Test Criteria for each of the Products set forth in Section 1 of this Schedule A will be agreed upon in a writing signed by both parties after the Effective Date.

 

3.                                       Supplier shall provide the Product Support Materials for each of the Products set forth in Section 1 of this Schedule A as identified and agreed upon in a writing signed by both parties after the Effective Date.

 

13



 

Schedule B - Pricing and Terms of Delivery

 

1.                                       Supplier will provide the following Product(s) in accordance with Schedule A:

 

a.                                       The Products will be agreed upon in a writing signed by both Parties after the Effective Date.

 

2.                                       Product Pricing (for each Product outlined in Schedule A)

 

a.                                       Pricing for each Product identified above in Section 1.a of this Schedule B will be agreed upon in a writing signed by both Parties after the Effective Date.

 

3.                                       Sample pricing

 

a.                                       Sample Pricing for each Product identified above in Section 1.a of this Schedule B will be agreed upon in a writing signed by both Parties after the Effective Date.

 

4.                                       Terms of Delivery

 

a.                                       Delivery is Ex Works Supplier’s facility.

 

b.                                       All units shall be bundled and packaged in accordance with the Schedule A.

 

c.                                        Shipments shall include accompanying documentation for build date and test data in accordance with the Schedule A.

 

d.                                       Unless otherwise expressly stated, Control4 agrees to pay all properly executed and undisputed Invoices within forty-five (45) days of receipt of a valid invoice or the date on which the entire delivery associated with the total Purchase Order amount is delivered to and accepted by Control4, whichever is later.  This payment term as defined is in effect for any term noted in this Agreement as “payment upon/from invoice date” or “payment upon/from date of receipt of valid invoice.”

 

e.                                        Upon request, Control4 may review Supplier financial under appropriate NDA with to satisfy any query required for Supplier to establish appropriate credit limit for Control4.

 

f.                                         Supplier agrees to pay for all expedited shipping for late deliveries and as may be required to meet delivery schedule as defined by Control4 in the Agreement.

 

g.                                        Other than the customized and/or Control4 specific related materials, Control4 is not responsible for raw materials ordered by Supplier that exceed those requirements to support Control4 valid and existing Purchase Orders at component lead time.

 

h.                                       Control4 may alter a valid Purchase Order by any amount up to the date of longest component lead time plus the manufacturing and testing time required.  Control4 may alter a valid Purchase Order by any amount and upon receipt of such change request from Control4 by Supplier, and subject to various lead times of the Products, Supplier will make commercially reasonable efforts to increase or decrease the quantity of Products requested in a valid Purchase Order.

 

i.                                           Any two (2) contiguous production shipments in which Supplier provides less than 98.5% on time delivery as measured by the delivery date stated on a Purchase Order and accepted by Supplier, may be considered a material breach of the Agreement by Supplier.

 

14



 

5.                                       Packaging Requirements:

 

a.                                       Exterior Packaging: Exterior packaging requirements for each Product identified above in Section 1a of this Schedule B will be agreed upon in a writing signed by both Parties after the Effective Date.

 

b.                                       End Customer Packaging: End customer packaging requirements for each Product identified above in Section 1.a of this Schedule B will be agreed upon in a writing signed by both Parties after the Effective Date.

 

15



 

Schedule C - Project and Delivery Schedule; Deliverables

 

1.                                       The Project and Delivery Schedule for each Product identified in Section 1.a of Schedule B will be agreed upon in a writing signed by both Parties after the Effective Date.

 

2.                                       The Deliverables will be agreed upon in a writing signed by both Parties after the Effective Date.

 

16


 

Schedule D - Product Support

 

Product Support

 

1.1                                If requested, Supplier shall provide operating documentation for the Product hardware and any applicable software.  Control4 shall be entitled to use the information to generate corresponding documents for Control4’s Products but Supplier shall not be held liable for any inadvertent errors associated with said documentation.

 

1.2                                Supplier shall also provide reasonable support to Control4.  However, Supplier shall not be held responsible for any misrepresentations or any error in Control4’s marketing of the Product to the public.

 

1.3                                There may be occasions where Control4 may desire Supplier, and Supplier is willing, to implement proprietary customization to hardware components of the Product.  Control4 and Supplier agree that such customization will be a separate activity and fees for such shall be quoted as NRE.  Any agreement relating to such customization shall be in writing, endorsed by Supplier and Control4, and attached to this document.  See Schedule G for more detail.

 

1.4                                Should Control4 require developmental support, such support shall be provided to Control4 on a case by case basis.

 

17



 

Schedule E - Quality Assurance Requirements

 

The following Quality Assurance Requirements are the basis for technical and organizational conditions and processes and shall be applied by both Supplier and Control4 in order to meet quality goals of each Party.  The minimum requirements for the Quality Management System of both Parties are specified below.  Rights and duties in view of supplied Product quality are regulated.  Supplier shall provide technical and organizational conditions in order to produce and supply high quality Products.  If at any point after the failure rates at Control4’s IQA exceed 0.5%, Control4 may consider Supplier to be in material breach of this Agreement.  During the 24-month warranty period after the date of sale by Control4, if any Products have been returned for repair and shipped back to Control4 with multiple instances of test failure or failure to meet the Specifications as defined in this Agreement, then Supplier shall replace the unit with a new unit at no extra charge or cost to Control4.

 

1.                                       Quality Management System at the Supplier

Supplier agrees to introduce and maintain a Quality Management System based on ISO 9001:2000 with the obligation to set a zero-defect goal and to continuously improve performance.  Production, inspection and/or packaging equipment provided by Control4 shall be part of the Quality Management System.  Control4 is interested in the protection and maintenance of our environment.  Therefore it is desirable that Supplier introduce an Environmental Management System based on ISO 14001 or similar.

 

2.                                       Quality Management System at sub-suppliers

If production or inspection equipment, software, services, material or any other components are provided by sub-suppliers, they will be part of the Supplier’s Quality Management System.  Otherwise Supplier will secure quality by adequate actions.  Supplier shall require its sub-suppliers to introduce and maintain a Quality Management System based on ISO 9000 with the obligation for sub-suppliers to also set a zero-defect goal and to continuously improve their performance.  Control4 may demand documented evidence from Supplier showing the effectiveness of the Quality Management System utilized by his sub-suppliers.

 

3.                                       Information

If it becomes evident that quality assurance requirements (such as quality characteristics, schedules or delivered quantities) cannot be met, Supplier shall inform Control4 immediately.  Supplier shall also notify Control4 immediately of any deviations detected after delivery.  To support a rapid solution, Supplier shall disclose all necessary data and facts.  Supplier shall obtain the approval of Control4 prior to any of the following:

 

·                                           Changing the production methods, sequence and materials (also at sub-suppliers)

·                                           Changing sub-suppliers

·                                           Changing test methods/equipment

·                                           Relocating production sites

·                                           Relocating production equipment at the same site

·                                           Outsourcing

·                                           Substitution

 

In order to be able to check the impact of any of the changes listed above, Supplier shall timely inform Control4.  However, Supplier’s duty to inform Control4 will not be applied in case of non-Control4 specific standard parts.

 

4.                                       Audit

Supplier authorizes Control4 to determine through audits whether its quality assurance activities meet the requirements set forth herein.  The audit can be conducted as a system, process or product audit.  Supplier shall support even short-term audit date requests.  Reasonable restrictions imposed by Supplier to safeguard business will be accepted and confidentiality will be warranted.  In the event of quality problems, Supplier shall enable Control4 to conduct an audit at its sub-suppliers.  Control4 shall communicate audit results to Supplier.  If Control4 considers corrective actions to be needed, Supplier agrees to immediately prepare an action plan and implement it on schedule through Control4’s Supplier Corrective Action (SCAR) system.  Supplier shall notify Control4 of all progress made.

 

5.                                       Product and process agreements

The Products shall comply with agreed or warranted conditions (e.g.  Specification, data sheets, drawings, sample parts).  Supplier shall promptly examine all documentation provided by Control4 (e.g.  specifications, data sheets, drawings).  If the Control4 documentation is obviously incorrect, unclear, incomplete or obviously different than a sample part, Supplier shall inform Control4 in writing prior to start of mass production or performance of services.

 

18



 

a.                                       Mass production and First Article Acceptance Report

Prior to starting mass production, Supplier shall, if not agreed otherwise, submit a mass production process validation plan, similar to PPAP per QS9000.  Verification of applicability and capability shall be provided.  Prior to starting mass production, Supplier shall submit initial samples of the product built under mass production conditions in agreed quantities and on schedule.  Mass production may not be started until it is released by Control4 through the FAAR (First Article Acceptance Report) program.

 

b.                                       Process capability

For all process characteristics, Supplier shall perform process planning (work plans, test plans, operating supplies, tooling, machinery, etc.).  For functional and process critical characteristics Supplier shall review the suitability of the manufacturing facilities and shall document the results.  Documented test results and process data must be made available to Control4 electronically.  Product quality is monitored with periodic audits.  “Special characteristics,” identified and agreed on between Control4 and Supplier shall, if applicable, be monitored electronically by statistic process control.  Special characteristics and process capabilities shall be determined and documented.  If not agreed otherwise, the following values shall be maintained.

 

Type Term Capability

Machine capability MFU Cm k   > 1,33

Short-term process capability PFU Pp k   > 1,

Long-term process capability PFU Cp k   > 1,33

If the value above cannot be met, Supplier shall perform and document a 100% inspection prior to shipping, until the root cause has been determined and fixed.  In the case of process disruptions and quality deviations, Supplier shall analyze the causes, shall initiate improvement measures and review their effectiveness.

 

C pk 

 

Sigma level ( s )

 

Area under the probability density function  F ( s )

 

Process yield

 

Process fallout (in terms of DPMO/PPM)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

0.33  

 

1

 

0.6826894921

 

68.27

%

317311

 

0.67  

 

2

 

0.9544997361

 

95.45

%

45500

 

1.00 

 

3

 

0.9973002039

 

99.73

%

2700

 

1.33 

 

4

 

0.9999366575

 

99.99

%

63

 

1.67 

 

5

 

0.9999994267

 

99.9999

%

1

 

2.00 

 

6

 

0.9999999980

 

99.9999998

%

0.002

 

 

6.                                       Production records

Supplier shall maintain the following documents:

·                   Work plan for every part

·                   Test plan for every part

·                   Inspection results for every batch

·                  Process settings for every batch

·                   Material used for every batch

·                   Material RoHS certificate for every part

In general, Supplier shall maintain evidence of the documents above.  Control4 may demand documented evidence.

 

7.                                       Serial production, documentation, product identification

Supplier shall record and document quality assurance measures, especially test and inspection results, and orderly retain these records electronically.  Control4 shall have the ability to query the Supplier database by unit MAC ID or unique Unit serial number to access electronically stored data.  Documents and records shall be retained for at least 7 years.  All changes made on the product and in the process chain shall be documented by Supplier in a product history, and shall be submitted to Control4 upon request if its PLM system is separate from Control4’s Arena PLM system.  Upon request Supplier shall enable Control4 to access the records electronically.  Supplier shall use process descriptions to regulate the control of all data and documents (including external documents like standards and customer drawings) and implement them effectively.  Based on the agreements herein, Supplier may be required to provide serialization documentation with every shipment.

 

8.                                       Packaging, identification, traceability

Supplier shall deliver products in approved shipping containers in order to prevent damage and quality impairments (e.g.  scratches, contamination, corrosion, chemical reaction).  Supplier agrees to identify the products, parts and the packaging in accordance with agreements reached with Control4.  Supplier must ensure that packed products will also remain legible during shipping and storage. 

 

19



 

Supplier agrees to ensure the traceability of the products produced.  Measures must be instituted to ensure that if a defect is detected, the defective parts/products/batches etc., are traceable and contained.  If Control4 makes production and test equipment available to Supplier, especially equipment and fixtures related to deliveries, and then they must be labeled as Control4 property.  Supplier is responsible for protecting this property from damage and ensuring proper function, maintenance and repair.

 

9.                                       Control4’s quality expectation

Supplier is committed in the same way as Control4 towards its customers to the zero-defect goal in business with Control4.  If the zero-defect goal is not attainable short-term, Control4 together with Supplier shall set temporary upper limits for defect rates as an interim goal.  Supplier shall propose and agree with Control4 on improvement actions.  If the defect rate is below the upper limit, this does not release Supplier from its responsibility to process all complaints and to proceed with continuous improvement activities.  Based on a periodic Supplier rating, the quality performance of Supplier will be monitored and reported by Control4.  It is expected that Supplier will monitor its quality performance as well.  Within the warranty period of 24 months from the date of sale by Control4, Supplier guarantees that all products, which are only assembled or sold without modification, are free of defects, which might be caused by material defects or poor processing.  Control4 shall limit incoming inspections to externally apparent shipping damage and conformation of the quantity and part number of the ordered product, according to supplied shipping documentation.  Discrepancies are reported without delay.  If the defect is not detected directly after delivery, Supplier will waive the claim of late notification of defects within the warranty period.  Supplier must adapt its Quality Management System and quality assurance activities to this limited incoming inspection.  If, in exceptional cases, Supplier is unable to supply products conforming to the specification, Supplier must obtain a concession from Control4 prior to delivery.  Supplier agrees to implement comments and ideas from Control4 to improve product quality by modifying production and quality assurance activities to the extent possible.  If the supply of components is not conforming to Specifications, should threaten to cause a production interruption at Control4 or its customers, Supplier, in consultation with Control4, must seek a remedy through suitable immediate actions for which Supplier is financially responsible (substitute delivery, sorting, rework, special shifts, rush shipment etc.).  Supplier then analyses defects without delay, with support from Control4 to the extent necessary and possible.  Defective parts shall be returned to Supplier.  Supplier agrees to analyze each deviation and to notify Control4 promptly of the cause of the deviation, initiated corrective and preventive measures as well as their effectiveness.

 

10.                                Safety and Environmental Regulations (RoHS, REACH)

Supplier commits to complying with all legal regulations regarding the environment, health, and striving to avoid all negative effects on humans and environment through an adequate organization and realization of environmental protection in the company.  For this, the implementation and further development of an Environmental and Occupational Safety Management Systems is beneficial.  Supplier is obligated to fulfill the requirements of the RoHS EC-guideline 2002/957EG and the REACH regulation (EC) no.  1907/2006.  If there is an exception for these requirements it must be clearly communicated to Control4 in writing for every single case.

 

11.                                Affected parts

These quality assurance requirements are valid for all parts and sub-assemblies which are supplied by Supplier.

 

20



 

Schedule F - Out-of-Warranty Repair Process and Fees

 

Out-of-Warranty Repair Process Supplier to Control4

 

1.1                                The out-of-warranty Repair Process shall be the same as the RTV Process except that repair time, component cost and shipping and handling charges shall be invoiced to Control4.

 

1.2                                Out-of-Warranty Repair Fees to Control4 shall be charged per incident based on the work and the components involved, plus labor cost

 

21



 

Schedule G - Customizations and Additional Work

 

Pricing for Extra Work that has been requested by Control4 and agreed to by Supplier with an executed Change Order or Request for Proposal is to be quoted on a case by case basis.  Control4 is not responsible for any work performed by Supplier without a valid Control4 Purchase Order.

 

22



 

Schedule H - Control4 Intellectual Property; Supplier Intellectual Property

 

1.                                       The Control4 Intellectual Property will be identified in a writing signed by Control4 after the Effective Date.

 

2.                                       Supplier’s Intellectual Property consists of the following:

 

a.                                       Multimedia Communication System, and Television Device and Core Module as identified in Taiwanese Application No.  099100089, filed January 5, 2010.

 

b.                                       Digital Home / Space Management System and Method, as identified in the attached application.

 

23


 

 

GRAPHIC

 


 

GRAPHIC

 


 

GRAPHIC

 


 

GRAPHIC

 


 

GRAPHIC

 


 

GRAPHIC

 


 

GRAPHIC

 


 

GRAPHIC

 


 

GRAPHIC

 


 

GRAPHIC

 


 

GRAPHIC

 


 

GRAPHIC

 


 

GRAPHIC

 


 

GRAPHIC

 


 

GRAPHIC

 


 

GRAPHIC

 


 

GRAPHIC

 


 

GRAPHIC

 


 

GRAPHIC

 


 

GRAPHIC

 


 

GRAPHIC

 


 

GRAPHIC

 


 

GRAPHIC

 


 

GRAPHIC

 


 

GRAPHIC

 


 

GRAPHIC

 


 

GRAPHIC

 


 

GRAPHIC

 


 

GRAPHIC

 


 

GRAPHIC

 


 

(19) Intellectual Property Office of Taiwan

 

 

 

(11) Publication No.: TW 201125376 A1

 

 

 

(12) Published Description of the Invention

 

(43) Date of Publication: July 16, TW 100 (2011)

 

(21) Application Number:  099100089

(22) Date of Application:  January 05, TW 99 (2010)

 

(51) Int. Cl. : H04R3/12   (2006.01)

 

 

(71) Applicant:

LITE-ON TECHNOLOGY CORPORATION (TW)

 

22F, 392, Ruey Kuang Road, Neihu, Taipei 114, Taiwan

 

 

(72) Inventor:

HOU, CHIH YUAN (TW); TSENG, TSAO TENG (TW); CHEN, CHI WEN (TW)

 

 

(74) Agent:

YUN, YIQUN; CHEN, WENLANG

 

Patent Entity Examination:   Yes   Number of Patent Claims: 18   Number of Figures:   7   28 pages in total

 

(54) Title

 

COMMUNICATING MODULE, MULTIMEDIA PLAYER AND TRANSCEIVING SYSTEM COMPRISING THE MULTIMEDIA PLAYER

 

(57) Abstract

 

A multimedia player is adapted for receiving a multimedia signal and receiving a communicating signal from an interphone and carrying with an input signal. The multimedia player comprises an output device, a communicating module and a core device. The communicating module includes a transporting unit used to receive the communicating signal, a decoding unit used to decode according to the communicating signal, and a processing unit generating an output signal corresponding to the input signal based on the decording result of the decoding unit. The core device is used to receive the multimedia signal and the output signal and to let the output device play the multimedia signal and the output signal simultaneously in order to achieve the object of not breaking off a multimedia service when interaction with a visitor is ongoing.

 

 

1: Main converting device

2: Auxiliary converting device

3: Core device

40: Input device

50: Output device

51: Sound recorder

52: Loudspeaker

53: Image recorder

54: Display device

100: Interphone

200: Multimedia player

300: Communicating module

 



 

Specifications of Invention Patent

(Please do not arbitrarily change the format or order of this specifications, and do not fill in parts marked with .)

 

  Application Number:

  Date of Application: 99.1.05

  IPC Classification:

 

(2006.01)

 

1. Title of the Invention: (Chinese / English)

 

 

communicating module, multimedia player and transceiving system comprising the multimedia player

 

2. Abstract of the Invention in Chinese:

 

 

3. Abstract of the Invention in English:

 

A multimedia player is adapted for receiving a multimedia signal and receiving a communicating signal from an interphone and carrying with an input signal. The multimedia player comprises an output device, a communicating module and a core

 

1



 

device. The communicating module includes a transporting unit used to receive the communicating signal, a decoding unit used to decode according to the communicating signal, and a processing unit generating an output signal corresponding to the input signal based on the decoding result of the decoding unit. The core device is used to receive the multimedia signal and the output signal and to let the output device play the multimedia signal and the output signal simultaneously in order to achieve the object of not breaking off a multimedia service when interaction with a visitor is ongoing.

 

2



 

4. Designated Representative Drawing:

 

1) The designated representative drawing of the invention is Figure (1).

2) Simple description of element symbols in the drawing:

 

100

Interphone

 

 

200

Multimedia player

 

 

300

Communicating module

 

 

1

Main converting device

 

 

2

Auxiliary converting device

 

 

3

Core device

 

 

40

Input device

 

 

50

Output device

 

 

51

Sound recorder

 

 

52

Loudspeaker

 

 

53

Image recorder

 

 

54

Display device

 

5. If this case includes chemical formulas, please display the chemical formulas most capable of showcasing the features of the invention:

 

3



 

6. Specifications of the Invention:

 

[Technical Field of the Invention]

 

The invention relates to a transceiving system, particularly to a transceiving system comprising a multimedia player.

 

[Background Technology]

 

Generally speaking, an outdoor interphone is often installed at the door of a house to help visitors outside contact the residents inside. In addition, the resident usually interacts with the visitor through an indoor interphone separately installed at the entrance of the door.

 

However, when the indoor interphone sends a visiting request, the resident has to put down the work at hand and hurry to the interphone from the current location if the resident is not beside the interphone. What is worse, this may displease the resident if he or she is watching a wonderful film at that particular moment.

 

[Summary of the Invention]

 

Therefore, the purpose of the invention is to provide a communicating module, a multimedia player and a transceiving system comprising the multimedia player, to allow the resident to talk to the visitor outside the door while still enjoying multimedia services.

 

As a result, the multimedia player of the invention is adapted for receiving a multimedia signal and receiving a communicating signal from an interphone and carrying with an input signal. The multimedia player comprises an output device, a communicating module and a core device. The communicating module includes a transporting unit used to receive the communicating signal, a decoding unit used to decode according to the communicating signal, and a processing unit generating an output signal

 

4



 

corresponding to the input signal based on the decording result of the decoding unit. The core device is used to receive the multimedia signal and the output signal and to let the output device play the multimedia signal and the output signal simultaneously.

 

The communicating module of the invention is adapted for receiving a communicating signal that carries an input signal and that is electrically connected with a core device coupled with an output device. The communicating module comprises a transporting unit used to receive the communicating signal, a decoding unit used to decode the communicating signal, and a processing unit generating an output signal corresponding to the input signal according to the decoding result of the decoding unit. Whenever the output device plays a multimedia signal, the core device allows the output device to play the output signal and the multimedia signal simultaneously when the core device receives the output signal.

 

The transceiving system of the invention comprises an interphone and a multimedia player. The interphone comprises an input device used to acquire a signal, a processing unit used to process the signal acquired by the input device into a coded signal, and a transporting unit used to load the coded signal on a communicating signal and send the communicating signal. The multimedia player comprises an output device, a communicating module, and a core device. The communicating module is provided with a transporting unit used to receive the communicating signal, a decoding unit used to decode the communicating signal, and a processing unit generating an output signal according to the decoding result of the decoding unit. The core device is used to receive the multimedia signal and the output signal and to let the output device display the output signal and the multimedia signal simultaneously.

 

[Description of the Preferred Embodiment]

 

The above-mentioned and other technical content, characteristics and

 

5



 

functions of the invention are clearly presented in the detailed description of a preferred embodiment below, with drawings for reference.

 

Referring to Figure 1, the preferred embodiment of the transceiving system of the invention comprises an interphone 100 and a multimedia player 200. Preferably, the interphone 100 is installed at the door of the house and the multimedia player 200 is an indoor television.

 

In addition, the multimedia player 200 comprises a communicating module 300 that is connected to the interphone 100 through a network. Therefore, when triggered by a visitor, the interphone 100 transmits a first  communicating signal to the communicating module 300 to alert the resident. On the other side, the resident can also send a second communicating signal through the communicating module 300 in order to interact with the visitor standing near the interphone 100.

 

Visitor Request

 

The interphone 100 of the embodiment comprises a main converting device 1, as well as a sound recorder 51 and an image recorder 53 that serve as an input device 40. The multimedia player 200 of the embodiment comprises a communicating module 300, a core device 3, and a loudspeaker 52 and a display device 54 which serve as an output device 50. In addition, the communicating module 300 is networked with the main converting device 1 of the interphone 100 through an auxiliary converting device 2 of the communicating module 300.

 

When the multimedia player 200 receives a multimedia signal, the core device 3 processes the multimedia signal into an audio signal to be played by the loudspeaker 52, and also processes the multimedia signal into a video signal to be displayed by the display device 54. Therefore, the resident near the multimedia player 200 can enjoy the associated multimedia service.

 

If triggered by the visitor during the multimedia service, the interphone 100 initiates recording of the sound recorder 51 to obtain a first sound

 

6


 

recording signal and also allows the image recorder 53 to operate, acquiring a first image recording signal. Then the main converting device 1 treats the first sound recording signal and the first image recording signal as an input signal and converts the input signal into a first communicating signal.

 

After the first communicating signal is transmitted to the multimedia player 200 through the network, the auxiliary converting device 2 converts the sound part of the first communicating signal into a first loudspeaking signal that corresponds to the first sound recording signal, and transmits the image part of the first communicating signal so as to allow the core device 3 to convert the image part of the first communicating signal into a first display signal that corresponds to the first image recording signal. This is how the first loudspeaking signal and the first display signal that serve as the output signal are acquired.

 

Finally, the core device 3 combines the first loudspeaking signal and the sound signal of the multimedia service to be played by the loudspeaker 52 synchronously. In addition, the core device 3 adopts a picture-in-picture mode, with the display device 54 showing the effect of the first display signal being superposed on the video signal of the multimedia service. As a result, the resident can enjoy uninterrupted multimedia service without rushing to respond to the visitor outside the door.

 

The main converting device 1 used to produce the first communicating signal and the auxiliary converting device 2 used to process the first communicating signal are described in further detail below.

 

As shown in Figure 2, the main converting device 1 is provided with an audio processing unit 11, a video processing unit 12, a coding unit 13 and a transporting unit 14. The audio processing unit 11 generates a first sound recording signal according to the sound recorded by the sound recorder 51.

 

7



 

The video processing unit generates a first image recording signal according to an image shot by the image recorder 53. The coding unit 13 codes a first coding signal according to the first sound recording signal and the first image recording signal by means of an MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group) coding mode. Then the transporting unit 14 transmits the first communicating signal according to the first coding signal.

 

The transporting unit 14 can select a wired or wireless transmission mode. The exemplary embodiment of the invention is as follows: the transporting unit 14 is provided with a protocol unit 141, a wired transceiving unit 142 and a wireless transceiving unit 143. The protocol unit 141 loads the first coding signal to the first communicating signal according with the SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) and then selectively transmits the first communicating signal to the wired transceiving unit 142 or the wireless transceiving unit 143. The wired transceiving unit 142 forwards the signal through an Ethernet wire 7 to the auxiliary converting device 2 based on the format of TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol), while the wireless transceiving unit 143 forwards the signal through an antenna 8 based on the WiMax (Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access) or Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity).

 

It is noted that the main converting device 1 is further provided with a control unit 15 which trains a synchronous signal according to the first sound recording signal and the first image recording signal in order to provide evidence for the operation of the various units.

 

In addition, as shown in Figure 3, the auxiliary converting device 2 possesses the function of calling the main converting device 1 and can analyze the sound and the image of the visitor from the first communicating

 

8



 

signal. The auxiliary converting device 2 is provided with a transporting unit 24, a decoding unit 23 and an audio processing unit 21, and the core device 3 comprises a display processing unit 26.

 

When the first communicating signal is transmitted to the auxiliary converting device 2, it is received by the transporting unit 24 in a wired or wireless manner corresponding to the forwarding means of the transmitting unit 14, and the protocol unit 241 separates a first to-be-decoded signal from the first communicating signal. The decoding unit 23 conducts MPEG decoding on the first to-be-decoded signal. The audio processing unit 21 generates a first loudspeaking signal according to the decoding result, the display processing unit 26 of the core device 3 generates a first display signal according to the decoding result, and then the first loudspeaking signal and the first display signal are presented through the loudspeaker 52 and the display device 54 coupled with the core device 3. In this way, the sound and the image of the visitor can be transmitted to the resident enjoying the multimedia service.

 

It is worth noting that the audio processing unit 11 and the video processing unit 12 of the main converting device 1 can be integrated into a processing unit 10 in Figure 2. The audio processing unit 21 of the auxiliary converting device 2 can also be configured into a processing unit 20 in Figure 3.

 

It is also worth noting that the multimedia player 200 in the embodiment is assumed to be an indoor television having a picture-in-picture function, so the display processing unit 26 is built in the core device 3. However, if other applications do not have such function (as shown in Figure 4), the display processing unit 26 is preferably moved to a processing unit 20’ of the auxiliary converting device 2.

 

9



 

Resident Response

 

As shown in Figure 3, in order to deliver the response of the resident, the communicating module 300 of the multimedia player of the embodiment  also comprises a sound recorder 51 and an image recorder 53, and the processing unit 20 of the auxiliary converting device 2 also comprises a video processing unit 22. The communicating module 300 acquires the sound and the image of the resident through the sound recorder 51 and the image recorder 53 respectively, then the auxiliary converting device 2 generates a second communicating signal to respond to the visitor standing near the interphone 100.

 

The auxiliary converting device 2 generates a second sound recording signal according to the sound of the resident through the audio processing unit 21, and generates a second image recording signal according to the image of the resident through the audio processing unit 22. The coding unit 27 conducts MPEG coding according to the second sound recording signal and the second image recording signal to acquire a second coding signal. Then the transporting unit 14 transmits the second communicating signal according to the second coding signal.

 

When the main converting device 1 in Figure 2 receives the second communicating signal, the transporting unit 14 separates a second to-be-decoded signal from the second communicating signal according to the SIP. After the second to-be-decoded signal is decoded by the decoding unit 17, the audio processing unit 11 generates a second loudspeaking signal according to the decoding result, the video processing unit 12 generates a second display signal according to the decoding result, and then the second loudspeaking signal and the second display signal are respectively presented through the loudspeaker 52 and the display device 54 that are coupled, so as to respond to the visitor outside the door.

 

Of course, in consideration of the privacy of the resident, the display device 54 of the interphone 100, the image recorder 53 of the communicating module 300, and the video processing unit 22 of the auxiliary converting device 2 are optional, so only the second communicating signal carrying the sound of the resident is transmitted by the communicating module 300.

 

10



 

It is worth noting that the sound recorder 51 of the communicating module 300 is preferably assembled from a weighting unit 511 and multiple microphones, as shown in Figure 5, in order to allow the visitor to receive the sound of the resident clearly and be free from sound interference from the multimedia. The sound recorder 51 produces a similar beamformer effect, and then the weighting unit 511 integrates the recorded sounds of all the microphones at different weighting proportions to achieve a recording quality with a better signal to voice ratio (SNR). Likewise, if the sound recorder 51 of the interphone 100 is implemented in the above-mentioned manner, then the resident will not hear street noises, such as sirens.

 

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 6, the multimedia signal received by the core device 3 can be a television signal processed by a frequency modulator 31 or video streams in AV (audio/video), SV(S-video) or other formats processed by a receiver 32. When a demodulator 33 further separates the loaded content from the multimedia signal, an audio processor 34 allows the loudspeaker 52 to emit a corresponding sound effect, and a video processor 45 also allows the driver 55 to drive the display device 54 to present a corresponding image.

 

The audio processor 34 of the embodiment is mainly used to process the multimedia signal into the audio signal and integrate the first loudspeaking signal and the audio signal of the multimedia service, so as to let the loudspeaker 52 display synchronously. In another exemplary embodiment in Figure 7, after the audio processor 34 processes and acquires the audio signal, the core device 3 can further choose to display the first loudspeaking signal, or the audio signal of the multimedia service, or both the first loudspeaking signal and the audio signal simultaneously according to a sound play command by a multiplex unit 37.

 

11



 

In addition to training a synchronous signal for the operation of various elements 26, 31-35 and 55 according to the multimedia signal, the control unit 36 of the core device 3 further allows the display processing unit 26 to generate a first display signal in a picture frame size and also lets the video processor 35 put the first display signal in a relative position of the display device 54. Fundamentally, the picture frame size of the first display signal is no greater than the maximum pick-up range of the display device 54.

 

It is stressed that although as described above the video processor 35 can adopt the picture-in-picture mode to superpose the first display signal on the video signal of the multimedia service, the actual superposition order is not only limited to the above-mentioned manner, and a left-right split screen or a top-bottom split screen can even be adopted.

 

In addition, the multimedia player 200 can be presented by a television in a fixed position or also by other devices like a video-phone with a fixed position in the embodiment of the invention. In other applications, the multimedia player 200 can even be a portable device, so the resident can receive the visitors’ information in any corner of the house. The portable device may be a mobile Internet device (MID) or a smartphone.

 

It is worth noting that the coding and decoding manners of the coding units 13 and 27 and the decoding units 17 and 23 are not limited to MPEG, and that other means are also applicable.

 

Finally, it is more noteworthy that both the interphone 100 and the multimedia player 200 can be independent from the transceiving system, and the communicating module 300 can even be independent from the multimedia player 200. The transceiving system is not limited to household purposes, but can also be applied in any company or office.

 

In conclusion, the core device 3 of the embodiment superposes the first display signal on the video signal of the multimedia service to present both

 

12



 

the first display signal and the video signal of the multimedia service on the display device 54 simultaneously, and to allow the loudspeaker 52 to play the first loudspeaking signal and the audio signal of the multimedia service synchronously, so the resident can continue to enjoy multimedia service while being able to talk with a visitor without moving around. This is how the purposes of the invention are achieved.

 

What is described above is merely a preferred embodiment of the invention, however, this is not a limitation on the scope of application of the present invention. Any simple equivalent change or modification made according to the claims or the summary of the invention is within the scope of the present invention.

 

[Brief Description of the Drawings]

 

Figure 1 is a block chart illustrating the preferred embodiment of a transceiving system of the invention;

 

Figure 2 is a block chart illustrating the interphone of the embodiment;

 

Figure 3 is a block chart illustrating a multimedia player of the embodiment;

 

Figure 4 is a block chart illustrating another example of the multimedia player;

 

Figure 5 is a block chart illustrating a sound recorder of a communicating module;

 

Figure 6 is a block chart illustrating a core device of the embodiment, and

 

Figure 7 is a block chart illustrating another exemplary embodiment of the core device.

 

13



 

Description of Main Element Symbols

 

100

interphone

3

core device

200

multimedia player

31

frequency modulator

300

communicating module

32

receiver

1

main converting device

33

demodulator

10

processing unit

34

audio processor

11, 21

audio processing unit

35

video processor

12, 22

video processing unit

36

control unit

13, 27

coding unit

37

multiplex unit

14, 24

transporting unit

40

input device

141

protocol unit

50

output device

142

wired transceiving unit

51

sound recorder

143

wireless transceiving unit

511

weighting unit

15, 25

control unit

52

loudspeaker

17, 23

decoding unit

53

image recorder

2

auxiliary converting device

54

display device

20, 20’

processing unit

55

driver

241

protocol unit

7

Ethernet wire

242

wired transceiving unit

8

antenna

243

wireless transceiving unit

MIC

microphone

26

display processing unit

 

 

 

14



 

7. Claims

 

1.               A multimedia player is adapted for receiving a multimedia signal and receiving a communicating signal from an interphone and carrying with an input signal. The multimedia player comprises:

 

an output device;

 

a communicating module, comprising:

 

a transporting unit used to receive the communicating signal;

 

a decoding unit used to decode according to the communicating signal; and

 

a processing unit generating an output signal corresponding to the input signal according to the decoding result of the decoding unit; and

 

a core device used to receive the multimedia signal and the output signal and let the output device play the output signal and the multimedia signl simultaneously.

 

2.               The multimedia player according to Claim 1, wherein the communicating module further comprises a sound recorder for recording the sound and a coding unit;

 

the processing unit of the communicating module is provided with an audio processing unit generating another sound signal based on the sound recorded by the sound recorder, in order to allow the coding unit to code; and

 

the transporting unit transmits the coding result of the coding unit.

 

3.               The multimedia player according to Claim 1, wherein the input signal carried on the communicating signal is an image signal, and the output device is a display device;

 

the processing unit generates the output signal in a picture frame size

 

15



 

no greater than the maximum pick-up range of the display device, and the display device superposes the output signal on the multimedia signal.

 

4.               The multimedia player according to Claim 1, the input signal carried on the communicating signal is a sound signal, wherein,

 

the processing unit of the communicating module is provided with an audio processing unit, a loudspeaking signal corresponding to the sound signal is generated according to the decoding result of the decoding unit; and

 

the multimedia player further comprises a loudspeaker coupled with the core device, controlled by the core device and making sounds according to the loudspeaking signal.

 

5.               The multimedia player according to Claim 1, wherein the communicating module further comprises an image recorder and a coding unit;

 

the processing unit of the communicating module is provided with a video processing unit that generates another image signal according to the image shot by the image recorder in order to allow the coding unit to code; and

 

the transporting unit transmits the coding result of the coding unit.

 

6.               The multimedia player according to Claim 1, wherein the transporting unit comprises:

 

a transceiving unit receiving the communicating signal by wired means through a network wire according to the TCP/IP, or wirelessly receiving the communicating signal according to the WiMax or Wi-Fi; and

 

a protocol unit separating a signal corresponding to the input signal from the communicating signal according to the SIP in order to allow the

 

16


 

decoding unit to implement MPEG decoding.

 

7.               The multimedia player according to Claim 1, wherein the core device is provided with a multiplex unit letting the output device play the output signal, or the multimedia signal, or both the output signal and the multimedia signal simultaneously according to a sound play command.

 

8.               The multimedia player according to Claim 1 is a television.

 

9.               A communicating module is adapted for receiving the communicating signal carrying with the input signal and is electrically connected with the core device coupled with the output device. The communicating module comprises:

 

a transporting unit used to receive the communicating signal;

 

a decoding unit used to decode according to the communicating signal; and

 

a processing unit generating an output signal corresponding to the input signal according to the decoding result of the decoding unit;

 

when the output device plays a multimedia signal, the core device drives the output device to play the output signal and the multimedia signal simultaneously when the core device receives the output signal.

 

10.        The communicating module according to Claim 1 further comprises a sound recorder for recording the sound, and a coding unit;

 

the processing unit of the communicating module is provided with an audio processing unit generating another sound signal according to the sound recorded by the sound recorder in order to allow the coding unit to code; and

 

the transporting unit transmits the coding result of the coding unit.

 

11.        The communicating module according to Claim 9, the input signal carrie

 

17



 

on the communicating signal has an image signal and a sound signal, and the output device is provided with a display device and a loudspeaker, wherein,

 

the processing unit generates the output signal in a picture frame size no greater than the maximum pick-up range of the display device, and the display device superposes the output signal on the multimedia signal;

 

in addition, the processing unit generates a loudspeaking signal corresponding to the sound signal according to the decoding result of the decoding unit in order to allow the core device to let the loudspeaker to generate sound.

 

12.        The communicating module according to Claim 9 further comprises an image recorder for shooting an image, and a coding unit;

 

the processing unit of the communicating module is provided with a video processing unit that generates another image signal according to the image shot by the image recorder in order to allow the coding unit to code; and

 

the transporting unit transmits the coding result of the coding unit.

 

13.        The communicating module according to Claim 9, wherein,

 

the transporting unit receives the communicating signal according to the SIP.

 

14.        A transceiving system comprising the multimedia player includes:

 

an interphone, including:

 

an input device used to acquire a signal;

 

a processing unit that processes the signal into a coding signal according to the signal acquired by the input device; and

 

a transporting unit that loads the coding signal onto a communicating signal and transmits the coding signal; and

 

18



 

the multimedia player, comprising:

 

an output device;

 

a communicating module, comprising:

 

a transporting unit used to receive the communicating signal;

 

a decoding unit used to decode according to the communicating signal; and

 

a processing unit generating an output signal according to the decoding result of the decoding unit; and

 

a core unit used to receive the multimedia signal and the output signal and allowing the output device to display the output signal and the multimedia signal simultaneously.

 

15.        The transceiving system according to Claim 14, wherein the communicating module further comprises a sound recorder used to record sound, and a coding unit;

 

the processing unit of the communicating module is provided with an audio processing unit generating another sound signal according to the sound recorded by the sound recorder, so as to allow the coding unit to code; and

 

the transporting unit transmits the coding result of the coding unit.

 

16.        The transceiving system according to Claim 14, wherein the signal acquired by the input device is an image signal, and the output device is a display device;

 

the processing unit generates the output signal in picture frame size no greater than the maximum pick-up range of the display device and allows the display device to superpose the output signal on the multimedia signal.

 

19



 

17.        The transceiving system according to Claim 14, wherein,

 

the transporting unit of the interphone loads the coding signal on the communicating signal according to the SIP; and

 

the transporting unit of the multimedia player receives the communicating signal according to the SIP.

 

18.        The transceiving system according to Claim 14, wherein the core device is provided with a multiplex unit that allows the output device to display the output or multimedia signal, or both signals simultaneously according to a sound play command.

 

20



 

8. Drawings:

 

 



 

 


 

 



 

 


 

 

 



 

 



 

 


 

 

(19) State Intellectual Property Office of the People’s Republic of China

(12) Application for Invention Patent

 

 

(10) Application Publication No.: CN 102346879 A

(43) Application Publication Date: February 8th, 2012

 

(21)             Application No.: 201110212290. 2

(22)             Application Date: July 22th, 2011

(30)             Priority Data: 61/367045 2010.07.23 US

(71)             Applicant: Lite-On Technology Corporation

Address: 22nd floor, No.392 Ruiguang Road, Neihu District, Taipei, Taiwan, China

(72)             Inventors: TSENG, TSAO TENG; CHEN, CHI WEN and QIU, HONG YANG

(74)             Patent Agency: Beijing HUAHE & PARTNERS Patent Trademark & Copyright 11019

Agents: SHOU, NING and ZHANG, HUA HUI

(51)             Int. Cl

G06Q 10/00(2012.01)

G06Q 50/00(2012.01)

 

2 pages for claims, 11 pages for specification and 11 pages for drawings

 

(54) Title of the Invention

 

Digital environment management system

 

(57) Abstract

 

The invention relates to a digital environment management system applicable to a digital environment containing multiple peripheral devices. The management system comprises a communication unit and a processing unit electrically connected with the communication unit, wherein the communication unit is used for carrying out communication with the peripheral devices, and the processing unit is used for generating a space management graphical interface to be used by a user in carrying out physical space planning operations.

 

211: Living-room light  212 Wall lamp                                                                                                         231: Media player

 

213: Entrance light  214: Air-conditioning device                                                                              232: Network camera

 

1: Digital environment management system

 

221: Gas detector  223: Automatic curtain                                                                                                  241: Network phone

 

222: Heat-source detector  224: Electric rolling door

 



 

1. A digital environment management system, applicable to a digital environment containing multiple peripheral devices; peripheral devices can be arranged in a physical space and can carry out communication with this management system; the management system comprises a communication unit and a processing unit; the communication unit is used for carrying out communication with the peripheral devices, and the processing unit is electrically connected with the communication unit. This management system is characterized in that:

 

The processing unit is used for generating a space management graphical interface which is used for carrying out physical space planning operations by the user.

 

2. The digital environment management system according to Claim 1, is characterized in that the space management graphical interface is also used for creating a physical space image corresponding to a physical space.

 

3. The digital environment management system according to Claim 1, is characterized in that the processing unit is also used for generating a peripheral device management graphical interface; this peripheral device management graphical interface is used for presenting a physical space image that corresponds to a physical space, and presenting multiple visual elements corresponding to the peripheral devices respectively; this peripheral device management graphical interface is also used by the user to configure at least one of the visual elements into the physical space image.

 

4. The digital environment management system according to Claim 3, is characterized in that the visual elements are used for enabling the user to carry out interactive operations of the peripheral devices; the processing unit is also used for generating at least one control signal in response to such interactive operations, and then transmitting the control signal to the corresponding peripheral devices by the communication unit.

 

5. The digital environment management system according to Claim 3, is characterized in that the processing unit is also used for generating configuration information that accords with configuration operations that have been conducted; the configuration information comprises the configuration of at least one of the visual elements with the physical space image, and is used for indicating the corresponding relationship between the peripheral device corresponding to at least one visual element and the physical space.

 

6. The digital environment management system according to Claim 5, is characterized in that the configuration information also comprises physical space information regarding every peripheral device that is configured to have one corresponding visual element, as well as device identifying information.

 

7. The digital environment management system according to Claim 6, is characterized in that the physical space is also provided with one floor of a building and a room on that floor; the physical space image is the image of the room; and the physical space information comprises the floor and the position of the room on the floor.

 

2



 

8. The digital environment management system according to Claim 7, is characterized in that the space management graphical interface generated by the processing unit provides a floor planning function so as to enable the user to carry out floor planning operations in the physical space.

 

9. The digital environment management system according to Claim 8, is characterized in that the processing unit is also used for generating physical space planning information according to physical space planning operations; and the physical space planning information contains the floor information, and is classified on the basis of the floor information.

 

10. The digital environment management system according to Claim 3, is characterized in that the physical space is further provided with a room; the space management graphical interface generated by the processing unit further provides a room planning function so as to enable the user to carry out room planning operations in the physical space.

 

11. The digital environment management system according to Claim 3, further comprises an input/output unit electrically connected with the processing unit, and is characterized in that the peripheral device management graphical interface generated by the processing unit is used for enabling the user to carry out configuration operations in a drag-and-drop manner by utilizing the input/output unit, so that at least one of the visual elements is configured into the physical space image; and the peripheral device management graphical interface and the space management graphical interface, both generated by the processing unit, are displayed by utilizing the input/output unit.

 

12. The digital environment management system according to Claim 3, is characterized in that the processing unit uses the communication unit to conduct scanning and obtain information from the peripheral devices.

 

13. The digital environment management system according to Claim 12, is characterized in that the processing unit classifies the visual elements according to the device information of each corresponding peripheral device, and displays the visual elements according to the results of this classification.

 

14. The digital environment management system according to Claim 13, is characterized in that the device information of each peripheral device comprises device function information and communication mode information.

 

3



 

Digital Environment Management System

 

Technical Field

 

[0001]    The invention relates to management/control technology for digital peripheral devices, in particular to a management system for planning a digital environment space.

 

Background Technology

 

[0002]    As communication technology has grown ever-more mature, and along with the vigorous development of digital home electronics, many management/control technologies related to digital home electronics have been developed in recent years - for example, the “INTELLIGENT MANAGEMENT APPARATUS AND METHOD OF DIGITAL HOME NETWORK SYSTEM” disclosed by United States Patent No. 7627098 - with the aim of providing a more convenient digital living environment for users.

 

[0003]    However, the existing management/control technologies for digital household appliances do not provide a graphical interface for the user to carry out planning for a digital environment space.

 

[0004]    Therefore, it is obvious that inconveniences and defects are still present in the structure and use of existing digital environment management systems, and further improvement is desired. Relevant manufacturers have tried their best to find a solution to these problems, but no applicable design has been developed and completed for a long time, and common products do not have suitable structures for solving these problems; and this is clearly a problem that all in the industry would like to solve. Therefore, the problem of how to design a novel digital environment management system is truly a key current research and development subject, and is an objective that the industry needs to achieve.

 

Summary of the Invention

 

[0005]    The purpose of this invention is to provide a digital environment management system, through which the user can intuitively plan a digital environment’s physical space by means of the space management graphical interface; furthermore, this invention can further be matched with the management control function of peripheral devices to carry out configuration and management of the peripheral devices in a physical space.

 

[0006]    The purpose of the invention, and the solution of its technical problems, are realized by adopting the following technical scheme. The digital environment management system, provided according to the invention, is applicable in a digital environment comprised of multiple peripheral devices; these peripheral devices may be arranged in a physical space and communicate with this management system; the management system comprises a communication unit and a processing unit, wherein the communication unit is used for carrying out communication with the

 

4



 

peripheral devices; and the processing unit is electrically connected with the communication unit and is used for generating a space management graphical interface which is used for carrying out physical space planning operations by the user.

 

[0007]    The purpose of the invention and the solution of its technical problems also can be further realized by adopting the following technical measures.

 

[0008]    Preferably, in the above-mentioned digital environment management system, the space management graphical interface is also used for setting a physical space image corresponding to the physical space.

 

[0009]    Preferably, in the above-mentioned digital environment management system, the processing unit is also used for generating a peripheral device management graphical interface; this peripheral device management graphical interface is used for presenting a physical space image corresponding to the physical space, and to present visual elements for each of the peripheral devices; the peripheral device management graphical interface is also used for enabling the user to carry out operations to configure at least one of the visual elements into the physical space image.

 

[0010]    Preferably, in the above-mentioned digital environment management system, the visual elements are used for enabling the user to carry out interactive operations for peripheral devices; the processing unit is also used for generating at least one control signal that corresponds with these interactive operations, and to use the communication unit to transmit this control signal to the corresponding peripheral device(s).

 

[0011]    Preferably, in the above-mentioned digital environment management system, the processing unit is also used for generating configuration information based upon configuration operations; this configuration information comprises a configuration relationship of at least one of the visual elements in the physical space image, and is used for marking the corresponding relationship between a peripheral device that is represented by at least one visual element and the physical space.

 

[0012]    Preferably, in the above-mentioned digital environment management system, the configuration information further comprises the physical space information of the peripheral devices corresponding (matching) with each visual element after configuration, and device identification information.

 

[0013]    Preferably, in the above-mentioned digital environment management system, the physical space further comprises a floor of a building and a room positioned on this floor; the physical space image is the image of the room, and the physical space information comprises the floor and the positioning of the room on the floor.

 

[0014]    Preferably, in the above-mentioned digital environment management system, the space management graphic interface generated by the processing unit provides a floor planning function so as to enable the user to carry out floor planning operations for this physical space.

 

[0015]    Preferably, in the above-mentioned digital environment management system the

 

5



 

processing unit is also used for generating physical space planning information based upon the described physical space planning operations; this physical space planning information contains information for one floor of the building, and carries out classification according to the floor information.

 

[0016]    Preferably, in the above-mentioned digital environment management system, the physical space further comprises a room; the space management graphic interface generated by the processing unit also provides a room planning function so as to enable the user to carry out room planning operations for this physical space.

 

[0017]    Preferably, the above-mentioned digital environment management system also comprises an input/output unit electrically connected with the processing unit, wherein the peripheral device management graphic interface generated by the processing unit is used for enabling the user to carry out configuration drag-and-drop manner by utilizing the input/output unit, in order to configure at least one of the visual elements into the physical space image. The peripheral device management graphical interface and the space management graphical interface generated by the processing unit are both displayed by utilizing the input/output unit.

 

[0018]    Preferably, in the above-mentioned digital environment management system, the communication unit is also used for scanning by the processing unit so as to obtain information from the peripheral devices.

 

[0019]    Preferably, in the above-mentioned digital environment management system, the processing unit classifies the visual elements according to the device information of the corresponding peripheral devices, and displays the visual elements according to the results of this classification.

 

[0020]    Preferably, in the above-mentioned digital environment management system, the device information for each peripheral device comprises device function information and communication mode information.

 

[0021]    Compared with existing technology, the invention has obvious advantages and beneficial effects. Through the described technical scheme, the digital environment management system has, at the least, the following advantages and beneficial effects: the invention uses its floor planning function and the room planning function provided by the space management graphical interface to enable the user to intuitively plan their digital environment’s physical space; furthermore, the invention can be matched with the management control functions of the peripheral devices to carry out configuration and management of the space peripheral devices.

 

[0022]    The above description is only the summary of the technical scheme of the invention. In order for the technical means of this invention to be understood more clearly, so that its implementation can be carried out according to the content of the specification, and so that the described purpose of the invention and other purposes as well as the characteristics and the advantages of the invention can be more obvious and easily understood, the invention will be further described in detail as follows, in combination with preferred embodiments and drawings.

 

6



 

Description of Drawings

 

[0023]    Figure 1 is a schematic diagram, showing a digital environment comprising multiple peripheral devices that uses the digital environment management system according to the invention;

 

[0024]    Figure 2 is a block diagram showing the digital environment management system generated in the preferred embodiment;

 

[0025]    Figure 3 is a schematic diagram, showing the main menu graphical interface generated in the preferred embodiment;

 

[0026]    Figure 4 is a schematic diagram, showing the space management graphical interface generated in the preferred embodiment;

 

[0027]    Figure 5 is a schematic diagram, displaying a preferred embodiment of a home directory structure produced using the classification results obtained by classifying physical space planning information using floor information;

 

[0028]    Figure 6 is a schematic diagram, showing a peripheral device management graphical interface generated in the preferred embodiment;

 

[0029]    Figure 7 is a schematic diagram, showing the lights peripheral device management graphic interface generated in the preferred embodiment;

 

[0030]    Figure 8 is a schematic diagram, displaying a preferred embodiment of a device directory structure produced using the classification results obtained by classifying many visual elements according to each visual element’s device function information;

 

[0031]    Figure 9 is a schematic diagram, displaying a preferred embodiment of the device directory structure produced using the classification results obtained by classifying the visual elements according to the each visual element’s communication mode information;

 

[0032]    Figure 10 is a schematic diagram, showing a home’s overall space graphical interface generated in the preferred embodiment;

 

[0033]    Figure 11 is a schematic diagram, showing a space overview’s graphical interface generated in the preferred embodiment.

 

Description of the Preferred Embodiment

 

[0034]                                The detailed description of the embodiment, structure, characteristics and effects of the digital environment management system provided by the invention are detailed in the following drawings and preferred embodiments to further illuminate the technical means adopted by the invention for achieving its intended purposes and effects.

 

[0035]    Referring to Figure 1, one preferred embodiment of the digital environment management system 1 can be used in a digital environment comprised of multiple peripheral devices, and is applied in spaces such as homes, hotels, collective residential clusters, exhibitions or flat spaces and/or all subspaces of large public spaces and the like. For example, the digital

 

7



 

environment management system 1 not only can be used for managing and controlling peripheral devices in digital homes, but also can be applied in management control of power supplies, lights and air conditioners in exhibition spaces, as well as in the management and use of public facilities in hotels and collective-type residences. The management system 1 can manage and control peripheral devices which communicate with the management system 1 through the utilization of different communication modes. As shown in Figure 1, in the preferred embodiment, the peripheral devices in the digital environment are divided based on their communication modes into a device group 21 based on infrared communication, a device group 22 based on Zigbee communication, a device group 23 based on wireless fidelity communication (Wi-Fi) and a device group 24 based on session initiation protocol (SIP) communication. The device group 21 based on infrared communications is comprised of a living-room light 211, a wall lamp 212, an entrance light 213 and an air-conditioning device 214. The device group 22 based on Zigbee communication is comprised of a gas detector 221, a heat-source detector 222, an automatic curtain 223 and an electric rolling door 224. The device group 23 based on wireless fidelity communication is provided with a media player 231 and a network camera 232. The device group 24 based on SIP communication is provided with a network phone 241.

 

[0036]    In recent years, due to the vigorous development of smart appliances and network communication, many home network communication protocol standards for standardizing the control of peripheral devices have been developed, and the management system 1 can control peripheral devices by utilizing existing home network communication protocol standards. Such home network communication protocol standards include the LonTalk communication standard, the ECONET communication standard and the KNX communication standard, etc., and such technology is known to all technicians skilled in this field, is not an important point of this invention, and therefore more details are not made of this here.

 

[0037]    Referring to Figure 2, in the preferred embodiment, the management system 1 is implemented through an electronic device (for example by portable electronic devices like a smart phone, a personal digital assistant or a tablet PC, etc., which is not shown in the figure). The management system 1 comprises an input/output unit 11, a communication unit 12, an image capturing unit 13, a processing unit 14 and an information base 15.

 

[0038]    The input/output unit 11 is used for enabling the user to carry out interactive operations on the management system 1. The input/output unit 11 can be a combination of a keyboard, a mouse, a display and/or a joystick, or an input/output operation unit such as a touch screen and/or other units with similar functions. The communication unit 12 is used for carrying out communication with the peripheral devices. The image capturing unit 13 is used for capturing a physical space image that corresponds with a physical space; it is worth mentioning that the management system 1 can also not include the image capturing unit 13; the physical space image can also be shot by the network camera 232 in the digital environment and be received by the communication unit 12 of the management system 1 through wireless communication, but this is

 

8



 

not limited to the disclosure of this preferred embodiment. In the other embodiments, the image capturing unit 13 and the network camera 232 also can be used for capturing matching physical space images for spaces such as homes, hotels, collective residential groups, exhibitions or large public spaces.

 

[0039]    The processing unit 14 is electrically connected with the input/output unit 11, the communication unit 12, the image capturing unit 13 and the information base 15. In the initialization stage of the management system 1, the processing unit 14 uses the communication unit 12 to carry out scanning to obtain device information from the peripheral devices. The processing unit 14 also stores the physical space image captured by the image capturing unit 13, the physical space image received through the communication unit 12, and device information in its information base 15.

 

[0040]    Wherein, every piece of device information includes manufacturer information, device function information, communication mode information and device identification information. Manufacturer information concerns the names of manufacturers and the like. Device function information is used for indicating the functional attributes of the peripheral devices, such as functions of illumination, detection, temperature control or communication. Communication mode information is used for indicating the communication modes of the peripheral devices, such as wireless, infrared, Zigbee, or other communication modes. The device identification information is unique identifying information and is used for enabling the processing unit 14 to identify the peripheral devices.

 

[0041]    Referring now to Figures 2, 3, 4 and 5, when the management system 1 is started, the processing unit 14 generates a main menu graphic interface 3 and displays this main menu graphic interface 3 to the user by utilizing the input/output unit 11. The main menu graphic interface 3 includes a Smart Your Home icon 31, a home overview icon 32 and multiple functional icons 33, and when the user selects the Smart Your Home icon 31, the processing unit 14 generates a space management graphical interface 4 and presents this space management graphical interface 4 to the user by utilizing the input/output unit 11 so as to enable the user to carry out physical space planning operations, set the physical space image corresponding to the physical space and carry out other interactive operations. In this preferred embodiment, the physical space provided is a room on a floor, and the physical space image is the image of the room.

 

[0042]    The following example details the operation mode of the space management graphical interface 4.

 

[0043]    Shown in Figure 4, a implementation mode of the space management graphical interface 4 generated by the processing unit 14 is provided with a floor management toolbar 41, a room management toolbar 42, a first display area 43, a second display area 44 and a function shortcut toolbar 45. The function shortcut toolbar 45 is provided with a main menu button 451, an add device button 452 and a home overview button 453. When the user selects one of the buttons,

 

9


 

the input/output unit 11 will be utilized and present the corresponding graphical interface to the user for operation. For example, when the user selects the main menu button 451, the main menu graphic interface 3 will be displayed for interactive operation by the user.

 

[0044]    The floor management toolbar 41 in the space management graphical interface 4 generated by the processing unit is used for enabling the user to carry out planning functions for one floor of a building. The floor management toolbar 41 is provided with an ‘add floor’  button 411 for adding a floor, a ‘remove floor’ button 412 for removing a floor, a floor information display area 413 for displaying the name of the current floor, a floor forward-scroll button 414 for moving from the current floor to the former floor, and a floor backward-scroll button 415 for moving from the current floor to the next floor. The room management toolbar 42 is provided to enable the user to use the input/output unit 11 to carry out room planning functions. The room management toolbar 42 is provided with an ‘add room’ button 421 for adding a new room, a ‘remove room’button 422 for removing a room, a room information display box 423 for displaying the name of the current room (this refers to the picture seen in the second display area 44), a room forward-scroll button 414 for moving from the current room to the former room, and a room backward-scroll button 415 for moving from the current room to the next room.

 

[0045]    When the user utilizes the room add button 421 to add a room to a floor, the processing unit 14 displays the physical space image corresponding to the floor in the information base 15 in the first display area 43 of the space management graphic interface 4, so that the user can utilize the input/output unit 11 to select the physical space image corresponding to the room (the physical space) to be added. This also allows the user to utilize the input/output unit 11 to drag and drop the physical space image from the first display area 43 into the second display area 44 so as to set the physical space image corresponding to the room (the physical space) to be added. The processing unit 14 also generates physical space planning information (containing both floor information and room information) based upon the physical space planning operations, and classifies this physical space planning information based on floor information and room information. For example, if the user divides the home into three floors for planning purposes, with the first floor being provided with an entrance, a kitchen and a living room; the second floor being provided with a parlor, a guest room and a study; and the third floor being provided with a master room and a bathroom, the processing unit 14 would classify the physical space planning information according to the floor information and the room information, and the classification results would correspond to home directory structure 5 shown in Figure 5. In home directory structure 5, a root directory 51 is a home, a first-layer subdirectory 52 is the floors classified according to the floor information, and a second-layer subdirectory 53 is comprised of the rooms and the floors they correspond to.

 

[0046]    Referring to Figure 2, 6 and 7, when the user selects the ‘add device’ button 452 of the function shortcut toolbar 45 shown in Figure 4, the processing unit 41 generates a peripheral device management

 

10



 

graphical interface 6 and presents the peripheral device management graphical interface 6 to the user by utilizing the input/output unit 11. The peripheral device management graphical interface 6 is used for enabling the user to configure the many visual elements corresponding to the peripheral devices into the physical space image; the visual elements- such as icons, images or text- are used for representing the peripheral devices. The peripheral-device management graphical interface 6 is also used for presenting the visual elements so as to enable the user to carry out interactive operation of the peripheral devices.

 

[0047]    The following detailed example shows the operation mode of the peripheral device management graphic interface 6.

 

[0048]    An implementation mode of the peripheral device management graphic interface 6 is provided with a third display area 61, a fourth display area 62, a floor toolbar 63, a room forward-scroll button 64, a room backward-scroll button 65, a function shortcut toolbar 66 and a room-name display area 67.

 

[0049]    The third display area 61 is used for displaying the visual elements corresponding to the peripheral devices; the fourth display area 62 is used for presenting the physical space image that corresponds to the current physical space; the floor toolbar 63 is similar to the function of the floor management toolbar 41 included in the space management graphic interface 4, in that it is used for adding floors, removing floors and carrying out switching between different floors; the room forward-scroll button 64 and the room backward-scroll button 65 are used for enabling the user to switch between different rooms on the same floor; and the room-name display area 67 is used for displaying the name of the current room (i.e., the names of the rooms shown in the fourth display area 62). The function shortcut toolbar 66 is provided with the main menu button 661, an add room button 662 and a home overview button 663, and when the user selects the add room button 662, the space management graphic interface 4 will be presented for operation by the user.

 

[0050]    To explain further, as mentioned above, the device information of the peripheral devices has been obtained by the processing unit 14, using the communication unit 12 to scan and obtain this information, during the initialization stage of the management system 1, and this information is pre-stored in the information base 5; furthermore, the information base 5 also contains many pre-established icons. This device information also comprises icon indicating information; the processing unit 14 obtains the icons corresponding to the peripheral devices according to this icon indicating information, and presents the icons to the user, so that the user can intuitively understand the visual elements that actually correspond to the peripheral devices.

 

[0051]    The processing unit 14 also classifies the visual elements according to the device information of their corresponding peripheral devices, and displays the classified visual elements in the third display area 61 of the peripheral device management graphic interface 6. For example, for peripheral devices communicating in the Zigbee mode, the processing unit carries out classification according to the standards for classification of the Zigbee Cluster Library (ZCL for short) in Zigbee pro 2007. In the preferred embodiment, the processing unit 14 classifies the peripheral devices into a light class, a detector class, an automation class, a temperature control

 

11



 

class, a communication class, and a multimedia class according to the peripheral devices’ corresponding device function information, wherein the classification result corresponds to a device directory structure 81 shown in Figure 8; in the device directory structure 81, the root directory 811 is the peripheral devices, the first-layer subdirectory 812 is the function types classified according to the device function information, and the second-layer subdirectory 813 shows the peripheral devices that correspond to the same functional types. It is worth mentioning that in another application example, the processing unit 14 also can classify the peripheral devices into an infrared device type, a Zigbee device type, a wireless device type and a session initiation protocol device type using the communication mode information in the device information. Wherein, the classification results correspond to the device directory structure 82 shown in Figure 9; in the device directory structure 82, the root directory 821 is the peripheral devices, the first-layer subdirectory 822 is the classes classified according to the communication mode information, and the second subdirectory 823 is the peripheral devices that have the same communication mode type.

 

[0052]    Returning to Figure 6 and Figure 7, when the user selects one class using the input/output unit 11, the processing unit 14 presents the peripheral devices of this class and the visual elements corresponding to the peripheral devices in the third display area 61; the visual elements are used for enabling the user to carry out interactive operations of the peripheral devices; and the processing unit 14 is also used for generating at least one control signal that accords with the interactive operations, and to then transmit this control signal to the peripheral devices using the communication unit 12. For example, when the user selects and clicks the light class 7 (shown in Figure 6), the processing unit 14 presents a living-room light visual element 71 (the living-room lamp visual element 71 is provided with a living-room lamp icon 711 and a testing button 712), a wall lamp visual element 72 (the wall lamp visual element 72 is provided with a wall lamp icon 721 and a testing button 722) and an entrance-light visual element 73 (the entrance-light visual element 73 is provided with an entrance-light icon 731 and a testing button 732) that are all displayed in the third display area 61 (shown in Figure 7) of the peripheral device management graphic interface 6; this allows the user to manage and control the peripheral devices. In the preferred embodiment, when the user clicks the testing button of either the living-room light visual element 71, the wall lamp visual element 72 or the entrance-light visual element 73, a test is performed on whether the corresponding peripheral device carries out the appropriate action.

 

[0053]    Shown in Figure 7, the peripheral-device management graphical interface 6 generated by the processing unit 14 also enables the user to configure the icons of the visual elements corresponding to the peripheral devices, for example, the entrance-lamp icon 731 can be drag-and-dropped into the physical space image presented by the fourth display area 62; the processing unit 14 will generate the appropriate configuration information based upon this drag-and-drop operation; this configuration information comprises the configuration relationship of

 

12



 

at least one of the visual elements in the physical space image and is used for indicating the corresponding relationship between at least one of the peripheral devices and the physical space. In the preferred embodiment, the configuration information comprises the physical space information and the equipment identifying information. The physical space information is used for indicating the configuration of the position of the peripheral devices in the physical space.

 

[0054]    Continuing the above example, when the user utilizes the input/output unit 11 to configure the entrance-light icon 731 that represents the entrance light by dragging and dropping it into the physical space image that corresponds with the living room presented in the fourth display area 62, the physical space information of the configuration information correspondingly generated by the processing unit 14 is used for indicating that the physical space position of the entrance light is in the living room of the first floor of the home. When the testing button 732 of the peripheral device management graphic interface 6 is pressed, the processing unit 14 transmits the control instruction to the entrance light using the device identifying information, so as to test whether the entrance light acts correspondingly. In the preferred embodiment, the user also can utilize the input/output unit 11 to drag and drop the entrance-light icon 731 from the fourth display area 62 to its original position in the third display area 61; when this is done, the entrance-light visual element 73 will display a bright color, which denotes that this entrance-light icon 731 is not currently configured for use and can be configured to other rooms to be used as desired. In this same vein, when the user configures the entrance-light icon 731 by dragging and dropping it into the physical space image in the fourth display area 62, the entrance-light visual element 73 becomes dark, which shows that the entrance-light icon 731 has been configured.

 

[0055]    Referring to Figure 10 and Figure 11, when the user selects the home overview button 453 in Figure 4 or the home overview button 663 in Figure 6, the processing unit 14 generates a home overview graphical interface 60 which is used for allowing the user to carry out physical space planning operations and post-configuration peripheral device uses (601-605 shown in Figure 10), and when the user clicks one physical space image (for example, clicking 605 shown in Figure 10), the processing unit 14 generates a room overview graphic interface 9, and utilizes the input/output unit 11 to present the room overview graphic interface 9 to the user, so that the user can find the desired peripheral devices to be controlled from the physical space image (after configuration of the visual elements has been completed) and control the peripheral devices by means of operation of the visual elements. The home overview graphic interface 60 also comprises a main menu button 606, and when the main menu button 606 is clicked, the user can return back to the main menu graphic interface 3 in Figure 3.

 

[0056]    The room overview graphical interface 9 is provided with a fifth display area 91, a sixth display area 92, a room toolbar 93, a main menu button 94 and a home overall space button 98; when the user selects the home overall space button 98, they can return back to the home overview graphic interface 60 and carry out interactive operations. The fifth display area 91 is used for presenting the physical space image (911 shown in Figure 11) corresponding to the

 

13



 

current physical space and the icons configured in the physical space image, such as a wall lamp icon 951, an automatic-curtain icon 961 and a network-camera icon 971; the sixth display area is used for displaying the visual elements configured in the current physical space and corresponding to the peripheral devices, such as a wall-light visual element 95, an automatic-curtain visual element 96 and a network-camera visual element 97; the room toolbar 93 is provided with a room forward-scroll button 931, a room backward-scroll button 932 and a room-name display area 933; the room forward-scroll button 931 and the room backward-scroll button 932 are used for enabling the user to carry out switching of the physical space image; and the room-name display area 933 is used for displaying the name of the current room (i.e., the name of the room seen in the fifth display area 91).

 

[0057]    As seen in the above description, the invention has the following effects that (1) the user can carry out physical space planning operation by utilizing the space management graphical interface 4 generated by the processing unit 14; this processing unit 14 also generates the physical space planning information based upon physical space planning operations, and classifies the physical space planning information according to floor information, so that the user can manage the physical space in the digital environment using directories; (2) the user can carry out configuration operations by utilizing the peripheral device management graphical interface 6 generated by the processing unit 14, so as to configure the icons of the peripheral devices on the physical space image; the processing unit 14 also generates configuration information based upon configuration operations so as to provide the peripheral devices’ physical space positional information to the user. Therefore, the purpose of the invention can truly be achieved.

 

[0058]    The description above is provided by way of preferred embodiment of the invention only, but does not limit the invention in any way; the invention has been disclosed above in the preferred embodiment, but this is not intended to limit the invention; without departing from the scope of the technical solution of the invention, those skilled in the art can utilize the technical content disclosed above to make slight modifications or alterations into equivalent embodiments with equivalent changes; any simple modifications, equivalent changes and alterations made to the above embodiment that don’t depart from the content of the invention’s technical solution, and that accord with the technical essence of the invention, are still part of the invention, and within the scope of the technical solution.

 

14



 

 

15


 

 

16



 

 

17


 

 

18



 

 

19


 

 

20



 

 

21


 

 

22



 

 

23


 

 

24



 

 

25




QuickLinks -- Click here to rapidly navigate through this document


Exhibit 23.1


Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

              We consent to the reference to our firm under the caption "Experts" and to the use of our report dated March 15, 2013 (except for the first paragraph of Note 10, as to which the date is July     , 2013), in the Registration Statement (Form S-1/A No. 333-189736) and related Prospectus of Control4 Corporation for the registration of shares of its common stock.

Salt Lake City, Utah
July     , 2013

              The foregoing consent is in the form that will be signed upon the completion of the reverse stock split described in the first paragraph of Note 10 to the consolidated financial statements.

/s/ ERNST & YOUNG LLP  

Salt Lake City, Utah
July 17, 2013




QuickLinks

Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm